130+ Easy Vegan Recipes Anyone Can Make - Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/category/special-diet/vegan/ Tried & True Recipes ยท No Refined Sugars Mon, 13 Nov 2023 17:05:21 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.3.2 https://foolproofliving.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/01/cropped-icon-1-32x32.png 130+ Easy Vegan Recipes Anyone Can Make - Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/category/special-diet/vegan/ 32 32 Air Fryer Red Potatoes https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-red-potatoes/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-red-potatoes/#respond Mon, 13 Nov 2023 17:05:17 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71802 It’s no secret that air-fried red potatoes are an easy way to fill your table with savory, expertly seasoned taste. If you can’t get enough of the subtle sweetness and creamy texture of red-skinned potatoes, get out your recipe book! My Red Potato Salad combines savory bacon, crisp dill pickles, and fresh dill with a creamy mayo dressing guaranteed to wow all your dinner guests. Ingredients Cooking new potatoes in...

The post Air Fryer Red Potatoes appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
It’s no secret that air-fried red potatoes are an easy way to fill your table with savory, expertly seasoned taste. If you can’t get enough of the subtle sweetness and creamy texture of red-skinned potatoes, get out your recipe book! My Red Potato Salad combines savory bacon, crisp dill pickles, and fresh dill with a creamy mayo dressing guaranteed to wow all your dinner guests.

Air fried red potatoes garnished with parsley in a bowl.

Ingredients

Cooking new potatoes in the air fryer requires only a handful of ingredients you likely already have in your pantry.

Ingredients needed for cooking red potatoes in air fryer on a marble.
  • Red potatoes: Small, creamy, and mildly sweet red potatoes (also known as red skin and new potatoes) are a must for this air fryer recipe. Though I use small red potatoes for this dish, other small, tender potatoes, such as Yukon Gold potatoes, would also work. However, avoid using potatoes with too much starch—such as russet potatoes—as they won’t crisp up or tenderize as well as other potato types.
  • Oil: I use olive oil to give my little red potatoes their irresistible crispiness and well-seasoned exterior. However, you may substitute olive oil with any other mild-flavored oil, like avocado oil or ghee.
  • Seasonings: I chose to season my air-fried new potatoes with a basic, savory mix of dried thyme, garlic powder, paprika, salt, and ground black pepper. To give your potatoes extra smoky undertones, you may also use smoked paprika.

Other Seasoning Ideas

Want to take your air fryer roasted red potatoes to the next level? Though optional, these expert seasoning ideas allow you to customize your red potatoes with dozens of other tasty flavor profiles.

  • Favorite spice mixtures: One of the best parts about air fryer potato recipes is how easy they are to customize based on the dish with which you serve them. For a sweet and peppery flavor profile, Italian seasoning makes a delicious seasoning mix. Or, you can enhance this dish’s spice and savoriness by opting for authentic Cajun seasoning, which you can easily make using my Blackened Seasoning recipe. Or, you can give your new potatoes a herby, warm, and bright finish using Mediterranean SeasoningBaharat Spice Mix, or Ranch Seasoning.
  • Spices: If you love spicy food, a few simple additions can give your air-fried potatoes a hot kick. Depending on what you serve with your potatoes, curry powder, red pepper flakes, cayenne pepper, chili powder, onion powder, and more can transform your red potatoes into a piquant side fit for even the biggest spice fans.
  • Fresh herbs: Enliven your air fryer new potatoes with fresh, gourmet flavor by finishing them off with a sprinkle of chopped fresh thyme, fresh parsley, fresh basil, or fresh rosemary.
  • Parmesan cheese: A great way to give your little red potatoes a rich, umami flavor is to sprinkle them with parmesan at the end of cooking. Cheesy and salty, these garlic parmesan air fryer potatoes will have the whole table asking for your recipe.

How to Cook Red Potatoes in the Air Fryer?

Making baked red potatoes in the air fryer is one of the quickest, simplest ways to delight your tastebuds and cut your kitchen prep in half. Six steps and twenty minutes are all you need to make this mouthwatering side.

  1. Prepare the air fryer: Preheat the air fryer to 400 degrees F.
A collage of images showing how to season new potatoes and cook them in the air fryer.
  1. Combine the seasonings: Take out a large bowl and add the olive oil, dried thyme, garlic powder, paprika, salt, and pepper. Whisk until thoroughly combined.
  2. Toss potatoes: Add the baby red potatoes to the seasoning mixture and toss until each potato has an even coating.
  3. Arrange the cut potatoes: Place the seasoned potatoes in the air fryer basket, arranging them in a single even layer without overcrowding.
  4. Air fry the red potatoes: Cook the potatoes for about 15 minutes, shaking the basket every five minutes, until the potatoes are tender when pierced with a knife. If the potatoes aren’t fork-tender at the end of 15 minutes, continue cooking them in one-minute increments until done.
  5. Serve: Transfer your fresh air-fried red potatoes onto a serving platter and serve with your favorite sauce on the side.

How to Store and Reheat?

To ensure maximum crispiness, I recommend eating them on the day of cooking. However, you can store your leftover potatoes in a pinch with these pro storage tips.

  • Storage: These air fryer mini red potatoes will stay fresh for up to three days when you store them in an airtight container in the refrigerator.
  • Reheat: To reheat your red potatoes, place them in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 5-7 minutes or until warmed through.

Serving Suggestions:

This simple air fryer side is one of the tastiest, most versatile potato recipe ideas in my cookbook. Hassle-free and quick, this simple side dish takes the stress out of complicated meal prep. 

  • Side dish with meat dishes: Hands-down, these bite-size potatoes make for the perfect weekday dinner side dish. Serve them with your favorite chicken main—like my effortless Baked Chicken Kabobs or perfectly portioned Air Fried Cornish Hens—for a menu the whole family can enjoy. Or, try a savory beef recipe, such as Reverse Sear Tenderloin or classic Pot Roast, to make a meal worthy of a gourmet dinner spread.
  • Serve as finger food: Not only are air fryer red potato wedges a perfect side dish for countless mains, but they’re also excellent finger food! Serve a plate of air-roasted potatoes with a side of your favorite dipping sauce—like my Blue Cheese Dip and Yogurt Ranch Dip, and watch them disappear in minutes.

Expert Tips

Preparing baby red potatoes in the air fryer is a surefire way to fill your plate with savory, crisp, and creamy flavors. These pro tips will guarantee your potato side is as delicious as possible—with none of the hassle!

  • Wash and dry: Washing your red potatoes is essential to removing bacteria and debris before cooking. After washing, though, dry the potatoes thoroughly with paper towels or a clean kitchen towel before adding them to your recipe. Otherwise, the seasoning will not stick to the potato skin, and they won’t come out as crispy.
  • Cut them evenly: When cutting new potatoes for this dish, slice them into uniform sizes to ensure even cooking. If they’re small enough, you may cook whole red potatoes in the air fryer, but if you have larger potatoes, I recommend cutting them into even, bite-sized pieces for the best results.
  • Don’t overcrowd: When cooking small red potatoes in the air fryer, it’s vital that you don’t overcrowd the basket to ensure proper air circulation and even cooking. I found that my 6-qt. air fryer (affiliate link) was large enough to accommodate one pound of red potatoes. However, if you have a smaller air fryer, you may need to cook your potatoes in two batches to ensure they lay in a single even layer.
  • Toss a few times while cooking: To ensure even roasting, I recommend tossing your potatoes a few times during the air frying process, preferably every five minutes.
  • Check for doneness: The best way to tell the doneness of your red skin potatoes is by using the “knife test.” Pierce the center of a potato with a knife or fork. If the blade enters and exits the flesh easily, you may remove your potatoes from the heat. If the blade encounters resistance, continue air frying the potatoes in one-minute increments until done.
  • Every air fryer is different: As you prepare your red baby potatoes, remember that different air fryers result in different heat levels and cooking times. I tested this recipe using an Instant Pot (affiliate link) and a Ninja Air Fryer (affiliate link), but if you have a different model, be sure to check your potatoes throughout the cooking process to avoid under or over-cooking.

FAQs

There’s no reason to stress over this simple air fryer recipe. This easy FAQ will answer all your remaining questions, from how long to cook red potatoes in the air fryer to nutritional information.

Can you air fry red potatoes?

Definitely! Air frying red potatoes results in expertly seasoned, delectably crisp, and lusciously tender potatoes in half the time as regular frying. All you need to do is season and oil your potato slices, air fry them at 400 degrees F. for 15-17 minutes (tossing occasionally), and enjoy.

Should you boil potatoes before air frying?

No, there’s no need to boil your potatoes before air-frying them. Boiling them first will make them mushy, and they won’t maintain their shape while eating.

What temperature to air fry potatoes?

Though you may air fry red skin potatoes at 350 and 375 degrees F., we found that 400 degrees F. for 15 minutes resulted in the crispiest, most tender potatoes. Remember, however, that you must adjust your cooking time should you choose a different temperature.

Are air-fried red potatoes healthy?

Air-frying is generally healthier than traditional frying methods, as it uses less oil, reduces calories and trans fats, and helps retain more nutrients in your main ingredient. However, it’s also important to note that potatoes—no matter your preparation method—are high in carbohydrates and low in protein, though they also contain vitamins and minerals, like Vitamin C and potassium (source.) Therefore, I encourage you to customize your menu depending on your dietary needs and the dishes with which you plan to pair your air-fried potatoes.

How long to air fry red potatoes at 400 degrees F.?

I recommend cooking your small red potatoes for 15-17 minutes at 400 degrees F., shaking the basket every five minutes to ensure even cooking.

How to make French fries with red potatoes in the air fryer?

To make air fryer red potato French fries, begin by washing, drying, and slicing your potatoes into thin, even-sized strips (i.e., into the shape of a French fry). Then, place potatoes in a large bowl of cold water and soak for 30 minutes. Once done, drain and dry the potatoes with a clean kitchen towel, toss them in olive oil and your desired seasonings until evenly coated. Next, arrange your seasoned potato slices in a single even layer in your air fryer basket and cook them at 375 degrees F. for 12-15 minutes, shaking the basket halfway through. When the air fryer red potato fries reach your preferred level of crispness, remove them from the heat, sprinkle them with any additional seasoning, and serve.

Other Potato Side Dishes You Might Also Like

Making crispy red potatoes in the air fryer is one of my favorite ways to please a crowd. For even more fan-favorite potato dishes, these tasty recipes will fill your menu with creamy, savory goodness every night of the week.

If you try this crispy Air Fryer Red Potatoes recipe or any other one of our Air Fry Recipes, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Air fryer roasted red potatoes in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

Air Fryer Red Potatoes Recipe

Get ready to tantalize your taste buds with this Air Fryer Red Potatoes recipe! In just 20 minutes, you can transform simple ingredients into a delectably crispy and flavorful weeknight dinner side dish or snack. Use this easy recipe to make a delicious side dish or a quick snack that is guaranteed to impress.
Course Vegan side dish
Cuisine American Vegetarian
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan, Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 113kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 pound baby red potatoes washed, blemishes removed and halved (no need to peel)
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon dried thyme
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ¼ teaspoon paprika
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

Instructions

  • Preheat the air fryer to 400 degrees F.
  • In a large mixing bowl, whisk together the olive oil, dried thyme, garlic powder, paprika, salt, and pepper.
  • Add the baby red potatoes and toss to combine.
  • Place the potatoes in a single layer into the air fryer basket, being sure not to overcrowd them.
  • Cook the potatoes until tender when pierced with a knife, about 15 minutes, shaking the basket every 5 minutes. If not tender after 15 minutes, continue to cook in 1-minute increments until done.
  • Transfer the air-roasted potatoes onto a serving platter and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 1 pound air fried red potatoes that are ideal for serving 4 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Rinse and dry: It is important to make sure the potatoes are dry before tossing them in the olive oil mixture to ensure that the potatoes are evenly coated and can crisp up during the cooking process. 
  • Do not overcrowd your air fryer: Cook in batches, if needed, so that the heat is evenly distributed and they have enough room to crisp up.
  • Sprinkle it while it’s still hot: Though optional, you may sprinkle your air-fried small red potatoes with additional salt, herbs, and parmesan cheese directly after cooking (while the potatoes are still hot). Doing so ensures that the baby red potatoes heat and develop the new flavors—making them as rich and savory as possible—while also melting any additional cheese.
  • Storage: To ensure maximum crispiness, I recommend air frying them right before serving. However, you can store your leftover potatoes in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • Reheat: To reheat, place them in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 5-7 minutes or until warmed through.
  • Oven roasting: If you do not have an air fryer, you can roast your red potatoes in the oven. Simply use 2 tablespoons of oil (instead of one), transfer the cut potatoes onto a parchment-lined baking sheet, and roast in a preheated 450-degree oven for 25-30 minutes.

Nutrition

Calories: 113kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 312mg | Potassium: 526mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 75IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 15mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Air Fryer Red Potatoes appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-red-potatoes/feed/ 0
Air Fryer Butternut Squash https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-butternut-squash/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-butternut-squash/#respond Thu, 02 Nov 2023 16:07:19 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71576 While this simple recipe shows you how to make air fryer cubed butternut squash, we also have a recipe for Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves, should you need it. Ingredients Sophisticated yet nutritious, this air-fried butternut squash recipe only uses simple ingredients that you probably already have on hand. How to Air Fry Butternut Squash? Roasting butternut squash in the air fryer is a cinch when you follow these simple...

The post Air Fryer Butternut Squash appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
While this simple recipe shows you how to make air fryer cubed butternut squash, we also have a recipe for Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves, should you need it.

Butternut squash cooked in air fryer on a white oval plate with a spoon on the side.

Ingredients

Sophisticated yet nutritious, this air-fried butternut squash recipe only uses simple ingredients that you probably already have on hand.

  • Butternut squash: Fresh, unblemished butternut squash is the key to making air fryer roasted squash. When selecting your squash, look for ones with an intact stem, a dark beige color, and matte skin. Once your squash is ready, peel and cut it into 1-inch cubes. Be careful when cutting it into cubes. If you are new to it, check out my foolproof guide to cutting butternut squash before you start. Also, to simplify your meal prep, you may use store-bought, pre-cut butternut squash for this recipe. However, remember that these cubes tend to be larger, so you may need to cut them into smaller, 1-inch cubes before tossing them in your seasoning mixture. 
  • Olive oil: I use olive oil to help my seasoning mix adhere to the butternut squash and give each cube a beautifully roasted exterior. However, you may also use avocado oil or coconut oil if you prefer.
  • Garlic powder: Though both have a robust garlicky flavor, I recommend using garlic powder instead of minced garlic for this recipe. Garlic powder allows for a more even flavor coating, ensuring every bite of your squash explodes with a rich, gourmet taste.
  • Seasonings: You only need Kosher salt and black pepper to give your air fryer butternut squash cubes a deliciously savory, sophisticated flavor.
Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Optional Add-Ins

  • Other spices: Want to infuse your air-fried squash with warm fall flavors? Add one teaspoon of ground cinnamon, ½ teaspoon of ground cumin, and a pinch of nutmeg to your seasoning mix for a fall-ready side no one can resist.
  • Sweetener: For a sweeter version of this recipe, prepare your air fryer butternut squash with a teaspoon of brown sugar, maple syrup, or coconut sugar—tossed in with your other seasonings. I recommend using a small amount of sweetener (no more than 1 teaspoon), as doing so might caramelize or burn the squash while it is air frying. However, if you prefer it to be sweeter, you can drizzle it with maple syrup over the air-fried butternut squash after the cooking is completed.
  • Fresh herbs: Add a light, herbaceous flavor to your recipe by sprinkling your squash with whatever fresh herbs pair with your main dish, such as parsley, sage, rosemary, or thyme.

How to Air Fry Butternut Squash?

Roasting butternut squash in the air fryer is a cinch when you follow these simple instructions. In six steps and fifteen minutes, your squash will come out delectably caramelized, rich, and soft.

  1. Prepare the air fryer: Preheat the air fryer to 375 degrees F. If you bought your squash as a whole, cut it into cubes using our guide on how to cut butternut squash.
The steps to making butternut squash in air fryer are laid out in a collage of photos.
  1. Toss the cubed butternut squash: Place the diced butternut squash, olive oil, garlic powder, Kosher salt, and pepper in a large bowl. If using, also add the ground cinnamon, ground cumin, nutmeg, and maple syrup (or sweetener of choice) to the mix. Then, toss the ingredients to ensure each butternut squash cube has an even coating of the seasonings.
  2. Transfer the seasoned butternut squash: Place the cubed butternut squash into the air fryer basket, ensuring they lie in a single layer. If your cubes don’t all fit, air fry them in two batches.
  3. Cook: Air fry the butternut squash for 15 minutes or until fork tender, shaking the basket halfway through.
  4. Check for doneness: I think the best way to check doneness (and tenderness) when air frying butternut squash is to pierce a cube with a knife. The batch is ready to eat if the blade gently enters and exits the air fryer squash cube. If the cube is still tough, cook the basket in one-minute increments until done.
  5. Serve: Once you’ve roasted the butternut squash in your air fryer, transfer the cooked cubes to a serving platter. If preferred, drizzle the squash with a teaspoon of maple syrup for additional sweetness.

How to Make Ahead and Store It

It’s no secret that air fryer-roasted butternut squash is best on the day you make it. However, these pro storage tips will ensure that no bite will go to waste when putting away your leftover squash.

  • Store: When storing your butternut squash, first let the leftovers reach room temperature. Then, transfer it to an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to three days.
  • Reheat: To reheat your air-roasted squash, place it in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 3-5 minutes. Be sure to shake the basket halfway through reheating to ensure even cooking.

Ways to Use Air-Fried Butternut Squash

When you air fry butternut squash cubes, you’ll unlock countless other recipes to fill your table with sweet, savory, and garden-fresh flavors. Below are just a few of my favorite ways to incorporate this winter squash into my menus:

  • Serve it as a healthy Thanksgiving side dish: What better way to celebrate the holiday season than with air fryer winter squash? This hassle-free recipe makes for the perfect Thanksgiving side dish, complementing your favorite holiday mains with gorgeous color, caramelized taste, and simple prep.
  • Add it to salads: This recipe makes the most delicious crispy roasted squash, which pairs beautifully with any of your fall salads. I especially like using it in Ina’s Butternut Squash Salad or Ottolenghi’s Butternut Squash Feta Salad for a surprisingly complex, rich, and healthy dish.
  • Turn it into soups: Tender, mild, and exquisitely caramelized, air-roasted butternut squash is one of my favorite recipes to add to creamy soups. My Thai Butternut Squash Soup is a vegan dish brimming with aromatic, nutty flavors, while Butternut Squash Chicken Soup will warm your belly with a hearty, nutritious taste.
  • Add it to pasta or pizza as a topping: Believe it or not, air fryer cubed butternut squash makes for the perfect addition to all your Italian favorites, including pasta and pizza recipes. With this easy air fryer recipe, you can add a sumptuously sweet flavor to all your go-to weeknight meals.

Expert Tips

You don’t have to be a Food Network star to roast butternut squash in the air fryer. This easy guide will give you expert guidance on everything from slicing tips to seasoning suggestions.

  • Equal-sized cubes: For best results, it is imperative that your squash cubes are similar in size. There’s a direct correlation between air frying time and the size of your butternut squash cubes, so keeping your cubes uniform will ensure no piece of squash comes out over- or under-cooked.
  • Don’t overcrowd the air fryer basket: The key to proper air frying is adequate air circulation throughout the chamber. Therefore, you mustn’t overcrowd your basket when cooking, arranging your squash in a single even layer so that hot air reaches each side of your squash cubes. This positioning will ensure your squash cubes develop an even golden brown exterior and tender insides. Depending on the size of your air fryer, you may have to cook your butternut squash in two batches if they don’t all fit in the basket.
  • Shake halfway through: Be sure to shake the air fryer basket halfway through the cooking process to ensure even air frying on all sides of the butternut squash.
  • Each air fryer is different: We tested this recipe in a Ninja Air Fryer and Instant Pot Air Fryer, and the results were very similar. However, keep in mind that each brand of air fryer is different. Therefore,  your butternut squash may need more or less time, depending on the brand you own. When in doubt, check the doneness halfway through the cooking process by inserting a sharp knife into your squash and continue to cook it in one-minute increments until fork-tender.
  • Check doneness: Remember that this recipe’s recommended cooking time may change depending on your air fryer model and the size of your squash cubes. To check whether your butternut squash is ready to serve, I recommend using the “knife test.” In other words, insert a knife into one of your squash cubes and see whether it smoothly enters and exits the veggie. If it does, your air fryer squash is ready to eat.
  • Sugar: If you add sugar to your recipe, I recommend starting with a small amount— one teaspoon at most—to avoid over-caramelizing. If you prefer your butternut squash sweeter, you may drizzle or sprinkle it with additional sugar right after removing it from the air fryer (while it’s still hot).
  • Experiment with seasoning: Feel free to experiment with your squash’s seasoning blend based on what you’re serving it with. Depending on your menu, you may consider adding additional ingredients, like ground cinnamon, brown sugar, parsley, or even ground cumin.
  • Air fryer butternut squash fries: If you want to air fry butternut squash fries, cut your squash lengthwise into French fry-shaped pieces. Then, follow the recipe as directed, air frying them for 15 minutes at 375 degrees F.

FAQs

Want to know more about roasting squash in the air fryer? This handy FAQ will answer all your most pressing questions, whether you’re wondering about recommended cooking time or proper veggie prep.

Can you air fry butternut squash?

Absolutely! Air frying squash is an easy way to transform your winter squash into a deliciously tender, caramelized, and flavorful side. Even better, you can even use your air-fried squash in other recipes to cut down on prep time.

Should I peel butternut squash before air frying?

Yes, I recommend peeling your squash using a vegetable peeler before air frying it to eliminate unwanted toughness and ensure even cooking.

How long to air fry butternut squash?

When cut into 1-inch cubes, air fry your squash for about 15 minutes at 375 degrees F., shaking the basket halfway through. Remember, though, that every air fryer is different, so your squash may need more or less time, depending on what brand you own. To check for doneness, insert a knife into a cube and ensure it enters and exits the squash easily.

Other Air Fryer Vegetable Recipes You Might Also Like

Preparing air-roast butternut squash is an exceptionally tender, flavorful, and quick way to pack nutrition into your weekday meals. For even more delectable veggie recipes, this collection has just a few fan favorites that will satisfy the whole family.

If you try this Air Fryer Butternut Squash recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Air fryer roasted butternut squash on a plate from the top view.
Print

Air Fryer Butternut Squash Recipe

Made with just a few simple ingredients, this Air Fryer Butternut Squash makes a great side dish or addition to salads, pasta, and pizza dishes. With many seasoning options, you can take this basic recipe and customize it to your liking.
Course Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 90kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 6 cups butternut squash cubes* from a 2.5 pounds squash (peeled)
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

Optional Add-ins

  • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon optional
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin optional
  • Pinch of nutmeg optional
  • 1 teaspoon maple syrup or brown sugar plus more for drizzling if preferred

Instructions

  • Preheat the air fryer to 375 degrees F.
  • Place the diced butternut squash, olive oil, garlic powder, Kosher salt, and pepper in a large bowl. If using, also add ground cinnamon, ground cumin, nutmeg, and maple syrup. Give it a good toss, ensuring that all the butternut squash cubes are coated with the seasonings.
  • Transfer the seasoned butternut squash into the air fryer basket in a single layer. If they don’t fit, you may have to air fry them in two batches.
  • Air fry for 15 minutes or until fork tender, making sure to shake the air fryer basket halfway through the process.
  • To check tenderness, pierce a cube with a knife. If it goes in and out gently, the squash is done. If not fully tender, cook in 1-minute increments until done.
  • Transfer to a serving platter. If preferred, drizzle the butternut squash cubes with a teaspoon (or more) of maple syrup.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe, made with 2 ½ pounds of squash, yields about 5 to 6 cups of air-fried cubed butternut squash, which is ideal for 6 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Halved Squash: If you prefer to use halved squash instead of cubed squash, check out our Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves recipe.
  • Cutting butternut squash: If you are new to cutting squash, check out our guide on How To Cut Butternut Squash into cubes.
  • Evenly sized: For best results, it is important that your squash cubes are similar in size. Please keep in mind that there’s a direct correlation between air frying time and the size of the cubes, so keeping them uniform will ensure they are evenly cooked.
  • Adding sweetener: We intentionally limited the amount of sugar (maple syrup or brown sugar) to a small amount (only 1 teaspoon) as too much sugar might cause squash cubes to over-caramelize and potentially burn. If you prefer your dish to be sweeter, feel free to drizzle it with maple syrup after it is cooked (while it is still warm.)
  • Store: Bring leftovers to room temperature and then transfer them to an airtight container and store them in the fridge for up to three days.
  • Reheat: To reheat, place the cubed squash in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 3-5 minutes. Be sure to shake the basket halfway through reheating to ensure even cooking.
  • Frozen Butternut Squash Cubes: We also tested this recipe using a 15-ounce bag (standard size) of frozen butternut squash cubes that we bought from the grocery store. If you prefer to use frozen squash, you can follow the recipe as written but adjust the amount of oil and seasoning based on the weight of your squash. In our case, we halved the seasoning and oil. You do not need to wait for it to thaw. Just extend the air frying time to 20 minutes. Finally, be aware that because the butternut squash is frozen, when you air fry it, it will lose most of its moisture and the cubes will become smaller.

Nutrition

Calories: 90kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 3g | Saturated Fat: 0.4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 394mg | Potassium: 507mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 14886IU | Vitamin C: 29mg | Calcium: 74mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Air Fryer Butternut Squash appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-butternut-squash/feed/ 0
Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-butternut-squash-halves/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-butternut-squash-halves/#respond Thu, 02 Nov 2023 16:03:23 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71692 Ingredients Healthy, natural, and tasty, this air fry winter squash recipe only uses a handful of simple ingredients to get its irresistibly mouthwatering flavor. How to Air Fry Butternut Squash Halves There’s no secret to preparing butternut squash in the air fryer whole. These simple instructions will guide you every step of the way, giving you tender, caramelized squash halves in just half an hour. How to Store and Reheat?...

The post Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Air fried butternut squash halves on a plate from the top view.

Ingredients

Healthy, natural, and tasty, this air fry winter squash recipe only uses a handful of simple ingredients to get its irresistibly mouthwatering flavor.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Butternut squash: The most essential ingredient in this air fryer recipe is—you guessed it!—butternut squash. Begin by selecting a butternut squash with a firm texture, matte surface, and no bruises. Then, cut it in half lengthwise with a sharp knife. Though slicing butternut squash may seem daunting, you’ll find all the pro tips you need in my foolproof guide on How to Cut Butternut Squash. You also don’t need to peel your squash before using it in this recipe, though you may use a vegetable peeler to remove the skin if you prefer.
  • Olive oil: Olive oil is crucial to giving your air roast butternut squash a moist, tender, and perfectly crisp taste. However, you may also use any other mild-flavored oil, such as avocado oil, melted butter, or ghee.
  • Seasonings: All you need is garlic powder, kosher salt and pepper to bring out the natural flavors of the squash. Optionally—depending on your recipe—you may also sprinkle your squash with cinnamon, nutmeg, cayenne pepper, and pumpkin spice for an extra warm, sweet, and spicy taste.
  • Optional sweetener: Though not necessary, you may also add light sweeteners like maple syrup or brown sugar to your whole squash to enhance its caramelization and give it a sweet flavor.

How to Air Fry Butternut Squash Halves

There’s no secret to preparing butternut squash in the air fryer whole. These simple instructions will guide you every step of the way, giving you tender, caramelized squash halves in just half an hour.

  1. Prepare the air fryer: Preheat the air fryer to 375 degrees F.
Person showing how to cut butternut squash in half.
  1. Cut the butternut squash: Place the whole butternut squash on its side on your cutting board. Be sure to hold it firmly around its middle with your non-dominant hand. Using a sharp chef’s knife in your free hand, trim off the stem by cutting off about half an inch. Then, while holding it in its side position, cut the squash in half lengthwise through its center, beginning from the top and working your way to the bottom. Remember that you may have to jerk the knife back and forth while applying pressure to loosen the blade while cutting. Use a spoon to scoop out the seeds and pulp from the core of the cut squash. You may either discard them or save the seeds to roast later.
Images showing how to air fryer halved butternut squash.
  1. Season the squash halves: Brush the cut side of the squash halves with olive oil and season them with garlic powder, salt, and pepper.
  2. Air fry the butternut squash: Place the halved squash cut side down into the basket of the air fryer and cook them for 22 minutes.
  3. Flip the squash: Flip the squash halves so their cut sides face up and cook them for an additional 10 minutes.
  4. Check for doneness: Insert a sharp knife into the neck (i.e., the vertical top) of the squash. If the knife pierces the flesh easily, it’s ready to remove from the heat. If the knife encounters some resistance, continue cooking the squash in one-minute increments until done.

How to Store and Reheat?

Making this air-fried butternut squash recipe is one of the easiest ways to enjoy savory, tender squash all week long. None of your favorite veggies will go to waste with these expert storage tips.

  • Storage: You can store your leftover squash in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to three days.
  • Reheat: To reheat your air-fried squash leftovers, cook them in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 5-7 minutes or until heated through.

How to Use Air-Fried Butternut Squash Halves in Recipes?

Exquisitely tender and expertly flavored, there are dozens of butternut squash recipes to make in the air fryer. These tasty cooking ideas will fill your table with rich, flavorful meals no matter when the craving strikes.

  • Use the flesh: My favorite way to warm up during the chilly winter months is to transform this savory air fryer butternut squash recipe into a warm, hearty meal. My Butternut Squash Soup is luscious, bright, and savory, while my vegan Thai Curry Butternut Squash Soup is a faster way to fill your bowl with bold, aromatic flavors. You can even turn your air-roasted butternut squash into a rich and creamy pasta sauce or a decadent pie filling for a fan-favorite Butternut Squash Pie.
  • Stuff it: Visually stunning and packed with nutrition, Stuffed Squash is a gourmet meal guaranteed to satisfy the whole family.
  • Mashed butternut squash: Transform your air-fried squash halves into the perfect Thanksgiving side dish using a five-star mashed butternut squash recipe. Like my Sweet Potato Mash, this recipe is fluffy, rich, and flavorful—but with half the calories!

Expert Tips

You don’t have to be a squash expert to make a delicious side dish fit for a restaurant. These pro tips will ensure your air fryer butternut squash recipe is rich, caramelized, and tender every time.

  • Size of your squash matters: When making roasted butternut squash in the air fryer, you must select a squash that will fit in the basket of your air fryer. Therefore, take a minute when selecting your vegetable to ensure it is an appropriate size for your type of air fryer.
  • Air frying time: How long it takes to cook butternut squash in the air fryer may vary depending on the size of your squash and the brand of your air fryer. In this recipe, I cook my squash halves for 22 minutes cut-side down and another 10 minutes after flipping. However, I recommend checking the doneness of your air-fried squash using the knife test—inserting a knife into the neck of your squash—to tell if your veggie is appropriately tender. If the knife encounters resistance when inserted into the squash’s flesh, continue cooking it in one-minute increments until fork tender.
  • No need to peel: You don’t have to peel your butternut squash halves before adding them to the air fryer. Not only does keeping the skin cut down on prep time, but it also helps give you a good grip when scooping out the flesh to use in other recipes. However, you may peel the squash before air frying if preferred.
  • Start with skin side down: The key to cooking butternut squash halves in the air fryer is beginning the cooking process by placing the squash slices skin side down. This orientation ensures that your squash halves cook more evenly, as it allows for better air circulation and helps trap moisture in the skin of the squash to keep the veggie from drying out. It also results in better caramelization, as the flesh side of the squash will have more direct contact with the heat of the air fryer basket.
  • Add the sweetener at the last minute: If you choose to make air fryer butternut squash halves with maple syrup, brown sugar, or other sweeteners, wait until the last 5-10 minutes of cooking before adding the ingredient. Limiting these sweeteners’ exposure to high heat will help prevent burning and over-caramelization.

FAQs

Have more questions about this easy air fryer recipe? This simple guide has everything you need, whether you’re wondering about the air frying process or proper squash preparation.

Can you air fry butternut squash?

Absolutely! Air-roasted butternut squash (whether you cook it in cubes or whole) is a tasty, tender, and quick alternative to oven-roasting, and it even helps free up oven space when preparing multiple dishes at a time.

Do butternut squash halves need to be peeled before cooking?

No, you don’t have to remove the butternut squash skin before cooking. Though some prefer removing the skin beforehand, leaving the skin on helps trap moisture in the veggie during the cooking process, and it makes it easier to scoop out the flesh if you plan on using it for other recipes.

Other Butternut Squash Recipes You Might Also Like

Make the most of squash season by filling your kitchen with all your favorite butternut squash recipes. These recipes have everything you need, from delicious holiday sides to easy weeknight meals.

If you try this Air Fried Halved Butternut Squash recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Air fried butternut squash halves on a plate from the top view.
Print

Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves Recipe

If cooking the whole butternut squash sounds daunting, try cooking them in the air fryer. The good news is that with this recipe, making Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves is not only easy but also convenient compared to other methods.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 32 minutes
Total Time 37 minutes
Servings 1 butternut squash
Calories 379kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 1 whole butternut squash approximately 2.5 pounds, cut in half lengthwise
  • 1 teaspoon olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

Instructions

  • Pre-heat the air fryer to 375 degrees F.
  • Using a sharp chef’s knife, place the whole butternut squash on its side on your cutting board. Hold it firmly in the middle with your non-dominant hand. Trim the stem (the top) by cutting about ½-inch off. While still holding it firmly on its side, cut it vertically (or from top to bottom direction) in the middle. As you are cutting, you may have to jerk it back and forth while applying a little pressure to loosen it.*
  • Brush the cut sides of the butternut squash with olive oil and season with garlic powder, salt and pepper.
  • Place the butternut squash halves cut side down* and cook for 22 minutes.
  • Flip the butternut squash halves and cook for an additional 10 minutes.
  • Insert a knife in the “neck” of the squash. If it pierces easily, it should be ready. If it does not feel tender, cook in 1-minute increments until done.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes one whole butternut squash with two halves, which is good for 2 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Cutting the squash: It is imperative that you use a sharp knife and take your time as you are cutting the squash. If you are new to the process, be sure to check out our how-to guide to cutting butternut squash like a pro.
  • Sweetener: If you prefer, you can use a sweetener like maple syrup or brown sugar. However, we recommend brushing (or sprinkling) your butternut squash halves with the sweetener of your choice in the last 5 minutes of air frying to prevent over-caramelization or burning.
  • Start with skin side down ensures that your squash halves cook more evenly, as it allows for better air circulation and helps trap moisture in the skin of the squash to keep the veggie from drying out. It also results in better caramelization, as the flesh side of the squash will have more direct contact with the heat of the air fryer basket.
  • Storage: You can store your leftover halved squash in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to three days.
  • Reheat: To reheat your air-fried squash halves, cook them in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 5-7 minutes or until heated through.
  • Cubed Butternut Squash: If you prefer to air fry cubed butternut squash, check out our Air Fryer Butternut Squash recipe.

Nutrition

Calories: 379kcal | Carbohydrates: 89g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 1194mg | Potassium: 2665mg | Fiber: 15g | Sugar: 17g | Vitamin A: 79728IU | Vitamin C: 158mg | Calcium: 364mg | Iron: 5mg

The post Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-butternut-squash-halves/feed/ 0
How To Cook Brown Jasmine Rice https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cook-brown-jasmine-rice/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cook-brown-jasmine-rice/#respond Mon, 16 Oct 2023 23:02:02 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71239 We love our whole grains for their nutty flavor, extra dietary fiber, and wholesome nutritional value. But nothing smells like comfort to me more than a pot of rice cooking away on the stove. And if you are into whole grains as much as I am, consider this as a guide to perfect brown rice every time. If you want to learn more, we have a great library of whole...

The post How To Cook Brown Jasmine Rice appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
We love our whole grains for their nutty flavor, extra dietary fiber, and wholesome nutritional value. But nothing smells like comfort to me more than a pot of rice cooking away on the stove. And if you are into whole grains as much as I am, consider this as a guide to perfect brown rice every time.

If you want to learn more, we have a great library of whole grains, including Black Rice, Bulgur Wheat, Quinoa, and Wild Rice.

Cooked jasmine brown rice in a bowl from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need to Make Jasmine Brown Rice

In and of itself, jasmine brown rice is a 2-ingredient recipe. The additional ingredients add that much more flavor, character, and color. We will need:

  • Rice: Brown jasmine rice, also referred to as whole-grain jasmine rice, brown Thai rice, jasmati brown rice, or unpolished rice, is a type of long-grain brown rice coming from Thailand and Southeast Asia. Its distinctive light brown color comes from retaining the outer layers, which are removed, along with the germ, to create white jasmine rice. Because jasmine brown rice is a whole-grain rice, it has a slightly matte finish, nutty taste, and chewy texture. You can find it in the global section of the grocery store, specialty Asian markets, or even online. My favorite brands are Lundberg organic brown jasmine rice (affiliate link) and Mahatma Jasmine Brown Thai Fragrant Whole-Grain Rice (affiliate link). We tested this recipe using these two brands of rice.
  • Cooking liquid: Water is the most common cooking liquid for rice and offers the easiest approach. With that being said, you can add more flavor by swapping the water for Chicken Stock, Vegetable Broth, or Veggie Scrap Stock instead.
Ingredients to make the recipe from the top view.

Optional Add-Ins

While the below additions are optional, I chose to use them in the recipe for extra flavor. Luckily, they are ingredients that you probably already have on hand.

  • Olive oil or butter: To give the rice a glossy sheen and extra flavor, add 1-2 tablespoons olive or butter right into the cooking liquid.
  • Kosher salt: Adding salt at the beginning of cooking will enhance the natural flavor of the rice.
  • Black pepper: For some slight heat, I like to add freshly ground black pepper after the rice is done cooking.
  • Fresh herbs: A sprinkle of fresh parsley at the end adds both color and flavor. However, feel free to adjust the herbs you choose based on the dish you are serving it with. I usually pair it with different herbs that complement Asian flavors, like cilantro, mint, basil, or scallions.

Brown Jasmine Rice Cooking Instructions (Stovetop)

This Thai brown jasmine rice recipe is a cinch to make. Since brown rice takes longer to cook than white rice, the hardest part is waiting for it to finish on the stove. Here’s how I like to do it:

A collage of images showing how to cook brown jasmine rice on the stove top.
  1. Rince rice: Place rice in a colander and rinse under cold water until the water runs clear, 20-30 seconds.
  2. Boil water: In a heavy-bottomed, medium saucepan over high heat, add 2 cups of cooking liquid, along with the olive oil and salt (if using). Bring to a boil.
  3. Add rice: During our recipe testing, we found that the best brown jasmine rice-to-water ratio is 1:2. Therefore, as soon as your cooking liquid comes to a boil, add 1 cup of rinsed and drained rice to the cooking liquid.
  4. Cover and cook: Cover with the lid, and reduce the heat to low. Simmer for 30 minutes without opening the lid. After 30 minutes, open the lid and check to see if the liquid is fully absorbed. If not, continue to simmer in 3-minute increments until the excess water has been absorbed.
Cooked jasmine brown rice being fluffed.
  1. Rest: Remove from the heat and rest the rice for 10 minutes with the lid on.
  2. Fluff and serve: Gently fluff the rice with a fork. Season with black pepper and parsley, if desired. Serve.

How to Store and Reheat

Stovetop brown jasmine rice is a wonderful meal prep recipe. I like to keep a container of this whole grain in either the fridge or freezer so I can have a hearty side dish ready at a moment’s notice. To store properly, simply:

  • Storage: You can keep leftover rice in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days. Just be sure to first bring it to room temperature before storing it.
  • Freezing: To freeze, first cool completely by spreading the rice out onto a baking sheet (this speeds up the process and prevents the formation of ice crystals in the freezer). Transfer to heavy-duty freezer bags or freezer-safe airtight containers with some room at the top for expansion. (If you are big into meal prep, package in 1-2 cup portions so you only pull out what you need.) Label, date, and freeze for up to 1 month.
  • Thawing: Thaw frozen rice overnight in the refrigerator.
  • Reheating: Splash a few tablespoons of water on the rice to rehydrate. Microwave on high in 30-second increments, stirring each time in between, until warmed through. Or steam or stir-fry in a skillet on the stove.

Other Methods of Cooking Brown Jasmine Rice

Brown Jasmine rice is just like any other rice, in that it can be cooked following a different cooking method. Some other methods of cooking Thai jasmine rice include:

  • In a Rice Cooker: Follow the ratio of 1 ½ cups liquid to 1 cup of uncooked rice. Place in your rice cooker and set it to the ‘Rice’ setting (or ‘Brown Rice’ setting, if your cooker has it). When done cooking, fluff it and serve.
  • In the Instant Pot: Follow the ratio of 1 ¼ cups liquid to 1 cup of rice. Place in the pressure cooker, set the vent to ‘Sealing’ position, select ‘Manual’ on high pressure, and set the cooking time to 20 minutes. Once done, allow the pressure to naturally release for 10 minutes, then manually release the remaining pressure. Fluff it with a fork and serve. For more information, check out our detailed post on cooking brown jasmine rice in the instant pot.

To make it easier, below is a breakdown of the brown jasmine rice-to-water ratio for each method of cooking:

MethodRice AmountWater AmountCook TimeNotes
Stove Top1 cup2 cups30-40 minutesCheck after 30 minutes.
Rice Cooker1 cup1 1/2 cups40-60 minutesThe timing might change based on your rice cooker.
Pressure Cooker1 cup1 1/4 cups23 minutesPlus, 10 min each to come to pressure and release.

Serving Suggestions

Brown rice is an incredibly versatile side dish that can be served just as is with stir-fried vegetables, added to soup and salads, turned into grain bowls, and in some cases, even transformed into dessert-like rice pudding. Make it a great addition to any of your favorite meat, chicken, seafood, and vegetarian meals. A few of my favorites are:

Expert Tips

For the best brown jasmine rice recipe, be sure to follow these expert tips:

  • Do not skip rinsing the rice: Rinsing removes the excess starch on the coating of the rice, resulting in light and fluffy grains. Place the rice in a fine-mesh strainer and rinse under cool running water until the water runs clear.
  • Keep the lid on: The key is to cook the rice over consistent heat, low and slow, so you want to refrain from opening the lid while cooking. In other words, no peeking.
  • Use a thick-bottomed saucepan: The thick bottom of the pan serves as a protective barrier, preventing the rice from burning or sticking. In addition, it ensures even heat distribution, resulting in perfectly cooked brown jasmine rice with uniform consistency.
  • Make sure to rest: The key to perfectly cooked rice is resting it for 10 minutes, with the lid still on, as soon as you remove it from the heat. This essentially steams the rice all the way through.
  • Fluff: When ready, use a fork to gently fluff the rice. Doing so helps release steam and separate the grains, resulting in a soft, airy texture.
  • Get creative: Don’t be shy when it comes to cooking rice the way you want it. Use any cooking liquid of your choice, throw in some aromatics like garlic cloves and bay leaves, and finish with herbs and seasonings like parsley, cilantro, basil, chives, red pepper flakes, and more.

FAQs

How long does it take to cook brown jasmine rice?

The cooking time for brown jasmine rice is anywhere between 30-40 minutes when cooking on the stove. Be mindful of the cooking liquid and cook until all the liquid is absorbed and the rice is tender.

Is jasmine rice whole grain?

There are two varieties of jasmine rice: white and brown. Brown jasmine rice is considered a whole grain because it contains the endosperm, bran, and germ.

Is jasmine rice brown rice?

Jasmine rice comes in two forms: white and brown. Brown jasmine rice boasts a tan color, a chewy texture, and an earthy flavor. On the other hand, white jasmine rice has a white appearance, with a tender yet slightly sticky texture, and is accompanied by a delightful floral aroma.

What does brown jasmine rice look like?

Brown jasmine rice is tan to light brown in color, with long and slender grains. The finish is somewhat matte, thanks to the presence of the bran layer.

If you try this Jasmine Brown Rice Recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Cooked brown jasmine rice in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

How To Cook Brown Jasmine Rice

Here’s the foolproof recipe for perfectly cooked brown jasmine rice on the stovetop. No special equipment is needed for this gluten-free and vegan side dish.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Thai Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Resting time 10 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 203kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 cups water*
  • 1 cup Brown Jasmine Rice* thoroughly rinsed*

Optional add-ins:

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon parsley chopped, optional

Instructions

  • Place your cooking liquid in a medium-sized saucepan over high heat. If using, add in olive oil and salt as well. Cover and bring it to a boil.
  • Add the rice, stir to combine, and bring it to a rolling boil. Put the lid on and turn the heat down to low. Simmer for 30 minutes without opening the lid.
  • At the end of the 30 minutes of simmering, open the lid and check whether or not the liquid is fully absorbed. If it hasn’t, then continue to simmer at 3-minute increments until no liquid is left.
  • Turn the heat off and let it rest for 10 minutes with the lid on.
  • When ready to serve, gently fluff it with a fork.
  • If preferred, season with black pepper and garnish with chopped parsley. Serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields about 3 ½ cups cooked. A side serving is suggested at ½-1 cup, so it would be good for approximately 4 servings. The nutrition facts below are per serving.
  • Cooking liquid: If you want to add more flavor, you can vegetable stock or chicken broth in place of water.
  • Do not skip on rinsing: Rinsing the rice is an important step as it helps remove any additional starch. The best method is to place the rice in a mesh strainer and rinse it under cold water, stirring with your fingers or spoon.
  • Jasmine Brown Rice: We tested this recipe using two different national brands: Lundbery Organic Jasmine Brown Rice and Mahatma Jasmine Brown Rice. They yielded similar results in terms of cooking time and the amount of cooked rice. However, please keep in mind that the age of the rice plays an important role in the final product. The fresher the rice, the more fragrant it will be. Additionally, if you decide to purchase brown jasmine rice from the bulk bin, the time of cooking might be different. We recommend using the visual cues we listed within the blog post to gauge doneness.
  • Storage: You can keep leftover rice in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days. Just be sure to first bring it to room temperature before storing it.
  • Freezing: To freeze, first cool completely by spreading the rice out onto a baking sheet Transfer to heavy-duty freezer bags or freezer-safe airtight containers with some room at the top for expansion. If cooking Thai jasmine brown rice is a part of your meal prep, I recommend packaging it in 1-2 cup portions so you only pull out what you need. Label, date, and freeze for up to 1 month.
  • Thawing: Thaw frozen rice overnight in the refrigerator.
  • Reheating: Splash a few tablespoons of water on the rice to rehydrate. Microwave on high in 30-second increments, mixing each time in between until warmed through.

Nutrition

Calories: 203kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 591mg | Potassium: 112mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 0.4g | Vitamin A: 86IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 17mg | Iron: 1mg

The post How To Cook Brown Jasmine Rice appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cook-brown-jasmine-rice/feed/ 0
Brown Jasmine Rice in Instant Pot https://foolproofliving.com/instant-pot-brown-jasmine-rice/ https://foolproofliving.com/instant-pot-brown-jasmine-rice/#comments Mon, 16 Oct 2023 22:54:34 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71283 I love my Instant Pot for many reasons, but one of my favorite ways to use the pressure cooker is cooking whole grains. Among my go-to Instant Pot recipes like Wild Rice, Forbidden Rice, and Quinoa, brown jasmine rice has quickly become my new favorite. Ingredients Instant Pot brown jasmine rice is a 2-ingredient recipe. But I added a few additional flavorings and seasonings to give it that much more...

The post Brown Jasmine Rice in Instant Pot appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
I love my Instant Pot for many reasons, but one of my favorite ways to use the pressure cooker is cooking whole grains. Among my go-to Instant Pot recipes like Wild Rice, Forbidden Rice, and Quinoa, brown jasmine rice has quickly become my new favorite.

Instant Pot Brown Jasmine Rice in a bowl from the top view.

Ingredients

Instant Pot brown jasmine rice is a 2-ingredient recipe. But I added a few additional flavorings and seasonings to give it that much more personality. We will need:

Ingredients laid out from the top view.
  • Brown jasmine rice: Brown jasmine rice is a long grain rice with the outer coating (bran and germ) still intact. Look for brown rice, sometimes labeled Thai jasmine brown rice, in the international aisle at the grocery store, specialty Asian markets, or online sellers, such as Amazon. My favorite brands are Lundberg Organic brown jasmine rice (affiliate link) and Mahatma Jasmine Brown Thai Fragrant Whole-Grain Rice (affiliate link). This instant pot jasmine brown rice was tested using these two brands of rice.
  • Cooking liquid: Use water for a clean, neutral flavor, or opt for Vegetable Broth, Chicken Stock, or Veggie Scrap Stock. Omit the salt if using stock instead of water.
  • Olive oil: A mere teaspoon of olive oil gives the rice a nice glossy sheen. Feel free to swap it out for avocado oil, coconut oil, or ghee.
  • Kosher salt: A little salt enhances the natural flavor of the rice and makes it that much more delicious.
  • Black pepper: Freshly ground black pepper is best sprinkled on top at the end of cooking to preserve those natural oils.
  • Fresh herbs: While not mentioned in the recipe card, fresh herbs or complimentary flavors really enhance the flavor of the rice and give balance to your meal. A few popular herbs and seasonings include fresh cilantro, basil, mint, green onions, lime juice, or sesame seeds.

Brown Jasmine Rice to Water Ratio for Pressure Cooker

If this is the first time cooking jasmine brown rice in the Instant Pot, there are keynotes to point out when it comes to the rice-to-water ratio. Here’s what I have discovered:

  • Firmer rice: If you prefer your rice on the firmer side, with a bit more bite to it, use a 1:1 ratio of water to rice. In other words, for every 1 cup of brown rice, use 1 cup of cooking liquid and adjust the cooking time to 20 minutes.
  • Softer rice: If you prefer soft rice that is bouncy with a chewy texture, use a 1:1.25 ratio. As in, for every 1 cup of rice, use 1 ¼ cups of cooking liquid and set the cooking time to 23 minutes (this is my preferred rice and the recipe that is written in the recipe card).

How to Cook Brown Jasmine Rice in Instant Pot?

This Instapot brown jasmine rice recipe is so easy and virtually hands-free you’ll wonder why you never started cooking rice in the pressure cooker in the first place. Much like the rice setting on your rice cooker, this Instant Pot jasmine rice recipe is ready after the push of a button. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

A collage of images showing how to cook jasmine brown rice in Instant Pot.
  1. Rinse the rice: Place the rice in a colander and rinse under cold water, stirring with your fingers (or a spoon) until water runs clear, 20-30 seconds.
  2. Add ingredients to Instant Pot: Into the steel inner pot, add brown jasmine rice, your choice of cooking liquid, olive oil, and Kosher salt. Give it a good stir.
  3. Close lid: Secure the lid and set the pressure release to the “Sealing” position.
  4. Pressure cook: Select “Manual” on high pressure and set it to 23 minutes of pressure cooking time. It should come to full pressure within the next 5-7 minutes. 
  5. Release pressure: Natural pressure release (NPR) for 10 minutes, and then manually release the remaining pressure.
Jasmati rice in instant pot insert being fluffed by a person.
  1. Fluff and serve: Carefully remove the Instant Pot lid and fluff with a fork. Season with black pepper and serve.

How to Store, Freeze, and Reheat?

This Instant Pot brown jasmine rice recipe bodes wonderful for meal prep, or simply any time you want to have whole grains on hand. Here’s how I like to store, freeze and reheat:

  • Storage: Leftover rice will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days. To speed up the cooling process, spread the cooked brown rice out on a baking sheet (this prevents clumps from forming as the rice cools).
  • Freezing: Once completely cool, transfer to a heavy-duty freezer bag or freezer-safe airtight container with some room at the top for expansion. (If you regularly meal prep, package the rice in 1-2 cup portions. This way, you only pull out what you need.) Label, date, and freeze for up to 1 month.
  • Thawing: Thaw frozen brown rice overnight in the refrigerator.
  • Reheating: Add a few tablespoons of water to the rice. Then, steam or stir-fry with your recipe in a skillet on the stove or microwave on high in 30-second intervals, stirring each time in between, until warm.

What to Serve it With?

Instant pot Brown rice is a nutritious and delicious side dish that can be served with vegetables alongside any main dish. With a delicious nutty flavor, it pairs beautifully with meat or vegetable-based dishes. Some of my favorites are:

Expert Tips

For the absolute best Instant Pot brown jasmine rice recipe, be sure to take note of these expert tips:

  • Rinse before cooking: Rinsing the brown rice prior to cooking washes away excess starch on the surface, resulting in perfectly fluffy brown rice. The best way is to rinse the rice in a fine mesh strainer, stirring with your hands or a spoon, until the water runs clear.
  • Natural release: When the cooking time is up, allow the Instant Pot to naturally release the pressure for about 10 minutes. This allows time for the rice to cook further through.
  • Do not overfill: If you are doubling or tripling the recipe, avoid filling the steel pot more than halfway. Rice expands when cooked, and too much starch can clog the vent when the pressure is released.
  • Fluff with a fork: Make sure to fluff the rice with a fork as soon as it is done cooking. Fluffing actually helps steam to release, resulting in a lighter, softer texture.

FAQs

How long to cook brown jasmine rice in a pressure cooker?

Cook time depends on the desired texture. For firm brown rice, set the pressure cooking time to 20 minutes and adjust the ratio to 1:1. For a softer texture, set the pressure cooking time to 23 minutes and use a 1:1.25 ratio of rice to liquid.

Should I soak brown jasmine rice before cooking?

I do not soak brown rice, but according to Healthline, soaking brown rice helps to remove some of the naturally occurring phytic acid (antinutrients) present in whole grains. This makes it easier for digestion and promotes increased nutrient absorption. Soaking brown rice also reduces the cooking time.

How does brown jasmine rice taste compared to white rice?

Brown rice has a slightly more earthier and nuttier flavor compared to white jasmine rice because brown jasmine rice retains the bran layers and germ, which contributes to its richer taste.

Other Rice Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you are a fan of rice as much as I am, you might like the following basic rice recipes from the archives:

If you try this basic recipe for Instant Pot Brown Jasmine Rice, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Pressure cooked brown jasmine rice in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Instant Pot Brown Jasmine Rice Recipe

Put your electric pressure cooker to use with this Instant Pot Brown Jasmine Rice recipe. It comes together with only 5 minutes of hands-on time and cooks perfectly fluffy and delicious every time.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Thai Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 23 minutes
Pressure time 17 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 180kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup Brown Jasmine rice* rinsed thoroughly
  • 1 ¼ cup water vegetable stock, or chicken stock
  • 1 teaspoon olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper optional

Instructions

  • Place rice in a colander and rinse under cold water until the water runs clear, 20-30 seconds while stirring with your fingers or a spoon.
  • Place brown jasmine rice, your choice of cooking liquid, olive oil, and Kosher salt in the insert of the Instant Pot. Stir to combine.
  • Secure the lid and set the pressure release to the “Sealing” position.
  • Select “Manual” on high pressure and set it to 23 minutes* of pressure cooking time.
  • It should come to full pressure within the next 5-7 minutes. Let the pressure release naturally for 10 minutes, and then manually release the rest of the pressure.
  • Carefully remove the lid. Fluff it with a fork.
  • Season with black pepper and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields approximately about 3 cups of cooked long-grain brown rice, which is ideal for 4 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Rice: We tested this recipe using two national brown jasmine rice brands, Lundberg and Mahatma. They delivered similar results in terms of cooking time, taste, and texture. Please keep in mind that the timing might be slightly different based on the brand.
  • Cooking liquid: If you want your rice to be flavorful, you can vegetable broth or chicken stock in place of water.
  • Rice to water ratio and time of cooking: The recipe, as written (1 to 1 ¼ rice to water ratio cooked for 23 minutes), yields soft and chewy brown rice. However, if you prefer it to be on the firmer side, with a bit more bite to it, use a 1:1 ratio of water to rice. In other words, for every 1 cup of brown rice, use 1 cup of cooking liquid and adjust the cooking time to 20 minutes.
  • Storage: If you have any leftovers, bring them to room temperature and store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • Freezing: To freeze, cool completely by spreading the rice on a baking sheet. Transfer to a freezer-safe airtight container, label, date, and freeze for up to a month.
  • Reheat: You can reheat it in a microwave-safe bowl in 30-second intervals, mixing after each time until it is thoroughly heated.

Nutrition

Calories: 180kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 0.4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 298mg | Potassium: 105mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 0.4g | Vitamin A: 1IU | Calcium: 14mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Brown Jasmine Rice in Instant Pot appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/instant-pot-brown-jasmine-rice/feed/ 2
Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/apple-cinnamon-oatmeal/ https://foolproofliving.com/apple-cinnamon-oatmeal/#comments Mon, 25 Sep 2023 16:31:32 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=20686 I don’t know about you, but I think nothing says fall like the combination of apple, cinnamon, and walnuts. And this Apple and Cinnamon Oatmeal recipe is probably the easiest way to fill your house with the smells of fall. It tastes like apple pie, but it is healthier. If you are like me, a huge fan of apples and cinnamon, be sure to also check out our Apple Almond...

The post Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
I don’t know about you, but I think nothing says fall like the combination of apple, cinnamon, and walnuts. And this Apple and Cinnamon Oatmeal recipe is probably the easiest way to fill your house with the smells of fall. It tastes like apple pie, but it is healthier.

If you are like me, a huge fan of apples and cinnamon, be sure to also check out our Apple Almond Flour Muffins, Apple Roses, and Dairy-Free Apple Crisp recipes.

Apple and cinnamon oatmeal garnished with toppings from the top view.

Whether you are a morning person like me or someone who prefers to sleep until the last minute, I am pretty sure the unmistakably autumn aroma of this homemade apple oatmeal cooking on the stovetop will lure even the sleepiest member of your family out of bed.

It’s an easy way to set the mood for the fall season, and similar to my other breakfast bowl recipes, it’s ready in only 15 minutes. Bonus – it’s also vegan, dairy-free, paleo-friendly, and gluten-free!

Ingredients for Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal:

You probably already have a handful of ingredients you need to make this Cinnamon Apple Oatmeal in your pantry. Below is everything you need:

Ingredients for homemade apple cinnamon oatmeal from the top view.
  • Oil: We use oil to sautee apples and cinnamon before adding in the oats and milk. We use coconut oil, but avocado oil, butter, or clarified butter (also known as ghee) would also work in this apple oatmeal breakfast recipe.
  • Fresh Apples: We use Honeycrisp apples, but any other variety of apples, like Fuji, Pink Lady, Gala, and Granny Smith Apples, would also work. Peeling them is optional, but we recommend cutting them into 1-inch cubes. You can also use two different kinds of apples if you want to take your apple pie oatmeal recipe to the next level.
  • Spices: You’ll need ground cinnamon and a pinch of nutmeg.
  • Nuts: We are using unsalted walnuts, but pecans or almonds would also work well in this recipe. If you have the time, we recommend toasting your nuts for a few minutes to enhance their flavors.
  • Rolled Oats: Of all the different kinds of oats, rolled oats (also called old-fashioned oats) are probably the easiest to find, and therefore, it is what we are using in this apple oatmeal breakfast. Use gluten-free oats if you are following a gluten-free diet. If you are new to the world of oats and want to know more about them, be sure to check out our detailed articles on Rolled Oats vs. Steel-Cut Oats and Quick Oats vs. Rolled Oats.
  • Milk: We used unsweetened almond milk, but any dairy or non-dairy milk (such as coconut milk, oat milk, or regular milk) would work in this recipe. You can also make Almond Milk from Almond Butter in a pinch. Either way, we recommend using sugar-free milk to keep it healthy.
  • Superfoods: To boost protein and to keep you full for longer, we used a tablespoon of chia seeds. However, you can also add ground flax seeds, hemp seeds, and even your favorite protein powder to up the nutrition of this apple oats recipe.
  • Sweetener: We wanted this homemade apple oatmeal recipe to be sugar-free, so instead of adding sugar to the mixture, we opted for a drizzle of maple syrup in the end. However, if you prefer it to be sweeter, you can use brown sugar, coconut sugar, honey, or regular granulated sugar and add it to the oatmeal mixture as you are cooking it.
  • Optional Toppings: We sprinkled our apple and cinnamon oatmeal with diced apples, walnuts, and pomegranate arils for a pop of color. However, when it comes to toppings, the sky is the limit. Feel free to add a tablespoon of almond or peanut butter (a great way to add some protein to the recipe), raisins (or cranberries), and even a dollop of vanilla yogurt.

Optional Add-ins and Substitutions:

  • Vanilla Extract: A splash of vanilla extract is an easy way to enhance the sweet flavors of the apples.
  • Apple Juice: For a richer apple taste, consider replacing some of the milk with apple juice. A good place to start is 1/4 cup unsweetened apple juice with 1 1/2 cups of milk.
  • Applesauce: While we prefer this recipe with diced and sauteed apples, you can still make this apple cinnamon breakfast with applesauce instead. Simply skip the sauteing of the apples and add 1/2 cup unsweetened applesauce into the oat mixture.
  • Cranberry Sauce: Making this easy oatmeal recipe during the holiday season? A dollop of leftover maple cranberry sauce is a delicious way to sweeten it.
  • Spices: While we opted for the basic cinnamon and nutmeg, you can experiment with adding other spices, such as ground cardamom and apple spice.
  • Salt: It is optional, but as it is with any sweet recipe, adding a pinch of salt to the oatmeal mixture will help enhance and balance the sweet flavor of apples.
  • Cooking liquid: Alternatively, you can make this apple cinnamon oats recipe using water instead of milk. If you decide to do so, please keep in mind that it will be less creamy.

How To Make Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal on Stove Top?

The steps to making this easy apple cinnamon oatmeal recipe are twofold, and it only takes 15 minutes from start to finish. Below are the steps:

A collage of images showing how to make cinnamon apple oatmeal step by step.
  1. Saute apples and spices: Start by heating coconut oil in a small saucepan over medium-high heat. Add apples and sauté, stirring frequently, for 2-3 minutes. Add the ground cinnamon and nutmeg and cook for 10 more seconds.
  2. Make oatmeal: Add the nuts, rolled oats, milk, and chia seeds (if using). Stir to combine and cook, keeping a close eye on it and stirring occasionally until thickened for 8-10 minutes.
  3. Serve with toppings: Ladle into bowls, and garnish with fresh diced apples (or other fruits like pomegranate seeds), more nuts, and a drizzle of maple syrup. If preferred, you can sprinkle it with more ground cinnamon and an extra splash of milk.

On a side note, we based the recipe for this healthy apple cinnamon oatmeal on my Oatmeal with Almond Milk and Chia Seeds recipe, which happens to be one of the most popular recipes on Foolproof Living. It is a great recipe to show you how to make oatmeal on the stovetop if you are new to making oatmeal for breakfast or in need of a works-every-time recipe.

How To Meal Prep, Store, and Reheat?

One of the reasons why we love making this healthy apple cinnamon oatmeal is that it is a great meal prep-friendly breakfast recipe that you can make over the weekend and enjoy in the next few days. Perfect for busy mornings! Here is how we do it:

  • Meal Prep: Make the apple oatmeal recipe as written but refrain from adding the toppings. Divide it among four mason jars and let it cool on the counter. Once fully cooled, cover it tightly with a lid and store it in the fridge for up to 4 days. When ready to serve, be sure to top it off with your favorite toppings.
  • Storing leftovers: Store the leftover cinnamon apple oatmeal in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.
  • Reheating: While you can enjoy this recipe warm, cold, or at room temperature, we like to reheat it in the microwave if we are serving it on a crisp fall morning. To do so, transfer the apple porridge into a bowl, add a splash of milk (or water), and give it a stir. Place in the microwave and heat it in 30-second increments stirring every time until it is warmed to your liking.
Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal being drizzled with maple syrup.

How to make this Oatmeal recipe in the microwave?

If you’d rather make this homemade cinnamon apple oatmeal in the microwave, simply:

  • Start with cooking the apples: Sprinkle cubed apples with cinnamon and place in a large microwave-safe bowl (it should be large enough to make the whole oatmeal)
  • Add the liquid and nuts: Add in the almond milk (or water) and nuts and cook on high for 3-5 minutes, stopping and stirring every minute or so until it reaches your desired consistency.
  • Assemble: Drizzle with maple syrup and add the toppings. Give it a taste and add more if you like.

Expert Tips for the Best Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal

While the recipe below, as written, is pretty straightforward, there are a few things to pay attention to make flavors shine through when making this easy breakfast bowl:

  • Cooking apples for oatmeal: Do not skip the sauteeing of the apples, as it is key to bringing out their sweetness and making this a sugar-free apple cinnamon oatmeal. Additionally, cooking them ensures they soften, resulting in a more delightful texture in your oatmeal.
  • Experiment with different types of apples: While we do not think that there is such a thing as “the best apple for oatmeal,” we recommend experimenting with two (or more) different kinds of apples when making this recipe. Each type offers its unique flavor and texture, enriching the overall flavor and texture of your oatmeal.
  • Enhance and toast your spices: Consider experimenting with other spices such as cloves, star anise, ginger, apple pie spice, and allspice. However, we recommend using a very small amount to start with and then adjusting it according to your tastebuds. Furthermore, we recommend taking the time to toast your spices with the apples for a few minutes to enhance their flavors.

FAQs

How to cook apples for oatmeal?

To soften apples, use a teaspoon of coconut oil and saute them in the warm melted oil for a few minutes while stirring them often. As they cook, they release some of their juices and become sweeter and softer, making it a perfect pairing for this cinnamon oatmeal.

How to boost the nutrition of apple oatmeal?

To make this apple cinnamon porridge recipe even more nutritious, you can add a scoop of ground flaxseeds for additional fiber, a scoop of collagen for additional protein, and use less (or no sugar) in the recipe.

Is apple cinnamon oatmeal healthy?

Yes, it is, especially when made without using additional sugars. According to Healthline, when consumed on a regular basis, apples lower your chance of developing cancer, diabetes, and heart disease. Additionally, ground cinnamon is packed with antioxidants and anti-inflammatory properties, which help lower the risk of disease.

How much cinnamon to add to oatmeal?

You Might Also Like:

If you enjoyed this healthy apple breakfast porridge, then you will love our collection of oatmeal and apple recipes. Below are a few that we hand-picked for you:

Other Oatmeal Recipes:

Other Autumn-Inspired Apple Recipes:

If you try this Homemade Apple Oatmeal recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Apple cinnamon oatmeal in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal Recipe

This Homemade Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal is an autumn-inspired twist on plain oatmeal. Rolled oats, apples, and cinnamon simmered in almond milk with a touch of maple syrup make a delicious and healthy breakfast ready in less than 15 minutes.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 2 servings
Calories 454kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon coconut oil avocado oil or ghee would also work
  • 1 large apple or 2 small apples, cut into small chunks
  • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • Pinch of ground nutmeg
  • ¼ cup chopped pecans or walnuts, plus more as topping
  • 1 cup rolled oats – Not quick cooking {I used Trader Joe's gluten free brand oats}
  • 2 cups unsweetened almond milk
  • 1 teaspoon chia seeds optional
  • 1 tablespoon pure maple syrup plus more to finish
  • ¼ cup pomegranate seeds as garnish (optional)

Instructions

  • Heat coconut oil in a medium sized saucepan over medium heat.
  • Add in the apples and saute for 2-3 minutes. Stir in the cinnamon and nutmeg.
  • Add in the pecans, oats, almond milk, and chia seeds (if using). Give it a stir and let it cook until thickened for about 7-10 minutes, stirring constantly during the cooking process.
  • Ladle into bowls and top them off with pomegranate seeds (or other fruit), nuts, more apples, and a slight sprinkle of ground cinnamon. Serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 3 cups of apple oatmeal, which is ideal for serving two people. You can multiply the recipe if you are serving a crowd. The nutritional values below are per serving and include the calories coming from the listed toppings.
  • Optional Add-ins: You can easily customize this cinnamon apple recipe according to your taste buds. A few of our favorite ways to do it are as follows:
    • Use two different types of apples
    • Add a splash of vanilla extract
    • Up the nutrition by adding other superfoods such as ground flaxseeds and hempseeds
    • Top it off with a dollop of creamy peanut butter or yogurt for additional protein
  • Meal Prep: Make the recipe as written but refrain from adding the toppings. Divide it among four mason jars and let it cool on the counter. Once fully cooled, cover it tightly with a lid and store it in the fridge for up to 4 days. When ready to serve, top it off with your favorite toppings.
  • Storing leftovers: Store the leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.
  • Reheating: While you can enjoy this recipe warm, cold, or at room temperature, I like to reheat it in the microwave if I am serving it on a crisp fall morning. To do so, transfer the apple porridge into a bowl, add a splash of milk (or water), and give it a stir. Place in the microwave and heat it in 30-second increments stirring every time until it is warmed to your liking.

Nutrition

Calories: 454kcal | Carbohydrates: 58g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Sodium: 330mg | Potassium: 403mg | Fiber: 11g | Sugar: 22g | Vitamin A: 70IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 368mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/apple-cinnamon-oatmeal/feed/ 34
Roasted Brussels Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-brussels-sprouts-sweet-potatoes/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-brussels-sprouts-sweet-potatoes/#comments Wed, 20 Sep 2023 19:47:47 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15280 Here at Foolproof Living, we love to roast colorful root veggies in the oven. Not only is this method quick and easy, but it’s the tastiest way to get your daily dose of nutrients. If you’re looking for more easy recipes for beautifully caramelized, tender roasted veggies, you have to make my Roasted Acorn Squash, this Maple Roasted Carrot dish, and my Baked Butternut Squash Cubes.  Ingredients We’re keeping the...

The post Roasted Brussels Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Here at Foolproof Living, we love to roast colorful root veggies in the oven. Not only is this method quick and easy, but it’s the tastiest way to get your daily dose of nutrients. If you’re looking for more easy recipes for beautifully caramelized, tender roasted veggies, you have to make my Roasted Acorn Squash, this Maple Roasted Carrot dish, and my Baked Butternut Squash Cubes

Roasted Brussel Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes in an oval plate with a spoon on the side.

Ingredients

We’re keeping the ingredient list short and simple for this roasted brussel sprout and sweet potato recipe. The veggies crisp up perfectly with just a little olive oil, and we’re adding a few additional seasonings to enhance the flavor of this dish. Here’s what you’ll need:

Ingredients for the recipe in small bowls from the top view.
  • Fresh Brussels sprouts: Rinse them under cold water and slice them in half. If you have larger sprouts, cut them into quarters.
  • Sweet potatoes: You’ll need 1 or 2 large sweet potatoes or 3-4 medium sweet potatoes. Be sure to peel them and cut them into 1-inch cubes.
  • Fresh garlic cloves: Peel garlic and mince finely. Don’t have fresh garlic on hand? Use a teaspoon of garlic powder instead.
  • Extra-virgin olive oil
  • Seasonings: You’ll need paprika (sweet or smoked), ground cumin, kosher or sea salt, and black pepper. 
  • Fresh Herbs (optional): We used fresh parsley as a garnish, but when making this dish during the holiday season, we use other fresh herbs like fresh sage, fresh thyme, or fresh rosemary.

Substitutions 

Root vegetables are ideal for roasting because the high heat allows the veggie’s natural sugars to caramelize and release a sweet flavor. Feel free to swap the sweet potatoes for your favorite root vegetable or even switch up the flavor profiles of this dish. Here are some ideas:

  • Pioneer Woman’s Brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes: The Pioneer Woman has a delicious variation of this Brussel sprouts and sweet potato recipe that uses butternut squash and onion. If you’d like to try out her version, swap the sweet potatoes for cubed butternut squash and add some diced onion (she uses yellow onion, but red onion would also work.) If you don’t know how to cube butternut squash, check out my easy How to Cut Butternut Squash guide. If you’re not a fan of butternut squash, try substituting chopped carrots. You can even make roasted yams and Brussels sprouts for another substitution. 
  • Maple roasted Brussels sprouts and sweet potatoes: Sweet and savory is such a classic combo! Balance the savory spices in this recipe by adding a sweetener like sweet maple syrup, which will also help to bring out those beautiful caramelized flavors. I recommend drizzling your oven-roasted sweet potatoes and Brussels sprouts with maple syrup (about one tablespoon), just as I did in this Maple Roasted Carrots recipe. For another sweet option, try drizzling your roasted veggies with a dash of balsamic vinegar or balsamic glaze (affiliate link.) 

How to Roast Sweet Potatoes and Brussel Sprouts?

In just 30 minutes, you can serve up this impressive, colorful vegetable dish that pairs with an endless number of main dishes. Plus, with only one bowl and a sheet pan, it makes for a super easy cleanup. Here’s how to make brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes in oven:

  1. Prep your equipment: Preheat your oven to 400 degrees F (204 degrees C). Line a large sheet pan with parchment paper or aluminum foil and set aside. 
A collage of images showing how to roast brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes.
  1. Combine the veggies and seasonings: Add the veggies, olive oil, garlic, cumin, paprika, salt, and pepper to a large or medium bowl. Toss Brussels sprouts and sweet potatoes with all the oil and seasonings until evenly coated.
  2. Transfer to the baking sheet: Transfer the seasoned veggies to the prepared baking sheet and spread them into a single layer. 
  3. Roast vegetables: Place in the center rack of the oven for 20-25 min, making sure to flip halfway through. 
  4. Serve: Transfer the roasted sweet potato and brussel sprouts to a serving bowl or plate. Sprinkle with fresh parsley or other fresh herbs, if desired. 

Variations with Optional Add-Ins

While roasted brussels sprouts and sweet potatoes are delicious as-is, they make an excellent base for salads, grain bowls, and more. Get creative by drizzling with dressings, adding lots of toppings, or adjusting the flavor profile to suit a special occasion. Here are a few suggestions:

  • Add quinoa: Turn this easy side dish into a roasted vegetable salad with cooked quinoa. For nutritious, simple, and filling lunch or dinner options, add your roasted brussels sprouts and sweet potato to this yummy Quinoa Sweet Potato Bowl or to my other delicious Quinoa Salad recipes. If you’d like to try these recipes but you are unfamiliar with cooking quinoa, I have you covered. Check out my easy guide for Cooking Quinoa on the Stove.
  • Mix with salad greens or massaged kale: Amp up the nutrients of this dish by tossing it with your favorite salad greens or kale. For a restaurant-worthy creation, finish off your sweet potato brussel sprout salad with a drizzle of Lemon and Balsamic Dressing and top it with lots of Crispy Bacon
  • Nuts and dried fruits: While you can enjoy roasted sweet potatoes and Brussels sprouts year-round, they’re especially fitting for the autumn season because of their warm, cozy flavors. If I’m making this dish for Thanksgiving, I love adding festive toppings like chopped pecans (or walnuts) and dried cranberries. Feel free to use your favorite nuts and dried fruit, such as dried figs or sliced almonds. Or, add a fun pop of color by tossing this sweet potato brussel sprout recipe with some fresh pomegranate seeds. 

How to Make Ahead, Store, & Reheat?

While sheet pan Brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes are quick and easy to throw together for a last-minute side dish, they’re also make-ahead-friendly for meal prep and storage-friendly for those yummy leftovers. Here are some make-ahead, storage, and reheating tips:

  • Make-ahead: You can make this sweet potato and brussel sprout recipe a day in advance so it’s ready to go when you are. Simply chop up the veggies, mix them together with the seasonings, garlic, and extra virgin olive oil, and store them in a plastic bag, large bowl, or airtight container in the fridge. Follow the above instructions to cook them when you’re ready to serve. 
  • Store: Bring the baked brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes to room temperature before placing them in an airtight container. They’ll stay fresh in the fridge for up to 4 days. 
  • Reheat: You can reheat your leftovers for a few seconds in the microwave or in a 300-degree F oven for about 10 minutes or until warmed through. 
A close up of the dish from the top view.

What to Serve It With?

Baked sweet potato and Brussels sprouts are a classic side that pairs with virtually any main dish. While it is one of my go-to dishes for holiday dinners, you can also enjoy this recipe as a snack, appetizer, or simple lunch! Here are a few of my serving recommendations: 

Expert Tips

When it comes to roasting Brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes, the goal is to make them tender, caramelized, and crisp rather than mushy and lifeless. Thankfully, this is easy to achieve with just a few tricks up your sleeve! Here’s what you need to know: 

  • Aim for equal-sized veggies: Cutting your veggies into fairly equally-sized pieces will help them cook evenly in the oven. I recommend chopping medium-sized sweet potatoes into 1-inch cubes and cutting the sprouts in half lengthwise. You may need to cut particularly large Brussels sprouts into quarters. 
  • Leave the outer leaves: While you can remove any loose sprout leaves before roasting, I prefer to leave them since they crisp up really well in the oven and add a nice crunch to the dish. 
  • Flip halfway through the roasting process: When roasting sweet potatoes and Brussels sprouts, flip them halfway through to ensure even cooking. They can turn from perfectly crisp and caramelized to mushy pretty quickly, so make sure to keep an eye on them after about 20 minutes (every oven is different). You’ll know they’re done when they’re fork-tender.

FAQs

Can I roast brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes together?

Yes, you can. Roast sweet potatoes and brussel sprouts in the oven for a total time of about 20-25 minutes to achieve a fork-tender texture with crisp, caramelized edges. Plus, sweet potato brussels sprouts are a savory and sweet combination that makes for the perfect side dish.

What temp to roast brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes?

You can cook sheet pan sweet potatoes and brussel sprouts in a 400-degree F oven for 20-25 minutes or until fork-tender.

Can I roast brussels sprouts and sweet potatoes in the air fryer instead?

For a quick and easy cooking option, you can make air fryer brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes instead of roasting them in the oven. I recommend roasting them in the air fryer basket at 400 degrees F for 17-20 minutes or until you achieve tender potatoes and crispy brussel sprouts.

What pairs well with brussel sprouts?

Root veggies, such as sweet potatoes, carrots, and butternut squash, pair beautifully with sprouts. Roasted root vegetables and brussel sprouts require around the same cook time, resulting in a tender texture with crisp, golden brown, and caramelized edges. It’s the perfect combination of savory and sweet.

Should I soak brussel sprouts before roasting?

There’s no need to soak your sprouts before roasting them. However, I recommend giving them a good rinse under cold running water to remove any dirt, debris, or pesticides. You can lightly dry them with a paper towel before cooking to ensure they crisp up nicely.

Other Roasted Vegetable Recipes You Might Like:

Whether you need a delicious side dish to serve with your holiday dinner or you are just looking for a healthy veggie meal for a Tuesday night dinner, we have a good collection of vegetable side dishes for you to choose from. Below are a few hand-picked recipes that we make regularly:

If you try this Roasted Sweet Potato Brussel Sprouts Recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Roasted Sweet Potatoes and Brussels Sprouts on a plate with a spoon on the side.
Print

Roasted Brussels Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes Recipe

These Oven-Roasted Brussel Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes are an easy side dish that’s vegan, gluten-free, and dairy-free. Tender, perfectly caramelized, and seasoned with cumin and paprika, these veggies are just as tasty as they are nutritious. Serve this recipe as a snack or appetizer, alongside your favorite weeknight meal, or even as an accompaniment to your holiday table.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 4 servings (as a side dish)
Calories 271kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 pound Brussels sprouts trimmed and halved lengthwise
  • 1 pound sweet potatoes peeled and cut into 1-inch cubes
  • 2 cloves fresh garlic minced or 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon paprika sweet or smoked
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon fresh parsley optional or other fresh herbs like fresh sage, thyme or rosemary

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 400 degrees F (or 204 degrees C). Line a large baking sheet with parchment paper (or aluminum foil) and set aside.
  • Into a large bowl, place halved Brussels sprouts, cubed sweet potatoes, minced garlic, olive oil, ground cumin, paprika, salt, and pepper.
  • Give it a good toss to ensure that the vegetables are coated with all the seasonings and oil.
  • Transfer onto the prepared baking sheet and make sure that they are spread on a single layer.
  • Roast vegetables in the oven for 20 to 25 minutes, flipping halfway through the cooking process.
  • Transfer the now-roasted sweet potatoes and Brussels sprouts to a serving platter. Serve it with a sprinkle of fresh parsley.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields about 4 to 5 cups of roasted vegetables, which is ideal for serving 4 people as a side dish. The nutritional values listed below are per serving.
  • Aim for equal-sized veggies: Cutting your veggies into fairly equally-sized pieces will help them cook evenly in the oven. I recommend chopping sweet potatoes into 1-inch cubes and cutting the sprouts in half lengthwise. You may need to cut particularly large Brussels sprouts into quarters. 
  • Make-ahead: You can make this recipe a day in advance so it’s ready to go when you are. Simply chop up the veggies, mix them together with the seasonings, garlic, and extra virgin olive oil, and store them in a plastic bag, large bowl, or airtight container in the fridge. Follow the above instructions to cook them when you’re ready to serve. 
  • Store: Bring the roasted vegetables to room temperature before placing them in an airtight container. Keep them in the fridge for up to 4 days. 
  • Turn it into a salad: An earlier version of this recipe was tossed with ½ cup of cooked quinoa, 1 cup of arugula, a handful of pumpkin seeds, and pomegranate arils. It was drizzled with a homemade salad dressing. Below are the ingredients you will need to make the dressing:
    • ¼ cup orange juice freshly squeezed
    • 2 tablespoons olive oil
    • 2 tablespoons balsamic vinegar
    • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

Nutrition

Calories: 271kcal | Carbohydrates: 34g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Sodium: 674mg | Potassium: 853mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 17158IU | Vitamin C: 101mg | Calcium: 93mg | Iron: 3mg

The post Roasted Brussels Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-brussels-sprouts-sweet-potatoes/feed/ 13
Mediterranean Hummus Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-mediterranean-hummus/ https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-mediterranean-hummus/#comments Tue, 05 Sep 2023 00:39:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=2804 While I love a good flavored hummus like my Carrot Hummus recipe, there really is something about plain hummus that just brings me back to my roots. Simple, straightforward, and with just a few pantry staples, homemade hummus is only a few steps away. Hummus Ingredients A traditional hummus recipe requires just a handful of ingredients. Since hummus is the Arabic word for chickpeas, it’s no wonder this is the...

The post Mediterranean Hummus Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
While I love a good flavored hummus like my Carrot Hummus recipe, there really is something about plain hummus that just brings me back to my roots. Simple, straightforward, and with just a few pantry staples, homemade hummus is only a few steps away.

A bowl of hummus garnished with chickpeas and parsley.

Hummus Ingredients

A traditional hummus recipe requires just a handful of ingredients. Since hummus is the Arabic word for chickpeas, it’s no wonder this is the main ingredient. Below is what you’ll need:

Ingredients for basic hummus recipe.
  • Chickpeas: Although you can cook your own chickpeas (more on this below), I find using canned chickpeas is easier and does not require any advanced planning. We will need one can of chickpeas (also known as garbanzo beans) rinsed and drained.
  • Lemon Juice: Fresh lemon juice will provide a fresh pop of citrus.
  • Water: A bit of water helps with consistency. For best results, use ice-cold water.
  • Tahini Paste: A high-quality tahini (sesame paste) makes all the difference and gives this easy hummus recipe that special nutty flavor. I love super creamy Soom tahini (affiliate link) or Seed + Mill (affiliate link.)
  • Extra Virgin Olive Oil: Use good quality olive oil for the best flavor.
  • Garlic Cloves: I use raw garlic when making this hummus recipe from scratch. However, if you want to take things up a notch (and are not a fan of the pungent garlic flavor), you can use Roasted Garlic, or, quicker, Air Fried Garlic as well. 
  • Seasonings: Cumin, cayenne pepper, black pepper, and salt add Mediterranean flavor and warmth.
  • Fresh Herbs: Upon serving, a final sprinkle of fresh herbs like parsley is all you need. 

Substitutions and Optional Garnish Ideas

While you can serve this DIY hummus simply as is, I find extra garnishes and Mediterranean additions compliment the classic characteristics of hummus and give it depth of flavor. Some favorites you can try include:

  • Chickpeas: If you would prefer to make hummus from dried chickpeas, I recommend trying Ottolenghi’s method of cooking chickpeas. Place 1 ⅓ cups dry chickpeas in a bowl, cover with cool water, add 1 teaspoon baking soda, cover and soak overnight. The next day, drain, rinse, and cook in a pot of water for 40 minutes to an hour, or until softened. And if you prefer it to be quicker, you can cook chickpeas in a pressure cooker as well.
  • Olive Oil: Create a deep crevice into the bowl of hummus with a large spoon and finish with a generous drizzle of olive oil.
  • Pine Nuts + Olives: Add crunch and fruitiness by finishing with toasted pine nuts and chopped Kalamata olives or green olives.
  • Hummus Seasoning: Finish with an array of spices and herbs, such as my Mediterranean Seasoning or Baharat Spice Blend, bright and tangy sumac, or dried oregano.
  • Greek: Garnish with chopped sun-dried tomatoes, crumbled feta cheese, chopped red onion, and a drizzle of olive oil.

How to Make Hummus From Scratch?

If you are ever looking for a step-by-step hummus recipe, you have come to the right place. Making your own hummus will always be better than store-bought hummus and might even be faster than taking a trip to the grocery store. Here’s how I like to do it:

Step by step photos showing how to make hummus recipe.
  1. Prep ingredients: Combine the lemon juice and water in a small bowl. Reserve 2 tablespoons of chickpeas as a garnish.
  2. Mix Tahini: In another small bowl, whisk together the tahini and olive oil until shiny and smooth.
  3. Blend chickpeas: In the bowl of a food processor with the steel blade or a high-powered blender, add the remaining chickpeas and process for 15 seconds. Add lemon juice/water mixture, garlic, cumin, cayenne pepper, black pepper, and salt. Process until the mixture begins to form into a paste, about 1 minute.
Person showing how to make creamy hummus in a collage of images.
  1. Add tahini: With the food processor running, slowly add the tahini paste mixture through the tube and process until creamy, about 30-40 seconds. Be sure to stop the machine a few times and scrape down the sides.
  2. Serve: Transfer the hummus to a large bowl. Using the back of a spoon, create a deep crevice in the center. Finish with reserved chickpeas, a drizzle of olive oil, and chopped fresh parsley, and enjoy.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Freeze?

Easy homemade hummus can be made ahead and stored in both the fridge and freezer. To do so, simply:

  • Make Ahead: Prepare this homemade hummus recipe as directed up to 2 days in advance. The flavors actually get better the longer they have a chance to marry together.
  • Store: Leftovers of this chickpea hummus recipe can be kept in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.
  • Freeze: Store in a freezer-safe airtight container, with a little space at the top (to count for expansion), for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the fridge.

How to Serve

This basic hummus recipe can be served in a number of different ways. Go the more traditional route or think outside of the box by serving as:

  • Mezze Platter: The adoration for hummus is a social activity that is meant to be enjoyed amongst the company, and no mezze plate would be complete without it. Enjoy it alongside Baba Ganoush and Middle Eastern Red Pepper Dip for an authentic experience.
  • Grilled Meat: Make it a part of a filling meal by serving your garbanzo bean hummus alongside Mediterranean Chicken, Chicken Kabobs, grilled lamb, or beef kabobs.
  • Appetizer / Dip: Cut up fresh veggies like raw celery sticks, English cucumber, carrots, bell peppers, or radishes and dip right into Mediterranean hummus bowls.
  • Spread: Use it as a sandwich spread to make your lunch that much more enjoyable, or add it to your favorite grain bowls.
  • Pita / Bread: Give it a casual approach with toasted pita bread, pita chips, crackers, Air Fried Garlic Bread, Olive Bread, or No Knead Artisan Bread.
Greek hummus in a bowl garnished with chickpeas and parsley.

Expert Tips

While the recipe for this authentic hummus recipe is pretty simple and straightforward, below are a few tips to ensure you get perfect results on your first try:

  • Should I remove the skins of chickpeas? I am sure you’ve seen a lot of recipes suggesting removing the chickpea skins. While I get why they recommend doing so, I personally do not have the time or patience to do so. And I guarantee you that this recipe is just as creamy and delicious without removing the skin. 
  • Use high-quality tahini: The quality of your tahini makes a huge difference here. For optimal taste and texture, use a brand of tahini that uses the buttery white Humera sesame seeds from Ethiopia. It should also be soft and creamy. If the tahini bottle has been sitting in the fridge for a while, be sure to give it a good stir before using it.
  • Use an ice cube: This is an optional step, but it really works. To achieve an extra smooth and creamy hummus, add 1-2 ice cubes near the end of processing.
  • No food processor? Use a blender. However, please keep in mind that if you have a high-speed blender like Vitamix (affiliate link), you might have to stop the machine and scrape the sides a few times.
  • Serve at room temperature: Fun fact – restaurant hummus is never refrigerated and is made fresh each morning. While I refrigerate my batch of homemade hummus to get ahead, I always serve it at room temperature.

FAQs

What is hummus?

Hummus originated in the Middle East, but many countries have welcomed and adapted it to their own. Such variations include Israeli, Lebanese, Palestine, Egyptian, and Greek hummus.

What is the secret to the creamiest hummus?

The creamiest hummus is made from soft chickpeas and a high-powered food processor or blender. Adding 1-2 ice cubes at the end of the processing time would also help.

Can you have hummus on a Mediterranean diet?

Yes, hummus is a staple of the Mediterranean diet and is celebrated for being plant-based and full of protein, dietary fiber, and healthy fats.

What is the main ingredient in hummus?

The main ingredient in hummus is chickpeas, sometimes referred to as garbanzo beans.

How much tahini for hummus?

This is more about personal preference and cultural influence, but I use ⅓ cup tahini for every 1 (14-15 oz) can of chickpeas.

Other Mediterranean Recipes You Might Enjoy:

It is no secret that I love making and sharing Turkish recipes on the blog. Below are other Mediterranean classics that I know you’ll like:

If you try this Mediterranean Hummus Recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Authentic hummus in a bowl drizzled with olive oil.
Print

Mediterranean Hummus Recipe

A restaurant style yet Homemade Mediterranean Hummus recipe. This recipe makes the creamiest and most delicious hummus that you can make in minutes. Top it off with pine nuts, chopped olives, and a drizzle of oil for extra deliciousness.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 6 people
Calories 139kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 1/4 cup water
  • 1/3 cup tahini paste
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 can chickpeas (14 oz.) drained and rinsed
  • 2 small cloves garlic minced
  • 1/4 teaspoon cumin
  • Pinch of cayenne pepper
  • Pinch of black pepper
  • 1/2 teaspoon salt
  • 2 tablespoons Italian parsley finely chopped

Instructions

  • In a small bowl, combine the lemon juice and water.
  • In a separate bowl (or a measuring cup), whisk together the tahini paste and olive oil until thoroughly incorporated.
  • Reserve 2 tablespoons of chickpeas as a garnish.
  • Place the rest of the chickpeas in a food processor and process them for 15 seconds. Add lemon juice and water mixture, garlic, cumin, cayenne pepper, black pepper, and salt. Process until mixed, scraping down the bowl as necessary, 50-60 seconds.
  • While the food processor is running, slowly (in a steady stream), pour the tahini paste and olive oil mixture from the tube, and process until smooth and creamy (or it reaches your desired consistency,) for 30-40 seconds.
  • Transfer the hummus to a plate and sprinkle it with chopped parsley and reserved chickpeas. If preferred, drizzle it with olive oil. Serve it with pita chips or toasted bread on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 1 ½ cups of hummus, which is ideal for 6 servings when served as an appetizer. If you are serving a larger crowd, you can multiply the recipe. The nutrition information below is for one serving.
  • Make Ahead: Make the recipe as directed up to 2 days in advance. Place it in an airtight container and store it in the fridge. The flavors actually get better the longer they have a chance to marry together.
  • Store: Leftover hummus can be kept in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 139kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 242mg | Potassium: 86mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 132IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 22mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Mediterranean Hummus Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-mediterranean-hummus/feed/ 13
Baba Ganoush Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/baba-ganoush-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/baba-ganoush-recipe/#respond Mon, 21 Aug 2023 15:24:58 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=69873 What is Baba Ganoush? Baba ganoush (also referred to as baganoush, baba gahanouj, baba ghanouj, papa ganoush, and baba ghanoush) is an eggplant- and tahini-based appetizer native to Levantine regions—now located the Middle East and Mediterranean. Directly translated, baba ganoush’s meaning is “pampered papa” or “coy daddy,” which may refer to the recipe’s smooth, rich taste. If you are wondering, what is in baba ganoush, this savory, smoky spread generally...

The post Baba Ganoush Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
What is Baba Ganoush?

Baba ganoush (also referred to as baganoush, baba gahanouj, baba ghanouj, papa ganoush, and baba ghanoush) is an eggplant- and tahini-based appetizer native to Levantine regions—now located the Middle East and Mediterranean. Directly translated, baba ganoush’s meaning is “pampered papa” or “coy daddy,” which may refer to the recipe’s smooth, rich taste.

Babaganoush in a bowl garnished with pomegranate seeds served with pita chips on the side.

If you are wondering, what is in baba ganoush, this savory, smoky spread generally consists of roasted eggplant, creamy tahini, zesty lemon juice, rich olive oil, and bold garlic. However, many also add unique blends of seasonings to give this Middle East eggplant dip a tantalizingly complex flavor profile.

Ingredients

Baba ganoush ingredients include a handful of fresh, natural, and flavorful ingredients—all of which you may already have in your pantry!

Ingredients used in the recipe from the top view.
  • Eggplant: There are many eggplant varieties to choose from when selecting a baba ganoush eggplant. Plump and round, globe eggplants are an excellent option for this recipe and are the easiest type to find in most American grocery stores. However, if you can get your hands on Italian eggplants, I highly recommend them, as this variety has a more tender flesh, fewer seeds, and a deliciously sweet flavor. Japanese eggplants will also work, but you’ll need more (7-8) due to their thinner shape and smaller size. If you’d prefer not to work with fresh eggplants, you may also use canned roasted eggplant (affiliate link), though it may not have the same tenderly mild flavor.
  • Fresh garlic cloves
  • Fresh lemon juice
  • Sesame Tahini: Ground sesame paste, aka tahini, has an earthy, nutty flavor that perfectly balances the mild, smoky taste of roasted eggplant baba ganoush. My favorite tahini brand is Soom (affiliate link), which is incredibly smooth and creamy.
  • Olive oil: I recommend using extra virgin olive oil for this recipe, as it has a higher quality with pure pressed olives, a lighter color, and a more neutral taste.
  • Kosher salt
  • Optional spices: While adding spices is not traditional to the original recipe, you can add more depth to your baba ganoush by adding a mixture of ground cumin and sweet, peppery paprika. For an extra deep taste, you may also use smoked paprika to complement your smoked eggplant baba ganoush. You can also add red pepper flakes for additional heat or black pepper for slightly pinier undertones.
  • Garnishes: Topping this Mediterranean eggplant dip with different garnishes is a great way to revitalize your spread with sweet, crunchy, and fresh notes. For a tart, sweet finish, try topping your dip with pomegranate seeds, or use sesame seeds and pine nuts for a nuttier taste. Or, if you want bright, fragrant overtones, fresh herbs like parsley are some of my go-to’s.

How to Cook Eggplant for Baba Ganoush?

There are three different ways to prepare your eggplant for this simple recipe, depending on your preferred cooking method: roasted, charred, and grilled eggplant for baba ganoush.

Roasting Eggplant in the Oven

Roasting eggplant for baba ganoush is a cinch when you use my foolproof method for preparing Whole Roasted Eggplant. These instructions will ensure your eggplants come out tender and creamy with little prep time.

Person showing how to roast eggplant for baba ganoush.
  1. Prep the oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F.
  2. Poke the eggplants: Use the tines of a fork to poke 7-10 ¾-inch holes around the exterior of each eggplant.
  3. Roast: Place eggplants on a baking sheet lined with aluminum foil in a single layer and bake for 50-60 minutes, turning them every 20 minutes until they burst, collapse, and soften.

Char Eggplant On a Gas Stove

The most authentic way to prepare eggplant for this baba ganoush recipe is by charring it over the open flame of a gas stove. Making Roast Eggplant on a Gas Stove is quicker than other cooking methods and will result in a smoky baba ganoush recipe with an irresistibly complex, aromatic flavor.

Person showing how to char eggplant on a gas stove.
  1. Prepare the stove: Line the base of a gas range stove with aluminum foil, ensuring that the burners are still exposed.
  2. Add the eggplants: Turn the burners to medium heat and place the eggplants directly on the flame. Two eggplants can fit on the larger burners, and one can fit on the smaller ones.
  3. Roast: Roast the eggplants for 15-20 minutes, depending on their size, turning them every five minutes with a pair of tongs. Be careful not to burn yourself while handling the hot eggplants.
  4. Remove from heat: Remove the charred eggplants from the flame when their skin becomes burnt and flaky, and their flesh is soft.

Grill Eggplant

Learning how to grill eggplant for baba ganoush is an easy way to give this Mediterranean dip its classic rich, smoky flavor and smooth texture. Here’s how to do it:

  1. Prep the grill: Preheat the gas grill (or charcoal grill) to medium heat.
  2. Grill the eggplants: Place the eggplants directly on the grill and cook them for 40-50 minutes, turning them every 10 minutes or so. Continue grilling until the eggplants have charred skin on all sides and are fully tender.

How to Make Baba Ganoush?

There’s no secret to making an authentic baba ganoush recipe. These foolproof instructions will ensure your tastebuds explode with fresh, Mediterranean flavors in just eight basic steps.

A collage of images showing how to make baba ghanoush.
  1. Let the eggplant cool: Cook your eggplant following one of the three methods mentioned above. Allow your cooked eggplant to cool down. In the meantime, place a fine-mesh strainer over a bowl and set it aside for later.
  2. Scoop the eggplant flesh: Once cool, draw a knife lengthwise through each eggplant until cut in half. Then, use a spoon to scoop out the eggplants’ flesh, trying to remove as much skin as possible.
  3. Strain: Transfer the scooped eggplant into the fine mesh strainer and use the back of a spoon to gently press against the flesh, removing as much moisture as you can. Let the eggplant drain while you prepare the remaining ingredients. Discard the juices.
  4. Mix the garlic and lemon: Transfer the eggplant to a medium bowl and add the garlic and lemon juice. Use a fork to mix the ingredients, breaking apart and mashing the large chunks of eggplant until thoroughly combined.
A collage of images showing how to make Lebanese baba ganoush recipe.
  1. Add the tahini: Stirring constantly, pour the tahini, followed by the olive oil, into the mixing bowl in a steady stream. Mix the ingredients until emulsified.
  2. Add the seasoning: Add the salt, ground cumin, and paprika (if desired) to the bowl. Taste the mixture and add more seasoning and lemon juice if necessary.
  3. Garnish: After giving it a good stir, transfer the baba ghanoush to a serving bowl and garnish with fresh parsley and pomegranate seeds if using.
  4. Serve: If wanted, drizzle the spread with olive oil and serve with pita chips.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Freeze?

This homemade baba ganoush is a must-have for anyone seeking easy meal prep. Whip up this simple dip for healthy snacking throughout the week, or make it in advance for a five-star party appetizer.

  • Make ahead: You can make this baba ganoush recipe up to four days in advance. Then, store your prepared baba ghanoush in an airtight container in the fridge until ready to eat.
  • Store: You can store your freshly made eggplant garlic dip in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to four days.
  • Freeze: While you can technically freeze this vegan baba ganoush recipe, please keep in mind that it will likely lose its creamy texture after it is exposed to freezing temperatures, so it might not taste as good after storage. However, if you still want to freeze, first transfer the mixture into an airtight container, removing as much air as possible. Then, store your baba ganoush in the freezer for up to one month. 
  • Thaw: Thaw your frozen aubergine dip in the fridge overnight. Because your mixture will likely become watery the longer it sits, drain it of excess liquid, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary before serving.

What to Serve with Baba Ganoush?

One of the best things about preparing babaganoush is the many delectable ways to serve it. Though many traditionally serve this dish alongside pita triangles or vegetables, it also works as a tasty spread on toast, sandwiches, wraps, and more. 

  • Bread: Who can say no to an appetizer as effortless and tasty as this? Serve a bowl of this popular Middle Eastern dip with your favorite pita chips, roasted pita wedges, or crackers, and you’ll have the perfect crowd-ready snack.
  • Raw vegetables: Crisp, nutritious, and garden-fresh, fresh veggies make an incomparable pair with a bowl of smoky eggplant dip recipes. My favorite raw vegetables include cucumber slices, carrot sticks, cherry tomatoes, and sliced radishes.
  • Other Middle Eastern or Mediterranean dips: Wondering what to do with baba ganoush that will make even the pickiest eaters hungry for more? Try pairing your creamy eggplant dip with other classics, like Mediterranean Hummus, Muhammara, and Tzatziki. To transform this simple spread into a next-level meze platter, you can also serve them with a side of olives and nuts—gorgeous and delicious.
  • Grilled or roasted meats: A tasty way to serve baba ganoush is as a light, creamy side dish for hearty protein mains. For a classic Middle Eastern pairing, serve it alongside brightly spiced Chicken Shish Tawook or Oven Chicken Kabobs. Or, if you want an irresistibly juicy, perfectly portioned poultry meal, try this simple dish with Grilled Cornish Game Hens.
A bowl of baba ghanouj garnished with pomegranate seeds and parsley.

Expert Tips

You don’t have to be a Middle Eastern chef to make an epic baba ganoush the whole family will love. These pro tips have everything you need to keep your spread as flavorful and smooth as possible.

  • Roasting time might change based on the sizes of your eggplant: Depending on the size and variety of your eggplant, they may need more or less cooking time. Japanese eggplants are smaller and thinner, requiring less time on the stove/grill, while globe eggplants are larger and may need more time to develop tender insides than other types. In total, however, you should have about 17 ounces (~480 gr.) of cooked eggplant flesh to make this babaganoush recipe.
  • Eggplant seeds: Globe eggplants tend to have a lot of seeds—more than Italian eggplants. Though these seeds are entirely edible and blend into the dip after everything is mixed, you may remove them if you are not a fan.
  • Roasted eggplant skin: It is totally okay if some of the charred eggplant skin goes into the mixture. While we want to remove as much of the skin as we possibly can, the eggplant skin is edible, so don’t worry about it if some skin gets mixed into your baba ganouj.
  • Don’t skip the draining: The secret to an epic baba ganoush recipe is to remove as much liquid as possible from the eggplants after they are cooked. Not only do not skip this step but also take your time to ensure that the juices are fully drained as much as possible to ensure it is as creamy and tasty as possible.
  • Add the oil in a steady stream: When adding the tahini and olive oil to the mixture, it is imperative to drizzle them in a steady stream while you are vigorously mixing the eggplant mixture. If you add them at the same time, they will not mix properly, and you’ll most likely end up with a less creamy and smooth baba ganoush.
  • Taste for seasoning: One other important tip for making the best baba ganoush recipe is tasting the mixture for seasoning before serving. I cannot stress this step enough, as it’s vital that you adjust the taste of your spread to your liking. Add more salt, cumin, or paprika to achieve a more robustly flavored dip, or if you prefer a more acidic, tart flavor, add more lemon juice.
  • Let it rest: Letting your eggplant baba ganoush rest for thirty minutes will allow its flavors to mix and develop, giving every bite a rich, Middle Eastern flavor. While it is an optional step, if you do have the time, let it rest in the fridge before serving.
  • Baba ganoush without Tahini: If you are not a fan of tahini, you can use an equal amount of plain Greek yogurt for a different but equally delicious version of this recipe.
  • For the iconic smoky taste: If you want to give your roasted eggplant spread an authentically smoky, robust taste, I highly recommend charring your eggplants over an open flame. Whether you cook them on a gas stovetop or on the grill, the smoky flavor that comes from the charred eggplants is worth the effort and time, especially if you are after the traditional baba ganoush recipe you enjoy in Middle Eastern restaurants.
  • Food processor or blender: Though not a traditional preparation method, you may use a food processor or blender to make an easy baba ganoush without heavy mixing. Simply fit your food processor with a steel blade and place the roasted eggplant flesh, garlic, lemon juice, tahini, olive oil, salt, ground cumin, and paprika (if using) in the bowl. Pulse 7-9 times until thoroughly combined or longer, depending on how smooth you want the texture of your dip to be. Then, transfer the mixture to a bowl, garnish it with fresh parsley and a drizzle of olive oil, and serve.

FAQs

If you have more questions about this classic baba ganoush recipe, don’t worry! This simple FAQ has all you need to know:

Where is baba ganoush from?

Baba ganoush originated in the Levantine regions, roughly located in the Middle East and Mediterranean. This area now includes several modern-day countries, including Palatine, Lebanon, Syria, Jordan, and Turkey.

Is baba ganoush vegan?

Yes! This baba ganoush recipe is vegan, dairy-free, and gluten-free, making it the perfect recipe for anyone with dietary restrictions.

How long to grill eggplant for baba ganoush?

When grilling eggplant for baba ganoush, your eggplants will need 40-50 minutes of cooking time, depending on their size.

What does baba ganoush taste like?

This creamy roasted eggplant dip offers a delectable balance of smoky, savory, and zesty flavors—a classic profile in Mediterranean and Middle Eastern cuisine. Not only does this spread taste incredible on its own, but it also makes a fabulous appetizer when served alongside a bowl of pita bread or raw veggies.

Is baba ganoush served hot or cold?

I recommend serving baba ghanouj chilled or at room temperature to ensure you can taste all its complex flavors. 

Why is my babaganoush bitter?

If your babaganoush comes out bitter, your eggplant may be old or not in season. I recommend selecting only fresh eggplants, which tend to have milder, sweeter flesh. Furthermore, it’s possible that the tahini paste you used has a naturally bitter profile or that you added too much during the mixing process. Always be sure to taste your babaganoush as you go so that you can adjust the seasoning to counteract any unwanted bitterness. You may also try adding extra fats, such as olive oil or Greek yogurt, to balance out any bitterness you taste.

What is the difference between hummus and baba ganoush?

Though they have a similarly smooth, rich flavor profile, hummus comes from a mixture of chickpeas and tahini, while baba ganoush contains a blend of eggplants and tahini.

Is baba ganoush healthy?

Absolutely! This recipe only uses the freshest, most natural ingredients—all packed with healthy nutrients. In fact, eggplants are high in antioxidants, fiber, and vitamins, helping reduce your risk of heart disease.

How long does baba ganoush last in fridge?

As long as it is kept in an airtight container in the fridge, your baba ganoush should last for up to 4 days.

Other Eggplant Recipes You Might Also Like

Wondering what to do with roasted eggplant? If you can’t resist adding this eggplant tahini dip to every meal, you’ll love adding these other eggplant recipes to your family cookbook.

Baba ganoush in a bowl with pita wedges on the side.
Print

Baba Ganoush Recipe

Learn how to make Baba Ganoush like the pros using our foolproof method. Made with just a few simple ingredients, this popular Middle Eastern recipe is the perfect appetizer for any party.
Course Dip
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 50 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 6 servings
Calories 152kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 ½-3 lbs globe or Italian eggplant ~ 2-3 eggplants if using globe eggplants
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • ¼ cup lemon juice plus more to taste
  • ¼ cup tahini
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil plus more as a drizzle
  • 1 ½ teaspoons kosher salt plus more to taste
  • Pinch ground cumin optional
  • Pinch paprika to finish it off – optional
  • 1 tablespoon fresh Italian parsley chopped (as garnish)
  • Handful of pomegranate seeds optional

Instructions

  • To cook eggplants for baba ganoush, you have three options:
    a. Roast whole eggplants in the oven: Preheat oven to 400 degrees F. Using a fork, poke 7-10 ¾-inch holes throughout each eggplant. Place eggplants on the sheet pan on a single layer and roast them for 50-60 minutes, turning them every 20 minutes until they burst, collapsed, and softened.
    b. Roast eggplants on the gas stove: Line the base of a gas range with aluminum foil, making sure to keep the burners exposed. Turn the burners on medium -heat and place eggplants directly on an open flame. You can put 2 eggplants on the larger burners and 1 on the smaller ones. Roast eggplants for about 15-20 minutes (depending on their size), turning every 5 minutes or so using a pair of tongs, being careful not to burn yourself. You will know that it is fully roasted when the skin is burnt and flaky and the flesh is soft.
    c. Grill eggplants: Preheat a gas grill (or a charcoal grill) to medium heat. Place eggplants directly on the grill and cook, turning every 10 minutes or so for 40-50 minutes or until charred on all sides and fully tender.
  • Let the now-cooked eggplant cool down. Meanwhile, place a fine-mesh strainer over a large bowl and set it aside.
  • When cool enough to handle, working on one eggplant at a time, slit open each eggplant lengthwise and carefully scoop the eggplant flesh removing as much of the skin as possible.
  • Transfer the eggplant flesh into the fine mesh strainer. Using the back of a spoon, gently press to remove as much of the liquid as much as possible. Let it drain while you are working on the rest of the ingredients. In the end, you should have about 17 ounces (~480 gr.) of eggplant flesh.
  • Transfer the eggplant to a medium bowl. Add minced garlic and lemon juice. Using a fork, give it a mix while breaking the large chunks of eggplant flesh until fully combined.
  • While stirring constantly, pour in the tahini, followed by olive oil, in a steady stream. Mix until fully combined.*
  • Add salt, ground cumin, and paprika (if using.). Taste for seasoning and add in more seasoning and/or lemon juice if you want.
  • Transfer baba ganoush to a serving bowl, garnish with fresh parsley and pomegranate seeds if desired.
  • If preferred, drizzle it with olive oil and serve with pita chips on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields about 2 cups of this roasted eggplant dip, which is good for 4-6 servings when served as an appetizer.
  • * Food processor: While it is not traditional, you can make baba ganoush using a food processor or blender. To do so, place eggplant flesh, garlic, lemon juice, tahini, olive oil, salt, and ground cumin and paprika (if using)  in the bowl of a food processor fitted with a steel blade. Pulse 7-9 times until fully combined. You can run it for longer if you prefer it to have a smoother texture. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Transfer to a bowl, garnish with parsley and a drizzle of olive oil, and serve with pita chips on the side.
  • Eggplant seeds: Globe eggplants tend to have a lot of seeds—more than Italian eggplants. The seeds are entirely edible and will blend into the dip after everything is mixed. However, if you are not a fan, you can remove them.
  • Don’t skip the draining: The secret to an epic baba ganoush recipe is to remove as much liquid as possible from the eggplant flesh. So, be sure to take your time when draining as much liquid as possible. 
  • Add the oil in a steady stream: When adding the tahini and olive oil to the mixture, it is imperative to drizzle them in a steady stream while you are vigorously mixing the eggplant mixture. If you add them at the same time, they will not mix properly, and you’ll most likely end up with a less creamy and smooth baba ganoush.
  • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 152kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 589mg | Potassium: 497mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 107IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 35mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Baba Ganoush Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/baba-ganoush-recipe/feed/ 0
Ina Gartenโ€™s Roasted Eggplant Spread https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-vegetable-dip-with-tahini/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-vegetable-dip-with-tahini/#comments Sun, 20 Aug 2023 20:28:16 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=408 As one of my favorite Eggplant Recipes, this eggplant spread is just as elegant as the Barefoot Contessa herself. It is easy to make with just a few simple ingredients; it is a great appetizer to serve with crackers, pita bread, and veggies. Ingredients While this could be an eggplant red pepper spread, I like to think eggplant is the star here. Here’s a quick glance at what we need:...

The post Ina Gartenโ€™s Roasted Eggplant Spread appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
As one of my favorite Eggplant Recipes, this eggplant spread is just as elegant as the Barefoot Contessa herself. It is easy to make with just a few simple ingredients; it is a great appetizer to serve with crackers, pita bread, and veggies.

Barefoot Contessa's roasted eggplant red pepper spread in a bowl.

Ingredients

While this could be an eggplant red pepper spread, I like to think eggplant is the star here. Here’s a quick glance at what we need:

  • Eggplant: Eggplant Types vary, but I used the easy-to-find globe eggplants for this recipe. If you can get your hands on Italian eggplants, you can use them as well. Since we are roasting the eggplant in the oven pre salting the eggplant is not necessary here. However, it is important to cut eggplant into equal-sized cubes to ensure even roasting.
  • Bell Pepper: I like the sweeter red bell peppers, but you can use any color, such as yellow or orange.
  • Red Onion: All you have to do is peel and cut the onion into big chunks.
  • Garlic Cloves
  • Olive Oil
  • Seasoning: This includes Kosher salt, black pepper, and a touch of (optional) cayenne pepper for some kick.
  • Lemon Juice: Use freshly squeezed lemon juice for the best flavor.
  • Tahini: Go for a high-quality, runny tahini, such as Soom (affiliate link.) The flavor makes all the difference.
  • Herbs: I love fresh chopped parsley here, but you can also add fresh mint to enhance those Mediterranean flavors. Fresh basil leaves as a garnish are a nice addition, too.
  • Pita Bread: Whether you prefer to toast fresh pita bread triangles or enjoy it with store-bought pita chips, this red pepper eggplant dip will be delicious either way.
Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Optional Add-Ins

  • Tomato Paste: The original recipe from the Barefoot Contessa cookbook contains tomato paste. While I did not include it here, you can add 1 Tablespoon of tomato paste for a richer flavor.
  • Extra Seasoning: Give it a smoky eggplant dip flavor with the addition of 1 teaspoon smoked paprika or an herbal kick with 1 teaspoon dried oregano.

How to Make Eggplant Spread

This Ina Garten eggplant spread recipe is a cinch to make, with most of the work done by the oven and the food processor. Here’s how to do it in a few easy steps:

A collage of images showing how to make the recipe.
  1. Preheat oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a large baking sheet with parchment paper.
  2. Prepare the vegetables: Spread the eggplant, bell pepper, onion, and garlic onto the baking sheet. 
  3. Season the veggies: Toss with olive oil, salt, pepper, and cayenne, if using.
  4. Roast vegetables: Bake for 35-40 minutes, tossing halfway through. Allow to cool for 5 minutes.
  5. Make spread: In the bowl of a food processor with the steel blade, add the roasted vegetables, lemon juice, tahini, and 2 tablespoons parsley. Pulse 4-5 times until the mixture resembles a coarse puree. 
  6. Taste: Taste for seasoning and add more salt and lemon juice, if necessary. 
  7. Serve: Transfer to a serving bowl. Top with the remaining parsley. Serve immediately with pita bread, crackers, or veggies on the side.

Serving Suggestions

This recipe for roasted eggplant dip is so versatile and can be served in a number of creative ways. Think outside the box and try:

  • Appetizer / Snack: Serve it as a fun and pleasing appetizer or snack with fresh pita triangles, pita chips, crackers, or fresh vegetables.
  • Mezze Plate: Make it a part of a full-on mezze plate, alongside Muhammara and Mediterranean Hummus.
  • Sandwich Spread: Eggplant dip for bread will be your new favorite sandwich addition. Spread it on crusty No Knead Olive Bread or Artisan Bread.
  • Side Dish: Serve it as a delicious side dish to grilled seafood, like Grilled Shrimp Skewers or Grilled Mahi Mahi, grilled lamb, or classic Mediterranean Lemon Chicken.
  • Pizza / Pasta: Think of it more as an eggplant paste recipe to spread on pizza dough or stir into pasta.

How to Store

This Barefoot Contessa roasted eggplant dip recipe actually gets better the longer it sits, as the flavors have a chance to marry together. You can either:

  • Make Ahead: Make the eggplant spread up to 2 days in advance for the best flavor.
  • Storage: Store in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. You may have to give it a good stir just before serving. Serve chilled or at room temperature.

Expert Tips

While the recipe for this eggplant red pepper dip is an easy one, here are a few tips to help you achieve perfect results on your first try: 

  • Cut the vegetables into the same size pieces: This ensures the vegetables will be done at the same time.
  • Single layer: Be sure to spread the veggies on a single layer to ensure even baking. If they don’t fit in one baking sheet, you can spread them on two separate sheets.
  • Pay attention to the cooking time: We want the vegetables to be tender and slightly caramelized. Overcooking can lead to a bitter flavor.
  • Do not over-process: We want a chunky spread, not a puree. Pulse just a few times in the food processor.
  • Make a double batch: Use two sheet pans and double the recipe. It’s a wonderful dip to have on hand when hosting a party.

FAQs

Should eggplant be peeled before roasting?

Although eggplant skin can impart a bitter flavor, it is not necessary to peel eggplant before roasting.

How do you prepare eggplant before cooking?

Eggplant preparation depends on the dish you are making it for. In this roasted eggplant dip, all we have to do is cut it into 1-inch cubes and let the oven do the rest of the work for us.

More Delicious Dips and Spreads You Might Like:

If you are like us, a fan of serving dips and spreads while entertaining, you might also enjoy the recipes below:

If you try Ina Garten’s Roasted Eggplant Spread recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Barefoot Contessa's Eggplant spread in a bowl
Print

Ina Garten’s Roasted Eggplant Spread Recipe

Barefoot Contessa’s roasted eggplant spread is an easy appetizer that you can serve with pita bread, crackers, or raw vegetables.
Course Appetizer, Dip
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 222kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 medium-sized eggplants with skin on and cut into small cubes (~1 pound each)
  • 1 red bell pepper seeded and cut into smaller pieces
  • 1 red onion peeled and chopped into big chunks
  • 3 cloves garlic peeled – no need to mince
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • Pinch cayenne pepper optional
  • 5 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 2 tablespoons tahini
  • 3 tablespoons Italian parsley chopped
  • Pita bread for serving

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • Place the eggplant, bell pepper, onion, and garlic on the baking sheet.
  • Drizzle it with olive oil and sprinkle it with salt, pepper, and cayenne. Give it a gentle toss.
  • Roast vegetables for 35-40 minutes, making sure to give it a toss halfway through the baking. Let them cool for 5 minutes.
  • Place the roasted vegetables, lemon juice, tahini, and 2 tablespoons of parsley in the bowl of a food processor. Pulse 4-5 times to blend. Taste for seasoning and add if necessary.
  • Transfer to a bowl. Garnish with the rest of the Italian parsley. Serve immediately with pita wedges.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 2 cups of eggplant spread, which is ideal for serving 6 people as an appetizer. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make Ahead: Make the eggplant spread up to 2 days in advance for the best flavor.
  • Storage: Store in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. You may have to give it a good stir just before serving. Serve chilled or at room temperature.

Nutrition

Serving: 6servings | Calories: 222kcal | Carbohydrates: 21g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 884mg | Potassium: 687mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 1341IU | Vitamin C: 53mg | Calcium: 46mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Ina Gartenโ€™s Roasted Eggplant Spread appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-vegetable-dip-with-tahini/feed/ 16
Curried Brown Rice https://foolproofliving.com/curried-brown-rice/ https://foolproofliving.com/curried-brown-rice/#comments Mon, 14 Aug 2023 21:47:35 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=673 Curry brown rice is a super simple, versatile, and delicious side dish you can serve with any main dish. I love to make this on a Monday evening to enjoy with dinner, and then pack up the rest to have a hearty side for the week. If you are interested in cooking brown rice dishes, also check out our Brown Jasmine Rice Recipe. Ingredients The ingredients for this curried rice...

The post Curried Brown Rice appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Curry brown rice is a super simple, versatile, and delicious side dish you can serve with any main dish. I love to make this on a Monday evening to enjoy with dinner, and then pack up the rest to have a hearty side for the week. If you are interested in cooking brown rice dishes, also check out our Brown Jasmine Rice Recipe.

Curried brown rice garnished with sunflower seeds and raisins on a plate from the top view.

Ingredients

The ingredients for this curried rice with raisins are so simple and full of ingredients you probably already have hanging about in your pantry. We will need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Extra virgin olive oil
  • Onion: You can use both yellow and white onion in this recipe. Be sure to chop it finely.
  • Bell pepper: Use more savory green bell pepper or sweeter yellow or red bell pepper.
  • Curry powder: My favorite store-bought curry powder is Simply Organic Curry Powder (affiliate link), which is what I use for many Indian rice recipes.
  • Fresh garlic cloves
  • Brown Basmati rice: Brown basmati rice is a long grain aromatic rice easy to find in the rice or global section of major grocery stores. My favorite brand is Pride of India (affiliate link.) If brown basmati rice is unavailable, brown jasmine rice is a great substitute.
  • Vegetable stock: Use Homemade Vegetable Stock, low sodium store-bought vegetable broth, or opt for Chicken Stock if not concerned about keeping it vegetarian.
  • Kosher salt
  • Raisins: Raisins provide a nice pop of sweetness, but the trick is to soak them beforehand (more on this below). If you can get your hands on sultanas or dried currants, either one would be a great substitute.
  • Sunflower seeds: Be sure to purchase unsalted sunflower seeds.
  • Citrus juice: This recipe can use fresh lemon juice or lime juice interchangeably.
  • Fresh herbs: Go for fresh parsley, fresh cilantro, or a mix of both to suit your taste.

Optional Add-Ins / Variations

  • Jalapenos: One small seeded and diced jalapeno can be added along with the bell pepper to add a nice spicy bite.
  • Homemade curry powder: If you don’t have curry powder on hand, make your own by mixing together 2 Tablespoons each ground coriander and ground cumin, 1.5 Tbsp ground turmeric, 2 teaspoons ginger, 1 tsp ground cinnamon, and ½ teaspoon each ground black pepper, ground cardamom, ground nutmeg, and cayenne pepper. Use 1 teaspoon for this recipe and store the rest in your spice cabinet.
  • Extra spices: Up the curry flavor with the addition of 1 teaspoon of cumin seeds.
  • Coconut milk: If you want to turn this dish into a coconut curried brown rice, replace 1 ¾ cups of the vegetable stock with one (13.5 ounces) can of coconut milk, and use 1 ¼ cups of vegetable stock to total 3 cups of liquid.
  • Craisins: Swap out the raisins for dried cranberries instead.
  • Nuts: Toasted slivered almonds or cashews are a great substitute for sunflower seeds.
  • Green peas: Add 1/2 cup frozen green peas while the rice is resting for some color and extra protein.

How to Make Curried Brown Rice?

If you have ever wondered how to spice up brown rice, this easy curry rice recipe will get you there. Here’s how to make it in a few easy steps:

A collage of images showing how to make curry rice.
  1. Rinse rice: Place brown basmati rice in a colander and thoroughly rinse under cold water.
  2. Saute aromatics and curry powder: Heat the olive oil over medium-high heat in a medium saucepan for about 1 minute. Add onion, pepper, and curry powder and saute, stirring frequently, for 4-5 minutes or until vegetables have softened. Add garlic and saute for 1 minute.
  3. Toast rice: Pour in the rinsed basmati rice and fry rice gently, stirring constantly, for 7-8 minutes.
  4. Add the stock: Pour in the vegetable stock, cover, and bring to a boil. Once the rice has come to a boil, reduce the heat to low. 
A collage of images showing how to make this recipe.
  1. Cook rice: Simmer for 45-55 minutes or until all the liquid has been absorbed. Turn off the heat and allow it to rest, with the lid on, for 10-15 minutes.
  2. Soak raisins: While the rice is cooking, place the raisins in a heat-proof small bowl and cover with hot boiling water. The raisins will plump up as the rice is cooking.
  3. Add mix-ins: After the rice has rested, fluff it with a fork. Drain the raisins and fold them in, along with the sunflower seeds.
  4. Finish and serve: Drizzle with lemon or lime juice. Taste for seasoning and add more if desired. Finish with fresh parsley or cilantro and serve.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Reheat Leftovers?

Brown rice with curry powder is a wonderful make-ahead side dish and one that I make regularly in my kitchen. To meal prep and store for later, simply:

  • Make Ahead: Prep on a Sunday or Monday evening to enjoy dinner throughout the week. Simply place it in meal prep containers with your choice of cooked meat and/or vegetables in individual portions.
  • Store: Place leftover rice in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. We do not recommend freezing.
  • Reheat: Place the rice on a microwave-safe plate, add a splash of water or broth, place a damp paper towel on top, and reheat in the microwave in 30-second increments until warmed through.

Serving Suggestions

Brown rice curry is a delicious and hearty side dish that can be paired and enjoyed with a number of different meals. You could try serving it with:

Brown rice curry in a Dutch oven from the top view.

Expert Tips

  • Rinse rice: Rinse the rice in a fine mesh strainer under cold running water for about 1-2 minutes or until the water runs clear. This removes excess starch and ensures the rice does not become too sticky.
  • No need to soak: While it is customary to soak brown basmati rice for 30 minutes prior to cooking, we found the rice texture to be just as tender and pleasing without soaking beforehand.
  • Fry in oil: Toasting or ‘frying’ the rice in olive oil and curry spices helps to prevent the rice grains from clumping or sticking. It also evenly distributes the flavors onto the rice grains, making each bite as delicious as the next.
  • Use the right ratio of liquid to rice: We found the best ratio of liquid to brown basmati rice to be 2:1. If there appears to be excess liquid in the pot, add 5-minute increments to the cooking time until all the stock is absorbed. Remove from the heat when done.
  • Increase curry spices: You can adjust the curry to your desired taste. Adding more may also change the color of the rice.
  • Do not stir: As soon as you add the vegetable stock to the pot, refrain from stirring, as this can cause the rice grains to break, resulting in a stickier product.
  • Allow the rice to rest: The key to fluffy rice is to allow the rice to rest once it is done cooking. Leave the lid on and steam the rice for 10-15 minutes to allow the moisture to distribute evenly.
  • Taste for seasoning: Be sure to give it a taste and add more salt if needed.

FAQs

Can you add butter to brown rice?

Yes, butter can replace olive oil in just about all brown rice recipes. Heat and melt butter in the pan just as you would the olive oil.

What can I add to brown rice for taste?

A few aromatics, like onions, peppers, and garlic, along with warming spices, in this case, curry powder, add flavor, spice, and plenty of taste to brown rice.

Should I soak my brown rice before cooking?

Although it is usually recommended to soak brown rice before cooking, we simply rinsed the rice in a fine mesh strainer under cool running water for 1-2 minutes, and the rice came out perfectly.

Other Whole Grain Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this Curried Brown Rice recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Freshly cooked Curried brown rice recipe on a plate.
Print

Curried Brown Rice Recipe

This Curried Brown Rice is an easy-to-make side dish that can be served along with any of your favorite meat, poultry, or vegetarian dishes. Packed with sweet, salty, and crunchy flavors, this brown rice recipe is sure to be a crowd-pleaser.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Indian
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 55 minutes
Resting time 10 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 20 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 335kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 medium onion chopped
  • 1 medium yellow red or green bell pepper, seeded and chopped
  • 1 teaspoon curry powder
  • 2 cloves garlic finely minced
  • 1 ½ cups Brown Basmati Rice thoroughly rinsed
  • 3 cups vegetable stock or water
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt plus more to taste
  • ½ cup raisins
  • ½ cup raw sunflower seeds unsalted
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice or lime juce, add more to taste
  • 1 tablespoon fresh parsley or cilantro, chopped

Instructions

  • In a medium size saucepan or Dutch oven, heat the olive oil over medium-high heat.
  • Add onion, pepper, and curry powder and saute, stirring frequently, for 4-5 minutes or until softened.
  • Add the garlic and saute for one more minute.
  • Stir in the basmati rice and cook, stirring constantly, for 5-6 minutes.
  • Pour the vegetable stock in, put the lid on, and bring to a boil. As soon as it is boiled, turn the heat down to low, and let it simmer for 45-55 minutes* or until all the liquid has been absorbed. Remove from the heat and let it rest for 10-15 minutes.
  • Meanwhile, place the raisin in a ramekin and pour some hot boiling water over it. Let it plump up while the rice is cooking.
  • When ready to serve, fluff the rice with a fork. Drain the raisins and stir them in, along with the sunflower seeds.
  • Drizzle it with the lemon juice. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
  • Sprinkle it with fresh parsley and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 4 to 5 cups of brown rice. The nutritional information below is per serving.
  • Rinsing the rice is important as it helps remove any additional starch. The best method is to place the rice in a mesh strainer and rinse it under cold water, stirring with your fingers or spoon.
  • If there appears to be excess liquid in the pot, add 5-minute increments until all the stock is absorbed. Remove from the heat when done.
  • Any leftovers can be refrigerated in an airtight container for up to 3 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 335kcal | Carbohydrates: 53g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Sodium: 866mg | Potassium: 377mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 881IU | Vitamin C: 28mg | Calcium: 37mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Curried Brown Rice appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/curried-brown-rice/feed/ 9
Corn Stock https://foolproofliving.com/corn-stock/ https://foolproofliving.com/corn-stock/#respond Wed, 02 Aug 2023 13:46:06 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=69428 This easy recipe for corn broth is my favorite way to reuse leftover corn cobs during the fresh corn season. After serving up delectable corn dishes— like my creamy and bold Mexican Street Corn or 15-minute Air Fried Corn on the Cob —save your bare ears of corn. Then, in five effortless steps, you’ll have a sumptuous broth ready to make dozens of gourmet meals. Ingredients You’ll Need This delicious...

The post Corn Stock appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
This easy recipe for corn broth is my favorite way to reuse leftover corn cobs during the fresh corn season. After serving up delectable corn dishes— like my creamy and bold Mexican Street Corn or 15-minute Air Fried Corn on the Cob —save your bare ears of corn. Then, in five effortless steps, you’ll have a sumptuous broth ready to make dozens of gourmet meals.

Corn cobs, celery, parsley, and whole black peppercorns in a pot.

Ingredients You’ll Need

This delicious corn cob stock recipe uses only six simple ingredients to produce an all-purpose stock perfect for countless kinds of dishes.

Ingredients for making corn broth from the top view with text on each ingredient.
  • Corn cobs: The best way to get deliciously sweet, nutritious, and robust corn stock is to use fresh corn on the cob with no blemishes. Needless to say, corn husks, silks, and kernels should be removed. If you can get your hands on it, I recommend buying Non-GMO corn.
  • Celery stalks
  • Yellow onion: I love using yellow onion in this recipe because of its mild, balanced taste. However, you may also use white onions if you’d like your stock to have a slightly more potent, intense flavor.
  • Fresh garlic cloves
  • Fresh parsley leaves
  • Whole black peppercorns

Optional Add-Ins and Substitutions

Because of this recipe’s incredible versatility, the sky is the limit when making your unique corn broth. Feel free to adjust the below optional add-ins to match the recipe you’re preparing, and keep in mind that practically any veggie will work in your stock—as long as they don’t overpower the delicate sweetness of corn’s natural flavor.

  • Carrot: You only need one small carrot stalk to add sweet, earthy notes to your corn broth. Be careful not to add too many carrots, though, as this ingredient may take over your recipe’s more nuanced, delicate flavors.
  • Fresh herbs: To give your stock recipe a hint of bright, herbaceous flavor, I recommend adding a few sprigs of fresh thyme, rosemary, or a bay leaf.
  • Spices: A few extra spices are all this corn broth recipe needs to lend its sweet overtones a touch of bold, fresh taste. Cumin seeds will add rich, warm tones to your stock, while coriander seeds are perfect for giving your mix a spicy, slightly citrusy edge. You may add a few bay leaves, too, for a somewhat more herby flavor.
  • Salt: I didn’t add salt to my corn broth to ensure I had more control over my prepared recipes’ seasoning balance. However, you may add salt to your mixture according to personal preference.
  • Parmesan rind: This nutty, bold ingredient is a perfect addition to homemade corn stock, especially if you are using your stock to make creamy risotto or corn chowder.

How to Make Corn Stock?

Learning how to make corn broth is an easy way to give your favorite recipes tantalizingly sweet, fresh undertones. These hassle-free instructions will have your stock ready to use in just five steps.

A collage of images showing how to make corn cob stock.
  1. Add the ingredients: Take out a large pot or a large Dutch oven, and add the bare corn cobs, celery, onion, garlic, parsley, and peppercorns.
  2. Add the water: Pour water into the pot, and bring it to a boil over high heat. Once the pot of water comes to a boil, reduce the heat to a simmer. 
  3. Simmer: Let the mixture simmer for at least one hour or a maximum of two hours.
  4. Strain the stock: When cool enough to handle, place a fine-mesh strainer in a large bowl, and strain the corn stock into the bowl. Be sure to press down on the vegetables as they catch in the sieve to extract any trapped liquid.
  5. Cool: Pour the corn cob broth into individual jars and let them cool, for about 30 minutes. Discard solids.
  6. Store: Once cool, cover each jar with an airtight lid before labeling and dating them. Then, transfer the jars to the refrigerator or freezer for later use.

How to Store and Freeze Corn Cob Stock?

Homemade corn broth is one of the most storage-friendly recipes in my recipe book. Store your stock in airtight containers, such as Mason jars or weck jars, to ensure it remains as fresh and flavorful as possible.

  • To store: Let the corn stock cool for an hour or so and then divide it amongst airtight containers or jars and store it in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • To freeze: For even longer storage, you may freeze your corn stock by letting it cool in airtight jars (such as Weck jars (affiliate link), closing the containers, and placing it in the freezer for up to three months.

How to Use Corn Stock in Recipes?

Versatile and oh-so-easy to make, this corn stock recipe comes in handy for dozens of mouthwatering dishes. Below, you’ll find just a few of my go-to stock-based recipes.

  • Soups, stews, and chili bases: Infuse your soup recipes with next-level flavors by transforming them into corn cob soup. I love adding the sweet notes of corn stock to my creamy and piquant Mexican Corn Soup—my favorite alternative to corn chowder. Or, for a heartier meal, use corn broth as a base for protein-packed chili recipes, like my Quinoa Chili or White Chicken Chili.
  • For cooking whole grains: You’ll never have to worry about bland grains again when you prepare them in this corn broth recipe. If you’re a quinoa fanatic like I am, you’ll love using corn stock in place of water to make basic cooked quinoa or to liven it up with a Mexican Quinoa version. You can also make show-stopping sides out of simple ingredients with dishes like Bulgur Wheat, Wild Rice, and Corn Risotto.
  • Cornbread and corn cakes: What’s cornbread without golden-sweet corn flavor in each bite? This corn broth makes an excellent addition to classic side dishes like Cornbread Muffins and Corn Cakes.
  • Polenta and grits: Mild, creamy, and endlessly customizable, polenta and grits taste out of this world when prepared with corn stock. If you want a vegetarian recipe that will stun your dinner guests with a five-star taste, this Creamy Polenta combines roasted mushrooms, toasted walnuts, and creamy blue cheese for an out-of-this-world flavor.
  • Poaching liquid: Corn stock makes an incomparably flavorful poaching liquid when preparing meats such as fish (especially salmon!) or chicken.
  • Sip on it: Drinking pure corn stock is a delicious and easy way to pack nutrients into every sip.
Corn cob soup stock in a jar dated and labeled.

Expert Tips

There’s no reason to stress over this beginner-friendly stock recipe. With this pro guide, you’ll never have to worry about making irresistibly fresh corn stock again.

  • More corn, no problem: The recipe below only requires six empty corn cobs. However, if you have more ears of corn, feel free to add them to your mixture with enough water to cover them by an inch.
  • Let it simmer: After coming to a boil, let your corn cob soup stock simmer for at least an hour (and no longer than two hours!). This time allows the veggies to release their natural flavors into the liquid without boiling away any nutrients or diminishing their taste.
  • Strain: Because of all the vegetable juices released into corn stock, this recipe might produce a cloudy liquid. If you prefer a clear stock, layer a cheesecloth at the bottom of your fine-mesh strainer before draining your broth.
  • Label and date: The key to ensuring that your corn cob stock remains as bright and flavorful as possible is using it while it’s fresh. I recommend labeling and dating your stored broth so that you know when to use it. Remember, broth stored in the fridge should be used within five days, while frozen corn broth should be used within three months.

FAQs

What is corn stock?

Corn stock is a liquid made from slow-cooking bare corn cobs and other veggies in water. The resultant broth has a mildly sweet, complex flavor that you can use to cook many dishes, from grains to cornbread.

Can you use corn cobs in vegetable stock?

Most definitely! Corn cobs add delightfully sweet undertones to vegetable stock and help eliminate waste in the kitchen.

Is corn stock good for you?

Yes! Corn contains many nutritious vitamins and minerals, including a hearty helping of Vitamin C, Vitamin B, and potassium.

Other Corn Recipes You Might Also Like

Few recipes match a stock of corn’s subtle sweetness and complex flavor. If you’re craving more soft, buttery corn recipes, these dishes will fill your table for days.

If you try this Corn Stock recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Corn cobs and vegetables in a pot from the top view.
Print

Corn Stock Recipe

Making corn stock is a great way to use up leftover corn cobs and getting a second life out of them. Make a batch and use it to infuse the sweet flavors of corn to your soup, risotto, chowder, and polenta recipes.
Course Condiment
Cuisine American, American Vegan
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 5 minutes
Servings 10 cups
Calories 6kcal

Ingredients

  • 6 corn cobs husked and kernels removed
  • 2 celery stalks cut in quarters
  • 1 medium onion peeled and quartered
  • 2 cloves garlic peeled and crushed
  • 4 sprigs fresh parsley
  • ¼ teaspoon whole black peppercorns about 10 peppercorns
  • 10 cups water

Instructions

  • Place the corn cobs, celery, onion, garlic, parsley and peppercorns in a stock pot or large Dutch oven.
  • Pour the water into the pot. Bring it to a boil over high heat. As soon as it comes to a boil, reduce the heat to a simmer. Let it simmer for at least one hour or for up to 2 hours. Off the heat, let it cool for an hour or so.
  • Meanwhile, place a fine mesh strainer in a large bowl. When cool enough to handle, carefully strain corn stock and gently press down on the vegetables to extract any remaining liquid.
  • Pour into jars and let it cool (uncovered) on the kitchen counter for 30 minutes. Discard solids.
  • When cooled, cover tightly with the lid, label and date before placing the jars in the refrigerator or freezing them for later use.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes ~ 9 1/2 cups to 10 cups of corn stock. The nutritional information below is per cup.
  • Adding salt: We intentionally didn’t use salt in this recipe so that you can adjust it according to the recipe you plan to use it in. However, you can season it with salt if you prefer.
  • To store: Let the corn stock cool for an hour or so and then divide it amongst airtight containers or jars and store it in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • To freeze: For even longer storage, you may freeze your corn stock in airtight freezer-safe containers for up to 3 months.

Nutrition

Calories: 6kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 0.2g | Fat: 0.02g | Saturated Fat: 0.01g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.01g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.003g | Sodium: 13mg | Potassium: 24mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 0.5g | Vitamin A: 38IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 12mg | Iron: 0.1mg

The post Corn Stock appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/corn-stock/feed/ 0
Cherry Tomato Salsa https://foolproofliving.com/cherry-tomato-salsa/ https://foolproofliving.com/cherry-tomato-salsa/#respond Tue, 01 Aug 2023 21:11:43 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=69426 Whether you are growing them in your garden or getting them from your local farmer’s market, if you are blessed with an abundance of cherry tomatoes, be sure to also try our Tomato Mozzarella Salad. It is a colorful, crisp, and light dish that uses juicy cherry tomatoes to bring out its garden-fresh taste. Alternatively, you can whip up my Black Eyed Peas Salad for a delicious bean salad that...

The post Cherry Tomato Salsa appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Whether you are growing them in your garden or getting them from your local farmer’s market, if you are blessed with an abundance of cherry tomatoes, be sure to also try our Tomato Mozzarella Salad. It is a colorful, crisp, and light dish that uses juicy cherry tomatoes to bring out its garden-fresh taste. Alternatively, you can whip up my Black Eyed Peas Salad for a delicious bean salad that allows the cherry tomatoes to shine.

A bowl of cherry tomato salsa with chips on the side.

Ingredients

This cherry tomato salsa recipe only uses the most flavorful, simple ingredients to get its signature freshness. To make this tasty mix, you’ll need the following:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top level with text on each ingredient.
  • Cherry tomatoes: I prefer fresh cherry tomatoes or grape tomatoes in this recipe due to their bright, tart flavor. With very minimal difference between the two varieties, both types of tomatoes would work here. Additionally, you can make this simple recipe using any other tomato—heirloom, Roma, colorful cherry tomatoes, or beyond.
  • Onion: I use roughly-chopped white onions in my version, but you can also use red onion for a mild salsa. You can also use green onions (or a combination of both!) if you prefer a less intense flavor profile.
  • Fresh Garlic Cloves
  • Jalapeno: Jalapeno is a spicy, garden-fresh ingredient perfect for adding heat and color to this homemade salsa. If you prefer it to be less spicy, be sure to remove the seeds from your jalapeno prior to chopping.
  • Cilantro: Lemony and bright, chopped cilantro leaves is a classic ingredient in this recipe. However, if you’re not a fan of cilantro, you may either omit the ingredient or substitute it with other fresh herbs, such as parsley, oregano, or mint.
  • Lime juice: Fresh lime juice is best when making your salsa due to its brilliant, citrusy flavor. While it is not traditional, lemon juice can also be used. If you don’t have any limes (or lemons) on hand, you may also use bottled lime juice in this recipe.
  • Seasonings: Only salt and ground black pepper are necessary to give this fresh salsa recipe its rich taste. For a warmer, nuttier profile, you may also add a pinch of ground cumin.
  • Olive oil: You’ll need olive oil only if you are for making roasted cherry tomato salsa. 

How to Make Salsa with Cherry Tomatoes?

Making salsa with cherry tomatoes is a great way to add bright tomato flavor to your favorite recipes. These simple instructions will teach you how to make salsa in two ways: by hand and in the food processor.

Make it by Hand

Whether it’s your first recipe or your hundredth, preparing fresh cherry tomato salsa—also known as salsa fresca—is an easy way to add light, zesty flavor to your table. Plus, it only takes 10 minutes!

Person showing how to make homemade cherry tomato salsa in a collage of photos.
  1. Prepare the tomatoes: Place a colander in another bowl and set the two aside. Then, use a sharp knife to cut the cherry tomatoes into smaller pieces and add them to the colander. Let their juices drain while you prepare the remaining ingredients.
  2. Combine the ingredients: Transfer the cut tomatoes to a medium bowl once drained. Add the chopped onion, garlic, jalapeno, and cilantro.
  3. Add the lime: Drizzle the mixture with lime juice, and sprinkle it with salt and pepper.
  4. Mix and serve: Stir the ingredients until thoroughly combined. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. When ready, serve the salsa fresca with chips or on the side of your main dish.

In the Food Processor or Blender

When serving a crowd, the last thing you want to do is spend hours in the kitchen prepping your ingredients. With this simple method, you can make salsa from cherry tomatoes with little prep time.

Person showing how to make grape tomato salsa in a food processor.
  1. Blend the veggies: Add the onion, garlic, and jalapeno to the bowl of your food processor. Pulse the ingredients 6-7 times to give them a rough chop.
  2. Add the tomatoes: Place the cherry tomatoes in the food processor, along with the other ingredients, and process the mixture for 10-15 seconds, depending on your preferred texture.
  3. Drain: Place a colander over a bowl, and pour the mixture into the colander. Use the back of a spatula to remove as much excess liquid as possible.
  4. Add seasonings: Transfer the drained veggies into a medium-sized bowl. Add the lime juice, salt, and pepper, and stir until combined.

What if I Want to Roast Tomatoes?

Roasted cherry tomato salsa adds irresistibly smoky, rich undertones to traditional pico de gallo recipes. Below, I’ll show you how to make a delicious roasted salsa that comes together in no time.

  1. Heat the oven: Preheat the oven to 450 degrees F.
  2. Prep the tomatoes: Arrange the cherry tomatoes on a baking sheet, and drizzle them evenly with a tablespoon of olive oil.
  3. Bake the tomatoes: Roast the tomatoes in the preheated oven for 10-12 minutes, flipping them halfway through the cooking process. Cook until the tomatoes slightly burst. For a fire-roasted cherry tomatoes version, turn on the broiler for the last 2-3 minutes of the cooking time.
  4. Cool the tomatoes: Let the roasted tomatoes rest and cool for 15 minutes. Then, transfer them to a cutting board and chop them to your desired size.
  5. Drain the tomatoes: Place the roasted tomatoes in a colander, and set the colander in another bowl. Once the excess liquid drains away, transfer the tomatoes to a medium bowl.
  6. Add the remaining ingredients: Add the chopped onion, jalapeño, cilantro, lime juice, salt, and pepper to the chopped tomatoes. Stir until combined.
  7. Taste and serve: Taste the mixture for seasoning, adding more if preferred, then serve.
A bowl of salsa with cherry tomatoes from the top view.

How to Store the Leftovers?

It’s best to serve homemade salsa with cherry tomatoes the day of, as this condiment tends to get watery as it sits. Therefore, I recommend serving it as-is and draining any excess liquid before plating your sauce.

However, if you need to store your leftover salsa, place it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days. If necessary, add freshness to the mixture by draining it and adding more tomatoes and extra seasoning.

How to Serve?

Pico de gallo with cherry tomatoes is one of the most versatile condiments in my recipe book. Zesty and fresh, this salsa makes a delicious pair with everything from tacos to shrimp.

  • Chips: No one can resist a classic—especially one as simple as this! Serve up your salsa alongside your favorite tortilla chips for the ultimate crowd-ready appetizer, snack, or side dish.
  • Grilled or roasted meat and seafood: If you love grilled meats’ succulent, savory taste, these salsa-friendly recipes are for you! Serve your homemade salsa atop a tender fillet of Grilled Sockeye Salmon or marinated Shrimp Kabobs for a five-star meal perfect for the summer months. You can also add a helping of salsa with my Baked Chicken Kabobs if you’re looking for a tender, healthy meal you can make all year round.
  • Tacos: Want to make an authentic, party-ready Mexican menu with your grape tomato salsa? My Beef Brisket Tacos are packed with savory richness, while my Black Bean Quinoa Tacos recipe is a vegan-friendly and oh-so-delicious alternative.
  • Quinoa or burrito bowls: Few weeknight dinners are as hearty or flavor-packed as a traditional burrito bowl. My Mexican Quinoa (and Instant Pot Mexican Quinoa!) load your favorite fresh, Mexican ingredients into every serving. Or, for a meal better than Chipotle, whip up a Homemade Burrito Bowl that will satisfy your cravings and save money.
  • Eggs: My favorite way to serve a hearty, flavor-packed breakfast is with a side of this light homemade salsa recipe. I love adding this iconic salsa recipe to Mexican breakfast staples like Huevos Rancheros and Mexican Breakfast Casserole.
  • Soups and Chilis: Take your soup game to the next level by adding a dollop of this cherry tomato mixture. This salsa pairs beautifully with soups like Mexican Street Corn Soup and Chicken Tomatillo Soup. It also adds a robust tomato finish to hearty chili recipes like my Quinoa Chili and Easy Chicken Chili.
  • Nachos: No nacho recipe is complete without a helping of salsa. This classic salsa recipe makes a great topping for savory fan favorites like Chicken Nachos and Beef Nachos.

Expert Tips

This salsa recipe with cherry tomatoes is easy for any chef to prepare in a snap. These pro tips will ensure that your sauce comes out effortlessly delectable regardless of your experience level.

  • Don’t skip on draining: To keep your salsa from becoming too watery, it’s essential to let your chopped tomatoes rest and drain before adding them to your salsa mixture. Also, be sure to add the seasoning and lime (or lemon) juice only after you drain the mixture, which will result in a perfectly seasoned salsa.
  • Let it rest: While it is an optional step, if you do have the time, I highly recommend making your salsa a few hours in advance and letting it sit in the fridge. The resting time allows the flavors to marinate and develop into a restaurant-quality salsa recipe.
  • Adjust the texture: Salsas come in dozens of different textures, from chunky to pureed. Because the fineness of your chopping doesn’t affect the overall taste of your condiment, feel free to chop your ingredients according to your preference. I recommend a small chop or a food processor for a saucier texture. For a chunkier salsa, cut your ingredients into larger pieces.
  • Taste for seasoning: Any salsa—whether it’s a cherry tomato pico de gallo or an heirloom tomato salsa—needs salt to bring out the ingredients’ natural flavors. Don’t skimp on salt and pepper when seasoning your salsa to ensure your recipe is as flavorful, fresh, and complex as possible.

FAQs

Can you make salsa out of cherry tomatoes?

Yes! Cherry tomatoes have a bright, tart flavor that exquisitely balances the flavors of other salsa ingredients. Plus, their size makes them easy to chop to your desired thickness, resulting in a perfectly tailored mixture.

Do you need to peel cherry tomatoes for salsa?

When you use cherry tomatoes for salsa, there’s no need to peel your tomatoes before adding them to your blend. Cherry tomatoes have a thin skin, which won’t affect the overall texture of your condiment once mixed.

Can I freeze cherry tomato salsa?

Though you technically can freeze this salsa recipe, I don’t recommend it. Freezer salsa with cherry tomatoes may become mushy and watery, and it tends to lose its flavor the longer it remains in storage. However, if you freeze your salsa, place it in an airtight container before storage and thaw it in the refrigerator overnight or until it reaches your desired consistency. I also suggest draining out any excess liquid and tasting for seasoning before serving.

Can I use this recipe for cherry tomato salsa for canning

Unfortunately, this salsa recipe won’t work for canning. Canning requires that you boil your ingredients (and jars) before transferring them to mason jars, and this recipe only uses fresh and/or roasted ingredients.

Other Fresh Tomato Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this Cherry Tomato Salsa recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A bowl of salsa from cherry tomatoes with chips on the side.
Print

Cherry Tomato Salsa Recipe

This Homemade Cherry Tomato Salsa is the ultimate Mexican party food! This easy recipe is wonderful with chips on the side or to serve as a topping with nachos, tacos, soups, stews & more.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mexican
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 36kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 cups cherry tomatoes
  • ½ cup onion roughly chopped
  • 2 cloves garlic roughly chopped
  • 1 jalapeno seeded and roughly chopped
  • ½ cup cilantro chopped
  • 4 tablespoons lime juice
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground pepper

Instructions

Make it by Hand:

  • Place a colander in a bowl and set it aside. Cut up the tomatoes into smaller pieces and place them in the colander. Let the juices drain while you are working on the rest of the ingredients.
  • Drain tomatoes and then transfer them to a medium-sized bowl. Add in the chopped onion, garlic, jalapeno, and cilantro.
  • Drizzle it with lime juice and sprinkle with salt and pepper.
  • Stir to combine. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Serve it with chips on the side.

Food processor version:

  • Place onion, garlic, and jalapeno in a food processor. Pulse 6-7 times to give them a rough chop.
  • Add the cherry tomatoes and process for 10-15 seconds, depending on your preferred chunkiness.
  • Pour the mixture into a colander set over a bowl. Using the back of a spatula, remove as much liquid as you can.
  • Transfer to a medium bowl; add lime juice and seasoning. Stir to combine.

Notes

  • Yield: This recipe yields around 2 cups of salsa that should be good for 4 servings as an appetizer. If you need to serve a crowd you can multiply it as many times as you need. The nutritional values below is per serving.
  • Storage of leftovers: To store your leftover salsa, place it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days. When ready to serve, add freshness to the mixture by draining it and adding more tomatoes and extra seasoning.
  • Texture difference: We prefer the method made by hand, but if you are serving this salsa to a large crowd you can use the food processor method. However, please be aware that, while it tastes similar, the version made in the food processor has a more liquidy texture.
  • Roasted Cherry Tomato Salsa: If you prefer to make your salsa with roasted cherry tomatoes, place them on a baking sheet and drizzle them with a tablespoon of olive oil. Roast for 10-12 minutes in a 450-degree F. preheated oven, making sure to flip them halfway through. Let them drain in a colander and follow the rest of the recipe as written.

Nutrition

Calories: 36kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.03g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.03g | Sodium: 596mg | Potassium: 317mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 728IU | Vitamin C: 37mg | Calcium: 24mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Cherry Tomato Salsa appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/cherry-tomato-salsa/feed/ 0
Virgin Pina Colada https://foolproofliving.com/virgin-gorda-style-pina-colada/ https://foolproofliving.com/virgin-gorda-style-pina-colada/#comments Mon, 24 Jul 2023 00:57:04 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=6290 If you have ever wondered how to make a virgin pina colada or just need a non-alcoholic drink to sip on to feel like you are on a tropical island, you have come to the right place. This alcohol-free pina colada recipe has the same creamy, beachy vibes as this Pina Colada Smoothie but with a mocktail twist. And if you are looking for more refreshing non-alcoholic drinks, make sure...

The post Virgin Pina Colada appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
If you have ever wondered how to make a virgin pina colada or just need a non-alcoholic drink to sip on to feel like you are on a tropical island, you have come to the right place. This alcohol-free pina colada recipe has the same creamy, beachy vibes as this Pina Colada Smoothie but with a mocktail twist.

And if you are looking for more refreshing non-alcoholic drinks, make sure to check out our Strawberry Basil Limeade, Rosemary Mint Lemonade, Kale Pineapple Smoothie, and Ginger Iced Tea.

Person holding a virgin pina colada in her hand with a cherry on top.

Virgin Pina Colada Ingredients

A frozen virgin pina colada recipe only requires a handful of key ingredients. It’s a short list of  tropical flavors, including the following ingredients:

Ingredients for virgin colada from the top view.
  • Frozen Pineapple: Look for frozen pineapple chunks in the frozen fruit section of your local grocery store. If you cannot find frozen pineapple, flash freeze fresh pineapple. To do so, simply remove the outer skin and core, then cut the pineapple into bite-size pieces. Place on a parchment-lined baking sheet and freeze for 30 minutes – 1 hour. You can also add more ice if frozen pineapple is unavailable.
  • Coconut Milk: We used full-fat coconut milk to create a healthier (and mildly sweet) version. For a sweeter take, make a virgin pina colada with 3-ingredients by using 1 cup sweetened Coco Lopez Cream of Coconut (affiliate link) and omitting the coconut sugar – add more pineapple juice (or try coconut water) if you find the mixture to be a little too thick.
  • Pineapple Juice: We think that unsweetened pineapple juice, usually found in a can, gives this Piña Colada mocktail an even more tropical flavor. Add more juice after blending based on your desired consistency. Swap it out for mango juice or orange juice for a different flavor.
  • Ice Cubes: Ice adds a creamy, slushy, icy texture. You can also use about ½ cup crushed ice, which will blend more evenly.
  • Coconut Sugar: Coconut sugar keeps it naturally sweetened with no refined sugar. Add more after blending if you would like it on the sweeter side.
  • Garnish: Stick to the classic fresh pineapple wedge or pineapple slices and maraschino cherry. Or, give it a real warm beach vibe with fresh mint and a mini cocktail umbrella. Maple Whipped Cream or a dollop of Honey Ice Cream takes it that much more over the top.

Optional Add Ins / Variations

  • Rum: Make a pina colada cocktail by adding a shot of rum per drink (about 4-6 ounces total for this recipe). This could be white rum, coconut, or dark rum.
  • Extracts: If you would still like to enjoy a pina colada mocktail, but with rum flavor, add 1 – 2 tsp rum extract for extra flavor. A dash of vanilla extract never hurts, either.
  • Lime Juice: Add a squeeze of fresh lime juice to balance the sweetness of the pineapple and coconut flavor.

How to Make Pina Colada without Alcohol?

Non-alcoholic pina coladas are ready in less than 5 minutes after a quick whiz in the blender. It is so refreshing and creamy, you will never miss the alcohol. Here’s how I like to do it:

A collage of images showing how to make virgin pina colada.
  1. Add ingredients to blender: In this order, place the frozen pineapple chunks, unsweetened coconut milk, pineapple juice, coconut sugar, and ice into a blender.
  2. Blend: Start off on low power, then increase to high power and blend until smooth, about 30 seconds. Taste for sweetness and add more if desired.
  3. Serve: Pour into a chilled cocktail glass. Garnish with pineapple wedges and maraschino cherries.

How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers

While this homemade non-alcoholic pina colada is best served the moment it is made, there are a few steps you can take to get ahead. You can:

  • Make Ahead: Prep and measure out all the ingredients in advance. Keep stored in the freezer and fridge, respectively.
  • Storage: Leftover virgin pina colada mix can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for 1-2 days. The mixture will melt and split, so reblend with some ice before enjoying.
  • Popsicles: Give it a creative spin and pour any leftovers into popsicle molds. Freeze until set, and enjoy!

Expert Tips

  • Coconut milk vs coconut cream: This recipe is best made with canned coconut milk rather than coconut cream (which has a higher fat content). To make sure the can of coconut milk is well blended, vigorously shake before opening or blend in a high-speed blender.
  • Use a hurricane glass: Stick to the curved hurricane glasses for classic pina coladas right at home.
  • Chill cocktail glasses: Chilled cocktail glasses keep the drink super cold without diluting it with extra ice. Place the glasses in the fridge or freezer for at least 1 hour, or until ready to serve.
  • Prep the garnishes: Make sure to have pineapple wedges and maraschino cherries at the ready so that your virgin colada cocktail doesn’t have time to melt. And don’t forget the paper umbrella for authentic Caribbean vibes.
Two glasses of virgin colada garnished with pineapple wedges.

FAQs

What’s in a virgin pina colada?

This healthy and mildly sweet pina colada without alcohol is made with frozen pineapple, coconut milk, pineapple juice, ice, and coconut sugar.

Who invented the pina colada?

Deemed the official drink of Puerto Rico, the first accounts of a pina colada came from bartender Ramon “Monchito” Marrero at the Caribe Hilton in 1954 in San Juan, Puerto Rico.

Why is it called virgin pina colada?

Pina Colada is Spanish for ‘strained pineapple’. Virgin pina colada denotes an alcohol-free version, which means the whole family can enjoy this fun drink on a hot summer’s day.

Are virgin pina coladas healthy?

This virgin colada is quite healthy as it contains no refined sugar, no alcohol, and clean, fresh ingredients you can feel good about. As a bonus, it is also vegan and dairy-free.

Other Non-Alcoholic Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you enjoyed this non-alcoholic pina colada recipe, I am pretty sure you will also like a few of our other mocktails. Below are our favorite summer sips that are worth checking out:

If you try this Pina Colada recipe without alcohol, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Homemade virgin piña colada recipe in glasses.
Print

Virgin Pina Colada Recipe

Here’s a simple Virgin Pina Colada recipe that’s made with healthier ingredients without any refined sugars. With only four simple ingredients, you can make this non- alcoholic and refreshing drink in minutes. It is surely the best mocktail to enjoy on a hot summer day.
Course Non Alcoholic Drink
Cuisine Caribbean
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 serving
Calories 144kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 cups frozen pineapple chunks (8 ounces)
  • 1 can unsweetened coconut milk (13.5 ounces) – Shake well
  • ½ cup unsweetened pineapple juice
  • 1 cup ice
  • 2 tablespoons coconut sugar more if necessary

Garnishes

  • 4 wedges pineapple
  • 4 Maraschino cherries Optional

Instructions

  • Place the frozen pineapple chunks, unsweetened coconut milk, pineapple juice, coconut sugar, and ice into a blender.
  • Blend until smooth. Taste for sweetness and add more if necessary.
  • If preferred, pour into a glass and garnish with pineapple wedges and Maraschino cherries (if preferred.)

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields ~ 32 ounces of virgin colada. Each serving is about 8 ounces.
  • Chill your glasses: Place your glasses in the freezer at least 30 minutes before making this drink to ensure that they are super cold.
  • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for 1-2 days. The mixture will melt and split, so reblend with some ice before enjoying.
  • Popsicles: Give it a creative spin and pour any leftovers into popsicle molds. Freeze until set, and enjoy!
  • Rum: Turn this into a pina colada cocktail by adding a shot of rum per drink (about 4-6 ounces total for this recipe). This could be white rum, coconut, or dark rum.

Nutrition

Calories: 144kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 0.2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 331mg | Potassium: 204mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 21IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 48mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Virgin Pina Colada appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/virgin-gorda-style-pina-colada/feed/ 6
Mediterranean Seasoning https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-seasoning/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-seasoning/#respond Wed, 28 Jun 2023 15:00:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68504 There are countless reasons to prepare this Mediterranean spice blend. Not only are homemade spice mixes fast and flavorful, but they’re also an easy way to save money on your spice cabinet. With just a handful of fresh, natural ingredients, you can make dozens of spice combinations guaranteed to be free of fillers and preservatives. Plus, you can tailor your recipe perfectly to your preferences by adjusting the spice levels...

The post Mediterranean Seasoning appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
There are countless reasons to prepare this Mediterranean spice blend. Not only are homemade spice mixes fast and flavorful, but they’re also an easy way to save money on your spice cabinet. With just a handful of fresh, natural ingredients, you can make dozens of spice combinations guaranteed to be free of fillers and preservatives. Plus, you can tailor your recipe perfectly to your preferences by adjusting the spice levels or modifying how much salt you include.

So, go ahead and make a batch and bring the most-loved flavors of the Mediterranean region to your own kitchen with this unique combination of warming spices you probably already have in your spice cabinet.

Mediterranean seasoning with a spoon from the top view.

What is in Mediterranean seasoning?

Also referred to as a Mediterranean herb blend, this seasoning is a classic mixture of common Mediterranean spices and herbs—basic, natural ingredients you likely already have in your spice cabinet!

Mediterranean herbs and spices in small spoons with text on every ingredient.
  • Garlic powder: I use garlic powder here. However, you can use granulated garlic if you can’t get your hands on it. The granulated version is thicker compared to its powdered version. Therefore, if you prefer a finer Mediterranean spice mix, simply use a food processor or spice grinder to crush your granulated garlic into smaller fragments.
  • Onion powder
  • Dried basil
  • Dried oregano: I prefer Italian oregano in this spice blend recipe due to its minty, herbaceous undertones. Mexican oregano will add too much citrusy flavor, resulting in a different flavor profile. 
  • Dried dill weed
  • Dried parsley
  • Dried rosemary
  • Dried thyme
  • Ground black pepper
  • Dried Lemon peel: This is probably the only ingredient that may require a trip to the store, but it is worth it. Dried lemon peel (affiliate link) lends this simple spice mixture an irresistible hint of fresh, tart flavor—in addition to its signature bright color. However, you could also use orange peel. And if that doesn’t work, you can add fresh lemon zest right before you are ready to use this Mediterranean seasoning in your recipe.

Optional Additions:

  • Kosher salt: Add ½ teaspoon salt to your mixing bowl for extra savory spice. Or, add it separately to your recipe while cooking to ensure it doesn’t come out too salty.
  • Ground cumin: Cumin is the key to giving Mediterranean cuisine its hearty, earthy taste—especially when making meat dishes and kabobs. Depending on your recipe, you can add ground cumin directly into your spice or separately. If you are a spice nerd like me, you can also purchase cumin seeds and grind them in your own spice grinder for an even fresh flavor.
  • Ground cinnamon: Want to add a little warmth to your Mediterranean spices? Just ¼ teaspoon of ground cinnamon will add a woody richness to your blend, making it the perfect addition to meat recipes.
  • Dried mint: Mint is a wonderful addition to this recipe, as it naturally sharpens the unique flavors of the other herbs. However, remember that dried mint is a potent herb, and a little bit can go a long way in this spice blend. 

How to Make This Recipe?

You can have a sumptuous flavoring for all your favorite dishes in just five minutes and one step.

Person mixing Mediterranean spices in a jar from the top view.

Simply add your ingredients to a small mixing bowl, adjusting the salt and seasoning levels to your taste. Mix until thoroughly blended. Use it in your recipe right away, or transfer the Mediterranean herb seasoning to an airtight jar for later use.

Storage Instructions

Whether you’re using this Mediterranean spice blend recipe for weeknight meals or a special occasion, use these storage tips to ensure that your mix stays fresh and flavorful for months.

  • Airtight container: It’s essential that you store your Mediterranean herb mix in an airtight container to ensure the ingredients don’t lose their flavor over time. A jar with a tight-fitting lid is ideal.
  • Check for dryness: Ensure your storage container is fully dry before adding your spice mixture. Also, if you dried your own fresh herbs, ensure all ingredients are completely dry before storing them. Any moisture will make your blend difficult to use, dull its flavors, and may result in unwanted bacteria or mold.
  • Store in a dark place: To keep your spices’ flavors as robust and fresh as possible, store your mixture in a cool, dark place, such as a pantry or cupboard. Exposure to heat and sunlight can strip your herbs of their flavors and limit how long you can use them. 
  • Date and label: I recommend dating and labeling your Mediterranean spices and herbs before storage to keep track of their freshness. This way, you won’t have to fret over your calendar every time you prepare a new dish.
  • Use within six months: To ensure maximum flavor, I suggest using it within six months of preparation. Though the seasoning won’t go bad, it will likely lose its potency the longer it sits.

Uses of this Mediterranean Spice Mix

There are endless ways to incorporate it into your cooking. In minutes, you can add fresh, sunny flavors to fan-favorite recipes, from hearty chicken to light seafood.

  • Rub for chicken and turkey: This Mediterranean rub does wonders to enhance the succulent, tender flavors of chicken and turkey recipes. Use it to season chicken thighs in my Mediterranean Chicken with Lemon to bring out their zesty profile. Or, sprinkle a bit over my Baked Split Chicken Breast for a savory, herby addition perfect for soups, salads, and everyday meal prep. For an elegant recipe made for presentation, you could use this spice in my Baked Turkey Tenderloin or add it to my Middle Eastern Chicken Kabob recipe for a summer-ready dish any party crowd will love.
  • Beef and steak seasoning: Using Mediterranean spices for beef is an easy way to balance the hearty flavor of steaks, burgers, meatballs (hello, Turkish Kofte!), and roasts with delicately fresh flavors. 
  • Lamb: If you’re a fan of its grassy, robust taste, I recommend using your Mediterranean spices for lamb. Take your recipe to the next level by adding this seasoning mix to lamb shanks, grilled chops, or lamb burgers with feta.
  • Grilled seafood: It’s no secret that Mediterranean cuisine and fresh seafood go hand in hand. Rub fresh-caught fish with olive oil, lemon juice, sea salt, and Mediterranean seasoning for a delectable dish that comes together in minutes. Or, add a dash of this tasty rub on some of my favorite seafood recipes, like Grilled Mahi Mahi and Shrimp Kabobs
  • Marinades and sauces: You won’t be able to resist eating your favorite sauces by the spoonful when you include this simple recipe. Add a touch of authentic Mediterranean taste to flavorful kitchen staples, like Basil Tomato Sauce, Green Pasta Sauce, or Garlic Butter Sauce. Or, elevate your meat marinades using it in my basic Easy Shrimp Marinade or Greek Yogurt Chicken Marinade recipes.
  • Salad Dressings: Looking for an easy way to bring your weekday salads to life? Mix your Mediterranean seasoning with olive oil, minced garlic, and either lemon juice or vinegar, and you’ll have a light, healthy salad dressing you can use all week long. You can also embellish my tart Lemon Dressing or creamy Yogurt Dressing by adding a pinch of this easy mixture.
  • Soups and stews: There’s no reason why your favorite soups shouldn’t explode with flavor. Add this Mediterranean blend to my healthy Broccoli and Feta Soup, creamy Red Lentil Soup, or hearty beef stews (hello, Eggplant Beef Stew!) to enliven every spoonful with herby, savory flavors.   
  • Bread dipping oil: The only thing better than a piece of freshly baked bread is one that you serve alongside delicious dipping oil. This Olive Oil Bread Dip would be the perfect accompaniment to dozens of menu ideas—with the addition of this spice mix, of course!
  • Sautéed or roasted vegetables: While some may only think to use this Mediterranean rub for chicken, this fragrant spice mix is one of the easiest ways to add mouthwatering flavor to your favorite veggie dishes. I love including this simple spice in tasty sides, like Pan Roasted Eggplant, Roasted Whole Carrots, and Roasted Cauliflower
Mediterranean herb blend in a wooden spoon from the top view.

Expert Tips

Making your own savory blend of herbs and spices is a great way to add bright, fresh flavor to your menu. With these tips for making Mediterranean spice, you’ll never eat bland food again.

  • Use new herbs and spices: The trick to getting your spice mixture as herbaceous and flavorful as possible is using fresh ingredients. You can make your own dried herbs for extra freshness, but ensure they dry thoroughly before adding them to your mixture.
  • Make it your own: My favorite part about making my own spice blends is how easy they are to customize. Feel free to adjust the spices in this recipe to match your taste. Or, if you don’t like any of the ingredients, you can omit them entirely or use a bit more of something else. For example, if you’re not a fan of dill, you can leave it out and add more thyme. For a spicier mix, you can add red pepper (aka chili pepper flakes), or you could include Spanish paprika for a slightly smokier taste.
  • Give it a good shake: Shake your spices’ storage container before incorporating the blend into your cooking. Because some ingredients tend to shift to the bottom during storage, shaking your mixture will ensure an even distribution of flavors.
  • Start with a small amount: When adding this seasoning to your cooking, I recommend beginning with a small amount and adding more after tasting. Remember, you can always add more spice but you can’t take it out. 
  • Customize your salt levels: When you buy spice blends at the store, you never know how much salt is inside. That’s why I prefer to make my own seasoning mixtures. For this recipe, you can either add the salt directly into the blend or omit it and add salt to your recipe as needed.

FAQs

What is Mediterranean seasoning?

Mediterranean spices generally include a signature blend of ingredients, such as basil, oregano, rosemary, garlic, and onion powder. However, other versions—often resultant of regional differences in the Mediterranean area—include flavor-enhancing additions, such as parsley, thyme, and dill. These different combinations give this classic mixture such versatility in Mediterranean cooking.

Is Greek seasoning the same as the Mediterranean?

Because these two variations often include the same spices used in Mediterranean cooking, there is a significant flavor overlap between them. However, Greek seasonings tend to have earthier overtones due to the inclusion of marjoram. Still, because of their similar flavor profiles and regional variations, you can use this Mediterranean spice mix instead of Greek seasoning in your recipes.

What can I use in place of Mediterranean seasoning?

Several options exist if you need a replacement for these Mediterranean food spices. Herbs de Provence is a common seasoning blend from France with a slightly more fragrant, herbaceous flavor. You can also use Italian seasoning due to its earthy, somewhat sweet overtones. However, remember that these seasoning blends have slightly different flavor profiles and may affect the outcome of your recipe.

Is Mediterranean food spicy?

Generally speaking, Mediterranean dishes are not spicy. However, chefs may add spice to their recipes to increase heat levels and accommodate personal preference.

Other Homemade Seasoning You Might Also Like:

If you try this Mediterranean Seasoning recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Mediterranean spices for beef, chicken and lamb in small spoons from the top view.
Print

Mediterranean Seasoning Recipe

This Mediterranean spice mix is perfect for flavoring meats, vegetables, soups, stews, sauces, and more. Use this unique blend of spices and herbs in your recipes and bring the Mediterranean to your table.
Course Seasoning
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 1 serving
Calories 21kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 teaspoons onion powder
  • 1 tablespoon dried oregano
  • 1 tablespoon dried basil
  • ½ tablespoon dried dill weed
  • ½ tablespoon dried parsley
  • 1 tablespoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon dried rosemary
  • 1 teaspoon dried thyme
  • 1 teaspoon lemon peel
  • 1/2 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon coarsely ground black pepper

Optional

  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ¼ teaspoon ground cinnamon

Instructions

  • In a small bowl, mix all the ingredients and transfer the mixture to an airtight jar.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields 1/3 cup of spice blend. However, it can be multiplied as many times as you need.
  • Storage: B sure to store your mixture in a cool, dark place, such as a pantry or cupboard. As long as it is kept in an airtight container, it should be fresh for up to 6 months. It would technically still be good after then, but we find that you get the freshest flavors if you use it within the first 6 months.

Nutrition

Calories: 21kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 296mg | Potassium: 110mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 0.2g | Vitamin A: 72IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 69mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Mediterranean Seasoning appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-seasoning/feed/ 0
Breakfast Fruit Salad https://foolproofliving.com/breakfast-fruit-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/breakfast-fruit-salad/#comments Wed, 21 Jun 2023 15:29:16 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68420 This recipe is one of the most versatile of all the breakfast fruit ideas. Serve it by itself for a healthy, light breakfast, or serve it with my Fruit Yogurt Dip on the side for a tantalizingly creamy dish perfect for a beautiful brunch spread. You can even use your fruit mix to top off or incorporate it into your morning oatmeal (hello, Yogurt Overnight Oats)for a satisfying morning meal....

The post Breakfast Fruit Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
This recipe is one of the most versatile of all the breakfast fruit ideas. Serve it by itself for a healthy, light breakfast, or serve it with my Fruit Yogurt Dip on the side for a tantalizingly creamy dish perfect for a beautiful brunch spread. You can even use your fruit mix to top off or incorporate it into your morning oatmeal (hello, Yogurt Overnight Oats)for a satisfying morning meal.

Fruit in a large bowl from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need for Fruit Breakfast Salad

You only need two sets of simple ingredients for this breakfast fruit salad recipe: the fruits and the fruit salad dressing.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text written on each ingredient.

Breakfast fruits: Wondering what ingredients to include when you make fruit for breakfast? This classic mix of colorful produce will brighten your table with nutritious, brilliant flavors.

  • Pineapple: Pick out a ripe pineapple that is juicy and sweet.
  • Grapes: You can use both red and yellow grapes in this recipe. However, I would recommend getting the seedless variety.
  • Berries: Nearly any berry will make this simple morning dish full of ripe, juicy flavors. My favorite fresh berries include strawberries, blackberries, and blueberries.
  • Oranges
  • Kiwis
  • Banana: I adore the creamy, sweet taste of fresh bananas. However, you can omit this ingredient if you’re not a fan of the fruit or preparing this recipe beforehand.

Fruit salad dressing:

  • Orange juice and orange zest: Be sure to use fresh orange juice and orange zest when you make fruit dishes for breakfast. Fresh oranges will give your recipe a delectable balance of tartness and sweetness guaranteed to satisfy your cravings.
  • Lime juice and lime zest: Fresh lime juice is the secret ingredient to giving this dish its zesty, bright flavor—and keeping your fruit fresh for longer! If you don’t have any limes, you can substitute this ingredient for lemon juice and zest.
  • Vanilla extract
  • Ground cinnamon
  • Sweetener: Because this dish gets natural sweetness from fruits, adding an extra sweetener is optional. If you want to enhance the sweetness of your fresh fruit breakfast, add a bit of honey (or honey syrup), maple syrup, or agave. You could also use my Honey Lime Dressing as a citrus-sweet alternative to this classic fruit dressing.

Optional Add-Ins

  • Fresh mint: Amongst all fresh herbs, I think mint is the most flavorful addition to a fruit salad. Adding a few fresh leaves will enliven every bite of your breakfast fruit recipes while adding a garden-green color.
  • Shredded coconut flakes: I love using unsweetened coconut flakes as a healthy, no added sugar topping for this sweet spread. Not only do their sweet, nutty flavors complement this simple mix, but they also add an irresistibly crunchy texture.
  • Spices: To add a warm, gourmet spice to your fruit bowl recipe, you can substitute a sprinkle of cardamom, nutmeg, or poppy seeds in place of cinnamon.

Variations Based on Season and Dietary Restrictions

The best fruits for a fruit salad match the time of year. If you want to transform this easy dish into a seasonal treat or satisfy a dietary need, you’ll love this collection of tasty fruits to use.

  • Summer: Looking to fill your morning fruit bowl with a mixture of sunny, summer-ready produce? I recommend making your summer salad with peaches, plums, raspberries, nectarines, cantaloupe, honeydew, papayas, and mango.
  • Fall: Fall produce makes some of my favorite fruit breakfasts. To make an autumn fruit salad, use apples, figs, pears, and pomegranate seeds for a dish perfect for the holiday season.
  • Winter: To make a winter fruit salad perfect for special occasions, I recommend adding tart, warm-colored fruits like Mandarin oranges, blood oranges, tangerines, grapefruit, and bananas.
  • Spring: When jumping into the garden-fresh spring season, you’ll want these fruits in your breakfast spread. Apricots and strawberries are some of the most spring-forward fruits in the produce aisle.
  • Low-sugar fruit salad: If you are in need of a healthy fruit salad recipe that has low quantities of sugar, I recommend using low-sugar fruits (as recommended by Healthline), like raspberries, strawberries, blackberries, kiwis, and grapefruit.
  • Low-calorie fruit salad: Want to cut down on your morning calorie intake? No problem! Some of the lowest-calorie fresh fruits for breakfast include apples, berries, grapefruit, passion fruit, and stone fruits (e.g., peaches, nectarines, and apricots).

Hot to Make Fruit Salad for Breakfast?

You don’t need a home garden to make a healthy breakfast. While it takes a bit of time to chop all the fruit, once you have them ready, you can prepare a breakfast or brunch fruit salad in just four simple steps:

A collage of images showing how to make breakfast or brunch fruit salad recipe.
  1. Add the fruit: Take out a large bowl, and add the fresh strawberries, pineapple, grapes, blueberries, blackberries, cut oranges, and kiwis. Add the banana if you plan to serve this dish immediately. If you’re making this dish ahead, wait to add the banana just before serving.
  2. Make the dressing: In a small bowl or mason jar, mix the orange juice, orange zest, lime juice, lime zest, vanilla extract, and cinnamon. Either whisk or vigorously shake everything until combined thoroughly. If you are using honey, be sure also to whisk that into the dressing.
  3. Add the dressing: Drizzle the dressing over the fruit salad and gently toss to combine.
  4. Serve: If using, garnish the fruit salad with fresh mint leaves and serve.

How To Make Ahead, Meal Prep, and Store?

It doesn’t matter whether you want a make fruit salad ahead for a crowd or an easy recipe for everyday meal prep. This simple guide will show you how to keep your salad fresh for a few additional days.

  • Make ahead: This recipe is one of the greatest brunch fruit ideas because it’s so easy to make ahead of time. Simply cut up your fruits and place them in a large mixing bowl. Then, just before serving, add the banana and drizzle the fruit with your prepared dressing.
  • Meal prep: Looking for easy breakfast fruit cup ideas? Divide the prepared fruit mixture into individual airtight cups or mason jars (or Weck Jars (affiliate link) as I did in the photo below), and store them in the fridge until ready to eat. Then, add the bananas right before serving and keep the dressing on the side. As long as they are stored in airtight containers, they should be fresh for up to 3 days.
  • Storage: You can store this sugar-free fruit salad in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days. Remember that the salad will get watery after the second day but still taste delicious.
Breakfast fruit placed in glass jars from the top view.

What to Serve with Fruit Salad for Breakfast?

Want to serve fruit for a brunch buffet or make a delicious fruit bowl for breakfast? When you make this easy recipe, you’ll discover countless ways to transform seasonal produce into a filling meal. 

Expert Tips

It doesn’t matter whether you’re serving this fruit salad for lunch or want to make a kid-friendly fruit salad your children will love. The below tips will ensure your salad is as fresh and flavorful on your first try.

  • Choose fresh fruits: The key to any good fruit breakfast is selecting high-quality fruits. Ensure your produce isn’t bruised or moldy, and try to choose adequately ripe fruit. However, avoid overly ripe fruit, as these ingredients likely won’t hold their shape and become mushy in your salad mixture.
  • Visual interest: To make the best fruit salad for a special event, I recommend using fruits in a variety of colors—red, yellow, green, and beyond! This way, it will look appetizing and add a nice pop of color to your tablescape.
  • Proper cutting: I recommend cutting your fruit into equal bite-sized pieces to ensure your salad is easy to eat. If you’re serving this recipe as a breakfast fruit plate, you can slice your larger fruits, arrange them on a plate, fill the empty spaces with strawberries, and top the spread with blueberries. 
  • Wash and dry your fruit properly: It’s essential to ensure your fruit is clean and safe to eat before incorporating it into your homemade fruit salad. However, remember that some fruits bruise easily, and washing berries requires particular gentleness. Be sure to be equal parts thorough and light when washing your produce.
  • Do not skip on the lime juice or lime zest: Because of its preservational properties, a little lime or lemon juice is a great way to prevent your fruit from browning. Plus, this addition enhances the taste of the salad by balancing its sweet flavors with an irresistible tanginess.
  • Adding banana: Some people think banana has no place as seasonal fruit for summer. However, they add a creamy, mild taste to any fresh fruit salad, and they pack tons of Vitamin C and potassium to fuel you through your day. Still, you can easily omit it if you are not a fan.
  • Dress it right before serving: I recommend dressing the salad right before serving. If you drizzle on the dressing too far in advance, your salad may become overly juicy and soggy.
  • Make it kid-friendly: The below recipe as written, is a great fruit salad for kids due to its bright color, nutritious ingredients, and sweet taste. However, depending on your kids’ age, you may want to cut your fruit into smaller or bite-sized pieces.

FAQs

Is it okay to eat a fruit salad for breakfast?

Yes! Fruit salad makes one of the healthiest options for a quick morning meal due to its high vitamin and mineral content. Plus, depending on which fruits you add, you can kick-start your day with other nutrients, such as potassium, that may help maintain healthy blood pressure, reduce your risk of diabetes, and promote immunity. With that being said, it is important to consume fruit in moderation.

Is fruit salad a healthy snack?

Definitely! Doctors recommend that people eat at least 400 grams of fruit per day (or five servings of 80 grams), so eating fruit salad as a snack will help you reach your dietary goals while reducing your risk of disease, aiding weight loss, and enhancing your body’s store of essential nutrients. However, it is always best to consult your doctor and get the best advice for your dietary requirements.

Should I peel fruits when making fruit salads?

Peeling your fruit is a personal choice for this breakfast fruit bowl recipe. However, I recommend peeling off any skins that are hard to digest, such as orange, kiwi, and banana peels.

Can I use frozen fruit?

Yes, but ensure your fruits are fully thawed (room temperature is best) before adding them to your mixture.

Other Fruit Breakfast Recipes

No one can resist a sweet bowl of fruit for breakfast. If you want other ingenious ways to incorporate nutritious fruit into your morning, you’ll love these simple dishes.

  • Yogurt Parfait: If you want a recipe incorporating healthy breakfast fruit with creamy, light Greek yogurt, this dish is precisely what you need.
  • Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal: Pack all the fresh, crisp flavors of the orchard into your morning bowl with this 15-minute recipe.
  • Instant Pot Quinoa Breakfast Bowl: This vegan, gluten-free breakfast recipe comes together in less than 20 minutes and is the perfect make-ahead dish.
  • Peach Galette: Search no more for a healthy dessert. This sophisticated recipe makes for the perfect brunch dessert—especially when served with my fan favorite Honey Vanilla Ice Cream.
  • Can’t get enough? Check out all our fruity desserts.

If you try this Breakfast Fruit Salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Breakfast fruit salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

Breakfast Fruit Salad Recipe

Here is a breakfast fruit salad that will help you start the day in a healthy way. Made without the use of any additional sugars, this easy fruit salad can be served by itself or as a side dish served with baked goods, eggs, or oatmeal.
Course Breakfast, Brunch
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 131kcal

Ingredients

For The Fruit Salad

  • 2 cups pineapple peeled, cored, and cut into 1-inch pieces
  • 1 cup grapes rinsed and halved
  • 1 cup strawberries rinsed, hulled, and quartered
  • 1 cup blueberries rinsed
  • 1 cup blackberries rinsed
  • 1 orange peeled and cut into 1-inch pieces
  • 2 Kiwis peeled and cut into 1-inch pieces
  • 1 banana peeled and sliced – optional

For The Salad Dressing

  • ¼ cup orange juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 teaspoon orange zest
  • 2 teaspoons lime zest
  • 4 tablespoons lime juice from approximately 2 limes
  • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
  • teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • Handful of fresh mint leaves chopped – Optional

Instructions

  • Place the pineapple, grapes, strawberries, blueberries, blackberries, cut orange, and kiwi in a large bowl. If you are serving it right away, add the banana, but if you are making it ahead of time, we recommend adding the banana right before serving.
  • To make the fruit salad dressing, combine the orange juice, orange zest, lime juice, lime zest, vanilla extract, and cinnamon* in a small bowl or mason jar. Whisk or shake vigorously to incorporate.
  • Drizzle the fruit salad with the dressing and gently toss to combine.
  • If using, garnish with fresh mint leaves and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields approximately 8-9 cups of breakfast fruit salad. The nutritional values below are for 1 serving.
  • Sweetener*: As we were working on this recipe, we wanted it to be a healthy no-sugar-added breakfast option. However, if preferred, you can add a tablespoon (or more) of honey (or honey simple syrup) to the dressing. Honey-sweetened fruit salad is slightly sweeter but has a subtle (but welcome) honey flavor.
  • Make ahead: If you want to make it ahead, simply cut up the fruit (except the banana) and prepare the dressing. Store them in separate airtight containers. Then, just before serving, add the banana and drizzle the fruit with the prepared dressing.
  • Meal prep: Divide the prepared fruit mixture into individual airtight cups, mason, or weck jars, and store them in the fridge until ready to eat. Then, add the bananas right before serving and keep the dressing on the side. As long as they are stored in airtight containers, they should be fresh for up to 3 days.
  • Storage: The leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days. Remember that the salad will get watery after the second day but still taste delicious.
  • Making it for a crowd? Feel free to multiply the recipe as many times as you need.

Nutrition

Calories: 131kcal | Carbohydrates: 33g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 4mg | Potassium: 407mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 22g | Vitamin A: 232IU | Vitamin C: 93mg | Calcium: 46mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Breakfast Fruit Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/breakfast-fruit-salad/feed/ 2
Homemade Blackening Seasoning https://foolproofliving.com/blackening-seasoning/ https://foolproofliving.com/blackening-seasoning/#respond Sat, 10 Jun 2023 17:52:44 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68051 Better than the cult favorite Zatarain’s blackened seasoning recipe, this five-minute rub builds upon cajun spice for an incredible flavor—something I always keep handy in my spice cabinet. Not only does it add an irresistible kick to dozens of foods, but it’s also the key ingredient of my Blackened Cod and Blackened Mahi Mahi recipe. Use this savory blackening rub for all of your proteins, veggies, grains, and more, and...

The post Homemade Blackening Seasoning appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Better than the cult favorite Zatarain’s blackened seasoning recipe, this five-minute rub builds upon cajun spice for an incredible flavor—something I always keep handy in my spice cabinet. Not only does it add an irresistible kick to dozens of foods, but it’s also the key ingredient of my Blackened Cod and Blackened Mahi Mahi recipe. Use this savory blackening rub for all of your proteins, veggies, grains, and more, and you’ll never be at a loss for simple and flavorful weeknight meals again.

Blackened seasoning on a plate with a spoon in the middle.

What Does Blackening Mean, and How to Blacken Foods?

“Blackening” is a process in which you pat dry your main ingredient (primarily meat and fish), brush it with melted butter or olive oil, then dredge it through a combination of spices—usually a traditional blackened seasoning blend. Then, cook the meat in a scorching cast-iron skillet until it forms a charred, spice-infused exterior.

Popularized by Paul Prudhomme, this technique of cooking and the seasoning mix is usually used when cooking seafood and chicken dishes, but you can also use a blackening rub on other meats—such as steak and pork—veggies, soups, grains, and even pasta. 

What is Blackened Seasoning?

Blackened seasoning, also referred to as “Blackening Seasoning”, is a traditional Louisiana spice blend that creates a crisp, blackened exterior when added to meat, poultry, or seafood and cooked in a hot cast iron skillet. 

Popular in Cajun cooking, this iconic spice mixture often includes paprika, onion powder, garlic powder, cayenne pepper, thyme, oregano, black pepper, and salt. 

What is in Blackened Seasoning?

You only need a handful of pantry-ready ingredients to make this iconic Louisianian spice mix:

An image showing what spices are in blackened seasoning with text on each spice.
  • Paprika: Smoked paprika is ideal for giving this Cajun blackened seasoning its signature smoky flavor. However, regular paprika will also work.
  • Onion powder
  • Garlic powder
  • Dried oregano
  • Dried thyme
  • Ground black pepper
  • Kosher salt: Salt is the key ingredient to livening up the other spices’ unique flavors. However, if you’re watching your sodium intake or simply want to limit how much salt you use, you can easily make a salt-free blackened seasoning by omitting the salt. 
  • Cayenne pepper: Though cayenne pepper is optional, it’s a great addition if you want to give your rub a spicy kick. Feel free to heat level according to your taste buds.
  • Other optional additions: While these are the basic blackened spice mix ingredients, you can also add other spices for more complex flavor profiles. Some of my favorites include ground cumin, white pepper, and dried basil—though there are countless others to try.

How to Make It?

Making blackening seasoning is an easy way to infuse your kitchen with bold, aromatic flavors. With a total time of five minutes, making this recipe is as easy as it gets.

  1. Mix the spices: Place all the blackened seasoning ingredients in a small bowl. Stir them together until they blend evenly.
  2. Store: Transfer the mixture into an airtight container with a tight-fitting lid—such as a mason jar and store it in a cool, dry space. Your blackened seasoning will stay fresh for up to a year.

How to Use Blackened Seasoning?

You’ll add countless mouthwatering dishes to your recipe book when you make your own blackened seasoning. Prepare to cook like a master Lousianian chef with these tasty menu ideas.

Fish coated with blackened spice mix on a plate from the top view.
  • Meat: The traditional way to enjoy this blackening spice blend is by using it to create a flavorful crust on meats. I love dredging my favorite meats (i.e., shrimp and salmon) through this homemade seasoning, making the perfect blackening recipe for fish, chicken, seafood, and steak. I even use this seasoning as the flavor base of my Blackened Mahi Mahi recipe
  • Vegetables: This blackening spice recipe is essential when adding a savory, piquant flavor to grilled or roasted vegetables. Sprinkle it on veggies like corn, zucchini, potatoes, and eggplant for a simple veggie dish.
  • Pasta, rice, and grains: One of the best ways to use this versatile seasoning is in your favorite grain recipes. Add this secret ingredient to creamy pasta sauces, or sprinkle it in a bowl of plain rice to give it a kick of New Orleans flavor.
  • Nuts and popcorn: Transform your everyday snacks into five-star fare by adding a dash of this robust seasoning. I love sprinkling this DIY blackened seasoning over a bowl of nuts or popcorn, giving each bite an out-of-this-world taste.
  • Soups and stews: Just like Italian seasoning, this easy blackened seasoning recipe is just what you need to take your soup-making to the next level. With just a few simple ingredients, every tablespoon will burst with delicious, bold flavors.

Expert Tips

There’s no guesswork when making this easy blackening seasoning recipe. These pro tips will make your kitchen smell like a gourmet market any day of the week.

  • Fresh spices: The best blackened seasoning begins with fresh spices. Not only do quality spices have a more potent flavor, but they’ll also keep your seasoning fresher for longer. Be sure to check the expiration date of all your ingredients before adding them to your mixture, and use new ingredients whenever possible. 
  • Sealed storage: Tightly seal your blackened seasoning in an airtight container to keep it fresh during storage. I also recommend placing your sealed seasoning in a cool, dark place to keep the flavors from drying out.
  • Mix well: To give every teaspoon of this blackening spice mix a well-balanced taste, evenly blend the spices. Each spoonful should have an equal amount of every ingredient.
  • Make it your own: The best part about the ingredients in blackened seasoning is how easy they are to adjust. Feel free to experiment with each spice’s proportions to satisfy your own preferences. For example, you could give your rub more heat by increasing the amount of cayenne pepper. Or, add more paprika for a smokier, deeper taste.
  • Adjust salt: If you’d prefer a low-sodium blackening seasoning, add less salt to your mixture or omit it altogether.
  • Safety: Proper air ventilation is a must when you cook with blackened seasoning. The high heat of the cooking process may cause your spices to smoke, resulting in coughing or irritation if inhaled directly. To avoid this from happening, I recommend turning on your kitchen’s overhead fan and, if possible, opening nearby windows.

FAQs

Still have questions about this homemade blackened seasoning? Don’t worry! This simple guide covers everything from cajun seasoning vs. blackened seasoning to how to adjust spice levels.

Is blackening seasoning spicy?

It can be! This spice rub’s heat comes primarily from its cayenne pepper, so you can adjust how much you use to reach your desired spice level.

What does blackened seasoning taste like?

Blackened rub tastes very similar to cajun and creole seasonings, with a spicy, smoky, and savory flavor.

What’s the difference between blackening seasoning, cajun seasoning, and creole spice?

Though similar, slight variations exist between blackened, cajun, and creole seasoning. Cajun seasoning tends to be spicier, with a higher proportion of cayenne pepper, and people often add it to traditional Cajun cuisine dishes, such as gumbo and jambalaya. Meanwhile, creole spice uses more herbs—like celery seed and dried basil—to make milder, more refined creole dishes.

What is a good blackened seasoning substitute?

If you need a substitute for blackened seasoning, don’t worry! There are dozens of similar recipes to try. Cajun and creole seasonings use a similar base, producing comparable flavor profiles. Old Bay seasoning also has a similar taste but tends to be saltier. If you don’t have any pre-made spice mixes, you could make a stripped-down version of this recipe with a chili, onion, and garlic powder blend. You could also use homemade taco seasoning—usually a chili powder and cumin mix—for an earthier, more citrusy version. If you don’t mind a sweeter, tangier alternative, you could also use a Canadian classic made with brown sugar and dry mustard: Traeger Blackened Saskatchewan Rub.

If you try this Blackening Seasoning recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Blackened chicken seasoning recipe on a plate with a spoon.
Print

Blackened Seasoning Recipe

Learn how to make your own blackened seasoning and use it to blacken fish, chicken, steak, and vegetables. This unique seasoning mix is an inexpensive and easy way to add spicy, smokey, and earthy flavors to all your favorite dishes.
Course Condiment
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 13kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 teaspoons smoked paprika
  • 1 ½ teaspoon onion powder
  • 1 ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
  • 1 teaspoon dried thyme
  • 1 teaspoon ground black pepper
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt

Optional:

  • ½ teaspoon cayenne pepper

Instructions

  • Mix all the ingredients in a small bowl and stir to ensure that they are evenly blended.
  • Store in a jar with a tight-fitting lid (such as a mason or a small glass jar) for up to a year.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes ¼ cup of blackened seasoning. It can be multiplied as needed.
  • Make it your own: Feel free to adjust the amount used according to your taste buds. This also applies to the amount of salt used. If you prefer to salt your food separately, we recommend omitting salt.
  • Safety: Proper air ventilation is a must when you cook with blackened seasoning. The high heat of the cooking process may cause your seasoning mix to smoke, resulting in coughing or irritation if inhaled directly. To avoid discomfort, we recommend turning on your kitchen’s overhead fan and, if possible, opening nearby windows.

Nutrition

Calories: 13kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.03g | Sodium: 293mg | Potassium: 64mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.2g | Vitamin A: 617IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 22mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Homemade Blackening Seasoning appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/blackening-seasoning/feed/ 0
Mango Pineapple Salsa https://foolproofliving.com/mango-pineapple-salsa/ https://foolproofliving.com/mango-pineapple-salsa/#comments Sat, 10 Jun 2023 17:49:18 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68053 Preparing mango salsa with pineapple is one of my favorite ways to make a fruity, fresh, and zesty condiment that pairs with dozens of dishes. Like my Peach Salsa and Cherry Tomato Salsa, this recipe is delicious as an appetizer, a topping for fish-based mains, or even a side for hearty meats. This dish will be your new summer staple, no matter how you serve it. Ingredients This recipe for...

The post Mango Pineapple Salsa appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Preparing mango salsa with pineapple is one of my favorite ways to make a fruity, fresh, and zesty condiment that pairs with dozens of dishes. Like my Peach Salsa and Cherry Tomato Salsa, this recipe is delicious as an appetizer, a topping for fish-based mains, or even a side for hearty meats. This dish will be your new summer staple, no matter how you serve it.

Mango pineapple salsa in a bowl with chips on the side from the top view.

Ingredients

This recipe for mango pineapple salsa uses a handful of fresh, healthy ingredients to get its signature fruity taste:

Ingredients for the recipe on a white backdrop with text on each ingredient.
  • Pineapple: Pineapple is essential to give this recipe its sweet, tropical overtones. I recommend using fresh pineapple for the freshest, healthiest taste. You can even add grilled pineapple for extra smoky, caramelized flavors. Canned pineapple will work in a pinch if you don’t have fresh alternatives, but be aware of their added sugar.
  • Mango: Fresh, sweet mangos are the best pick for this fresh pineapple mango salsa. Frozen mango will also work, but thaw it completely before adding it to your recipe.
  • Red onion: Red onion gives this simple salsa a sharp, bold flavor kick. You can also use Mexican Pickled Onions for a tangier, zestier take.
  • Jalapeño pepper: A bit of pepper is the key to giving this mango pineapple jalapeno salsa its classic balance of sweet and spicy flavors. I recommend using seeded jalapeno peppers to give this recipe a little heat, but you can also remove the seeds if you like.
  • Fresh cilantro
  • Fresh Lime juice: I recommend using freshly squeezed lime juice for this easy salsa dish. However, you can also use lime juice from a bottle if you don’t have any fresh limes on hand.
  • Salt

Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

  • Green onions: Want to make this tangy salsa a little milder? Use a bit of finely chopped green onions instead of red onions. This easy ingredient substitution is both delicious and colorful.
  • Mint: If you’re not a fan of cilantro, fresh mint makes an excellent substitution, giving this recipe a bright, herby flavor.
  • Avocado: Adding a few chunks of ripe avocado is the best way to add a mild, creamy taste to this fruit salsa.
  • Cherry tomatoes: Transform this simple recipe into pineapple mango pico de gallo by adding a cup of finely chopped cherry tomatoes. This addition will add sharp juiciness to each bite—perfect for tacos!
  • Habanero: To increase the heat level of this recipe, add a little bit of finely chopped habanero peppers. These tiny veggies will give your salsa a bold kick, perfect for spice lovers.

How to Make Mango Pineapple Salsa

Even beginner chefs can prepare pineapple mango jalapeno salsa in a snap! With just four steps and a handful of ingredients, your table will overflow with sweet, zesty, and salty flavors.

A collage of images showing how to make mango salsa.
  1. Add the ingredients: Add the chopped pineapple, mango, red onion, jalapeno, cilantro, lime juice, and salt to a large mixing bowl.
  2. Mix: Stir until you thoroughly combine the ingredients.
  3. Let it rest: Cover the mixed salsa with plastic wrap and refrigerate for 30 minutes to two hours to combine the flavors.
  4. Serve: Serve the mango pineapple salsa as a condiment or with a bowl of tortilla chips.

How to Make and Ahead and Store?

This fresh fruit salsa is a great recipe for make-ahead meal plans during the summer months.

  • Make ahead: You can make this easy salsa recipe up to 24 hours in advance. Simply store it in an airtight container in the fridge until ready to serve.
  • Store: Transfer your leftover salsa to an airtight container and place it in the refrigerator for up to 2-3 days. When ready to serve, give it a good stir, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary, as fruit salsa tends to lose its saltiness during storage. This step will ensure your recipe’s flavors are still bold and evenly mixed.

What to Serve with Mango Pineapple Salsa?

It doesn’t matter whether you’re preparing a light Thai lunch or pork chops on the grill. With this delectable collection, you’ll never wonder what to serve with pineapple salsa again.

Mango pineapple salsa for fish over blackened mahi mahi on a plate.
  • Appetizer with chips: One of the easiest, tastiest ways to serve this simple salsa recipe is as an appetizer or a snack with your favorite tortilla chips. Served alongside my Super Easy Guacamole and Corn Salsa, this crowd-pleaser will complete your menu of game-day recipes.
  • On grilled or roasted fish: This mango pineapple salsa for fish is a refreshing, bright combination that will make you feel like you’re at a seaside restaurant. Serve this luscious condiment on top of Cajun Mahi Mahi (as pictured above), Grilled Mahi Mahi or Breaded Fish, and it’ll disappear in minutes.
  • Over chicken: No one can resist the tender, sweet combination of grilled chicken with pineapple salsa. Serve your salsa with grilled or roasted chicken using my succulent recipe for Chicken Breast for an elegant pairing perfect for special occasions and weeknight dinners.
  • Tacos: Take your taco game to the next level by topping your spread with this fruity, Instagram-ready condiment. I recommend serving your salsa with fish tacos—especially shrimp tacos!—to bring out your meat’s fresh, tropical flavors.
  • Rice bowls: Adding a few spoonfuls of this pineapple and mango salsa to your favorite rice bowls is an easy way to add a pop of color and sweetness to them. This simple condiment adds a rich, refreshing taste to dishes like a salmon rice bowl and fish taco rice bowl.
  • Pork chops: Few combinations are as sumptuous, sophisticated, or tasty as serving mango pineapple salsa with sweet-and-savory pork. You can even add a touch of classic outdoor smokiness to your plate by preparing grilled pork chops for the table.
  • Thai recipes: Nothing balances Thai recipes’ savory, spicy, and sweet flavors better than a fruity salsa. Top your favorite dishes, like my Thai Steak Noodle Salad, with this 20-minute condiment, and prepare yourself for a host of compliments to the chef.

Expert Tips

If you want a fresh salsa with vibrant color and the best flavor, these pro tips are a great way to cook like a master chef. Follow this simple guide for the perfect balance of presentation and taste.

  • Ripe fruit is the best: The best mango pineapple salsa begins with sweet, ripe ingredients. If you have difficulty telling which fruits are ripe, purchase pre-cut fruit at the grocery store. Not only will this save time, but it’ll also guarantee that your ingredients are maximally fresh.
  • Finely chopped: When making this salsa, it’s essential that you chop your ingredients into small, bite-sized pieces. Use a sharp knife and cutting board to ensure easy slicing, and avoid using a food processor, as it will likely result in a watery, off-colored mixture.
  • Taste for seasoning and add more: No one wants their salsa to come out bland. I recommend tasting your mixture for seasoning before serving and adding more if necessary. 
  • Let it rest: Let your fruit salsa chill for at least 30 minutes before serving. This extra resting time allows the ingredients to mix flavors and absorb the added seasoning, giving each bite an exquisite balance of fruity, savory taste.

FAQs

What can I substitute mango for in mango salsa?

If you don’t have ripe mangos, papaya or pineapple are easy substitutes that perfectly mimic mangos’ juicy, sweet taste. Plus, no one can say no to tropical salsa!

Can you freeze pineapple mango salsa?

I don’t recommend freezing this condiment, as the temperature change may result in a grainy, unpalatable texture.

Other Mango Recipes You Might Like

This mango pineapple salsa recipe explodes with sweet, tangy flavors. These simple recipes are just what you need for more refreshing ways to incorporate mango into your weekday menu.

If you try this Mango Pineapple Salsa recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Mango Pineapple Salsa placed in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

Pineapple Mango Salsa Recipe

This pineapple mango salsa recipe is a delicious fruit salsa that is packed with fresh flavors. Serve it as an appetizer with tortilla chips or as a condiment over blackened or grilled chicken, fish, or pork.
Course Condiment
Cuisine Mexican
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 20 minutes
Resting time (optional) 30 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 57kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup pineapple peeled, cored, and cut into ¼ inch pieces (5.3 ounces)
  • 1 cup mango peeled and cut into ¼-inch pieces (5.3 ounces)
  • ¼ cup red onion roughly chopped (1 ounce)
  • 1 jalapeno seeded and roughly chopped (1 ounce)
  • 3 tablespoons fresh cilantro roughly chopped
  • 4 tablespoons lime juice freshly squeezed; approximately 2 limes
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt

Optional add ins:

  • ¼ cup red bell pepper roughly chopped

Instructions

  • In a bowl, add pineapple, mango, red onion, jalapeño, cilantro, lime juice, and salt. If using, add in the red pepper too.
  • Stir to combine.
  • Cover with plastic wrap and refrigerate for 30 minutes* or up to 2 hours for the flavors to combine.
  • Serve as a condiment or with your favorite tortilla chips on the side.

Notes

  • Storage: You can store leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • Ripe and finely chopped: We recommend using fresh ripe fruit that is finely chopped for this fruit salsa.

Nutrition

Calories: 57kcal | Carbohydrates: 15g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.3g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 293mg | Potassium: 176mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 828IU | Vitamin C: 56mg | Calcium: 16mg | Iron: 0.3mg

The post Mango Pineapple Salsa appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mango-pineapple-salsa/feed/ 2
Roasted Red Onions https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-red-onions-with-walnut-salsa/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-red-onions-with-walnut-salsa/#comments Mon, 22 May 2023 19:52:59 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=5289 Here at Foolproof Living, we love roasting vegetables. If you feel the same way, be sure to also check out our Roasted Eggplant, Roasted Asparagus, and Roasted Butternut Squash recipes and add them into your weekly meal prep. Ingredients It’s incredible how delicious food can be with few ingredients and a simple cooking method. You only need a little oil and a pinch of salt and pepper to bring out...

The post Roasted Red Onions appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Here at Foolproof Living, we love roasting vegetables. If you feel the same way, be sure to also check out our Roasted Eggplant, Roasted Asparagus, and Roasted Butternut Squash recipes and add them into your weekly meal prep.

Roasted red onion slices in a bowl with a spoon on the side.

Ingredients

It’s incredible how delicious food can be with few ingredients and a simple cooking method. You only need a little oil and a pinch of salt and pepper to bring out the flavors while cooking red onions to get that gorgeous caramelization. Here’s what you’ll need:

Ingredients for baking red onions from the top view.
  • Red onions: When you’re at the grocery store, look for large onions that are free firm and free of bruises with their peppery skin still intact.
  • Extra virgin olive oil: I like to use extra virgin olive oil (or another oil with a high smoke point) to get that nice caramelization for your roasted onion slices. Another good option that can withstand high cooking temperatures is avocado oil. 
  • Seasonings: The beauty of this recipe is that you only need a tiny bit of seasoning to get a lot of flavor. Kosher salt and black pepper will do the job of bringing out the natural sweetness of red onions. 

Optional Add-Ins 

You may love the taste of your roasted red onions using only the simple ingredients above. However, there are many great ways to incorporate other ingredients to make this recipe work for whatever you’re cooking it with. Here are some options below:

  • Garlic Powder: Like garlic, onions are part of the allium family. You can season the onions with a dash or two of garlic powder for a savory note. 
  • Balsamic vinegar: Tossing them with a tablespoon of balsamic vinegar is an easy way to infuse them with an even deeper flavor, thereby taking this easy recipe to the next level. Balsamic roasted red onions are especially ideal for topping salads.
  • Spices: You can use a variety of spices for your baked red onion recipe, depending on what you’re making them with. Dried thyme, oregano, and rosemary are good choices for savory dishes. 
  • Brown Sugar: It is optional, but you can add a teaspoon of brown sugar (or coconut sugar) if you want sweeter onions. The sugar will enhance the caramelization and help release more of its juices. 
  • Fresh Herbs: I love finishing a dish with fresh herbs. The brightness of the herbs balances the deep roasted taste of the onions. Try fresh thyme, dill, parsley, or anything else you like.

How To Cook Red Onions in The Oven?

Cooking red onions is so quick, you’ll wonder how you’ve never tried it before. Your new favorite topping will be ready to serve on the dinner table in less than half an hour. Here’s the best way to make this tasty dish:

  1. Preheat the oven: To start, preheat the oven to 400 degrees. Line a rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper, and set aside.
Red onions cut and sliced on a cutting board.
  1. Cut the onion: You have two options when cutting the onion. One is to slice them into rings and keep them whole. The other option is to slice them into rings, cut them in half, and separate them. Remember to peel off the papery skin before slicing. I recommend cutting them into ¼-inch-thick slices for roasting. 
Red onion slices cut and seasoned according to the way they were cut.
  1. Season the onions based on how you cut them: 
    • Cut into rings: If you slice them into rings, place them evenly on your baking sheet. Use a brush to lightly coat them with extra virgin olive oil on each side, and sprinkle them with salt and pepper (optional).
    • Thinly sliced: Separate the red onion slices and place them in a medium-sized bowl. Drizzle with olive oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper. Gently toss them together. Spread them on your sheet pan in a single layer.
Baked red onions after they came out of the oven.
  1. Roast: Place your sliced red onions in the oven. For rings, flip them halfway through, or give them a good stir for thin slices. Cook for about 20 minutes until soft and turned lightly golden brown.
  2. Serve: Take them out of the oven, and let them cool for a few minutes before using them in your recipe.

Storing and Reheating Instructions

We love the fact that baked red onion is a condiment that stores well. Here’s how we store and reheat leftovers:

  • Storing: Let your oven-roasted sliced onions cool to room temperature. Keep them fresh in an airtight container and refrigerate for 3-4 days.
  • Reheating: You can enjoy this recipe either hot or cold, but if you’d prefer it hot, you can reheat it in three ways. 
    • Oven: Put the roasted onions in an oven-proof baking dish with a splash of water. Roast them in preheated 350 degrees F. oven until heated through for about 8-10 minutes.
    • Sautee: Add the red caramelized onions to a saucepan with oil and sautee until thoroughly warmed.
    • Microwave: Place onions in a microwave-safe container with a splash of water. Heat in 30-second increments, stirring each time, until heated through.

How to Use Roasted Red Onions in Your Daily Cooking?

There are countless ways you can use this condiment. The real question is, what don’t they go with? Here are a few uses for red onions:

  • Salads: Caramelized onions pair beautifully with salads, especially if you use cheese in your salads. This La Scala Salad recipe is a prime example. The sweet tang from the onions is absolutely heavenly with feta or goat cheese. You can use butter lettuce or spring mix like in my Goat Cheese and Beet Salad. Another option is to replace the raw red onions in this Friends Salad recipe with cooked red onions. 
  • Pizzas & Taco Topping: Roasting onion to add on top of pizza will please any crowd. They’re also a great topping option for taco recipes like my Black Bean, Quinoa Tacos, and Beef Brisket Tacos.
  • Burgers, Sandwiches, and Wraps: Red onion is a staple for burgers, sandwiches, and wraps, so why not swap them out with its roasted version? Sink your teeth into a Guacamole Bacon Burger or Greek Pita Wraps topped with roasted red onion slices!
  • Cooked Grains and Grain Bowls: Grain bowls are fun because the toppings are limitless. I love adding roasted onions to dishes like my Lemon Quinoa. Have fun with a variation like roasted balsamic onions for this Sweet Potato Quinoa Bowl. They provide the overall dish with a lovely texture and a slightly sweet bite.
  • Dips and salsas: These baked red onions can be the final colorful touch to dishes like Peach Salsa and Pineapple Mango Salsa. 
Oven roasted red onions on a plate with a fork on the side.

Expert Tips:

While the recipe for roasted red onions is pretty straightforward, there are a few things that we’d like to mention so that you can get the best results on your first try:

  • Slice them evenly: It is important that the onion slices are cut evenly (about ¼-inch thickness) to ensure even baking. You can cut them thicker but again, make sure they are even in size.
  • Coat with oil and season well: Take your time when coating the slices with olive oil and seasoning them with salt and pepper. This is an important step in making sure that they are perfectly caramelized and ready to use in recipes.
  • Do not overcrowd the pan: It is important to spread them on a single layer when baking. If you are making this recipe for a crowd (using more onions), we recommend using two baking sheets or cooking them in batches.
  • Flip/Rotate: Do not forget to stir (or flip) the onion slices as they are roasting. Doing so ensures even browning and prevents them from burning.
  • Customize: Feel free to make it your own and customize it to fit the dish you intend to incorporate them into. Enhance the flavors by using various spices and fresh herbs to complement your meal.
Can you roast red onions?

Yes, you can. Roasting red onions may make anyone who doesn’t like onions an onion lover. This is because the baking process softens the pungent flavor of raw onions, bringing out their natural sweetness.

How do you cut a red onion for roasting?

When roasting red onions, you can cut them in two ways:

1- Cut into rings: You can cut the onions into ¼ inch rings or disks. I suggest cutting them this way burgers, sandwiches, or as a side dish. 
2- Thinly sliced: You can also slice them thinly. To do so, cut the onion in half and then slice each half into ¼-inch-thick half-moon slices. Red onion slices are perfect for topping salads, grain bowls, and tacos.

Are roasted red onions healthy?

Cooked red onions have several impressive health benefits. These vegetables are known for their potent antioxidants and healing properties. According to Healthline, they’re loaded with vitamin C and potassium and promote digestive health. So yes, adding a little red onion to your lunch or dinner is an easy way to up the nutritional value of your meals.

How long should I roast onions at 400 f degrees?

Cooking times may vary based on the thickness of your onion slices. However, it takes about 20-25 minutes to cook ¼-inch thick red onion slices in the oven.

Can I use this method for red onion wedges?

Yes, you can. However, depending on the size of your onion, it could take longer to roast them. Use visual cues for doneness. They are done when they are softened, look caramelized, and turned lightly golden browned.

Other Roasted Vegetables You Might Like

If you try this Roasted Red Onions recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Roasted red onion slices are in a casserole dish from the top view.
Print

Roasted Red Onions Recipe

Roasted Red Onions are a great flavor booster for salads, tacos, sandwiches, and grains. This 3-ingredient vegan recipe also makes a tasty side dish.
Course Condiment, Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 1 cup
Calories 293kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 large red onion
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper optional

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper (or foil) and set it aside.
  • Peel the onions by removing the outer layer and inner papery skin. When cutting, you can either slice them in rings (and keep them whole) or split them into half-moon slices (and separate them.) Either way, for even baking, we recommend cutting them into ¼ inch slices.
  • Season them depending on how you cut them:
    – Cut into rings: Place the red onion rings onto the prepared sheet pan on a single layer. Brush them on both sides with extra virgin olive oil and sprinkle them with salt and pepper (if using.)
    – Sliced thinly: Gently break apart the slices and place them in a medium-sized bowl. Drizzle with olive oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper. Toss to combine. Spread on the prepared baking sheet on a single layer.
  • Roast, flipping (if you are cooking them as rings) or stirring (if you are baking them as thin slices) until softened and caramelized, for about 20 minutes*.
  • Remove from the oven, and let them cool slightly before using in your recipe.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 1 to ½ cups of roasted sliced red onions.
  • Baking time: During the recipe testing, we found out that the roasting time stayed the same for both cutting methods.
  • Storing: Let them cool to room temperature, place them in an airtight container and store them in the refrigerator for 3-4 days.
  • Reheating: You can enjoy this recipe either hot or cold, but if you prefer to serve them hot you can reheat them using one of the three methods below:
    • Oven: Put the leftovers in an oven-proof baking dish with a splash of water. Roast them in preheated 350 degrees F. oven until heated through for about 8-10 minutes.
    • Saute: Add the red caramelized onions to a saucepan with a little bit of oil (or water) and saute until thoroughly warmed.
    • Microwave: Place onions in a microwave-safe container with a splash of water. Heat in 30-second increments, stirring each time, until heated through.
  • Not a fan of red onions? You can use this method/recipe to roast yellow onions as well.

Nutrition

Calories: 293kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 20g | Sodium: 1168mg | Potassium: 168mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 5IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 29mg | Iron: 0.5mg

The post Roasted Red Onions appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-red-onions-with-walnut-salsa/feed/ 12
Honey Lime Dressing https://foolproofliving.com/honey-lime-dressing/ https://foolproofliving.com/honey-lime-dressing/#respond Thu, 11 May 2023 16:00:50 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=67142 I know it is convenient to buy salad dressing from the store, but once you learn to make your own, you will never want to spend money on dressings that are usually made with low-quality ingredients. Plus, most homemade dressings can also be used as a marinade for meat and vegetables, and this honey lime vinaigrette dressing is no exception. The good news is that our recipe archives have so...

The post Honey Lime Dressing appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
I know it is convenient to buy salad dressing from the store, but once you learn to make your own, you will never want to spend money on dressings that are usually made with low-quality ingredients. Plus, most homemade dressings can also be used as a marinade for meat and vegetables, and this honey lime vinaigrette dressing is no exception.

The good news is that our recipe archives have so many dressings to choose from. For a simple yet satisfying option, try our Lemon Olive Oil Dressing, or indulge in the rich flavors of Balsamic Lemon Vinaigrette for a more elevated taste experience. And if you like spicy food, our Chili Lime Dressing is a must-try!

Person holding a jar of honey lime vinaigrette in her hand with fresh lime around it.

Ingredients

All you need is 5 simple ingredients for this honey lime dressing. And guess what? You probably already have everything in your pantry. Below is what you’ll need:

Ingredients for lime dressing for salad from the top view.
  • Extra virgin olive oil: Olive oil is the base of this honey-lime vinaigrette. However, a neutral oil like avocado oil can also be used.
  • Fresh lime juice and lime zest: Every dressing needs an acid! For the best lime vinaigrette recipe, be sure to use fresh lime. Keep in mind that it is best to zest the lime before squeezing it.  
  • Honey: Honey is the perfect way to balance the tartness of the lime. However, for a vegan version, you can use maple syrup instead.
  • Kosher Salt: A pinch of salt will bring out these wonderful flavors.

Optional Add-Ins

While the basic honey lime dressing recipe has more neutral flavors ideal for sweet fruity salads, adding just a few basic ingredients can easily turn it into a dressing (or sauce) for savory salads, grain bowls, and more. Below are a few add-ins to give your sweet, savory, and spicy dishes a pop of flavor:

  • Garlic: One small fresh garlic clove would be a nice addition to any savory salad. However, in a pinch, garlic powder would also work.
  • Shallot: A small shallot or a quarter cup of thinly sliced red onion adds another layer of flavor.
  • Fresh herbs: Fresh cilantro is a great addition to any Mexican-style dressing; this one is no exception. Add a teaspoon of chopped fresh cilantro to turn this into a delectable honey lime cilantro dressing (just like I did in my Black Bean and Quinoa Salad) to use in any of your favorite Southwest-flavored salads. Or, use a few fresh mint leaves for a refreshing flavor twist when incorporating it into your favorite fruit salad.
  • Spices: Add a small amount of ground cumin and/or chili powder to enhance the depth of flavor and add warmth and complexity to any of your favorite Mexican salads with lime dressing.
  • Balsamic vinegar: Add a splash of balsamic vinegar for an additional layer of flavor! Thanks to balsamic vinegar’s rich, sweet, and tangy taste, balsamic lime dressing is a luxurious version of this basic lime juice salad dressing perfect for your next summer or winter fruit salad.
  • Dijon Mustard: Not only is it a natural emulsifier, but adding a small amount (½ to 1 teaspoon) of Dijon mustard can help balance the sweetness from honey and the acidity of the lime juice in the dressing.

How To Make Honey Lime Dressing?

You can make a jar of this simple honey lime dressing with only 5 minutes of hands-on time. Juice, zest, whisk, and pour. Here is how to make lime vinaigrette in just 4 simple steps:

Two photos side by side showing how to make the recipe.
  1. Combine: Lime zest, lime juice, honey, and salt in a small bowl and whisk together. If you decide to use garlic, shallot, or ground cumin, you can add it here. 
  2. Emulsify until creamy: Slowly pour in the extra virgin olive oil and constantly whisk until emulsified.
  3. Season: Give it a taste and adjust it to your liking.
  4. Pour: Drizzle it over your favorite fresh salad or store it in a mason jar and refrigerate for later.

How To Make Ahead and Store?

The best part of this honey lime vinaigrette recipe is that it keeps well in the fridge, so you can make it ahead and refrigerate it until you are ready to use it. 

To store, pour the lime honey dressing into a mason jar (or an airtight container) and keep it in the fridge for up to one week.

How To Use Lime Honey Dressing

Wake up your taste buds with the many ways to use this recipe. Try fruit salad with honey lime dressing or marinade chicken before grilling for some mouth-watering goodness. Here are a few ways to use it:

  • Fruit Salads: This dressing is my favorite way to bring together a brunch side dish like summer fruit salad with strawberries, blueberries, pineapple, red grapes, kiwi, or other tropical fruit you like. 
  • Savory Salads: This honey lime salad dressing is the perfect compliment whether your salad is the main course or the side. Pour it over leafy greens like spring mix, butter lettuce, arugula, or kale for a natural sweetness with a kick of citrus. Mix with nuts, cheese, and beans for a sweet and savory combination. It’s my first choice when making Mexican-inspired salads and the ultimate last step for my Southwest Chicken Salad and Corn and Black Bean Salad.
  • Grain Bowls: Another way to use this flavorful honey and lime juice recipe is for grain bowls. It perfectly soaks into couscous, bulgur, and quinoa mixed in with roasted veggies and proteins. You’ve got to try it on my Southwest Quinoa Bowl or even this Caribbean Jerk Chicken Bowl!
  • Marinades: This recipe has more intent than just honey lime dressing for salad. I also use it for marinating chicken, pork, beef, and seafood. The acid from the lime tenderizes the meat, and the honey will caramelize it when cooked. This dressing is one of my go-to recipes when I make Grilled Mahi Mahi and Grilled Shrimp Skewers. I like playing with the ingredients by adding paprika for the Mahi Mahi Marinade and parsley for the Shrimp Marinade.  
Person drizzling a watermelon salad with honey lime dressing from the top view.

Expert Tips 

Check out some of these tips to nail this delicious salad dressing recipe the first time. Here are a few expert tips for the best results:

  • Use fresh ingredients: As with any recipe that uses minimal ingredients, prioritizing using fresh, high-quality ingredients is crucial to achieving great results. You’ll create the best honey-lime dressing that stands out by squeezing fresh limes and using high-quality olive oil.
  • Seasoning: Salt is an important addition to bring out the citrusy and sweet flavors of lime and honey, so do not skip using it (even if you are using this honey lime sauce in a fruit salad.) Additionally, as it is with any recipe, it is best to give it a taste and adjust the amount of seasoning based on your taste buds and the recipe you are using it in.
  • Change it up according to your recipe: This basic Mexican lime dressing can easily be adapted to complement the flavors of the recipe you are using it in. So, take advantage of the use of optional add-ins and make it your own.
  • Emulsify the dressing: While it is convenient to combine all the ingredients in a mason jar and give it a shake, the secret to making an ultra-creamy honey lime dressing lies in the two-step process we are using here. Slowly pouring olive oil into the lime and honey mixture while constantly mixing it ensures perfect emulsification resulting in a smooth dressing. If you skip this step, the salad dressing will not be as creamy.
  • Use a blender or food processor: If you are making a large quantity of this recipe, you can use a blender or food processor.
  • Let it marinate: For maximum flavor, let it marinate for a minimum of 30 minutes to a few hours. I like to let it sit overnight to allow everything to sink in. 
  • Shake well: Dressings separate with time, so if you decide to make it ahead of time, give it a solid shake before using. 

Other Salad Dressings You Might Like

It is no secret that a salad is as delicious as its dressing. If you agree, you will love our collection of salad dressing recipes below:

If you try this Honey Lime Dressing recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A batch of freshly made honey lime salad dressing in a jar from the top view.
Print

Honey Lime Dressing Recipe

This honey lime dressing recipe is a versatile savory vinaigrette you can make with just a few basic ingredients. Endlessly customizable with a number of optional add-ins, it can be used as a drizzle for fruit or savory salads or as a marinade for meats.
Course Salad Dressing
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 161kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 teaspoon lime zest
  • ¼ cup lime juice ~ 2 limes (freshly squeezed)
  • 2 tablespoons honey
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil

Optional Add-Ins:

  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • 1 small shallot or ¼ cup thinly sliced red onion
  • ¼ teaspoon ground cumin

Instructions

  • Whisk together lime zest, lime juice, honey, and salt in a small bowl. If using, add in the garlic, shallot, and ground cumin.
  • Slowly pour in the extra virgin olive oil while whisking constantly until emulsified.
  • Taste for seasoning and add in, if necessary.
  • Use it right away or store it in a mason jar in the refrigerator up to a week.

Notes

  • Yield: This recipe yields approximately 1/2 cup of honey lime dressing.
  • Storage: You can store the dressing in the fridge for up to 7 days.
  • Taste for seasoning: Be sure to give it a taste and add more if necessary before using it in your recipe. 
  • If you make it ahead, be sure to give it a good shake before using it.
  • While it is convenient to combine all the ingredients in a mason jar and give it a shake, the secret to making an ultra-creamy honey lime dressing lies in the two-step process we are using here. Slowly pouring olive oil into the lime and honey mixture while constantly mixing it ensures perfect emulsification resulting in a smooth dressing. So, for the most creamy dressing, do not skip this part.

Nutrition

Calories: 161kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 0.3g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Sodium: 293mg | Potassium: 50mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 10IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 8mg | Iron: 0.3mg

The post Honey Lime Dressing appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/honey-lime-dressing/feed/ 0
Air Fryer Eggplant https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-eggplant/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-eggplant/#comments Mon, 24 Apr 2023 19:05:39 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=66508 If you don’t have an air fryer, I have dozens of other eggplant recipes to satisfy your cravings. With my simple recipe for Roasted Eggplant Slices, you’ll have tender, savory veggies you’ll want to eat straight from the oven. Add a layer of panko breadcrumbs and mozzarella cheese, and you’ll have an irresistible appetizer of Crispy Oven-Baked Eggplant. Or, transform your tasty side into a rich, Healthy Baked Eggplant Parm...

The post Air Fryer Eggplant appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
If you don’t have an air fryer, I have dozens of other eggplant recipes to satisfy your cravings. With my simple recipe for Roasted Eggplant Slices, you’ll have tender, savory veggies you’ll want to eat straight from the oven. Add a layer of panko breadcrumbs and mozzarella cheese, and you’ll have an irresistible appetizer of Crispy Oven-Baked Eggplant. Or, transform your tasty side into a rich, Healthy Baked Eggplant Parm that will disappear in minutes.

Air fried eggplant cubes placed in a bowl with a spoon on the side.

Ingredients You’ll Need for Air-Frying Eggplant

You only need a handful of pantry-ready ingredients to make eggplant in the air fryer. Healthy, fresh, and natural, this air-fried eggplant recipe won’t require any extra trip to the grocery store.

Ingredients for the recipe are laid out on a marble backdrop.
  • Eggplant: I use globe eggplant in this crispy air fryer eggplant recipe, as it’s the most common type of eggplant found in grocery stores. However, many different types of eggplants would also work. Other types, such as Japanese eggplant, Japanese eggplant, and even Chinese eggplant, would all work in this recipe.
  • Kosher salt: Though salting eggplant is optional, this step helps remove excess liquid and gives this easy recipe its exquisitely crisp texture. It may also be helpful if you’re buying eggplant out of season. You can learn more about this process in my simple guide to sweating eggplant.
  • Oil: I recommend using high smoke point oils, like avocado oil or olive oil, when making eggplant in the air fryer.
  • Seasonings: You can use countless delicious seasoning mixes when you air-fry eggplant. However, I recommend a robust, savory mixture of Italian seasoning, garlic powder, and paprika. Don’t have Italian seasoning at home? Make your own spice blend by mixing together ¼ teaspoon of dried oregano, ¼ teaspoon of dried rosemary, ¼ teaspoon of dried thyme, and ¼ teaspoon of dried basil.
  • Optional toppings: If preferred, you can sprinkle them with fresh parsley (or any other fresh herbs you like) and a squeeze of fresh lemon juice right before serving. 

How to Cook Eggplant in Air Fryer?

Air frying eggplant is easier than you think. And the best part, you ask? No messy oil or waiting in front of the stove for it to cook.  With these easy instructions, your air fryer-fried eggplant will come out irresistibly tender in no time. Whether you like to air-fry sliced eggplant or cubed eggplant, simply follow the instructions below for my foolproof method:

Person showing how to cut eggplant into slices and cubes.
  1. Cut the eggplant: Cut your eggplant into either ½-inch air fryer eggplant slices or into 1-inch cubes to make cubed eggplant. If you are new to slicing eggplant, check out my handy guide to cutting eggplant.
Person showing how to season aubergine in a collage of images.
  1. Salt the slices of eggplant: If you want to salt the eggplant before cooking, line a sheet pan with a few sheets of paper towels, then layer the baking sheet with a single layer of your sliced eggplant. Sprinkle the veggies with ½ teaspoon of salt, covering all sides with equal seasoning. Let the salted eggplant rest for 15 minutes.
  2. Dry the eggplant: Use either paper towels or a clean kitchen towel to pat dry the surface of the eggplant. Try to remove any excess moisture.
Person showing how to prepare and season eggplant in a collage of images.
  1. Season the eggplant: For sliced eggplant, brush both sides of the slices with oil. Then, sprinkle the top of the eggplant with Italian seasoning, garlic powder, paprika, and salt, being sure to coat each side evenly. For cubed eggplant, place the vegetables in a large bowl, drizzle them with oil, and toss the mixture until thoroughly combined. Then, sprinkle the oiled veggies with Italian seasoning, garlic powder, paprika, and salt.
  2. Preheat the air fryer: Set the air fryer to 400 degrees F.
Person showing how to cook eggplant slices and eggplant cubes in the air fryer.
  1. Transfer the seasoned slices: Place the eggplant in a single even layer in the air fryer, being sure not to overlap or overcrowd the basket. If necessary, roast eggplant in the air fryer in two batches to ensure even cooking.
  2. Cook eggplant in the air fryer: Air fry the pieces for 12 minutes, flipping them halfway through. Check for doneness by inserting a paring knife in one cube/slice. Remove the eggplant if the knife easily enters and exits its flesh. However, if there is resistance on the blade, continue to air fry the pieces in one-minute increments until tender.
  3. Serve: Transfer the air-fried eggplant slices or air fry eggplant cubes to a plate and serve while warm.

How to Store, Reheat, and Freeze This Recipe?

Once you make this vegan and gluten-free recipe for eggplant in the air fryer, you’ll want it every night of the week. With these simple storage tips, you’ll have toasty, savory eggplant whenever the craving strikes.

  • Store: To store your air-fried eggplant cubes or slices, first let the veggies reach room temperature. Then, transfer the pieces to an airtight container and place them in the refrigerator for up to three days. To reheat, place your eggplant in the air fryer for two minutes (or until heated thoroughly) at 400 degrees F. or in the oven for 5-8 minutes at 300 degrees F. I recommend draining excess liquid before serving, as your veggie pieces will likely become watery during storage.
  • Freeze: After roasting the eggplant in the air fryer, place the room-temperature pieces in a freezer bag or airtight container. I recommend separating each layer with wax paper to prevent fusing during storage. Once you place the sealed container inside the freezer, your eggplant will stay fresh for up to 2 months.
  • Thaw: Thaw your air fryer roasted eggplant by placing it in the fridge overnight. Remove the wax paper between slices/cubes, and reheat them in the air fryer at 400 degrees F. for two minutes or in the oven at 300 degrees F. for 5-8 minutes.
Air fried eggplant slices on a plate from the top view.

How to Serve Air Fryer Roasted Eggplant?

You can serve this healthy eggplant recipe in the air fryer in dozens of mouthwatering ways. From a great snack to a final dish, these tasty ideas will fill your menu with maximum flavor.

  • Serve it as a vegetable side dish: Crispy eggplant slices make a delectable appetizer when served with a dip, such as your favorite marinara sauce, Basil Tomato Sauce, or creamy Tzatziki. These simple eggplant rounds are also a great way to complement a protein-packed main course. Serve them alongside Mediterranean dishes, like my Greek Yogurt Chicken and Mediterranean Lemon Chicken, or balance a hearty main, like my Classic Pot Roast, with light and healthy flavors.
  • Incorporate it into cooked grains: This delicious air fryer eggplant recipe is just the thing to add to your favorite quinoa salad or other cooked grains. Savory air-fried eggplant makes a great addition to Cooked Bulgur or even pasta recipes, like my Eggplant Pomodoro Pasta—especially when topped with rich parmesan cheese, ground black pepper, and fresh parsley.

Expert Tips

If you want to make air fryer roast eggplant that will have the whole family asking for seconds, these pro tips are just what you need. This guide has everything from slicing to seasoning and cooking pointers.

  • Select good eggplants: The first step in air frying eggplant is to choose the right produce. I recommend using eggplants that are firm to the touch and have smooth, glossy skin. Though eggplants have a bad rap for bitterness, these riper veggies tend to have fewer seeds, a sweeter taste, and a less bitter flavor.
  • Cut evenly: The key to this recipe is to cut your eggplants into evenly sized pieces (½-inch slices or 1-inch cubes). Similarly sized eggplants will cook more evenly, whether you slice them or cut them into cubes.
  • A word about salting: Sweating eggplant isn’t necessary for this recipe, especially if you are using eggplant during its peak season (May through September.) However, if you’re making this dish out of season, you may want to remove extra liquid or unwanted bitterness from your slices by salting your eggplant before putting it in the air fryer.
  • Don’t overcrowd the basket: When you layer your eggplant pieces into the air fryer basket, don’t overcrowd or layer them on top of one another. More space between slices will allow for better air circulation and limit the possibility of undercooked or unevenly cooked eggplant. Depending on the size of your air fryer, you may find that air frying your eggplant in batches helps avoid partially cooked or soggy eggplant.
  • Flip halfway through: The best thing about this vegan air fryer eggplant is its crisp-tender texture and golden brown exterior. Flipping your eggplant batches halfway through their air frying time will help give you these best results.
  • Watch closely: Many factors contribute to how long it will take to make eggplant cooked in the air fryer, including your specific air fryer, the thickness of your slices, and how densely you pack the basket. Therefore, I recommend watching your pieces after the 10-minute mark to see whether they need more or less time.

FAQs

Cooking eggplant is an easy recipe anyone can prepare (and post on Instagram!). With these helpful tips, this eggplant air fryer recipe will come out exquisitely crisp every time.

Can you air-fry eggplant?

Yes! Not only is air frying the quickest method of cooking eggplant, but it’s also effortless. Cut your eggplant into ½-inch slices or 1-inch cubes, and your eggplant will only need about 12 minutes in the air fryer at 400 degrees F.

What is the ideal cook time and temperature for cooking eggplant in an air fryer?

You’ll likely need 12 minutes in the air fryer set to 400 degrees F. to cook your eggplant pieces.

How long do you air fry eggplant?

The ideal eggplant air fryer time is about 12 minutes at 400 degrees F. However, this cooking time depends on your specific air fryer and eggplant thickness, so keep an eye on your pieces to ensure they don’t come out over- or undercooked.

Can I air-fry eggplant without oil?

Yes, you can air-fry eggplant without any added oil. However, these eggplant pieces often come out drier than those cooked with oil. You can combat this dryness by making no-oil Breaded Eggplant in the Air Fryer, which uses an egg and flour and breadcrumb mixture to give your eggplant a rich tenderness instead of oil.

Other Air Fryer Recipes You Might Also Like

If you can’t get enough tasty eggplant recipes like this, you’ll fall head over heels for these other effortless air fryer dishes. Feel free to check out the recipes below and never be at a loss for a delicious recipe to complete your menu again!

If you try this Air Fryer Eggplant with no breadcrumbs recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A bowl of air fried eggplant served by a person from the top view.
Print

Air Fryer Eggplant Recipe

If you are in need of a recipe for Air Fryer Eggplant with no breadcrumbs, you have come to the right place! Follow this straightforward recipe to create a nicely seasoned air-fried eggplant dish (sliced or cubed) that you can serve as a side or incorporate into salads, casseroles, stews, and more.
Course Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Resting Time 15 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 96kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 1 large globe eggplant ~1 pound
  • 3/4 teaspoon Kosher salt divided
  • 2 tablespoons avocado oil or vegetable oil
  • 1 teaspoon Italian seasoning
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon paprika

Optional Garnish

  • 1 teaspoon fresh parsley chopped finely
  • A squeeze of lemon juice

Instructions

  • Cut the eggplant into your desired shape, either ½ inch slices or 1-inch cubes. You do not need to peel the eggplant as the skin is edible.
  • Line a sheet pan with a few sheets of paper towels. Place the eggplant on top and sprinkle with ½ teaspoon of salt, ensuring that all sides of the eggplant slices (or cubes) are evenly seasoned. Let rest for 15 minutes.
  • Using a sheet of paper towel (or a clean kitchen towel), pat the surface of the eggplant dry to absorb moisture.
  • Season the eggplant:
    For sliced eggplant: Brush eggplant slices with the oil on both sides and sprinkle each slice with Italian seasoning, garlic powder, paprika, and ¼ teaspoon of salt.
    For cubed eggplant: Place eggplant cubes in a large bowl. Drizzle with oil and toss until well combined. Sprinkle them with Italian seasoning, garlic powder, paprika, and ¼ teaspoon of salt.
  • Preheat the air fryer to 400 degrees F.
  • Place the eggplant in an even layer in the air fryer. Be sure not to overcrowd the air fryer basket. If needed, it is best to air fry it in two batches to ensure even frying.
  • Air fry for approximately 12 minutes flipping the eggplant halfway through the air frying process. To check doneness, insert a pairing knife in one of the eggplant cubes/slices, if it goes in and out easily, it should be done. If not, let it continue to air fry in one-minute increments until tender.
  • Transfer to a plate. If preferred, sprinkle it with chopped parsley and a light squeeze of lemon juice. Serve while it is still warm.

Notes

  • Yields: Depending on the size of your eggplant, this recipe yields 7-9 slices of eggplant or about 2 cups of cubed eggplant. This recipe can be multiplied as many times as you want.
  • Evenly cut eggplant: The key to this recipe is to cut your eggplants into evenly sized pieces (½-inch slices or 1-inch cubes). Similarly sized eggplants will cook more evenly, whether you slice them or cut them into cubes.
  • Storage: You can store leftovers in an airtight container (after they come to room temperature) for up to 3 days. To reheat, place your eggplant in the air fryer for two minutes (or until heated thoroughly) at 400 degrees F.

Nutrition

Calories: 96kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 439mg | Potassium: 289mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 283IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 20mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Air Fryer Eggplant appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-eggplant/feed/ 4
How To Make Vegetable Stock https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-make-vegetable-stock/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-make-vegetable-stock/#comments Wed, 12 Apr 2023 22:08:57 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=66223 We know that it might sound like an extra step, but trust us when we say that once you learn how to make vegetable broth and use it in any of your favorite soup recipes, you will agree that there is no better alternative. It is such an easy (and cheaper) way to add rich and robust flavors to any dish. It is also a great alternative to chicken broth...

The post How To Make Vegetable Stock appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
We know that it might sound like an extra step, but trust us when we say that once you learn how to make vegetable broth and use it in any of your favorite soup recipes, you will agree that there is no better alternative. It is such an easy (and cheaper) way to add rich and robust flavors to any dish.

It is also a great alternative to chicken broth to make a recipe vegan or vegetarian. Not to mention, just like my Corn Cob Stock, making veggie stock takes much less time than meat stocks so you have no excuse not to try!

Vegetables in a pot to make vegetable stock.

Vegetable Stock Ingredients

The ingredients for vegetable broth are simple, healthy, and all-natural with a ton of add-in options.

For broth vegetables, I recommend using neutral vegetables with savory flavors, such as onions (with the onion skin!), carrots, celery stalks, and fresh garlic cloves.

To give your soup stock recipe extra rich flavor, you’ll also need fresh herbs, like fresh parsley and thyme; salt (both kosher salt and sea salt will work); whole peppercorns, and water.

Ingredients for the recipe are in small bowls.

Optional Add-Ins

When considering what to put in vegetable broth, the options are limitless. You can select dozens of mouthwatering combinations to make your veggie broth recipe as savory, fresh, and delectable as possible. Below is a long list of ingredients you can use:

Other Vegetables You Can Use:

  • Alliums: Alliums—such as shallots, green onions (AKA scallions), leeks, and leek tops—can give this vegan stock a robust, mildly sweet flavor.
  • Mushrooms: Umami-rich mushrooms (and mushroom stems) will give your veg broth recipe an earthy, complex taste.
  • Fresh or dried bay leaves: This simple addition adds bright, herbal notes to any DIY stock.
  • Parsnips: Sweet and mildly spicy, parsnips add a nice sweet kick to the broth.
  • Fennel and fennel tops: If you like mild, anise-like flavors, then fennel is a great addition.
  • Corn cobs: The sweet buttery taste of corn cobs is a welcome addition during the summer months when corn is in season.
  • Tomatoes: If you want to give your DIY broth a touch of sweetness, I recommend adding chopped tomatoes. However, remember to remove the seeds first, as they can give your stock a bitter taste.
  • Apple or pear: Apples and pears are the perfect ingredients to add sweetness and help eliminate bitterness.

Add-Ins With Reservations

These are some of the ingredients to use in small doses when making homemade broth:

  • Carrot tops: When added in small amounts, carrot tops will it earthy, sweet undertones. Too many carrot tops, however, will result in a bitter-tasting broth.
  • Peppers: Are you a fan of heat? Then I recommend adding bell peppers, jalapeńos, or other hot peppers to your broth. However, don’t add too many (especially when using green bell peppers!) to avoid an acidic, bitter liquid.
  • Celery leaves: Use celery leaves for a bright peppery taste, but limit it to just a few ones to avoid making your stock bitter.
  • Soy sauce or tamari: You only need a small amount of soy sauce or tamari to give your homemade veg broth a complex umami taste.

Flavor and Nutrition Boosters

  • Dried kombu: Adding a bit of dried kombu to your simmering broth is an excellent way to give it briny, mushroom-like overtones.
  • Nutritional yeast: I recommend adding a pinch of nutritional yeast to your simmering pot for extra rich flavor.
  • Tomato paste: Give your stock sweet, mild tomato flavors by adding one tablespoon of tomato paste. To help your paste mix into the broth, I recommend removing a half-cup of simmering stock, whisking in the tomato paste, then re-adding it to the pot.
  • Roasted garlic: If you have made some for another dish (such as Baked Garlic Butter), use roasted garlic to incorporate caramelized flavors into your homemade stock.
  • Fresh ginger and turmeric (or even Golden Paste): If you’re making an Asian-themed dinner, ginger, and turmeric make brilliant additions to your stock vegetables. Not only do these ingredients add a spicy, bright flavor, but they also help develop a light, appetizing color in your stock.
  • Dried mushrooms: If you are a fan of the rich umami flavors, dried mushrooms is a good addition. However, be sure to soak them for an hour (or so) in hot water before adding to the stock. 
  • Parmesan rind: If you don’t mind a non-vegan addition, parmesan cheese rind is a simple flavor booster that complements any Italian dish. 

How to Make Vegetable Broth

Wondering how to make your own vegetable broth? These simple, beginner-friendly instructions will give you exquisitely flavored, perfectly simmered broth every time.

A collage of photos showing how to make your own vegetable broth.
  1. Place ingredients in the pot: Add the onion, carrots, celery, garlic, fresh parsley, fresh thyme sprigs, salt, pepper, and other optional add-ins into a large stock pot (affiliate link) or Dutch oven (affiliate link.)
  2. Add water: Pour the water into the pot.
  3. Boil & simmer: Place the lid atop the pot and bring the mixture to a boil over medium-high heat. Once the stock comes to a boil, reduce the heat to medium. Let the mixture simmer for 60-90 minutes, stirring once or twice during this time.
  4. Cool & strain: Let the veggie stock cool for 10-15 minutes. Then, carefully strain the liquid with a fine mesh strainer (affiliate link) placed over a large, heat-proof bowl. Using the back of a spoon, gently press the vegetables for the stock into the strainer to release their juices. Discard the veggies once finished.
Straining broth into jars and a labeled jar.
  1. Store: Transfer the vegan vegetable stock into airtight jars. Let them cool to room temperature and label them before storing them in the fridge or freezer.

How Long to Cook Vegetable Stock?

Once your vegan stock comes to a boil, I recommend letting it simmer for 1 to 1½ hours. Any longer, and the vegetables’ flavors begin to break down.

How to Store, Freeze, and Thaw?

The best part of this homemade vegetable stock recipe is how easy it is to store for effortless meal prep. Store it to make a soup the next day, or freeze it for a handy ingredient to use months later.

  • Storage: Pour your veg stock into airtight mason jars (or any airtight container of your choice.) A large heat-proof measuring cup with a sprout (affiliate link) will help streamline this step. Once your jars reach room temperature, transfer them to the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • Freezing instructions: Transfer your cooled soup stock to freezer-safe, airtight containers—such as these Weck Jars (affiliate link) —being sure to leave a few inches open at the top. Then, store your stock in the freezer for up to 6 months. Adding removable freezer labels (affiliate link) helps me keep track of expiration dates. 
  • Thawing instructions: To thaw your homemade veggie stock, place it in the fridge overnight.
Veg stock stored and labeled in jars.

Vegetables to Avoid Adding to Broth

Though there are countless vegetables to use in vegetable broth, there are a few veggies to avoid. Eliminating the following ingredients will ensure your vegan broth recipe is as smooth and tasty as possible.

  • Starchy vegetables: I recommend avoiding starch-based vegetables, like potatoes (including sweet potatoes, baby potatoes, yellow potatoes, and potato peels) and turnips. These ingredients will make your stock clumpy and cloudy.
  • Zucchini and green beans: Vegetables like zucchini and green beans become bitter when simmered too long and may harsh the savory flavors of your broth.
  • Brassica family veggies: Vegetables from the Brassica family—including cruciferous vegetables, like kale, broccoli, cauliflower, cabbage, mustard greens, and bok choy—will likely turn your veggie broth bitter. However, I often use kale stems (check out this handy guide to properly remove stems from kale) and chard stems as an addition. 
  • Beets and beet skins: These reddish-purple veggies will likely transfer their color into your stock, resulting in off-colored dishes when cooking.

Expert Tips

You don’t have to be a master chef to make the best-tasting vegetable broth. Here are a few pro tips to help you as you make your own vegetable stock.

  • Rinse and chop veggies well: Be sure to remove all harmful debris from your veggies. When rinsing your ingredients, I recommend scrubbing them lightly under cold tap water with a soft vegetable brush. Then, chop your veggies into small pieces to ensure they release maximum flavor into your stock.
  • Choose fresh ingredients: Using fresh vegetables is the best way to give your vegetarian broth the best flavor. Avoid wilted or overripe produce, as these ingredients will give your vegetable soup stock a bitter taste. Organic vegetables are always preferable, but non-organic ones would also work.
  • Mix and match vegetables: To us, the secret to a good vegetable broth is to use a variety of vegetables in your mix. And when doing so, it is important to avoid using a lot of one kind. 
  • Roast or sauté your veggies: Roasting or sautéing your vegetables before adding them to your stock will help release their garden-fresh flavors, resulting in extra complexity and depth. These pre-cooked veggies will give you a brown vegetable stock with a more robust flavor than white stocks. To sauté your vegetables, cook them in a skillet with one tablespoon of olive oil for 15 minutes. To roast them, cook them in a 300-degree F. oven for 30-35 minutes.
  • Begin with cold water: I recommend beginning with cold water when cooking your veg stock. This more significant temperature differential will gradually extract the vegetables’ flavors, resulting in greater depth and a richer taste.
  • Simmer gently: After boiling your vegetable broth, reduce the mixture to a gentle simmer. This lower temperature will ensure that your stock comes out savory—not bitter—and clear.
  • Strain the veggie stock: Once the cooking time is completed, pour the mixture through a fine-mesh strainer to remove the remaining vegetable pieces. Some people also line it with a cheesecloth, but it is optional. Press the veggies against the strainer to extract their juices, then discard the remaining solids. This process will give your stock the most flavor while ensuring a smooth, clear texture.
  • Cool completely before storing: Before storing your DIY vegetable broth, let it reach room temperature. This cooling will ensure your storage containers don’t crack in the cold, reduce unwanted condensation, and prevent bacterial growth.
  • Adding salt: To avoid oversalting it, I prefer to begin with a small amount of salt —only one teaspoon—and add more as the flavors develop. However, if you prefer a saltier taste, you can add more.
Various veggie scraps in a sheet pan.
  • Vegetable Stock with Scraps: It is no secret that making homemade stock from vegetable leftovers is another popular method. Many people save their cooking trimmings and peels (such as carrot peels and onion skins) and store them in a freezer bag for future stock making. We are also fans of that method so we have dedicated a separate article to it, titled “How to make vegetable Stock from Scraps (and frozen scraps)”, where we covered the process in depth.

How to Use Veggie Stock

You can create hundreds of dishes using vegetable stock as a foundation point. Put it to good use with some of the suggestions below:

  • Vegetarian soup recipes: Veggie stock is a must when making these delectable soup dishes. Get your fall fix with a creamy, 30-minute dish like Pumpkin Ginger Soup or Wild Rice Chicken Soup. Or, use your stock for a soup recipe like my Spiced Chickpea Stew or Green Lentil Soup for a dish as delicious as it is filling.
  • Cooking grains or legumes: It doesn’t matter whether you prefer to cook quinoa on the stove, in an Instant Pot, in a rice cooker, or in the microwave. Prepare your quinoa with veggie broth, and you’ll be astounded by your grains’ savory flavor. You can even use vegetable stock for cooking wild rice or in popular wild rice recipes like my Wild Rice Pilaf or Wild Rice Stuffing. Looking for a hearty Mediterranean option? Cooking bulgur with this stock is an easy way to elevate your cooking or make dishes like Bulgur Pilaf. This vegetable broth recipe even makes an excellent base for cooking risotto!
  • Mashed potatoes: Looking for a healthy alternative to buttery mashed potatoes without sacrificing flavor? Instead of using milk or cream, try using veg stock instead! With this easy recipe, your mashed potatoes will come out rich and flavorful in no time.
  • Braising and sautéing vegetables: Add sophisticated depth to your favorite vegetable sides—like my Pan-Seard Mushrooms and Asparagus—by lightly braising them with vegetable stock.
  • Sauces and gravies: This quick vegetable broth provides an ideal base for dozens of savory sauces, like any of your pasta sauces or gravy.
  • Steaming vegetables: When you make your own vegetable broth, you have the perfect ingredient to give steamed vegetables an incomparably rich taste. Use your veg stock instead of water in Steamed Asparagus or any other steamed vegetable for an easy flavor upgrade.
  • Vegetable curries: Nothing beats the earthy, spicy taste of warm curry. Using my veggie stock recipe, you can add succulent flavor to dishes like Cauliflower Curry, Butternut Squash Red Curry Soup, and Curried Brown Rice.

FAQs

It’s a cinch to make vegetable broth from scratch. Here are the answers to some of the frequently asked questions:

What is the difference between vegetable broth and stock?

Vegetable stock generally has less seasoning and is often used as a base for other dishes. By contrast, vegetable broth tends to have more seasoning and can serve as either a recipe ingredient or a “finished dish,” ready to drink straight from a cup.

What not to put in vegetable stock?

I recommend eliminating starchy vegetables (i.e., potatoes), zucchini, green beans, cruciferous vegetables (i.e. kale, cabbage, Brussels sprouts), beets, and beet skins from your ingredient list.

What is the most common vegetable mixture used in making stock?

The most common ingredient combination for veg broth is referred to as “mirepoix,” meaning the combination of onions, celery, and carrots.

Can you freeze homemade vegetable stock?

Yes! To freeze your homemade veggie broth, let it first reach room temperature. Transfer the liquid to airtight, freezer-safe containers, leaving 1-2 inches at the top of each container. It should be good for up to 6 months in the freezer.

How long does homemade vegetable stock last in the fridge?

When stored properly in airtight containers, this veg stock will last up to 5 days in the refrigerator.

What to do with the leftover vegetables from making veggie stock?

A great way to eliminate food waste and eliminate your vegetable scraps is to compost them.

What is the difference between white vegetable stock and brown vegetable stock?

White vegetable stock is made by simmering whole vegetables in water whereas the brown version is made by first roasting vegetables in water and then simmering them in water.

If you try this recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Vegetables in a big pot to make vegetable stock.
Print

How to Make Vegetable Stock

Learn how to make vegetable stock at home cheaper than store bought vegetable broth. Homemade veggie stock is such as easy way to elevate any of your soups, stews, sauces and casseroles.
Course Vegan
Cuisine American Vegan
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 40 minutes
Servings 8 cups
Calories 107kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 2 large onions roughly chopped
  • 4 medium size carrots chopped in 2-inch pieces
  • 2 celery stalks chopped
  • 1 whole head of garlic cut in half widthwise
  • 5 sprigs fresh parsley
  • 3 sprigs fresh thyme
  • 2 teaspoons kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon black peppercorns about 8-10 whole peppercorns
  • 10 cups water

Optional Add-ins

  • 1 cup Mushroom or mushroom stems
  • 1-2 bay leaves
  • 1 leek with the top

Instructions

  • Place onion, carrots, celery, garlic, fresh parsley and fresh thyme sprigs, salt and pepper and any of the optional add ins into a large stockpot or a Dutch oven.
  • Pour the water in.
  • Put the lid on and bring to a boil on medium-high heat.
  • Once it comes to a boil, turn the heat down to medium and let it simmer, stirring once or twice, for about an hour to hour and a half.
  • Let it cool for 10 – 15 minutes and carefully strain using a fine mesh strainer placed over a large heat proof bowl, pressing the juices out of the vegetables with the back of a spoon. Discard the veggies.
  • Transfer the vegetable broth into jars. Cool them to room temperature before storing in the fridge or freezing for later use.

Notes

  • Rinse your vegetables well: It is best to give your vegetables a quick rinse to get any debris before using them in your stock. You can also use a soft brush to gently rub them (such as carrots). This way, there is no need to peel them. Needless to say, avoid using moldy or rotten vegetables.
  • Vegetables to avoid: You can use this basic recipe and add more veggies based on what you have on hand. However, we recommend avoiding cruciferous vegetables such as kale, cabbage, and Brussels sprouts as they can make your broth bitter. Also, starch veggies like potatoes would make your stock cloudy so it is best not to use them.
  • Storage & freezing instructions: You can store your stock in an airtight container (such as a mason jar) in the fridge for up to 5 days. You can also freeze it for up to 6 months. Thaw it in the fridge overnight.
  • Vegetable stock with scraps: You can make vegetable broth using kitchen scraps or even frozen scrap. The method is similar but there are a few other things to pay attention to. If you want to try that method, check out our detailed post on how to make veggie broth from scraps to learn more.

Nutrition

Calories: 107kcal | Carbohydrates: 25g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 0.4g | Saturated Fat: 0.2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 4780mg | Potassium: 411mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 177IU | Vitamin C: 22mg | Calcium: 162mg | Iron: 2mg

The post How To Make Vegetable Stock appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-make-vegetable-stock/feed/ 2
Vegetable Stock from Scraps https://foolproofliving.com/vegetable-stock-from-scraps/ https://foolproofliving.com/vegetable-stock-from-scraps/#respond Wed, 12 Apr 2023 22:06:24 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=66247 Making homemade vegetable stock from scraps is an easy way to save money, eliminate food waste, and prepare hundreds of delectable dishes. Cheaper than store-bought broths, this simple recipe makes for easy storage and freezing, so you can effortlessly incorporate it into your weekly meal prep. Not to mention, it is a great alternative to chicken stock to use in vegetarian recipes. Add it to sauces for a rich, savory...

The post Vegetable Stock from Scraps appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Making homemade vegetable stock from scraps is an easy way to save money, eliminate food waste, and prepare hundreds of delectable dishes. Cheaper than store-bought broths, this simple recipe makes for easy storage and freezing, so you can effortlessly incorporate it into your weekly meal prep. Not to mention, it is a great alternative to chicken stock to use in vegetarian recipes.

Add it to sauces for a rich, savory flavor, or use it as a delicious base for your favorite soups and stews. No matter how you use it, vegetable scrap broth will make your kitchen taste like a five-star restaurant. 

Kitchen scraps placed in a pot to make vegetable broth.

What Veggie Scraps to Use for Stock?

Don’t know what ingredients to add to your veggie scrap stock? Using this master list, you’ll find dozens of ideas, from hearty vegetable trims to savory veggie peels. 

  • The outer layer and skin of alliums: One of the most flavorful additions that you can add to a veggie broth from kitchen scraps is the outer layer of vegetables like onions, shallots, and garlic. In particular, onion skins and onion peels give scrap stock a hearty, robust taste.
  • Green parts of scallions and leeks: The green ends of green onions and leek tops can add mild, grassy undertones to your vegetable broth with scraps.
  • Fennel tops: Full of sweet, licorice flavor, fennel tops make a great addition.
  • Carrots and carrot tops: These carrot bits unlock sumptuous, sweet flavors in your stock. As a bonus, they also add great color!
  • Corn cobs: If you are like us a huge fan of the popular Mexican dishes, Mexican Corn Salad or Mexican Street Corn Soup and make them during the summer months, with this recipe, you can use the leftover corn cobs to lend your own vegetable broth a sweet, buttery taste. And if you have so many corn cobs then you can also make our Corn Broth recipe.
  • Mushroom stems: Don’t throw away your mushroom scraps the next time you make Roasted Portobello Mushrooms or Shiitake Mushroom Soups. Mushroom stems are the perfect ingredient to give your homemade stock an earthy, full-bodied flavor.
Veggie scraps to use for stock are on a sheet pan from the top view.
  • Tomatoes and tomato skins: Some of my favorite leftover vegetable scraps to add are tomatoes and tomato skins. These pantry-classic ingredients add a bright and sweet flavor to any homemade broth.
  • Vegetable peels: Nearly any vegetable peel will work in this flavorful stock recipe, from carrot peels to squash peels. Even pea pods add delicious notes to this flavorful vegetable stock.
  • Herbs and herb stems: After using fresh herbs in a dish be sure to add your leftover stems to your vegetable stock! Fresh parsley and thyme are some of the best things to brighten up the taste of your vegetable scrap stock.
  • Peppers: There’s no need to let the tops of your bell peppers go to waste. Add them in for a light, earthy flavor. However, I recommend using bell peppers in small amounts, as they can give them a bitter taste if used too much.
  • Asparagus ends: Put your leftover asparagus bits (including the woody ends) to good use and add to the saved scraps pile. 

Optional Add-Ins

Want to add even more flavor to your veggie stock from scraps? Here are a few additional ingredients to elevate veggie scrap broth:

  • Onion, carrot, celery: These three ingredients—a mix called “mirepoix”—form a hearty vegetable stock base. They are also the backbone of a good vegetable broth. While scraps are usually enough, (optionally) you can also add an equal amount of each of these vegetables to ensure that your broth from veggie scraps has a rich, well-balanced flavor profile.
  • Garlic: If you prefer a bold, rich flavor, garlic cloves are a great way to add complexity to the stock. You don’t need to peel them, either; simply smash the cloves and add them directly to your vegetable scraps.
  • Bay leaf: I love to add bay leaves as they give the liquid irresistible herby undertones. Even better, you only need one bay leaf per batch of broth.
  • Salt: Salt can be a secret weapon when making veggie stock from scraps. Add a small amount of kosher salt (or sea salt) to bring out the nuanced flavors of your broth veggies.
  • Black peppercorns: Whole peppercorns are a classic ingredient in any stock recipe and this one is no exception.
  • Fresh ginger and turmeric: Ginger and turmeric are my go-to’s when making Asian-inspired dishes. Use a small amount of these ingredients to complement your dish. Keep in mind, however, that turmeric will likely change the color of your broth.

What Vegetable Scraps Are Not Good for Stock?

There are no strict rules regarding which veggie scraps should be avoided in making vegetable stock. With that being said, in an ideal scenario, it would be preferable to exclude certain vegetables or at least use them sparingly. Below are a few of those:

  • Cruciferous vegetables: Avoid adding many vegetables from the Brassica family—such as kale, cabbage, cauliflower, broccoli, chard, and Brussels sprouts, as these veggie scraps may give your broth a bitter flavor.
  • Starchy vegetable trimmings: I don’t recommend adding the skins and trimmings of starchy vegetables, like potatoes or potato skins, to your broth recipe, as they tend to make the stock cloudy.
  • Beets: I avoid beets in my kitchen scraps pile because they carry an intense color and overpoweringly earthy flavor.
  • Eggplant: I recommend avoiding eggplant trimmings in your food scraps to eliminate an unwanted slimy texture and unnecessarily strong flavor.
  • Spicy peppers: It isn’t easy to cook with veggie stock that’s too spicy. That’s why I avoid spicy peppers—such as jalapeños, serranos, and habaneros—when preparing my vegetable scrap stock.
  • Artichokes: Artichoke pieces tend to have a powerful taste that will overwhelm the other, more nuanced flavors of vegetable scrap broth.
  • Rotten or moldy vegetables: The most important rule of thumb is to use vegetables that aren’t rotten or moldy, as these ingredients will give your stock a bitter flavor and even pose a health risk.

How to Save Vegetable Scraps for Stock

Wash the vegetables well before use to keep the scraps as fresh, clean, and tasty as possible. A soft kitchen brush works well to eliminate any unwanted soil and debris. This way, your peels, ends, leaves, stems, and trimmings are ready to use directly after cutting.

Photos showing how to save scraps for stock in plastic bags.
  • In the fridge: You may store your vegetable scraps in an airtight Ziploc bag in the refrigerator and add them to your veggie scrap stock once you collect 4-6 cups. Labeling your bags will help ensure your ingredients don’t go bad before you use them. 
  • In the freezer: Another way to collect vegetable scraps is by putting them in an airtight container or a freezer bag in the freezer. Once you reach 4-6 cups, you can save them for later or make veggie stock immediately.

How to Make Vegetable Broth from Scraps

Making vegetable stock from scraps is the best way to use up vegetable leftovers without hassle. Follow these effortless instructions for savory, rich broth every time.

A collage of images showinghow to make veggie broth from scraps.
  1. Add the ingredients: Place all the veggie scraps, salt, and peppercorns into a large stock pot or Dutch oven. If you’re making vegetable stock from frozen scraps, you don’t need to thaw them first. Just keep in mind that the total time of cooking will be longer. Pour the water over the veggie scraps, put the lid on the pot, and bring the contents to a boil over the stovetop. 
  2. Let it simmer: After it boils, leave the lid ajar, and let it simmer for 1-1½ hours.
  3. Strain: Strain the veggie stock broth by placing a fine-mesh strainer over a large bowl. Discard or compost the leftover vegetables.
  4. Cool the stock: If you are using it right away, use it in your dish. Otherwise, pour the stock into mason jars or airtight plastic containers, and let the liquid cool to room temperature.
  5. Store: Once the liquid has cooled, store it in the fridge, or freeze it for later use.

How to Store, Freeze, and Thaw

  • Store: Place broth in airtight plastic containers or mason jars. Once they are fully cooled, place them in the fridge and use them within 5 days.
  • Freeze: To freeze, let the liquid come to room temperature in freezer-safe airtight containers (such as Weck jars). Leave 1-2 inches at the top of each container. Then, store the stock in the freezer for up to 6 months.
  • Thaw: Thaw the frozen broth in the fridge overnight.
Veggie scrap stock in a jar labeled with the date.

How to Use It In Your Cooking?

There are countless ways to use this flavorful homemade veggie stock from scraps. From creamy risotto to hearty soup recipes, the possibilities are endless when you make your own vegetable stock. 

  • Soups and stews: Veggie scrap stock makes a rich, flavorful base for countless delicious soup and stew recipes. Whether you whip up an umami-packed, one-pot Shiitake Mushroom Soup or a hearty, vegan French Lentil Soup, your kitchen scraps can create mouthwatering flavors in under an hour.
  • Poached vegetables with meat and fish: Who can resist buttery, tender veggies alongside a protein-packed main? Use your vegetable broth from scraps to make these crowd-pleasing menus, and your dinner guests won’t resist a second plate.
  • Risotto: Rich, creamy, and utterly delicious, risotto is one of my favorite Italian dishes. Now you can add incomparable savoriness to every bite by whipping up this classic recipe using this simple recipe as the cooking liquid.
  • Cooking grains: There’s no reason why your grains have to be bland. You can give anything from Jasmine Brown Rice, Black Rice Pilaf to white rice, and even Stovetop Quinoa gourmet taste using vegetable scrap stock.

Expert Tips

Here are a few helpful tips for the best results as you make your own veggie broth from scraps:

  • Don’t use old or moldy vegetables: Even though we’re using scraps, you don’t want to use moldy or rotten vegetables. These unpalatable veggies will give your broth a sour, bitter taste and may introduce unwanted bacteria to your recipe. Be sure, too, to give your veggies a good rinse before adding them to your mix.
  • Mix and match veggies: Don’t be afraid to experiment with new blends of vegetables. Various combinations will result in different flavors, which may better suit a specific recipe or taste preference.
  • Don’t overuse any vegetables: One of the best parts about making broth from veggie scraps is that the flavor improves with a balanced mix of vegetables. Try not to use too much of any one kind of vegetable, as this will give your broth’s favor a monotone, often unsavory taste.
  • Try to compliment your favorite recipes: Nothing tastes better than using a perfectly paired veggie stock to make a recipe. I recommend tailoring which veggie scraps you use to bring out your menu’s natural flavors. For example, when cooking Asian-inspired dishes—like my fan-favorite Ramen Bowl—I love adding ginger to my veggie scrap mix. 
  • Roast or sauté the scraps: Though this extra step takes more prep time, roasting or sautéing veggie scraps before adding them to your broth mix will give your stock a rich, caramelized flavor. To roast your veggies, bake them in the oven at low heat (300 degrees F.) for 20-25 minutes, and toss them halfway through the cooking process. To sauté them, cook them in a pan for 5-7 minutes with a bit of olive oil.
  • Cook it at a gentle simmer: To avoid giving your veggie scrap stock a bitter flavor, bring your mix to a gentle simmer after it reaches a boil. Don’t cook it for more than 1½ hours, and be sure to taste it before adding it to other recipes.
  • Store it in small portions: Store your stock in 1-2 cup portions, which makes it easy to use in future meals (including your weekly meal prep.)
Vegetable scrap broth with veggies after the cooking time is completed.

FAQs:

Have more questions about this homemade vegetable broth with scraps? This simple guide covers everything from making vegetable broth from frozen scraps to alternate cooking methods.

Can I reuse/recycle the veggie scraps after making veggie broth?

I don’t recommend reusing veggie scraps after making homemade broth because you’ve likely already extracted all their flavor and nutrition. Instead, you can discard or put the scraps in a compost bin.

How to make vegetable stock from frozen scraps?

You don’t have to thaw your vegetable pieces when you make veggie stock from frozen scraps. Simply follow the recipe as usual, considering the cook time will be longer.

How to make vegetable stock from scraps in an Instant Pot?

To make veggie scrap broth in a pressure cooker, use the same amount of ingredients written in the recipe and set your Instant Pot to high pressure for 30 minutes. Though, keep in mind that it will take about 20 minutes for your mix to reach high pressure before beginning the cooking process.

How many cups of vegetable scraps should I use for stock?

Depending on the size of your pot, I recommend using 4-6 cups of veggie scraps and 8-10 cups of water, to make a whole batch of homemade vegetable scrap broth.

If you try this recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Vegetable stock from scraps in a big pot from the top view.
Print

Vegetable Stock from Scraps Recipe

The foolproof method for making vegetable stock from kitchen scraps. This method is not only delicious but also much cheaper than the vegetable stock you buy at the grocery store. Use it in soups, stews, casserole, sauces, and more!
Course Vegetarian
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 40 minutes
Servings 8 cups
Calories 7kcal

Ingredients

  • 4-6 cups of veggie scraps ie peels, trimmings, tops, and bottoms
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • 8-10 black peppercorns
  • 8-10 cups of water

Optional Add ins:

  • 2-3 cloves of garlic smashed
  • 3-4 parsley stems

Instructions

  • Place veggie scraps, salt, and peppercorns into a stock pot or a Dutch oven. If using, add garlic and parsley stems.
  • Pour water over the veggie scraps.
  • Bring it to a boil and let is simmer for 1 to 1 ½ hours (partially cover it with the lid.)
  • When done, turn the heat off and let it cool for 20-30 minutes.
  • Place a fine mesh strainer over a large bowl and strain vegetables. Discard or compost vegetables.
  • Pour the veggie scarp stock into jars (or plastic containers), bring to room temperature, and store in the fridge or freeze for later.

Notes

  • Ratio of kitchen scraps to water: Depending on the size of your pot, I recommend using 4-6 cups of veggie scraps and 8-10 cups of water, to make a whole batch of homemade vegetable scrap broth.
  • Vegetables that are good for scraps: Trimmings and peels of alliums (onions, leeks, shallots), carrot, celery, garlic, tomatoes, and corn cobs are a few to name.
  • Vegetables to avoid: Peels and trimmings of cruciferous vegetables (i.e. kale, cabbage, Brussels sprouts), beets, spicy peppers, and artichokes are a few to name. We also recommend avoiding any moldy or rotten vegetables or scraps.
  • Frozen scraps: You can use this exact recipe with frozen scraps. There is no need to thaw. The only difference would be the time of cooking.
  • Storage & freezing: You can store your stock in an airtight container (such as a Weck jar or a mason jar) in the fridge for up to 5 days. You can freeze it for up to 6 months. We recommend thawing it in the fridge overnight.
  • Vegetable stock using whole veggies: If you prefer making stock using whole vegetables (instead of kitchen scraps), be sure to check out our detailed post on Homemade Vegetable Broth.

Nutrition

Calories: 7kcal | Carbohydrates: 2g | Protein: 0.1g | Fat: 0.01g | Saturated Fat: 0.003g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.003g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.003g | Sodium: 773mg | Potassium: 6mg | Fiber: 0.1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 282IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 10mg | Iron: 0.05mg

The post Vegetable Stock from Scraps appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/vegetable-stock-from-scraps/feed/ 0
Steamed Asparagus https://foolproofliving.com/steamed-asparagus-with-white-bean-and-artichoke-aioli/ https://foolproofliving.com/steamed-asparagus-with-white-bean-and-artichoke-aioli/#comments Sun, 09 Apr 2023 22:34:31 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=7431 We’re huge fans of asparagus here at Foolproof Living. From rich, buttery Pan Sautéed Asparagus to tender-crisp Air Fried Asparagus, asparagus recipes are a must in my recipe book. If you prefer to cook veggies in the oven, you could even whip up my healthy yet flavorful Baked Asparagus with just five simple ingredients! These simple veggie sides are just what you need to complete your menu during asparagus season....

The post Steamed Asparagus appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
We’re huge fans of asparagus here at Foolproof Living. From rich, buttery Pan Sautéed Asparagus to tender-crisp Air Fried Asparagus, asparagus recipes are a must in my recipe book. If you prefer to cook veggies in the oven, you could even whip up my healthy yet flavorful Baked Asparagus with just five simple ingredients! These simple veggie sides are just what you need to complete your menu during asparagus season.

Steamed asparagus on a plated garnished with lemon wedges.

Ingredients

Whether you’re making steamed asparagus in a steamer or steaming asparagus in a pan doesn’t matter. You only need one simple ingredient to prepare this nutritious recipe: asparagus! Plus, of course, your favorite seasonings such as butter, a squeeze of lemon juice, and salt & pepper (we’ll cover the seasoning options in detail below.)

Seasoning for steamed asparagus; butter, lemon, and salt and pepper on a marble backdrop.

You may choose any fresh asparagus for this recipe, including green, purple, and white asparagus. 

Keep in mind, too, that the steam time for asparagus directly correlates with the thickness of your stalks—not necessarily the type of asparagus. Therefore, your asparagus steam time may vary depending on the thickness of your spears.

After selecting your asparagus, complete the following steps: 

  1. Rinse it under cool water.
  2. Dry it with a kitchen towel.
  3. Remove the woody ends (1-2 inches from the bottom). You can either snap off these ends with your fingers or line up your asparagus stalks on a cutting board and slice them off as a group. Discard the trims or save them for making veggie stock later.
Person cutting the woody ends of asparagus on a cutting board.

Once prepped, you can cook the vegetable immediately or save it for future use. For more handy tips on storage instructions, check out my simple guide on storing asparagus.

How to Steam Asparagus?

This steamed asparagus recipe comes together with minimal effort and in no time, no matter which method you choose. Select any of these four foolproof cooking styles, and you’ll never have to scramble for side dish ideas again.

With a Steamer Basket

Want to steam fresh asparagus perfectly every time? Learn how to steam asparagus with a steamer basket, and your veggies will come out exquisitely tender without hassle. 

A collage of images showing how to steam asparagus using a steamer basket.
  1. Fill the pot: Select a large pot—one that’s large enough to fit your steamer basket—with a tight-fitting lid. Fill the bottom of the pan with 2-3 inches of water. The water level should reach below the bottom of the steam basket.
  2. Prepare the steamer basket: Place a collapsible steamer basket (affiliate link) inside the pot. Add the lid to the pot and bring the water to a boil.
  3. Steam the asparagus: Place the asparagus spears—cut or whole—inside the basket, put the lid back on the pot, and cook for 4-5 minutes for al dente.
  4. Serve: Carefully remove the asparagus stalks from the steamer basket. Top with your desired seasonings, then serve.

On the Stove

Steaming asparagus on the stove is one of the most hassle-free methods of perfectly cooking your veggies. Using this method, you can still get similar results to steaming asparagus in a steamer without having to own yet another kitchen gadget.

A collage of photos showing how to steam asparagus spears on the stove in a skillet.
  1. Prepare the skillet: Fill a large skillet with just enough water to cover its bottom. You shouldn’t have to use more than a cup of water.
  2. Steam asparagus in the pan: Add the asparagus to the skillet, put the lid on, and bring the water to a boil over medium-high heat. Pan-steam the asparagus for 5-6 minutes or until tender.
  3. Serve: Transfer the pan-steamed asparagus to a serving plate.

In the Microwave

Curious about how to steam asparagus without a steamer? Follow this steamed asparagus recipe that I learned from the folks over at The Kitchn! The steps below will have you steaming asparagus in the microwave in no time. 

A collage of images showing how to steam asparagus in the microwave.
  1. Wet the paper towels: Wet four sheets of paper towels with ¼ cup water. Gently squeeze each sheet to remove excess water. Your paper towels should be damp—not soaking wet—by the end of this step.
  2. Assemble: Stack all four paper towel sheets on top of one another, then arrange the asparagus stalks in a single layer. This step is optional but if you want season the vegetables with salt with a little bit of salt (about ¼ teaspoon.)
  3. Wrap: Roll the paper towels with the asparagus inside into a semi-tight bundle. When finished wrapping, your bundle should have several layers of asparagus and paper towels inside.
Person placing asparagus in microwave with paper towel.
  1. Cook asparagus in the microwave: Place the asparagus in the microwave with the paper towel wrap. Cook on high for 3 minutes.
  2. Check for doneness: Remove the microwave-steamed asparagus bundle from the microwave, being careful of its heat. Gently unroll the bundle and pierce one of the spears with a paring knife to check for doneness. If it needs more time, re-roll the bundle and steam the asparagus in the microwave in 1-minute increments until it reaches your desired doneness.

In a Rice Cooker

If you love easy kitchen shortcuts, you’ll adore this foolproof method for fresh steamed asparagus. Put your rice cooker to work and get tender, nutritious spears every time.

A collage of images showing how to steam asparagus spears in a rice cooker.
  1. Prepare the rice cooker: Fill the inner pot of your rice cooker (I own an Aroma Rice Cooker – affiliate link) with 1½ cups of water. Place the steamer tray on top.
  2. Arrange the asparagus: Place asparagus stalks on top of the steamer tray.
  3. Steam the spears: Close the lid, then turn on your rice cooker. Select the steam setting and set your timer for 10 minutes. Because the countdown timer doesn’t start until the water inside boils, even though the actual cook time is only 10 minutes, it takes about 20-25 minutes to steam asparagus in a rice cooker.
  4. Remove the steamer basket: After cooking, open the lid and carefully remove the steaming basket using a tong or oven mitts.
  5. Serve: Transfer the steamed fresh asparagus to a serving platter, season as desired, and serve.

How Long Does it Take to Steam Asparagus?

Wondering how much time it takes to steam asparagus? The quick answer is that this simple recipe usually takes 3-6 minutes to prepare. However, remember that these times are for one bunch of medium-thick spears (about ½-inch diameter).

Below is a quick guide for steaming time for asparagus to an al dente tenderness. If your stalks are different thicknesses, use the following tips:

  • If you select thinner stalks, reduce the cooking time by 1-2 minutes. 
  • If you choose thicker stalks, add 1-2 minutes of cooking time to the recipe.
Steaming MethodAsparagus Steam Time
Using a steamer basket4-5 minutes
On The Stove in a Pan5-6 minutes
In the microwave (high heat setting)3 minutes
In a rice cooker (using the steamer insert)20-25 minutes 

How to Check for Asparagus Doneness

There are two easy ways to check whether your asparagus is ready to eat:

A person checking doneness by inserting a knife into a spear.
  • Knife method: To check the doneness of your asparagus, insert a paring knife into a spear. If the blade enters without extra effort, your asparagus doesn’t need more time. You may also cook your asparagus to whatever tenderness level you prefer.
  • Visual cues: You can also assess whether your asparagus needs more or less time by its color. Perfectly steamed asparagus should have beautiful, fresh green hues. If your spears come out in more of a green-olive color, they’re likely overcooked.

How to Season Steamed Asparagus?

If you love to try new flavor combinations, you’ll enjoy the endless seasoning options that are available to you. The list below includes zesty lemon juice, creamy salad dressing, roasted garlic, and more!

  • Butter: Rich, decadent, and full-bodied, butter is just what you need to bring this easy dish to life. Drizzle your asparagus with two tablespoons of melted butter, or kick it up a notch with my robust and creamy Roasted Garlic Butter.
  • Extra Virgin Olive oil: A small drizzle of olive oil is an easy way to give your delicious asparagus subtle yet mouthwatering complexity. Plus, olive oil makes it much easier to season steamed asparagus with other herbs and spices.
  • Salt & pepper: Who can resist a classic? Always stocked in my spice cabinet, a pinch of sea or kosher salt and a dash of freshly ground black pepper are my go-to seasonings for this steamed asparagus recipe.
  • Garlic: Give this side dish bold, earthy notes by topping steamed asparagus with garlic. Along with a drizzle of olive oil, you can use freshly minced garlic, oven-roasted garlic, air-fried garlic, lightly sautéed garlic, or even garlic powder in this asparagus recipe.
  • Parmesan cheese: Nothing complements steamed asparagus’s grassy, tender taste better than nutty, rich parmesan cheese. Sprinkle your freshly steamed asparagus with one tablespoon of olive oil, 2-3 tablespoons of parmesan cheese, and a dash of black pepper, and voila! An elegant side perfect for any occasion.
  • Fresh herbs: Fresh parsley and basil are an iconic seasoning for steamed asparagus. Earthy, fragrant, and visually stunning, these herbs will give every bite a sumptuous flavor.
  • A squeeze of fresh lemon: Bring every bite of your vegetable to life with a light spritz of fresh lemon juice. Brilliant and bright, lemon wedges will also give your asparagus spears a gorgeous presentation.
  • Your favorite salad dressings: To give your asparagus maximum flavor, salad dressing is the way to go. Yogurt Dressing and Ranch Yogurt Dressing are two easy recipes with creamy, tangy richness. Or, try a lighter flavor profile with my fan-favorite recipes for Lemon Salad Dressing and Lemon Mustard Dressing.
  • Hollandaise sauce: You only need four ingredients and two minutes to make this buttery, luxurious topping. Serve this sophisticated asparagus dish at Easter brunch or on busy weeknights. You’ll be licking your plate clean, no matter the time of day.

How to Store, Freeze, and Thaw?

Steaming fresh asparagus is the perfect dish for easy meal prep. Store it for simple lunch salads throughout the week, or freeze it for meals months in advance—the choice is yours!

  • Storage: Before storing, let your steamed asparagus cool completely. Once room temperature, place it in an airtight container in the fridge for 3-4 days.
  • Freezing: I recommend flash-freezing asparagus to ensure it maintains its texture. First, let your steamed spears cool completely. Then, lay them in a single layer on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper. Place the baking tray in the freezer until the asparagus hardens. Once frozen, transfer the stalks to an airtight container, such as a Ziploc bag, and remove as much air as possible. You may then store your asparagus in the freezer for up to a month.
  • Thawing: To thaw your frozen asparagus, take it out of the freezer one to two hours before serving.

How to Serve?

This recipe for steamed asparagus is as versatile as it is delicious. Serve it warm or cold, with a protein or on a salad, or even on its own for a side dish the whole family will love.

  • As a side dish: Light and healthy, steamed asparagus perfectly balance the hearty taste of chicken, beef, pork, and turkey recipes. You can even serve it with morning eggs to start your day with vitamins, antioxidants, and fiber.
  • Make it a part of a spring salad: What pairs better with spring-fresh salads than more delicious vegetables? Mix your steamed asparagus into irresistibly fresh recipes, like my Asparagus Salad or Boston Lettuce Salad, for a light lunch or a crisp vegetarian main course.
  • As a topping: Steamed asparagus makes an ideal topping for dozens of nutritious, filling recipes. Add it to Savory Steel-Cut Oatmeal for a hint of grassy flavor, or layer it atop Asparagus Tart for an earthy, creamy side you’ll serve at every get-together.

Expert Tips

It doesn’t matter whether you prefer preparing your asparagus in a steamer or making asparagus steamed in the microwave. Here are a few pro tips to help you get tasty and tender asparagus every time.

  • Woody ends: Don’t skip trimming off the asparagus spears’ bottom 1-2 inches. These tough ends have a rigid, woody texture and don’t taste good.
  • Cut or not: For any of my four cooking methods, you may steam your asparagus spears whole or cut them into smaller, 2-inch pieces.
  • Using rice cooker and microwave: Please keep in mind that every rice cooker and microwave is different, so I’d encourage you to look at their user manuals before steaming asparagus. Take my recipe instructions as a place to start and adjust them as necessary, especially when it comes to steaming time.
  • Ice water bath: If I am serving y steamed asparagus right away, there is no need to set up an ice water bath. However, if you are planning to serve it later, it is a good idea to fill a bowl with water and ice and place the freshly steamed asparagus stalks in there to stop the cooking. This way it will continue to maintain its bright green color and still be fork-tender when you are ready to serve.

FAQs

There’s no secret to how to steam fresh asparagus. This handy guide will answer all your questions, from how long to steam asparagus to the difference between cooking methods.

Is it better to boil or steam asparagus?

My favorite way to cook asparagus is to steam it instead of boiling it. When you boil asparagus, the vegetables lose some of their nutrients in the water. By contrast, steamed asparagus retains its nutritional value while achieving a warm, tender texture.

How do you tell if steamed asparagus is done?

You can tell asparagus is done using one of two ways. One method is to insert a paring knife into an asparagus spear and see if the spear is tender enough to allow easy insertion. You can also use visual cues to tell. Appropriately steamed asparagus should have a bright green color, while overcooked asparagus is a lighter green with olive undertones.

How do you steam asparagus if you don’t have a steamer?

If you don’t have a steamer, you can also use the other three other methods I detail above: on the stove, in the microwave, or in a rice cooker.

How is steaming asparagus different than blanching?

Unlike steaming, blanching is a form of par-cooking in which you cook asparagus directly in boiling water for 5-6 minutes before immediately transferring it to an ice bath. By contrast, steaming entails cooking asparagus in the steam of boiling water for 5-6 minutes.

Other Asparagus Recipes You Might Like

One bite of this perfectly steamed asparagus, and you’ll be longing for asparagus recipes every night of the week. Satisfy all your garden-fresh cravings with these easy side dishes.

Steamed asparagus on a plate garnished with lemon slices.
Print

Steamed Asparagus Recipe

Steamed asparagus is probably the easiest and most versatile side dish you can make. Below is 4 different methods you can steam asparagus; Using a steamer basket, on the stove, in the microwave, and in a rice cooker.
Course Vegan side dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 1 Bunch
Calories 91kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 bunch of asparagus rinsed
  • Water

Instructions

  • Trim the ends: Snap off the woody ends of the asparagus spears by holding the ends and bending them until they break naturally. Or, if you want to do it faster, you can line them on a cutting board and trim an inch (or two) off the bottom using a knife.

Using a Steamer Basket:

  • Prepare the pot: Fill the bottom of a large pot (one that is large enough to accommodate your steamer basket) with a tight-fitting lid with two to three inches of water. The water level should be below the bottom of the steamer basket.
  • Assemble the steamer basket: Place a collapsible steamer basket inside. Put the lid on and bring the water to a boil.
  • Add the asparagus spears: Place the asparagus stalks inside, put the lid back on, and cook for 4-5 minutes for al dente.
  • Season and serve: Carefully remove steamed asparagus stalks from the steamer basket and season it with your favorite seasonings.

In a Pan on the Stove Top:

  • Prepare the skillet: Fill a large (10 or 12-inch) skillet with water just enough to cover the bottom of it. No more than 1/2 cup.
  • Cook: Add the asparagus, put the lid on, and bring it to a boil over medium-high heat. Let it steam for 5-6 minutes or until tender. I use kitchen tongs to turn them a few times to ensure that they are cooking evenly.
  • Serve: Transfer them onto a plate and season as you wish.

In the Microwave:

  • Prepare the paper towels: Wet 4 sheets of paper towels using ¼ cup water. Gently squeeze each sheet of paper towel to remove excess water. They should be dampened instead of soaking wet.
  • Assemble: Stack all four sheets on top of each other and spread the asparagus spears on top in a single layer. Season with salt.
  • Wrap: Roll the paper towels into a bundle with asparagus spears, forming layers of asparagus and paper towels throughout. It should be a semi-tight bundle more so than a loose one.
  • Microwave: Place the bundle into the microwave and cook on high for 3 minutes.
  • Check for doneness: Remove the asparagus bundle from the microwave. Being very careful (it is hot!!), unroll the bundle and pierce one of the spears with a pairing knife to check for doneness. If it needs more time, roll it again and microwave for 1-minute increments until it is cooked to your liking.

In a Rice Cooker:

  • Prepare the rice cooker: Fill the inner pot of your rice cooker with 1 ½ cups of water. Place the provided steamer tray on top.
  • Add the asparagus: Place the asparagus on top. If the full stalks don't fit, you can cut them into smaller pieces.
  • Steam: Close the lid. Turn on the rice cooker. Select the steam setting and set the timer to 20 minutes. Please remember that the countdown timer does not start until the water inside the cooker comes to a boil.
  • Remove from the rice cooker: When the cooking time is completed (my rice cooker beeps), open the lid and carefully remove the steamer basket using a tong or kitchen mittens.
  • Serve: Transfer the steamed asparagus to a serving platter. Season as desired before serving.

Notes

  • Steaming Time: The time suggested for steaming using every one of these methods is for medium-sized asparagus (about ½-inch diameter) to an al dente tenderness. If your stalks are different thicknesses, use the following tips:
    • If you select thinner stalks, reduce the cooking time by 1-2 minutes. 
    • If you choose thicker stalks, add 1-2 minutes of cooking time to the recipe.
  • Seasoning ideas:
    Below are a few seasoning ideas that you can use to season your steamed asparagus after it is cooked:
    • Melted butter and salt and pepper: Drizzle steamed asparagus with 2 tablespoons of melted butter and sprinkle with salt and pepper. 
    • Extra virgin olive oil, garlic, lemon juice, and salt and pepper: Mix together 2 tablespoons of olive oil, 1 small minced garlic, and 1 tablespoon of lemon juice with ½ teaspoon salt, and ¼ teaspoon pepper in a small bowl. Drizzle it over the steamed asparagus.
    • Olive oil, parmesan cheese, and black pepper: Drizzle asparagus with 1 tablespoon of olive oil and sprinkle it with 2-3 tablespoons of parmesan cheese. Finish it off with freshly cracked pepper. Give it a gentle toss and serve.
  • The method for steaming asparagus is adapted from The Kitchn.

Nutrition

Calories: 91kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Sodium: 9mg | Potassium: 916mg | Fiber: 10g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 3429IU | Vitamin C: 25mg | Calcium: 109mg | Iron: 10mg

The post Steamed Asparagus appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/steamed-asparagus-with-white-bean-and-artichoke-aioli/feed/ 8
Spinach Peanut Butter Smoothie https://foolproofliving.com/peanut-butter-spinach-shake/ https://foolproofliving.com/peanut-butter-spinach-shake/#comments Sun, 02 Apr 2023 19:16:08 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=10022 The combination of spinach and peanut butter may sound unusual, but the creamy nuttiness of the peanut butter perfectly complements the earthy flavor of the fresh spinach. Plus, adding a frozen banana and almond milk makes this spinach banana smoothie a naturally sweet and healthy drink that is worthy of your weekly smoothie rotation.  If you enjoy smoothies like this Peanut Butter Spinach Smoothie, you might also like our Turmeric...

The post Spinach Peanut Butter Smoothie appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
The combination of spinach and peanut butter may sound unusual, but the creamy nuttiness of the peanut butter perfectly complements the earthy flavor of the fresh spinach. Plus, adding a frozen banana and almond milk makes this spinach banana smoothie a naturally sweet and healthy drink that is worthy of your weekly smoothie rotation. 

If you enjoy smoothies like this Peanut Butter Spinach Smoothie, you might also like our Turmeric Green Smoothie and Vegan Banana Smoothie, which are both packed with a variety of nutrients for a satisfying breakfast. And if you need more smoothie recipe inspiration, be sure to browse our collection of superfood smoothies.

Spinach peanut butter banana smoothie garnished with banana slices from the front view.

Ingredients

The ingredient list of this peanut butter banana spinach smoothie is short and sweet, with plenty of substitutions and optional add-ins to make it even more nutritious. Below is everything you need to know to make this healthy green smoothie your own:

Ingredients for green monster smoothie on a marble backdrop.
  • Frozen banana: I usually freeze ripe bananas when they start changing their colors. If all you have is a fresh banana (and want your smoothie to be super cold), then just add in a cup of ice cubes.
  • Natural Peanut Butter: I prefer unsalted and unsweetened creamy peanut butter to avoid added sugars and excessive sodium. However, you can also use other nut butter options like almond butter or cashew butter. And if you have nut allergies, you can substitute peanut butter with a seed butter of your choice.
  • Non-Dairy Milk: I prefer dairy free unsweetened almond milk (or vanilla almond milk), but any kind of milk would work here. Soy milk, oat milk, and coconut milk would all work. 
  • Fresh Spinach Leaves: I recommend using prewashed and rinsed baby spinach for ease of use. While I prefer fresh spinach for its milder flavor, you can make it with frozen spinach as well.

Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins: 

  • Yogurt: I sometimes add in a few tablespoons of whole milk yogurt for probiotics. Both plain Greek yogurt and vanilla yogurt would work here.
  • Superfoods: If you stock your pantry with superfoods such as chia seeds, ground flax seeds (aka flaxseed meal), and hemp seeds, you can add them in. Additionally, you can add in a few tablespoons of your favorite protein powder and powdered collagen for an extra boost.
  • Other leafy greens: Use other leafy greens like kale (or blanched kale) and spring mix instead of raw spinach. Kale peanut butter smoothie is just as delicious but tastes rather earthy. You can also use swiss chard and collard greens, but I would recommend blanching them first to get rid of some of their bitterness.
  • Sweeteners: If you like your smoothie more on the sweeter side, adding a few tablespoons of maple syrup, a few pitted dates or some honey (non-vegan option) gives is a nice sweetness.
  • Spices: A pinch of cinnamon or nutmeg is an easy way to give in a nice kick of flavor.

How To Make Peanut Butter Banana Spinach Smoothie?

The best part of this spinach breakfast smoothie recipe is that it takes just a few minutes to make. Simply:

A collage of photos showing how to make spinach banana peanut butter smoothie recipe.
  1. Blend: Put spinach leaves, peanut butter, milk of your choice, and frozen banana (and all the optional add-ins) into a blender and blend until creamy and smooth. 
  2. Serve: Pour into a few glasses (or mason jars) and serve right away.

How To Make Ahead and Store Spinach Banana Smoothie?

Whether you make green smoothies like this for breakfast or enjoy them as a post-workout snack, with just a few minutes of advance prep, you can have them in minutes. Here is how I do it:

  • Make Ahead: Portion out all the ingredients (except peanut butter) and place them into a Ziplock bag. Store in the fridge (or freezer). When ready to serve, dump everything in your blender along with peanut butter and blend until smooth.
  • Storing leftovers: I think this peanut butter spinach banana smoothie recipe is best on the day that it is made. However, you can place the leftovers into a mason jar, put the lid on and store it in the fridge for up to 1 day. Just be sure to give it a good shake before serving.

Expert Tips:

  • Adjust the consistency: If you prefer your spinach banana peanut butter smoothie to have a thicker consistency add more frozen bananas along with a handful of ice cubes. And if you want it to have a thinner consistency, simply add more milk to the blender.
  • Use a high powered blender: If you make green monster smoothies like this one on the regular, I highly recommend investing in a high-speed blender. While you can make a good smoothie in any blender, a high-powered one makes it so much easier, especially when blending frozen fruit and leafy greens.
  • Chill your glass: I love serving this in the warmer summer months by the pool as an afternoon snack in a cold glass as an alternative to ice cream. I pour it into chilled glasses and serve it with a few slices of bananas and then let everyone know that I have a delicious green spinach milkshake! It disappears in minutes!
A person pouring smoothie with spinach and banana in a glass.

FAQs:

Why is spinach good in smoothies?

Adding a handful of spinach into your smoothie is a great idea because spinach is a low calorie, nutrient dense food that is packed with fiber, vitamins, and minerals. It also has a mild taste that does not take over the whole smoothie and blends well with the rest of the ingredients.

Are smoothies good for losing weight?

They can be as long as they are consumed in smaller portions and without extra added sugars.

Is peanut butter good for protein smoothies?

Yes, because peanut butter is a great source of plant-based protein, with 8 grams of protein per 2 tablespoons (source.) Adding a few tablespoons of peanut butter is an easy way to get a portion of your daily protein in.

Other Smoothie Recipes You Might Like:

It is no secret that green smoothies like this Spinach Banana Smoothie have a long list of benefits and incorporating them in your daily diet (especially as a substitute for your sweet cravings), will help you feel energized and full. If you agree, here are a few other smoothie recipes you might like:

If you try this healthy peanut butter green smoothie recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Peanut butter and spinach smoothie in a glass garnished with banana slices.
Print

Spinach Peanut Butter Smoothie Recipe

Treat yourself to a refreshing Spinach Peanut Butter Smoothie, crafted with creamy peanut butter, vibrant fresh spinach and a frozen ripe banana. This naturally sweetened green smoothie is ready in 5 minutes and great as a healthy breakfast or post work-out fuel.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 2 servings
Calories 257kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 cups baby spinach leaves
  • 2 cups unsweetened almond milk or any other regular or plant based milk
  • 1 large banana frozen*
  • 3 tablespoons peanut butter creamy and unsalted natural peanut butter
  • 1 tablespoon ground flaxseeds optional – plus more as garnish

Instructions

  • Place all the ingredients into a blender. Blend in high speed until smooth.
  • Pour into glasses and sprinkle with ground flaxseeds (and/or chia seeds.) Serve right away.

Notes

  • Banana: If you do not have a frozen banana, you can use a ripe one and add 1 cup of ice cubes into the blender.
  • Optional sweeteners: If you want your peanut butter smoothie to be sweeter, you can add in a few tablespoons of maple syrup, honey or a few pitted dates and blend until smooth.
  • Consistency: For a thicker smoothie, use an additional half a banana and for a thinner one, use more almond milk.
  • To Make Ahead: Portion all the ingredients (except peanut butter) and place them into a plastic bag. Store in the fridge (or freezer). When ready to serve, dump everything in your blender along with peanut butter and blend until smooth.
  • Storing leftovers: I think this peanut butter spinach banana smoothie recipe is best on the day that it is made. However, you can place the leftovers into a mason jar, put the lid on and store it in the fridge for up to 1 day. Just be sure to give it a good shake before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 257kcal | Carbohydrates: 22g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 354mg | Potassium: 541mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 2851IU | Vitamin C: 14mg | Calcium: 353mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Spinach Peanut Butter Smoothie appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/peanut-butter-spinach-shake/feed/ 8
Sauteed Eggplant https://foolproofliving.com/sauteed-eggplant/ https://foolproofliving.com/sauteed-eggplant/#comments Thu, 30 Mar 2023 15:09:24 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=65625 Eggplant is one of our favorite vegetables here at Foolproof Living, as this nutrient-dense purple veggie is versatile, inexpensive, and easy to cook. If you’re looking for no-fuss, healthy eggplant recipes, we have no shortage on the blog. There are many different ways to prepare eggplant side dishes, such as Charring Eggplant on Stove, Roasting Eggplant Whole, or making Roasted Eggplant Slices and Roasted Eggplant Halves. For a super quick-cooking...

The post Sauteed Eggplant appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Eggplant is one of our favorite vegetables here at Foolproof Living, as this nutrient-dense purple veggie is versatile, inexpensive, and easy to cook. If you’re looking for no-fuss, healthy eggplant recipes, we have no shortage on the blog. There are many different ways to prepare eggplant side dishes, such as Charring Eggplant on Stove, Roasting Eggplant Whole, or making Roasted Eggplant Slices and Roasted Eggplant Halves. For a super quick-cooking option, also try my Air Fried Eggplant

Sauteed eggplant slices on a plate garnished with fresh parsley.

Ingredients

Eggplant caramelizes beautifully with a bit of oil, so all you need for this recipe for pan-fried eggplant are salt, pepper, and garlic to enhance the veggie’s mild, sweet flavor. Below, you’ll find more information about these simple ingredients:

Ingredients needed to make pan fried eggplant from the top view.
  • Fresh Eggplants: We chose to use globe eggplant for this eggplant saute recipe, which is the most widely available in the US. You’ll recognize this type of eggplant as one with shiny skin, a deep purple color, and a rounded shape. However, different varieties of eggplant will also work for this recipe, such as Japanese Eggplant, Chinese Eggplant, or Italian Eggplant. You can even make sautéed White Eggplant!
  • Extra virgin olive oil: Caramelized eggplant recipes often call for olive oil, and I also prefer frying eggplant in olive oil. However, feel free to use any type of vegetable oil or even butter for this recipe. 
  • Fresh garlic cloves: I love the aroma of stir-fried eggplant with garlic. If you’re in a pinch, you can also make sautéed eggplant with garlic powder.
  • Seasonings: We’re keeping the seasonings simple for this recipe. You’ll need kosher salt, ground black pepper, and red pepper flakes (optional). 

Optional Add-Ins & Variations 

While the ingredient list for this simple eggplant recipe is short and sweet, feel free to amp up the flavor of your eggplant side dish by adding toppings and seasonings of your choice. Here are a few suggestions: 

  • Parmesan cheese: Garlic parmesan eggplant is an Italian favorite! Feel free to top your eggplant liberally with parmesan cheese for a nutty taste that pairs beautifully with the caramelized flavor notes. You can also top it with feta cheese for a Mediterranean flair. Both options would pair well with grilled chicken or fish. 
  • Fresh herbs: A sprinkle of fresh herbs, such as fresh parsley or fresh basil leaves, will elevate your pan seared eggplant and add a hint of earthy flavor. 
  • Asian variation: You can easily turn this easy recipe for eggplant saute into an Asian eggplant stir fry, filled with yummy umami flavor, with just a few ingredient swaps. Fry the eggplant in sesame oil and replace the salt with 2 tablespoons of soy sauce. Finish it off with a few sesame seeds and some fresh cilantro. 
  • Sauteed eggplant with onion and garlic: If you have an onion lying around, feel free to dice it and saute it alongside your eggplant for extra aromatics. Sauteed eggplant and onions would pair well with virtually any main dish!

How to Cut Eggplant for Pan Frying?

I chose to cut my eggplant into rounds (slices) for this pan fried eggplant recipe, as I find this to be the quickest and easiest way to prepare it for cooking. Eggplant rounds are also easy to flip, caramelize well, and maintain a soft texture instead of becoming mushy. This method is also ideal if you’re serving your eggplant as a side.

If you plan to use your pan cooked eggplant in a recipe, you may need to dice it instead. Just be aware that sauteed eggplant cubes don’t caramelize as well, so handle them gently. Additionally, in order to prevent them from getting mushy, you would want to be gentle as you flip them.

Follow the instructions below to prepare your eggplant for sauteing. For more detailed instructions, visit my easy guide on How to Cut Eggplant

  • Slices: Rinse the eggplant in cold water and dry it off with a paper towel. Trim the stem end of the eggplant and spin it around to cut off a small part of the bottom. Lay the eggplant on its side and slice it into ½-inch thick rounds.
  • Diced: Trim the eggplant on both ends. Lay the eggplant on its side or stand it up vertically (whichever is more comfortable) and slice it into ½-inch lengthwise slices. Stack the slices on top of one another and cut them vertically into ½ inch sticks. Rotate the sticks 90 degrees and cut ½ inch slices widthwise. You can also cut it into 1-inch cubes, depending on your recipe. 

How to Cook Eggplant on Stove Top

This easy eggplant recipe takes only about 15 minutes and requires only one skillet. Whether you cook your eggplant in slices or cubes, remember to leave them alone while cooking and only flip them once to ensure they take on that beautiful, golden brown color. Below is step by step instructions on how to saute eggplant:

Person showing how to cut eggplant to saute on the stove top.
  1. Slice the eggplant: Cut the eggplant into ½-inch thick rounds. Alternatively, you can also dice your eggplant.
Person seasoning eggplant before sauteing.
  1. Season: Season the eggplant on both sides with salt and pepper. 
person showing how to cook eggplant on stove in a collage of photos.
  1. Saute eggplant: Heat about 2 tablespoons of the oil in a non-stick, large skillet over medium-high heat until it is shimmering hot. Arrange half of the slices in the skillet in a single layer and fry eggplant in olive oil for 5-7 minutes per side or until golden brown and caramelized.  If you are cooking cubed eggplant, the cooking time would be a few minutes shorter.
  2. Repeat: Before cooking the second batch of eggplant slices, pat them dry on both sides with a paper towel (they tend to sweat as they sit). Add two more tablespoons of oil to the skillet and repeat the above process to saute the remaining eggplant slices. 
  3. Garnish and serve: Transfer the caramelized eggplant to a serving plate and garnish with your toppings of choice, such as a sprinkle of parmesan, fresh herbs, and chili flakes. 

How to Store, Reheat, & Freeze

I prefer to serve my eggplant stovetop recipe immediately after cooking, but you can always store and reheat your leftovers to enjoy on another day. Sauteed eggplant is also delicious when served cold, especially on sandwiches or salads! Here are some storage and reheating tips:

  • Store: Bring your eggplant saute to room temperature before placing it in an airtight container. It will keep in the fridge for 3-5 days. 
  • Reheat: When it comes to reheating eggplant, you have a few options. I recommend reheating in a 300-degree F air fryer for about 3-5 minutes or in a 350-degree F oven for a few minutes or until warmed through. Alternatively, you can also reheat the eggplant slices in a non-stick skillet until warm. Make sure to keep a close eye on them, as they can burn quickly.  
  • Freeze: To freeze your pan roasted eggplant, I recommend the flash-freezing method. Bring the slices to room temperature, arrange them in one layer on a parchment-lined baking sheet, and place them in the freezer. Once they are frozen, you can put parchment sheets between each slice to prevent them from sticking together and store them in a freezer-safe plastic bag or sealed container. 

Expert Tips

While this healthy eggplant recipe is pretty straightforward, I’ve learned some tips and tricks along the way that helped me achieve golden brown, tender, and sweet eggplant rather than mushy, bland slices. Here’s what you need to know:

  • Sliced crosswise vs. diced: How you cut your eggplant will affect the outcome of this recipe. I find that sauteing eggplant slices is easier than cooking diced eggplant, as slices are easier to flip, have more surface area for caramelization, and hold their shape without getting mushy. It’s possible to caramelize your pan fried eggplant cubes, but they tend to get mushy while cooking. To avoid this problem, leave your cubed eggplant alone as much as possible and turn them one by one (gently!) in the skillet. Also, make sure to saute eggplant cubes in one layer to avoid overcrowding. If you need to cook them in batches, add more oil between each batch if there’s not enough excess oil from the previous batch. 
  • If using diced eggplant, keep the peel on: If you’re cooking diced eggplant to add to various sauteed eggplant recipes, I recommend keeping the peel on. This layer of tougher skin will help them hold their shape while cooking. 
  • Salting your eggplant: Chefs used to generously salt eggplants before cooking them to remove bitter flavors. This technique is, for the most part, no longer necessary because modern farming has eliminated most of the bitter flavors from the vegetable. If you picked up your eggplant from the farmer’s market or if you grew it yourself, you may need to season it before cooking. To learn more, check out my How to Salt Eggplant guide. 
  • Cut your eggplant right before using: Once sliced, eggplants oxidize and turn brown very quickly, so make sure to cut your eggplant right before you intend to use it. Alternatively, you can fill a large bowl with tap water and add a few tablespoons of salt and place your cut eggplant slices or cubes to prevent them from changing their color.
  • Use a non-stick skillet: Even with the help of oil, eggplant tends to stick to skillets that aren’t non-stick. To successfully pan fry eggplant, you’ll want to use a non-stick saute pan (affiliate link) to ensure even cooking and avoid a mess! 
  • Don’t overcrowd the skillet: You may be tempted to add all your eggplant slices to the skillet at once, but it’s very important that each slice has room to cook and brown evenly. If you’re cooking eggplant on stovetop in several batches, make sure to add more oil before each batch.
  • Use visual cues: Cooking time for your eggplant will depend on the size and thickness of your slices. While it should take about 5-7 minutes per side, you’ll know the eggplant is done when it appears golden brown and caramelized. 
  • Don’t skimp on garnishes: Eggplant is still delicious with simple seasonings, but you can really elevate the flavor by adding lots of garnishes. I love to top mine with fresh herbs, parmesan cheese, and a sprinkle of chili flakes. 
Sauteed eggplant cubes in a plate from the top view.

What to Serve with Pan-Fried Eggplant?

Since this eggplant side dish recipe is so simple and versatile, you can pair it with virtually any main you’d like! Feel free to switch up the garnishes and seasonings for your sauteed eggplant to complement the flavor profile of your main dish. Here are a few pairing suggestions:

  • Chicken recipes: Chicken and a veggie side dish is a classic combo. Serve your seared eggplant with my juicy Yogurt Marinated Chicken or Air Fried Cornish Hens for a dinner-party-ready spread, or have an Italian night by serving it with Baked Chicken Parm
  • Seafood: For a fresh, light spring or summer meal, serve your eggplant side dish with a flavorful seafood recipe. Fire up your grill on a nice day and make my Grilled Mahi Mahi, Shrimp Scampi, or Shrimp Kabobs
  • Vegetarian: Get creative with your flavor profiles and pair your quick eggplant recipe with a yummy vegetarian main. Top your skillet eggplant with feta cheese for a Mediterranean flair, and serve it with Quinoa Salad with Feta or Quinoa Tabbouleh. Or, sprinkle your eggplant dish with parmesan cheese and pair it with my delicious Italian eggplant recipe, Baked Eggplant Parmesan.

FAQs

Do you peel eggplant before sauteing?

There’s no need to peel before cooking eggplant on the stove, as the peel softens during the cooking process. Eggplant skin even contains some nutrients! Leaving the peel on also helps your eggplant slices keep their shape while cooking. You can, however, peel your eggplant with a vegetable peeler if preferred (I recommend peeling it before cutting it into your desired shape).

Should I salt eggplant before sauteing?

In the past, salting eggplant was a necessary method to get rid of the vegetable’s bitter taste, but nowadays, modern farming techniques have reduced the bitterness of eggplants. If you bought your eggplant from your local grocery store, you don’t need to salt it, but if you purchased it from a farmer’s market, grew it yourself, or have a big eggplant, salting it before cooking on the stove would not hurt. For additional details, refer to my tutorial on salting eggplant.

How long to cook eggplant on stove?

If you are cooking eggplant slices, it is best to cook them for 5-7 minutes on each side for a total of 10-14 minutes, whereas if you are sauteeing eggplant cubes, you should cook them 4-5 minutes per side for a total of 10-12 minutes. They should be perfectly sauteed when they turn golden brown.

Other Easy Eggplant Recipes You Might Also Like

If you can’t get enough of this yummy purple veggie after trying this sauteed eggplant recipe (we don’t blame you), then you’ll be glad to know that we have many other easy eggplant recipes here on the blog. Check out the links below for more quick recipes with eggplant: 

If you try this Sautéed Eggplant Recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Sauteed eggplant on a plate garnished with parsley.
Print

Sauteed Eggplant Recipe

Sauteed eggplant is an easy yet delicious dish that can be used as a side dish or as a flavorful addition to various eggplant recipes. Whether sliced or cubed, this versatile vegetable can be sauteed using just a few ingredients to create a dish that is quick and easy to prepare.
Course Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 1 eggplant
Calories 140kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 Globe Eggplant ~1lb – rinsed and dried
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 4 tablespoons olive oil plus more as needed

Optional Garnishes

  • 1 tablespoon parmesan cheese
  • 1 tablespoon fresh herbs such as fresh basil leaves or parsley
  • 1 Pinch of red pepper flakes optional

Instructions

  • Slice eggplant crosswise in ½-inch-thick rounds*.
  • Sprinkle eggplant slices with salt and pepper on both sides.
  • Heat half of the oil in a large non-stick skillet over medium heat. Add half of the eggplant slices in a single layer and cook for 6-7 minutes on each side or until it is slightly caramelized and turned golden brown.
  • Before sauteing the remaining eggplant slices, pat them dry on both sides with a paper towel, as they tend to sweat as they sit. Repeat the cooking process using the remaining olive oil for the rest of the eggplant.
  • Transfer the now-pan-fried eggplant onto a plate and garnish with parmesan cheese, fresh herbs, and chili flakes, if desired.

Notes

  • Sauteed eggplant cubes: Alternatively, you can cut your eggplant into 1-inch cubes and pan-sear them in oil following the same recipe. I prefer sauteing diced eggplant if I am using Chinese or Japanese eggplants instead of large globe or Italian eggplants. However, when sauteing diced eggplant, it is important to pay attention to a few things:
    • Do not stir them so much: To avoid eggplant cubes becoming mushy, refrain from stirring them excessively while cooking. It’s better to leave them alone and check for doneness by testing a single cube. When one side turns golden brown, turn each cube one by one to ensure even cooking.
    • Be aware of the shorter cooking time: They tend to cook quicker than sliced eggplants, so it is best to cook them for 4-5 minutes on each side (a total of 10 minutes or so).
    • Do not crowd the pan: Depending on the size of your eggplant, saute diced eggplant in two batches making sure to cook them on a single layer using more oil as needed.
    • Keep the skin on: When pan-frying eggplant cubes, I prefer not to peel the eggplant as leaving the skin on helps keep their shape.
  • Store: Bring the sauteed eggplant to room temperature before placing it in an airtight container. It will keep in the fridge for 3-5 days.
  • Reheat: When it comes to reheating eggplant, you have a few options. I recommend reheating in a 300-degree F air fryer for about 3-5 minutes or in a 350-degree F oven for a few minutes or until warmed through. Alternatively, you can also reheat the eggplant slices in a non-stick skillet until warm. Keep a close eye on them, as they can burn quickly.  
  • Freeze: Bring the sauteed eggplant slices to room temperature, arrange them in one layer on a parchment-lined baking sheet, and place them in the freezer. Once they are frozen, you can put parchment sheets between each slice to prevent them from sticking together and store them in a freezer-safe plastic bag or sealed container. 

Nutrition

Calories: 140kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 3mg | Sodium: 1271mg | Potassium: 1102mg | Fiber: 14g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 781IU | Vitamin C: 15mg | Calcium: 112mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Sauteed Eggplant appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/sauteed-eggplant/feed/ 4
Alison Roman’s “The Stew” Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/alison-roman-the-stew/ https://foolproofliving.com/alison-roman-the-stew/#comments Sat, 25 Mar 2023 18:47:13 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=65568 Cookbook author and New York Times columnist Alison Roman first published the Alison Roman Chickpea Stew in The New York Times in 2018. The recipe quickly took the internet by storm, gaining popularity among home chefs and food lovers on social media through its own hashtag #TheStew.  The NYT chickpea stew recipe has many renditions today, so you may also see it referred to online as “Chickpea Turmeric Stew,” “Chickpea...

The post Alison Roman’s “The Stew” Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Cookbook author and New York Times columnist Alison Roman first published the Alison Roman Chickpea Stew in The New York Times in 2018. The recipe quickly took the internet by storm, gaining popularity among home chefs and food lovers on social media through its own hashtag #TheStew. 

The NYT chickpea stew recipe has many renditions today, so you may also see it referred to online as “Chickpea Turmeric Stew,” “Chickpea Curry Stew,” or “Coconut Curry Chickpea Stew.” Because of its original publication in The New York Times, you may also see it appear as “The New York Times Chickpea Stew” or the “NY Times Chickpea Stew.” Whatever you’d like to call it, Alison Roman’s viral recipe is truly delicious and worth a try!

Alison Roman's chickpea stew in a bowl garnished with yogurt and mint leaves.

Ingredients

The beauty of this vegetarian chickpea stew is that, because of its short ingredient list of pantry staples, it’s budget-friendly and requires little to no grocery shopping if you have a well-stocked kitchen. Here’s what you’ll need to make the Alison Roman stew recipe: 

Ingredients for chickpea stew by Alison Roman are in small bowls from the top view.
  • Olive oil: Garbanzo beans love to bathe in oil, so you’ll need about a ¼ cup. 
  • Aromatics: Onion, fresh ginger, and garlic deepen the stew’s flavors and add a nice aroma. 
  • Spices and seasonings: You’ll need ground turmeric, red pepper flakes (optional), kosher salt, and black pepper. 
  • Canned garbanzo beans: Spiced chickpeas, also known as garbanzo beans, are the star of the show in this recipe. The canned version is easy, inexpensive, and convenient, but you can also cook your own dried chickpeas if you’d prefer. Just ensure that the ones you use in this recipe are cooked.   
  • Full-fat coconut milk: According to Roman, full-fat coconut milk yields the best results for this chickpea coconut stew. You’ll want to avoid lite coconut milk, low-fat coconut milk, cream of coconut, or coconut milk that’s meant for drinking, as these variations will alter the consistency of the stew. 
  • Vegetable stock: You can also use chicken stock (I make mine following Barefoot Contessa’s Chicken Stock recipe) if preferred. 
  • Hearty leafy greens: Use your favorite hearty leafy green, such as kale, collard greens, swiss chard, baby spinach, or mustard greens. However, remember that swiss chard and spinach will wilt and soften much faster than kale or collard greens. 
  • Fresh herbs: Fresh herbs, such as mint, parsley, or cilantro, add the perfect finishing touch and hint of flavor to this recipe. 
  • Garnishes and accompaniments: Finish off your stew with a dollop of greek yogurt (or sour cream), a good drizzle of olive oil, a squeeze of lime juice, and a handful of fresh mint. You can also finish it off with extra chili flakes for a spicy chickpea soup. Serve with bread on the side, if preferred. 

Optional Add-Ins

Don’t be afraid to make this Alison Roman The Stew recipe your own by tossing in additional ingredients to amp up the flavor profile, make it more hearty, or add extra nutrients. Here are some suggestions: 

  • More vegetables: In my opinion, you can’t add too many veggies to a stew! To boost your turmeric chickpea stew with extra nutrition, stir in ½ cup of chopped carrots, celery, sweet potato, and baby bok choy. Roman recommends cooking the carrots, celery, and sweet potatoes along with the aromatics, but you’ll want to add in the bok choy during the last five minutes of cooking. 
  • Add a carb: While this stew is pretty filling on its own, you can make it especially hearty by adding a carb. I personally like to toss in some ramen noodles about three minutes or so before serving. You can also add some quinoa about 10 minutes before serving to give the stew extra body and heartiness. 
  • Make it richer: If you are a fan of turmeric and are like me, have a batch of homemade golden paste in your fridge at all times, use a tablespoon of it instead of using ground turmeric spice.

How to Make Alison Roman’s Chickpea Stew?

With just a few minutes of prep time and a little over a half hour of cook time, this creamy, flavorful, and spicy chickpea stew with garlicky coconut milk is ready to enjoy. Plus, it all comes together in one pot! Here’s how to make it: 

A collage of images showing how to sauté onions and crush spiced chickpeas with a wooden spoon.
  1. Cook the onion: Heat the oil over medium heat in a large pot or dutch oven. Add the onion and cook for 5-6 minutes, or until the onion is translucent, making sure to stir occasionally.
  2. Add additional aromatics and spices: Add the ginger, minced garlic cloves, ground turmeric, and a sprinkle of red pepper flakes to the pot and cook for 2 minutes, stirring often. 
  3. Fry the garbanzo beans: Pour in the cans of chickpeas (drained and rinsed) and let the chickpeas sizzle and break down, stirring frequently, for 8-10 minutes.
  4. Crush the garbanzo beans: Remove a cup of chickpeas to use for garnish. Using the back of a wooden spoon or a spatula, gently crush the remaining chickpeas against the side of the pot to help them release their starchy insides. Doing so will help make the stew a bit thicker, so do not skip this step.
Images showing how to simmer the spiced chickpea stew with coconut and turmeric.
  1. Add the liquids: Pour in the cans of coconut milk and vegetable broth and season with a pinch of salt and pepper. Stir, making sure to scrape the pot to remove any bits that are stuck to the bottom. 
  2. Simmer: Place the lid on the pot, bring it to a boil, then reduce the heat to medium-low. Let simmer for 25-30 minutes.
  3. Add the greens: Use your hands to chop the kale or leafy greens of your choosing into bite-size pieces and add them to the pot. Cook for an additional 5 minutes or until the greens are soft. Taste and adjust seasoning if needed. 
  4. Serve: Ladle into bowls and garnish with the reserved garbanzo beans and other toppings of your choosing. Serve with bread on the side, if preferred. 

How to Make Ahead, Store, Reheat, & Freeze?

This coconut chickpea stew is quick enough to whip up for an easy weeknight meal, but it’s also make-ahead friendly and stores well as part of your weekly meal prep. Here are some tips: 

  • Make ahead: To make this recipe ahead of time, follow the above instructions through step 6. You’ll want to add in your greens right before serving, as they tend to become wilted and soggy as the stew sits. 
  • Store: To store, bring the leftover kale and chickpea stew to room temperature before ladling it into an airtight container (you can also portion it out into several containers). It will keep in the fridge for up to 5 days. 
  • Freeze: Bring the stew to room temperature and store it in a freezer-safe container for up to 2 months. 
  • Thaw: Thaw your frozen stew overnight in the fridge. Reheat per the instructions below. 
  • Reheat: You can reheat your leftover stew on the stovetop or, in a pinch, microwave it in 30 seconds intervals until warmed through, making sure to give it a stir after each interval. 

What Goes with Alison Roman Chickpea Stew?

Because of its Indian and Caribbean influences, this chickpea stew with coconut milk pairs beautifully with Middle Eastern and Mediterranean-style flatbreads. To round out your meal, you can also pair your stew with a simple green salad or a healthy grain. If you’re wondering what to serve with this chickpea stew recipe, here are a few additional ideas:

  • Serve it with bread: Bread is a no-brainer side to pair with a stew, and we especially love to dip our bread in that delicious leftover broth! I recommend pairing your coconut turmeric soup with a flatbread like Naan, Pita, or Lavash for a Middle Eastern flair. Also, my artisan-style, crusty, No-Knead Bread never met a stew it didn’t like. 
  • Pair it with a green salad: To get in your daily dose of greens, whip up an easy, nutrient-dense salad to enjoy as a side dish with your warm bowl of curry chickpea stew. My favorites are this Kale Quinoa Salad, this simple Spring Mix Salad, and my colorful Harvest Salad. Serve it with a glass of crisp white wine on the side and call it a dinner!
  • Add some cooked grains: If you prefer a hearty, filling stew, I recommend adding some cooked grains to offer texture, substance, fiber, and carbs. My favorites are quinoa and bulgur, and I even have how-to guides on the blog for Cooked Quinoa and Cooked Bulgur. For additional flavor, try serving it with my yummy Bulgur Pilaf
Chickpea stew garnished with fresh mint leaves and yogurt in a bowl with a spoon on the side.

Expert Tips

Since this stew recipe is adapted from the original version created by Alison Roman, I learned a few tips and tricks from her while researching the recipe. I’ve included these tips below to help you achieve expert-level results on your first try:

  • Season as you go: Roman adds salt various times throughout the original recipe, which helps her ensure that each ingredient is properly seasoned. However, this is a bit too much salt for my preference, so I cut down on the salt a bit for my version of her recipe. However, I suggest that you taste as you go and adjust the salt to your liking. 
  • Simmer to your preferred thickness: This coconut ginger chickpea soup begins with a soup-like consistency and must simmer for about a half hour to take on a thicker, stew-like consistency. You can simmer it for less time if you’d prefer a coconut chickpea soup, or a bit longer if you’re after that perfect stew thickness. It’s up to you! 
  • Break those chickpeas! Do not skip the part where you break the garbanzo beans with the back of the spoon, as it will help thicken the stew.

FAQs

Can you freeze Alison Roman’s chickpea stew?

Yes, you can. After making your garbanzo bean stew, let it cool to room temperature. Ladle it into a freezer-safe airtight container and freeze for up to 2 months.

Is chickpea a carb or protein?

While garbanzo beans are considered a plant-based protein, they are also a good source of fiber, vitamins, and minerals. A 1-cup serving of garbanzo beans contains about 269 calories, of which about 67% are from carbohydrates. The remaining calories come from its protein and fat content.

Other Curry Recipes You Might Also Like

There’s nothing like an aromatic, warming, perfectly spiced bowl of curry to enjoy on a cool day (or even a warm one!), especially if you are a fan of the anti-inflammatory benefits of turmeric spice. If you love Middle Eastern, Indian, and Asian-inspired dishes with bold flavors like this curried chickpea stew, you’ll love these recipes below:

If you try Alison Roman’s Chickpea Stew Recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Alison Roman The Stew recipe in a bowl garnished with a dollop of yogurt.
Print

Alison Roman The Stew Recipe

Here is the viral recipe for Alison Roman’s “The Stew” that had gained popularity in the last few years. Essentially a vegan stew that is made with spiced chickpeas, coconut milk, ginger, garlic and turmeric, this easy recipe comes together in a pot and perfect for a Tuesday night.
Course Soup, Stew
Cuisine Indian
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 553kcal

Ingredients

  • ¼ cup olive oil plus more for drizzling
  • 1 large yellow onion chopped
  • 1 tablespoon fresh ginger finely chopped – from a 2-inch piece ginger
  • 4 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 ½ teaspoons ground turmeric
  • ½ teaspoon crushed red pepper or chili flakes optional
  • 2 cans chickpeas (15-ounces each) drained and rinsed
  • 2 cans full-fat coconut milk (15-ounces each)
  • 2 cups vegetable stock
  • 1 ½ teaspoons kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 2 cups kale leaves torn into bite-sized pieces – other greens like Swiss chard and collard greens would also work
  • 1 cup fresh mint leaves or cilantro

For serving (optional):

  • Plain Yogurt
  • Toasted Pita or lavash bread

Instructions

  • Heat oil in a large Dutch oven over medium-high heat. Add the onion and cook, stirring occasionally, until softened 5-6 minutes.
  • Add the ginger, garlic, ground turmeric, and crushed red pepper and cook for 2 more minutes, stirring frequently.
  • Add the garbanzo beans and fry them in oil and spices while stirring frequently until they start to break down for about 8-10 minutes.
  • Using a spatula or a wooden spoon, crush the garbanzo beans slightly to release some of their starches (which will help thicken the stew.) Remove a cup of stewed chickpeas for garnish.
  • Add the coconut milk, vegetable stock, and salt and pepper. Scrape down the bits at the bottom of the pot and give it a good stir.
  • Put the lid on, bring it to a boil, turn down the heat to medium-low, and let it simmer for 25-30 minutes or until it thickens to your liking.
  • Add kale leaves and cook for 5 more minutes or until kale leaves are nice and soft.
  • Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.
  • Ladle into bowls. Garnish with the reserved garbanzo beans, red pepper flakes, and a drizzle of olive oil.
  • Serve it with yogurt and pita bread (or lavash) on the side.

Notes

  • Season as you go: In the original recipe, Roman adds salt after each step, which helps her ensure that each ingredient is properly seasoned. However, this is a bit too much salt for my preference (especially if you are using any other salt then Diamond kosher salt), so I cut down on the salt a bit for my version of her recipe. However, I suggest that you taste as you go and adjust the salt to your liking. 
  • Simmer to your preferred thickness: This stew begins with a soup-like consistency and must simmer for about a half hour to take on a thicker, stew-like consistency. You can simmer it for less time if you’d prefer more of a soup or a bit longer if you’re after that perfect stew thickness. It’s up to you!
  • Break those chickpeas! Do not skip the part where you break the garbanzo beans with the back of the spoon, as it helps with thickening the stew.
  • Make ahead: To make this recipe ahead of time, follow the above instructions through step 6. You’ll want to add in your greens right before serving, as they tend to become wilted and soggy as the stew sits. 
  • Store: To store, bring the stew to room temperature before placing it into an airtight container (you can also portion it out into several containers). It will keep in the fridge for up to 5 days. 
  • Freeze: Bring the stew to room temperature and store it in a freezer-safe container for up to 2 months. 
  • Thaw: Thaw your frozen stew overnight in the fridge. Reheat per the instructions below.
  • Reheat: You can reheat your leftover stew on the stovetop or, in a pinch, microwave it in 30 seconds intervals until warmed through, making sure to give it a stir after each interval. 

Nutrition

Calories: 553kcal | Carbohydrates: 35g | Protein: 12g | Fat: 44g | Saturated Fat: 30g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Sodium: 1353mg | Potassium: 756mg | Fiber: 12g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 2790IU | Vitamin C: 30mg | Calcium: 161mg | Iron: 5mg

The post Alison Roman’s “The Stew” Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/alison-roman-the-stew/feed/ 2
Air Fryer Beets https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-beets/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-beets/#respond Tue, 07 Feb 2023 17:57:36 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=64487 It’s no wonder why air fryer vegetables are so popular. From these beets cooked in air fryer to Air Fryer Corn, Air Fryer Asparagus, and even Air Fryer Green Beans, air-fried veggies are an easy way to pack major nutrition with few calories and exquisite taste. Plus, unlike veggies roasted in the oven, these recipes take less than 15 minutes to make—with five ingredients or fewer! Learning how to air...

The post Air Fryer Beets appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
It’s no wonder why air fryer vegetables are so popular. From these beets cooked in air fryer to Air Fryer Corn, Air Fryer Asparagus, and even Air Fryer Green Beans, air-fried veggies are an easy way to pack major nutrition with few calories and exquisite taste. Plus, unlike veggies roasted in the oven, these recipes take less than 15 minutes to make—with five ingredients or fewer!

Roasted beetroot in air fryer served in a bowl shown from the top view.

Learning how to air fry beets is a simple skill any chef can benefit from. This guide has what you need, from how to cook whole beets in an air fryer to peeling tips.

Ingredients

You only need four basic ingredients to whip up this air fryer beets recipe. Fast, tasty, and gluten-free, this delectable recipe won’t require any last-minute trips to the grocery store.

  • Beets: Many different beet varieties will work for this air fryer recipe. Red beets, golden beets, and Chioggia beets (AKA candy cane beets) are just a few of my favorites. Whichever type you choose, just be sure to peel and cut them into small, 1-inch chunks before cooking them in your air fryer. With that being said, you can roast beets as a whole or with other root vegetables (i.e., sweet potatoes and carrots.)
  • Oil: You can use either olive oil or avocado oil when cooking beets in an air fryer.
  • Salt and black pepper: These two simple seasonings are the key to bringing out your air fryer beets’ earthy flavor and natural sweetness.
Ingredients for air fried root vegetables in bowls from the top view.

Optional Add-Ins

  • Other root vegetables: Take this easy side dish to the next level by air frying your beets alongside another nutritious vegetable. Air fryer beets and carrots make a tender, filling combination, while air fryer beets and sweet potatoes will tantalize your tastebuds with a mildly sweet flavor. Or, roast all three together for a colorful veggie mix!
  • Seasonings: Herby and light, fresh herbs like mint or parsley make a fantastic addition to your air fryer roasted beets. Or, top your beets with Italian seasoning for an extra earthy flavor.
  • Toppings: If you’re a fan of rich, creamy flavor, you’ll love topping your roasted beets with goat cheese or feta cheese. Add a drizzle of olive oil, and your whole table will ask for seconds.

How to Cook Beets in Air Fryer?

Anyone can prepare roasted beets in an air fryer in minutes. In just five steps, these simple instructions will have even novice chefs making this great healthy side dish.

  1. Prepare the beets: Preheat the air fryer to 400 degrees F. Peel and cut beets into 1-inch pieces.
A person adding olive oil and salt to sliced beets in a bowl.
  1. Toss the ingredients: Transfer the beet pieces to a mixing bowl. Drizzle them with olive oil, sprinkle them with salt and black pepper, and toss the ingredients until thoroughly combined.
Roasting beets in air fryer from the top view.
  1. Add beets to the basket: Arrange the seasoned beets in a single layer in the air fryer basket.
  2. Cook beets in the air fryer: Place beets in the air fryer and cook for 15 minutes, flipping them halfway through the frying process.
  3. Serve: Transfer the air-fried beets to a serving platter and add additional seasoning if necessary.

Can I Cook Whole Beets in Air Fryer?

Yes! You can easily make roasted whole beets in the air fryer and eliminate the extra prep time that comes with chopping. 

With that being said, there’s a direct correlation between size and air frying time, so choosing similarly-sized veggies is essential to ensure even cooking. Therefore, when roasting whole beets in an air fryer, I recommend selecting beets that are small and close to the same size. 

Roasted whole beets air fryer method shown from the top view.

The process and the air frying temperature do not change when roasting whole beets in an air fryer. Simply air fry your whole beets at 400 degrees F. and test for doneness after 15 minutes, flipping the veggies halfway through. Keep in mind, however, that it can take up to 20-25 minutes to roast whole beets in an air fryer, depending on the size of your beets.

You will also need to peel your veggies before placing the whole beets in the air fryer, as peeling them afterward will be more difficult. Using a vegetable peeler will make this step particularly easy.

How to Store, Reheat, and Freeze?

Air-fried beetroot is fantastic when it comes to easy storage. Whether you freeze your air fry beets for months or save your leftovers for the next day, these storage tips are a meal prep must.

  • Store: Once you cook your beets in the air fryer, let them cool completely. Then, store them in an airtight container for up to four days.
  • Reheat: I love to eat my leftover beets cold. However, you can also reheat your beetroot in the air fryer should you prefer to eat them warm. Place your leftovers in the air fryer for 3-4 minutes at 350 degrees F.
  • Freeze: To ensure your air-fried beets maintain their tender, roasted texture, you’ll need to flash-freeze them. Spread the cooled beets on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper and freeze them solid. Then, transfer the pieces to a freezer-safe bag, remove as much air as possible, and freeze for up to three months.

How to Serve Air Fried Beets?

When you roast beets in an air fryer, you can design your menu in countless different ways. These menu ideas guarantee a five-star meal, from crisp salads to hearty mains.

  • Top off a salad: Tender and flavorful, roasted beets from an air fryer make an excellent salad topper. Roasted Beet Salad is one of my favorite beet recipes to prepare during busy weekdays.
  • Serve it as a side with meat: If you want a meal to impress, you’ll adore this sophisticated pair. After cooking beetroot in the air fryer, sprinkle it with feta or goat cheese and fresh herbs, such as fresh mint or parsley, and serve it alongside a hearty protein. Air-fried beets go exceptionally well with elevated meat dishes, such as Instant Pot Lamb Shanks or Reverse Sear Chateaubriand.
  • On top of hummus: Out of all the great combinations, easy roasted air fryer beets and savory hummus are among the greatest. Add your cooked beets to tasty hummus recipes, like my Mediterranean Hummus or Carrot Hummus, and you won’t believe how much variation you can achieve in your snacks.

Expert Tips

There’s no secret to this mouthwatering air fryer beet recipe. Following these pro cooking tips, your beets will be perfectly tender and exquisitely crisp every time.

  • Oil: One tablespoon is the ideal amount of oil for 1 pound of fresh beets that are medium-sized. We initially tried making this recipe using a teaspoon of oil as we wanted to use the least amount of oil possible. However, we quickly found out that an adequate amount of oil is an important factor when it comes to ensuring that your beets don’t dry up or lose their tender texture during the air frying process.
  • Peeling and cutting: For the best results, I recommend peeling and cutting your raw beets into 1-inch chunks before air frying them. This is not to say you can not do it later, but we found it much easier to do it beforehand.
Air fryer beets and sweet potatoes in a bowl from the top view.
  • Roast with other root vegetables: If you can’t get enough vegetarian recipes, you’ll love air frying your beets alongside another nutritious root vegetable. Carrots and sweet potatoes are two of my favorite air-fried pairs, and they take the same amount of time in the air fryer to cook properly.
  • Don’t overcrowd the basket: When air frying beets, it’s essential that you don’t overcrowd the air fryer basket, as too many beets will result in uneven cooking. I also recommend tossing your beets halfway through the roasting process to give each side equal roasting time.

FAQs

How long does it take to cook beets in an air fryer?

The total time it takes to make air fryer roasted beets is 15 minutes at 400 degrees F. However, there is a direct correlation between the size of the beets and air frying time. For best results, we recommend cutting beets in equal sizes before roasting them in the air fryer.

Is it better to peel beets before or after roasting them in the air fryer?

I highly recommend peeling your beets before cooking them in your air fryer. Unlike boiled beets, air-fried beet skin is much more difficult to remove after cooking.

Can you air fry canned beets?

If necessary, you can roast canned beets in an air fryer. Just be sure to dry each piece as much as possible with a clean paper towel before mixing it with the oil and seasonings.

Can you roast golden beets in the air fryer?

Yes! If you want a zesty, mellow alternative to red beets, air fryer golden beets are an excellent choice. The process and air frying time do not change. Simply follow the air fryer beets recipe below as written.

How to check the doneness of air-fried beets?

To see if your air fryer beets don’t need more cooking, insert a knife into their center. If the blade enters easily, your beets are ready to serve. If the knife finds resistance, you may add a few minutes of cooking time.

Other Air Fryer Vegetable Recipes You Might Like

I think we can all agree that air fryer veggies are healthy and easy to make. Not to mention, they make a great side dish. Here are a few more easy recipes to help you satisfy your cravings and get your fill of healthy nutrients:

If you try this Air Fryer Beets recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Roasted carrots and beets in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Air Fryer Beets Recipe

These Air Fryer Beets are a colorful, nutritious, and easy side dish that's suitable for any occasion. Thanks to the speedy air fryer, these veggies are ready in under 30 minutes! Serve them as an elegant accompaniment to a dinner entree, as a topping for your favorite salad, or even for a quick and satisfying snack.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 2 cups
Calories 160kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 pound beets red, gold or Chioggia beets would all work
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt plus more to taste
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

Instructions

  • Preheat the air fryer and prep the beets: Preheat the air fryer to 400 degrees F. Peel and cut beets into 1-inch pieces.
  • Season the beets: Transfer to a large bowl, drizzle with olive oil, and sprinkle with salt and pepper. Toss to combine.
  • Transfer to the air fryer: Transfer the beets into the now-preheated air fryer basket and make sure they are in a single layer.
  • Air fry: Air fry for 15 minutes or until they are fork tender. Be sure to turn once halfway through the air frying process.
  • Serve: Carefully transfer them to a serving platter, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary.

Notes

  • Store: Once you cook your beets in the air fryer, let them cool completely. Then, store them in an airtight container for up to four days.
  • Reheat: I love to eat my leftover beets cold. However, you can also reheat your beets in the air fryer should you prefer to eat them warm. Place your leftovers in the air fryer for 3-4 minutes at 350 degrees F.
  • Freeze: To ensure your air-fried beets maintain their tender, roasted texture, you’ll need to flash-freeze them. Spread the cooled beets on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper and freeze them solid. Then, transfer the pieces to a freezer-safe bag, remove as much air as possible, and freeze for up to three months.
  • Roasting whole beets: You can roast whole beets in the air fryer. However, please remember that there’s a direct correlation between size and air frying time, so choosing similarly-sized veggies is essential to ensure even cooking. Therefore, when shopping for beets, purchase beets that are small and equal in size. The ones you see in the photos took about 15-20 minutes, but larger ones would take more time to fry.
  • Using other root vegetables: Thanks to similar air frying times, you can roast sweet potatoes and carrots along with beets.

Nutrition

Calories: 160kcal | Carbohydrates: 22g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 758mg | Potassium: 741mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 15g | Vitamin A: 76IU | Vitamin C: 11mg | Calcium: 38mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Air Fryer Beets appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-beets/feed/ 0
Kale Chips with Nutritional Yeast https://foolproofliving.com/cheesy-oven-roasted-kale-chips/ https://foolproofliving.com/cheesy-oven-roasted-kale-chips/#comments Fri, 03 Feb 2023 20:48:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=5103 Short on time? If you have an air fryer, be sure to also try our Air Fryer Kale Chips recipe, which takes less than 5 minutes to make from start to finish. These homemade kale chips are my favorite way to curb an afternoon salt craving, and they couldn’t be easier to throw together. If you find yourself grabbing for the crunchy, salty, savory snacks throughout the day, you’ll be...

The post Kale Chips with Nutritional Yeast appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Short on time? If you have an air fryer, be sure to also try our Air Fryer Kale Chips recipe, which takes less than 5 minutes to make from start to finish.

These homemade kale chips are my favorite way to curb an afternoon salt craving, and they couldn’t be easier to throw together. If you find yourself grabbing for the crunchy, salty, savory snacks throughout the day, you’ll be amazed at how these vegan cheesy kale chips are a great way to replace a bag of chips or pretzels. 

Kale Chips with nutritional yeast after they are baked on a sheet pan.

Not to mention, having your choice of seasoning for kale chips (more on that below) gives you unlimited options of flavors each time you make them. So, go ahead, make your own kale chips, and enjoy a great snack that happens to be good for you.

Ingredients

This quick and easy recipe for kale chips with nutritional yeast requires only a few ingredients.

Ingredients for the recipe are placed in bowls from the top view.
  • Kale: Curly kale or lacinato kale (aka dinosaur kale) would both work in this recipe. If you are new to buying kale, be sure to check out our guide on the different varieties of kale.
  • Oil: I recommend using avocado oil, olive oil, or coconut oil. You can even use tahini (sesame paste), which will pair beautifully with the nutritional yeast. Though it is important to thoroughly whisk your tahini before massaging it into the kale.
  • Nutritional yeast: Nutritional yeast is the ingredient that gives these vegan kale chips their great cheesy flavor. The cheesy-tasting cousin to baker’s yeast, nutritional yeast is rich in nutrients. It is mostly used in place of cheese in vegan recipes (such as this vegan nacho cheese sauce) mainly because it tastes very similar to parmesan cheese. In this cheesy kale chips recipe, it is the savory element that makes them extra delicious. You can often find it in the healthy section of the store or order it online (affiliate link.)

Seasonings for Kale Chips:

The best part of this recipe is that it is incredibly versatile; you can easily make it your own by adding a variety of seasonings. Here are a few options:

  • A combination of ½ teaspoon of garlic powder and onion powder would not only pair well with the cheesy qualities of nutritional yeast but also enhance their umami flavors.
  • You can opt for a  Mexican flair by adding a sprinkle of ground cumin, chili powder, and even cayenne pepper for some heat.
  • Sprinkle it with some toasted sesame seeds or Everything But The Bagel seasoning for an extra savory punch. And, of course, you can also finish it with a sprinkle of sea salt to help bring all the flavors together.

How to make kale with nutritional yeast?

The steps of this vegan cheese kale chips recipe are simple and only take a few minutes. 

A collage of images showing how to make kale chips.
  1. Prepare the kale: Preheat the oven to 300 degrees F before you begin prepping the ingredients. Rinse a fresh bunch of kale and tear it into small pieces. Dry them in a salad spinner as much as you can. Alternatively, you can spread them on a sheet pan lined with a kitchen towel and gently pat them dry with a sheet of paper towel.
  2. Mix: Lightly massage kale with oil, nutritional yeast, and any of the kale chip seasonings of your choice in a large bowl. 
Homemade kale chips on a sheet pan before and after they are baked.
  1. Prep for baking: Spread the kale on a large sheet pan in a single layer. This is an important step for achieving crispy kale chips, so if needed, feel free to use two separate baking sheets.
  2. Bake: Bake in the preheated oven for 5 minutes. Remove from the oven, gently flip the kale leaves and bake for another 5-7 minutes keeping a close eye on it. If you are baking two sheets at the same time, be sure to rotate them as well. 

How to make ahead and store leftovers?

  • Make Ahead: Most of the prep time involved in this recipe is the cleaning and preparing of the kale to make the chips. The good thing is that you can easily wash, cut, and store kale in the refrigerator, so it takes just a few minutes to put it all together. If you are new to prepping kale, be sure to check out our guide on storing kale.
  • Store: I’d be surprised if you have leftover kale chips. Truthfully, these crunchy kale chips are best on the day they are made. However, if you do wish to store them, wait until they cool fully, then keep them in an airtight container or a paper bag large enough that they won’t break. They should be good for up to 2 days.

Expert Tips:

Having been making these cheesy vegan kale chips for years, I learned a thing or two. Here are my tips for making the best baked kale chips:

  • Dry kale thoroughly. Take the time to dry the kale thoroughly. While it may sound like an unnecessary step, removing the excess moisture is an important step for getting that addictive crispy texture. Plus, doing so ensures that the nutritional yeast mixture will stick to each piece of kale.
  • Tear or Cut the kale into equally sized pieces. Make sure to tear or cut the raw kale pieces roughly equal in size. This will help them bake evenly and prevent browning.
  • Massage the oil into the kale. Tossing kale with oil and nutritional yeast is an option, but I recommend giving it a gentle massage to ensure that they are distributed evenly throughout. If you are new to it, be sure to check out our quick guide on how to massage kale.
  • Low-temperature oven: Baking kale leaves at a low oven temp is a key step for crispy chips. Low and slow is a safer option for getting evenly baked kale chips with a crispy texture.
  • Watch it closely. We highly recommend keeping a close eye on the kale chips after the 10-minute mark. Since all ovens behave differently, you may have to rely on visual cues to decide whether or not you need the extra few minutes. If it is nice and crisp, it is time to pull it out. If the leaves are still on the softer side, give a minute or two for them to get crisp. Though please be aware that if you leave them in the oven for too long, they will turn brown and burn.

FAQs

Does making kale chips destroy the nutrients?

Surprisingly, when baking kale, very minimal nutrients are cooked off, making it a more nutritious alternative to other salty snacks such as potato chips, pretzels or tortilla chips.

How do you keep kale chips crispy?

The secret to keeping kale chips crispy is to let them cool completely before storing them. We also recommend storing them in a large enough container so they won’t break.

Other Kale Recipes You Might Enjoy

If you love kale or are using kale to add more leafy greens to your diet, here are a few more must-try kale recipes:

If you try this Homemade Kale Chips recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

kale chips in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Kale Chips with Nutritional Yeast Recipe

These Kale Chips are flavored with nutritional yeast for a cheesy yet vegan and healthy snack. Flavored with nutritional yeast, this easy and quick-to-make kale snack recipe is guaranteed to be your next movie night treat. Perfectly crispy, this kid-friendly snack is a great way to sneak some greens into your diet. Paleo, whole30 & gluten-free diet-friendly tool!
Course Healthy Snacks
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 2 cups
Calories 86kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 bunch fresh kale (curly kale) (8 oz. with stems), about 4-5 cups
  • 2 teaspoons olive oil or avocado oil or coconut oil
  • 2 tablespoons nutritional yeast plus more for sprinkling
  • ¼ teaspoon Kosher salt

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 300 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set aside.
  • Rinse kale under cold water, remove stems, and tear each leaf into bite-size pieces. It is best if they are (roughly) equal in size to help with even roasting in the oven.
  • Using a salad spinner, dry the leaves as much as possible. Alternatively, you can spread them on a sheet pan lined with a kitchen towel and gently pat them dry. Transfer the kale leaves to a large mixing bowl.
  • Drizzle with oil and sprinkle with nutritional yeast and salt. Lightly massage to ensure each leaf is coated with the oil and nutritional yeast.
  • Transfer kale to the parchment-lined baking sheet. Spread them on an even layer making sure that they are not overlapping. You can grab a second baking sheet or bake it in two batches if needed.
  • Bake in the oven for 7 minutes. Remove from the oven, gently flip each piece of kale, and bake for another 5-7 minutes. Towards the end, they should be crisp but not browned.
  • Remove from the oven and let it cool for 1-2 minutes. Serve with an additional sprinkling of nutritional yeast on top.

Notes

  • Dry kale thoroughly. Take the time to dry the kale thoroughly. While it may sound like an unnecessary step, removing the excess moisture is important for getting that addictive crispy texture. Plus, doing so ensures that the nutritional yeast mixture will stick to each piece of kale.
  • Tear kale into equally-sized pieces. Make sure to tear or cut the kale leaves roughly equal in size. This will help them bake evenly and prevent browning.
  • Watch it closely. We highly recommend keeping a close eye on the kale chips after the 10-minute mark. Since all ovens behave differently, you may have to rely on visual cues to decide whether or not you need the extra few minutes. If it is nice and crisp, it is time to pull it out. If the leaves are still on the softer side, give a minute or two for them to get crisp. Though please be aware that if you leave them in the oven for too long, they will turn brown and burn.
  • Storage: While we think that these kale chips are best on the day they are made, you can store them to enjoy later. To do so, bring them to room temperature and store them in an airtight container or a paper bag large enough that they won’t break. They should be good for up to 2 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 86kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 325mg | Potassium: 376mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 6494IU | Vitamin C: 61mg | Calcium: 165mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Kale Chips with Nutritional Yeast appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/cheesy-oven-roasted-kale-chips/feed/ 6
Air Fryer Kale Chips https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-kale-chips/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-kale-chips/#respond Thu, 02 Feb 2023 20:55:07 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=64342 It’s no secret that we love kale here at Foolproof Living. Made from my favorite superfood, kale chips in the air fryer are one of my go-to snacks. That’s why I have countless other tasty kale recipes in my recipe book!  For a light lunch or nutritious side, Avocado Kale Salad and Kale Quinoa Salad are the perfect recipes for busy weekdays. Or, if you want your kale on the...

The post Air Fryer Kale Chips appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
It’s no secret that we love kale here at Foolproof Living. Made from my favorite superfood, kale chips in the air fryer are one of my go-to snacks. That’s why I have countless other tasty kale recipes in my recipe book! 

For a light lunch or nutritious side, Avocado Kale Salad and Kale Quinoa Salad are the perfect recipes for busy weekdays. Or, if you want your kale on the go, my Pineapple Kale Smoothie uses only five ingredients to start your morning with a sweet energy boost.

Crispy pieces of air-fried kale in a bowl from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need

To make kale in the air fryer, you only need three simple ingredients:

Ingredients for air frying kale in bowls from the top view.
  • Kale: When selecting among types of kale for this recipe, I recommend choosing either curly kale or lacinato kale. Curly kale is available in most grocery stores, making it a go-to for crispy kale chips. Lacinato kale—also known as dinosaur kale—is more delicate, so it will cook more quickly.
  • Oil: Olive oil, coconut oil, or avocado oil will work in this air fryer kale chips recipe. If you want less oil, you can spray the leaves lightly with oil spray. You may also use well-stirred tahini to give your healthy kale chips an earthy, savory flavor.
  • Salt: To bring out the snackable flavor of your air fry kale chips, I recommend using sea salt, kosher salt, or garlic salt.

Kale Chips Seasoning Ideas

  • Ranch seasoning: You don’t need to run to the grocery store to make ranch kale chips in the air fryer. You can easily make it at home. This Homemade Ranch Seasoning calls for ¼ teaspoon each of dried dill, dried parsley (or chives), garlic powder, onion powder, salt, and black pepper.
  • Cheese: Give your air fry kale a rich, gooey flavor by sprinkling it with your favorite cheese. For vegan cheese, use two teaspoons of nutritional yeast. Or, top your kale with one tablespoon of parmesan cheese for savory, nutty undertones.
  • BBQ seasoning: If you count barbecue sauce as one of your favorite seasonings, try this Homemade Barbeque Seasoning. Simply mix ¼ teaspoon of brown sugar, paprika, chili powder, garlic powder, onion powder, salt, and black pepper. You can even add a kick of spice by adding a pinch of cayenne pepper or red pepper flakes on top of the kale.
  • Everything But the Bagel seasoning: Robust and garlicky, Everything But the Bagel seasoning (affiliate link) makes an excellent addition to seasoned kale. However, if you don’t have this seasoning on hand, toasted sesame seeds make a great substitute—especially if you massage your kale with tahini!

How to Prepare Kale for Chips?

Following these simple steps, you don’t need to stress about kale prep time. From cutting kale to cleaning and storing kale, you’ll make kale chips in the air fryer in no time.

  • Wash and dry kale: Wash your raw kale leaves under cold water. To dry, line a baking sheet with paper towels, place the wet leaves on top, and pat them dry with more paper towels. You can also use a salad spinner to dry your kale if you want to avoid using extra towels.
  • Remove stems: Using a cutting board and a sharp paring knife, remove the stems of your kale. Fold the kale leaves in half, so the stem lies at one end, and then slice along the stem to separate the leaves. Or, pull the stem through one closed fist to detach the leaves without using a knife.
  • Tear the kale: Once de-stemmed, tear your leaves into bite-sized pieces. Try to keep your pieces of kale as equal as possible to ensure even cooking.

How to Make Kale Chips in Air Fryer?

If you like healthy eating and have an air fryer, this easy kale recipe is just what you need. Follow these hassle-free steps, and you can prepare kale in the air fryer in just ten minutes.

  1. Prepare the air fryer: Preheat your air fryer to 375 degrees F.
A person showing how to make kale chips in the air fryer from the top view.
  1. Mix the ingredients: Add the fresh kale leaves, olive oil, and salt to a large mixing bowl.
  2. Massage the kale: Using your hands, lightly massage the kale such that you evenly coat each leaf with olive oil. For more detailed instructions on this step, check out my guide on how to massage kale
  3. Arrange in the air fryer basket: Transfer the massaged kale pieces to the air fryer basket. Spread the leaves in a single layer, being sure not to overcrowd them. I recommend frying your kale leaves in batches to make crispy kale in the air fryer.
  4. Air fry the kale: Air fry the arranged kale leaves for 3-5 minutes, flipping them halfway during the process.

How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers?

You won’t be able to get enough of these air fried kale chips once you give it a go. Here is how I make it ahead and store leftovers to have this flavorful afternoon snack ready whenever a craving strikes:

  • Make ahead: For the crunchiest, best results, I recommend putting your kale in the air fryer on the day you want to enjoy it. However, you can prepare your kale leaves (the part of this recipe that takes the most amount of time) in advance by following my tips on how to store kale. First, wash your kale in cold water, remove the stem, and dry the leaves. Once dry, lay 2-3 kale leaves per paper towel and roll them into a sort of towel-kale cannoli. Place the rolled kale in a plastic storage bag and store it in the fridge. When ready to use, remove the kale from the refrigerator, massage the leaves, and air fry as usual. I recommend using stored kale within 2-3 days.
  • Store: For maximum crunchiness, I prefer to eat homemade kale chips on the day I cook them. However, storing kale chips is an easy way to fit healthy vitamins into your diet throughout the week. Simply place your kale chips in a paper bag or a paper towel-lined airtight container large enough so that the crispy leaves will not break. Your chips will stay fresh for up to two days.
A person holding an air-fried kale chip from the top view.

Expert Tips

It doesn’t matter whether you’re a master chef or new to the air fryer game. This air fryer kale recipe will come out perfectly crisp every time with these foolproof suggestions.

  • Dry kale leaves thoroughly: Drying your kale leaves is the key to getting crispy air fryer chips. I recommend using a salad spinner or laying your washed kale on a paper towel-lined sheet pan for complete dryness. Just don’t let your kale sit out for too long, as the leaves will lose their firmness.
  • Lightly massage kale to coat them with oil: A light, even oil coating is necessary to give your kale chips sufficient crunch. For this reason, it’s essential that you gently massage your leaves in the oil for 30-40 seconds before adding them to the air fryer.
  • Arrange leaves in a single layer: For proper cooking, it’s crucial to arrange your kale leaves in a single layer in your air fryer basket. Overcrowding will prevent the chips from crisping up evenly. Remember that you’ll likely have to cook your kale in batches to avoid overcrowding.
A person placing a rack over pieces of kale in an air fryer.
  • Cover chips with another rack while cooking: Due to hot air circulation, kale tends to fly around in the air fryer during the cooking process. Covering each batch with an air fryer rack or another basket will keep your kale chips in place.
  • Check after three minutes: It doesn’t take long to air fry kale, so you must keep a close eye on it to avoid overcooked chips. After three minutes of cook time, checking each batch will help keep your kale from burning.
  • Play with seasoning ideas: One of the best parts about these easy air fryer kale chips is how simple it is to try different flavor combinations. It doesn’t matter if you’re looking for a savory, herby, or cheesy flavor. Experimenting with kale chip seasonings is a great way to add creativity to your kitchen.

FAQs

There’s no need to stress out about air frying kale. Whether you want to know about air fryer kale chips’ nutrition information or how to make crispy kale in the air fryer, this FAQ has all you need.

Can you air fry kale chips?

Definitely! Making kale chips in an air fryer is one of the easiest snacks in my recipe book. Good for weight loss, dietary restrictions, and cost-effectiveness, air-fried kale chips come together in less than ten minutes using any air fryer brand. (We tested this recipe in a Ninja Air Fryer and Instant Vortex Air Fryer, but any kind should work!)

Are kale chips better in the oven or air fryer?

Kale chips are a delicious snack whether you make them in an oven or an air fryer. The only difference is that cooking them in the air fryer is quicker, though you’ll have to cook them in several batches. By contrast, the oven will require a longer cook time, but you can make your kale chips in a single batch.

How do you keep kale chips so crunchy?

To get your air fryer kale chips as crunchy as possible, dry them thoroughly before massaging them with oil. Then, keep a close eye on them during the air frying process to ensure they crisp up without burning.

Are kale chips healthy?

Yes! Kale chips are one of my favorite healthy snack recipes because they contain a fraction of the fat of regular potato chips and retain their nutritional value during the air frying process. Kale is high in vitamins A, B, and C and has tons of fiber and antioxidants. As an added bonus, these air fryer kale chips are keto, vegan, gluten-free, Whole30, low-carb, and low-calorie!

Can you air fry frozen kale?

Yes, you can air fry frozen kale by frying the frozen pieces for 7-8 minutes at 375 degrees F. When using this method, I recommend placing smaller pieces of kale in your basket to avoid overcrowding, as frozen kale will expand in the hot air. Also, remember that fresh kale tends to result in crunchier chips.

Other Air Fryer Vegetable Recipes You Might Like

Kale chips from the air fryer are a healthy, crunchy snack that’s as satisfying as it is tasty. After trying out these other delicious recipes, your air fryer will be your new favorite appliance.

If you try this Air Fryer Kale Chips recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A bowl of baked kale leaves shown from the top view.
Print

Air Fryer Kale Chips Recipe

These Air Fryer Kale Chips are a fun, crispy, and nutritious snack that's ready in about 10 minutes. They're vegan, gluten-free, keto, and low-calorie, too, so you can munch on them guilt-free. Sprinkle these crunchy chips with your favorite seasoning as a great way to get in your veggies for the day!
Course Snack
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 7 minutes
Cook Time 3 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 2 cups
Calories 121kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 5 cups kale (1 bunch of kale) rinsed, spin-dried, torn into smaller pieces
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt

Instructions

  • Preheat the air fryer: Preheat air fryer to 375 degrees F.
  • Add the ingredients to a bowl: Place kale leaves, olive oil, and salt in a large mixing bowl.
  • Massage the kale: Lightly massage the kale, ensuring all leaves are coated with the oil.
  • Place in the air fryer: Transfer the kale to the air fryer basket and spread them in a single layer, making sure not to overcrowd them. It is best to air-fry kale leaves in batches for optimum crispiness.
  • Air fry the kale: Air fry for 3-4 minutes, turning them halfway through the air frying process. Keep a close eye on them around the 3-minute mark to prevent over cooking.

Notes

  • Can I air fry frozen kale? Yes, you can. Frozen kale takes about 7-8 minutes. Keep in mind, though, that kale expands as it air fries, so it’s important not to overcrowd the air fryer basket. Additionally, during our recipe testing, we found that kale chips made with fresh kale were crispier than its version made with frozen kale.
  • You may need to cover kale with another rack while cooking: Due to hot air circulation, the fragile and light kale leaves tend to fly around in the air fryer during the cooking process. Covering each batch with an air fryer rack or another heat-proof basket will keep your kale chips in place.
  • Seasoning ideas: Seasoning is the fun part of making kale chips at home! While you can sprinkle them with parmesan cheese (or nutritional yeast for a vegan option), you can also season them with ranch seasoning, bbq seasoning, or even everything but the bagel seasoning.
  • Make ahead: The part that takes the most time in this recipe is preparing the kale chips (rinse, dry, and cut the leaves into small pieces) for frying. The good news is that you can prepare kale and store it in the fridge a few days in advance.
  • Storage: For maximum crunchiness, we recommend air frying kale chips on the day you plan to consume them. However, if you have some leftovers, you can store them in a paper bag or a paper towel-lined airtight container large enough so that the crispy leaves will not break. Make sure that they are at room temperature before you store them. Your chips will stay fresh for up to two days.

Nutrition

Calories: 121kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 380mg | Potassium: 583mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 16733IU | Vitamin C: 156mg | Calcium: 426mg | Iron: 3mg

The post Air Fryer Kale Chips appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-kale-chips/feed/ 0
Catalan Spinach https://foolproofliving.com/catalan-style-spinach/ https://foolproofliving.com/catalan-style-spinach/#comments Tue, 31 Jan 2023 00:28:39 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=1055 Spinach is a staple ingredient that I always keep stocked in my fridge. It’s nutritious, versatile, and pairs well with sweet and savory flavors. If you’re looking for more savory spinach recipes, you’ll love this Spinach and Cheese Quesadilla, Green Spaghetti Sauce, or this Spinach Shrimp Salad. Or, to sweeten things up, try my Spinach Blueberry Salad. Ingredients This recipe, also known by its Spanish name, Espinacas a La Catalana,...

The post Catalan Spinach appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Spinach is a staple ingredient that I always keep stocked in my fridge. It’s nutritious, versatile, and pairs well with sweet and savory flavors. If you’re looking for more savory spinach recipes, you’ll love this Spinach and Cheese Quesadilla, Green Spaghetti Sauce, or this Spinach Shrimp Salad. Or, to sweeten things up, try my Spinach Blueberry Salad.

Catalan spinach served with tomatoes and roasted garlic on the side.

Ingredients

This recipe, also known by its Spanish name, Espinacas a La Catalana, requires only a few simple ingredients. The pine nuts add a nice crunch and an earthy flavor that complements the spinach, while the dried fruit adds texture and a hint of sweetness. 

ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

For this spinach Catalan recipe, you’ll need fresh spinach, raisins, extra-virgin olive oil, an onion, large garlic cloves, pine nuts, kosher salt, and black pepper. 

Ingredient Substitutions

If you’re missing one or more recipe ingredients, feel free to be resourceful and use what you have on hand. Various nuts would work for that crunch factor, while another type of dried fruit would still add a hint of sweetness. Here are a few recommendations: 

  • Spinach: If you don’t have any fresh spinach on hand, you can use frozen spinach instead. You can use a 1:1 ratio of frozen spinach to fresh spinach. Make sure to thaw your frozen spinach overnight in the fridge and squeeze out the excess juices before using it in the recipe. 
  • Onion: While I chose to use a medium onion for this recipe, you can substitute a shallot for a similar flavor. 
  • Pine nuts: I love the earthy, buttery taste of pine nuts, but I know they can be expensive and sometimes difficult to find at the store. If you’d like to substitute a different nut, I recommend sliced or slivered almonds. 
  • Dried fruit: Raisins aren’t everyone’s cup of tea, but I like the chewy texture and subtle sweetness they add to this dish. If you don’t have raisins or aren’t a fan of them, you can use dried cranberries or chopped dried apricots instead. You can also use golden raisins, which are a bit sweeter than regular ones. 
  • Optional addition: Some traditional spinach Spanish recipes also include a golden delicious apple in the dish. If you’d like to add in a small golden delicious apple for additional sweetness and flavor, I recommend chopping it up and sauteing it with the rest of the ingredients.

How to Make Catalan Spinach 

If you’re craving a quick appetizer or snack, it only takes 20 minutes to make this spinach tapas recipe. Here’s how to do it:

Person soaking raisins and sauteing onion in two images.
  1. Soak the raisins: To help the raisins get plump and juicy, soak them in a small bowl of hot water for 15-20 minutes. In the meantime, make the rest of the recipe. 
  2. Saute the onion and garlic: Heat the oil in a skillet. Once hot, add the onion and saute for 5-6 minutes or until translucent, tossing as it cooks. Add the garlic and saute for an additional 30 seconds. 
Person showing how to make this spinach side dish in a collage of images.
  1. Cook the spinach: Add the baby spinach and cook until wilted. At first, it will look like you have a lot of spinach, but as it cooks, it will go down to pretty much, nothing.
  2. Add the plump raisins, nuts, and spinach: Drain the raisins and add them to the skillet, along with the pine nuts. Season to taste with salt and pepper, stir, and cook for about 3 minutes. 
  3. Serve: Transfer the dish to a serving bowl and serve it warm or cold with crusty bread like my Artisan Bread or even more Mediterranean, Kalamata olive bread. I also like it with roasted tomatoes on the side.

How to Store

If you have leftovers or wish to make a double recipe to serve later, you can store the dish in the fridge to have this yummy appetizer ready to go whenever the craving strikes. 

To store leftovers, let the dish cool to room temperature before transferring it to an airtight container. Store it in the fridge and enjoy it for up to four days. 

How to Serve?

If you’re in the mood for a light meal, enjoy this dish tapas-style with bread and other small snacks and appetizers. You can also serve it up as a side dish to pair with a larger main dish for a more filling meal. Here are some serving recommendations: 

  • Serve it with crusty bread: In Spain, this dish is traditionally served with crusty bread, roasted tomatoes, and roasted garlic. I personally love to pair this recipe with a sliced French baguette and a glass of red wine. 
  • Pair it with a grilled dish: The delicate flavors of this spinach dish pair nicely with grilled meat or fish. On a nice evening, fire up your grill and serve this spinach appetizer with my Grilled Mahi Mahi for a zesty, light spring or summer meal, or pair it with Marinated Shrimp for a crowd-pleasing spread.
Catalan spinach from the top view with a wooden spoon on the side.

Expert Tips 

This Spanish spinach dish is pretty quick and easy to make, as it only requires a few basic cooking skills. Even so, I’ve compiled a few tips to help you achieve the best results on your first try. Here’s what you need to know:

  • Buy prewashed spinach: I think it is a time saver and worth the money.
  • Salting the spinach: As the recipe states, ensure to season the spinach after it’s cooked. If you season spinach with salt while cooking, it may become too salty as it absorbs the salted water. 
  • Toast the pine nuts: If you have the time, toast pine nuts in an empty skillet until they turn lightly golden brown. It takes only a few minutes to do so but takes the dish to a whole other level.

FAQs

Can I use frozen spinach instead of fresh?

While you can use frozen spinach in this recipe, we prefer the version made with fresh baby spinach. If you need to use frozen spinach, you can use a 1:1 ratio of frozen spinach to fresh spinach. Make sure to thaw your frozen spinach overnight in the fridge and squeeze out any excess water or juices before using it in the recipe.

What is Catalan spinach?

Catalan-style spinach is a traditional Spanish tapas dish made with spinach, pine nuts, and dried fruit. World-renowned Chef José Andrés created the dish and named it after Catalonia, a region in Spain. He believed the dish represented the Catalonian penchant for combining savory food with sweet flavors, as well as their love for small dishes. 

Other Similar Small Dishes You Might Also Like:

If you try this Catalan Style Spinach recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Catalan spinach in a bowl with tomatoes on the side.
Print

Catalan Spinach Recipes

This Catalan Spinach is a fantastic Spanish Tapas dish that is quick and easy to make. Flavored with pine nuts and raisins, it is a flavor-packed dish that is guaranteed to impress.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Spanish
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 185kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 tablespoons raisins
  • 8 ounces spinach washed, dried and roughly chopped
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 onion finely chopped – medium size (about 1 cup)
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 3 tablespoons pine nuts
  • 1/2 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1/4 black pepper freshly grounded

Instructions

  • Soak the raisins in hot water and let them plump up for 10 minutes. Drain and set aside.
  • Heat the olive oil in a large skillet, add the onion and cook for 5-7 minutes until translucent, stirring occasionally.
  • Add the garlic and cook for 30 seconds.
  • Add the spinach and cook until fully wilted. At first, it will look like you have a lot of spinach, but as it cooks, it will go down to pretty much nothing.
  • Stir in the raisins and pine nuts. Season with salt and pepper, and cook for 3 minutes.
  • Serve with crusty bread on the side.

Notes

  • Serving: Can be served warm or cold. 
  • Storage: Let the dish cool to room temperature before transferring it to an airtight container. Store it in the fridge and enjoy it for up to four days. 
  • Yields: This recipe makes about 1 to 1 ½ cups of spinach that is supposed to be served as tapas style. However, if you want to serve it as a side dish, you can make multiply the recipe as many times as you want.

Nutrition

Calories: 185kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 385mg | Potassium: 810mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 10633IU | Vitamin C: 35mg | Calcium: 124mg | Iron: 4mg

The post Catalan Spinach appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/catalan-style-spinach/feed/ 12
Slow Cooker Steel Cut Oats https://foolproofliving.com/slow-cooker-steel-cut-oats/ https://foolproofliving.com/slow-cooker-steel-cut-oats/#comments Tue, 17 Jan 2023 20:26:08 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=11808 Today’s recipe, Crockpot steel cut oatmeal, is the ultimate grab-and-go breakfast. It only takes five minutes to put together, and you can flavor your oats with dozens of delectable add-ins. Plus, unlike other crockpot oatmeal you’ll find on the internet, my simple recipe uses a water bath and a small casserole dish or mason jars to eliminate the hassle of cleanup—perfect for a busy morning or to make for a...

The post Slow Cooker Steel Cut Oats appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

Today’s recipe, Crockpot steel cut oatmeal, is the ultimate grab-and-go breakfast. It only takes five minutes to put together, and you can flavor your oats with dozens of delectable add-ins.

Plus, unlike other crockpot oatmeal you’ll find on the internet, my simple recipe uses a water bath and a small casserole dish or mason jars to eliminate the hassle of cleanup—perfect for a busy morning or to make for a crowd. It doesn’t matter whether you’re a morning person or not, you’ll love the chewy texture of these steel cut crock pot oats.

A bowl of slow cooker steel cut oatmeal garnished with fruit and nuts.

Ingredients

To make this recipe for steel-cut oats in a crock pot, you only need a handful of pantry-ready ingredients: 

  • Steel-Cut Oats: When selecting types of oats for this oatmeal recipe, I recommend using steel cut oats—sometimes called “Irish oats.” As mentioned in this article on Steel Cut Oats vs. Rolled Oats, steel cut oats are less processed and have a lower glycemic index than any of the different kinds of oats in the market. Also, rolled oats have a softer texture and don’t do well in slow cookers. Bob’s Red Mill (affiliate link) is one of my favorite steel-cut oats brands and is available in most grocery stores.
  • Liquid: You can use water, plant-based or regular milk, or a combination of the two when you slow cook steel cut oats. Any other natural plant milk will work if you don’t want to use dairy milk. My favorite is unsweetened almond milk, which you can make at home using my easy recipe for DIY Almond Milk. I also like unsweetened coconut milk and oat milk.
  • Sweetener: To give your crockpot steel cut oats natural, low-calorie sweetness, I recommend adding in a mashed ripe banana or applesauce (hello, Homemade Unsweetened Applesauce!). Or better yet, make a batch of my Breakfast Fruit Salad and use it as a healthy unsweetened option for topping. These tasty ingredients will satisfy your sweet tooth without the added sugar. 
  • Salt: A pinch of salt is the key to brightening up the sweet, creamy flavor of your slow cooker overnight oats.
  • Toppings (optional): Garnish your steel-cut oats with fresh berries, homemade chunky granola, or unsweetened coconut flakes for a light, sweet take on this classic dish. Or, give your breakfast extra protein by adding peanut butter (or any other nut butter), a handful of nuts, or your favorite granola.
  • Add-ins: Who says you have to eat slow cooker steel cut oats plain? Adding a dash of spices, like cardamom, cinnamon, or pumpkin pie spice, is an easy way to give your oats a warm, fragrant flavor. Or, mix in a teaspoon of vanilla extract to give each bite sweet undertones. You can even add protein powders to your overnight crockpot steel cut oats for extra nutrition.
Ingredients to make this recipe from the top view on a marble backdrop.

​​

Variations

  • Apple cinnamon: If you like apple pie, you’ll love apple cinnamon steel cut oats from the crockpot. You can use either sauteed apples, as I did in my Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal, or shredded apples, as I did in my Overnight Muesli. Finish your bowl with a pinch of cinnamon or a cinnamon stick, and voila! Delicious and healthy slow cooker oatmeal.
  • Blueberry: Nothing brightens a weekday morning like a bowl of oatmeal flavored with Pureed Blueberries or Homemade Blueberry Sauce. These ingredients transform your hot breakfast into a fruity delight full of antioxidants.
  • Cranberry sauce: Adding a dollop of my naturally sweetened Cranberry Sauce is a festive, vegan way to give your slow cook oatmeal irresistible tartness. Plus, it’s an excellent use of holiday leftovers!
  • Other sweeteners: For those who love pancakes and syrup, maple steel cut oats will be your new favorite weekday breakfast. Top your crockpot steel cut oats with maple brown sugar, pure maple syrup, or honey, and enjoy.

Equipment You’ll Need

If desired, you can make this steel cut oatmeal recipe directly in the insert of the slow cooker. Spraying the insert with cooking spray or using a crockpot liner (affiliate link) will help make cleaning easier.

However, I recommend cooking your oatmeal in an additional heat-resistant, waterproof bowl—such as a casserole dish, mason jar (I use the widely available 16 oz. jars – affiliate link), or ramekin. The key is to find a container that will fit in the bowl of your slow cooker.

This extra layer ensures easy portioning and mess-free cleanup.

How to Cook Steel Cut Oats in a Crock Pot?

My slow cooker steel cut oats recipe takes the hassle out of overnight oatmeal. Once you combine your ingredients, you can set it and forget it with this effortless breakfast.

Steps showing how to assemble the oats and milk in a crock pot using a casserole dish or mason jars.
  1. Combine the ingredients: Select a heat-resistant bowl, mason jar, or small casserole dish that will fit in your slow cooker. Mix the steel cut oats, water, almond milk, mashed banana, and salt inside the selected bowl.
A collage of photos showing how to make steel cut oatmeal in a crockpot using the two methods mentioned in the article.
  1. Prepare the slow cooker: Place your oat-filled dish inside your crockpot, and fill the insert halfway with water.
  2. Cook the oatmeal: Put on the lid and cook the steel cut oats in the crockpot for four hours in a low-heat setting. For a thicker consistency, let the oatmeal cook for up to five hours at low heat.
A collage of photos showing how to assemble and store crock-pot oatmeal.
  1. Serve: Divide the overnight oats among four bowls. Top each off with fresh fruit, nut butter, or other favorite toppings. If you made your slow-cooking oats in mason jars, serve them in the jars with your toppings of choice.

How to Store, Reheat, Freeze, and Thaw?

Making steel cut oatmeal in a slow cooker is a fantastic way to relieve morning meal prep stress. With these storage tips, you’ll never have to worry about preparing breakfast again.

  • Storage: To store crock-pot steel cut oats, let the mixture reach room temperature. Then, store in an airtight container and place in the fridge. If you prepared your oats in mason jars, screw on the jars’ lids for an airtight seal.
  • Reheat: When reheating your slow-cooked oatmeal recipe, place the oats in a microwaveable bowl and add a splash of water or milk. Then, microwave the mixture for about 1½ minutes, stirring the oats every thirty seconds.
  • Freeze: To freeze, divide your overnight slow cooker oatmeal into a 12-cup muffin tin and freeze for 4-5 hours. Then, transfer the frozen oatmeal cups into a Ziploc bag, remove as much air as possible, and store them in the freezer. You can reheat the frozen oatmeal by placing it in a microwaveable bowl with a little water or milk and microwaving it for 1-2 minutes. 
  • Thaw: If you’d prefer not to microwave your steel-cut oats straight from the freezer, you can thaw them overnight in the fridge. Just be sure to eat them the next day to ensure freshness.

Expert Tips

Preparing steel cut oats in a crockpot is one of the easiest ways to start your morning with nutritious, hearty eats. Even beginners can make irresistibly creamy oatmeal with these pro instructions.

  • Warm heat setting for overnight: Slow-cooked oatmeal begins to dry out after 4-5 hours in the crockpot. To maintain your oats’ creamy texture, I suggest turning your slow cooker to a warm heat setting after 4 hours and keeping it on “warm” until you’re ready to eat.
  • Stir your oatmeal before serving: Because slow cookers don’t mix their ingredients during the cooking process, stirring your slow cooker oats is essential for creamy, lump-free oatmeal.
  • Halve or multiply the recipe: You can make this crockpot oatmeal for a crowd or a single serving with my water bath method. Simply halve the recipe (ideal if you want to make a mini crockpot oatmeal) and cook it in a smaller dish, or multiply it and use a larger dish. The water bath will ensure your oatmeal comes out perfectly chewy no matter how many servings you prepare.
  • Cooking times may vary: The amount of time it takes to cook overnight oatmeal in a crockpot may change depending on your specific slow cooker. Use this recipe as a base and adjust your cooking time depending on how quickly or slowly your oats cook.
Slow cooker oatmeal with steel cut oats cooked in mason jars from the top view.

FAQs

You don’t need to stress over this easy steel cut oats in slow cooker recipe. Whether you’re looking for the perfect oat-to-liquid ratio or ideal cook times, this simple guide has everything you need.

What is the water-to-steel cut oats ratio?

For the best slow cooker steel cut oats, I recommend using a 1:4 ratio of oats to liquid. In other words, for every cup of steel cut oats, you will need 4 cups of liquid (water, milk or a combination of the two.)

How long does it take to cook steel cut oats in a slow cooker?

I recommend cooking your steel cut oats in a slow cooker for 4-5 hours on a low-heat setting. After that time, switch your slow cooker to a warm heat setting to keep your oatmeal from drying out.

Other Oatmeal Recipes You Might Like

Once you taste the creamy decadence of steel cut oatmeal in a crock pot, you’ll crave oatmeal every day of the week. These healthy oat recipes will help you start each day well.

If you try this Slow Cooker Steel Cut Oatmeal recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Slow Cooker steel cut oatmeal in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Slow Cooker Steel Cut Oats Recipe

Who knew that the best way to make steel cut oatmeal is to use your crock pot and cook the oats in a bowl in hot bath? Read through the post and recipe below to learn my foolproof method to make the best overnight slow cooker steel cut oats only to wake up to a bowl of warm steel cuts oats in the morning.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 5 hours
Total Time 4 hours 5 minutes
Servings 4 cups
Calories 172kcal

Ingredients

For The Steel Cut Oats:

  • 1 cup steel cut oats
  • 2 cups water
  • 2 cups unsweetened almond milk or any of your favorite plant based or cow’s milk
  • 1 cup mashed banana from one small banana or ½ cup of applesauce
  • Pinch Salt

Optional Toppings:

  • 1 cup seasonal fruit chopped
  • Nuts or nut butters as garnish

Instructions

  • Mix together the steel cut oats, water, almond milk, mashed banana and salt in a heat-resistant bowl (or a small casserole dish) that will fit in your slow cooker*. Alternatively, you can divide the ingredients (¼ cup steel-cut oats and 1 cup of liquid per jar) among four mason jars. Be sure to stir it well.
  • Place the casserole dish (or mason jars) in the bowl of your crock pot. Fill the bowl halfway through with water.
  • Put the lid on and cook for 4 hours in a low-heat setting for a super creamy consistency. If you want it to be thicker, you can let it cook for up to 5 hours in a low heat setting*.
  • When ready to serve, divide it between 4 bowls and top each cup off with fresh fruit, nut butter, or any other one of your favorite toppings. If you cooked them in mason jars, serve them in the jars with your toppings of choice.

Notes

  • Serving size: Each serving of this recipe is between 2/3 cup to a cup.
  • Crockpot size: The size of my slow cooker is 6 1/2 quarts (a model that is no longer produced.) 
  • Warm heat setting: To maintain the creamy texture of your steel cut oatmeal, I suggest turning your slow cooker to a warm heat setting after 4 hours and keeping it on “warm” until you’re ready to eat. This is especially necessary if you are cooking it overnight.
  • Prefer not to use the water bath method? If you prefer to cook your steel-cut oats in the bowl of your slow cooker instead, you can put all the ingredients in the bowl. I recommend using cooking spray before adding everything in. Alternatively, you can use a slow cooker liner to make cleaning easier. The timing would not change.
  • Cook times may vary: It is no secret that every brand of the slow cooker is different, so the timing might change slightly. My recommendation is to use this basic recipe as a starting point and alter the cooking time according to your own crock pot.
  • Storage: To store leftover oatmeal, let it come to room temperature. Then, store in an airtight container and place in the fridge. If you prepared your oats in mason jars, screw on the jars’ lids for an airtight seal.
  • Reheat: When reheating, place the oats in a microwaveable bowl and add a splash of water or milk. Then, microwave the mixture for about 1½ minutes, making sure to stir the oats every thirty seconds.
  • Freeze: To freeze, divide your overnight slow cooker oatmeal into a 12-cup muffin tin and freeze for 4-5 hours. Then, transfer the frozen oatmeal cups into a freezer bag, remove as much air as possible, seal them, and store them in the freezer. You can reheat the frozen oatmeal by placing it in a microwaveable bowl with a little water or milk and microwaving it for 1-2 minutes. 
  • The nutritional information below does not include the optional toppings.

Nutrition

Calories: 172kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 0.4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 168mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 0.1g | Calcium: 174mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Slow Cooker Steel Cut Oats appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/slow-cooker-steel-cut-oats/feed/ 38
How To Make Muesli https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-make-muesli/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-make-muesli/#comments Tue, 03 Jan 2023 15:10:42 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=63563 Few breakfasts are as filling, nutritious, or versatile as this homemade muesli recipe. Every bite will satisfy your tastebuds, whether you prepare it with almond milk, like my Almond Milk Oatmeal, or top it with fresh fruit, like my Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal. And if you love the health-conscious ingredients in this easy muesli recipe, you’ll adore other oatmeal dishes, including my Vegan Baked Oatmeal. Muesli Ingredients Below, you will find...

The post How To Make Muesli appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

Few breakfasts are as filling, nutritious, or versatile as this homemade muesli recipe. Every bite will satisfy your tastebuds, whether you prepare it with almond milk, like my Almond Milk Oatmeal, or top it with fresh fruit, like my Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal. And if you love the health-conscious ingredients in this easy muesli recipe, you’ll adore other oatmeal dishes, including my Vegan Baked Oatmeal.

A homemade cereal in a jar with a spoon from the top view.

What is Muesli?

Muesli is a healthy breakfast dish made from a rolled oats base mixed in with other ingredients, such as nuts, fruits, and seeds, and served right away with milk (or juice) or soaked overnight.

This nutritious dish—sometimes mistyped as “museli,” “meusli,” “muselix,” and “muslie”—was created by Swiss physician Maximilian Bircher-Benner in the 20th century to serve as a healthy breakfast for hospital patients as a part of their treatment. (source – Wikipedia Muesli article)

The original Bircher muesli recipe was a bit different than what it is today. It was made by using raw oats, grated apples, and chopped nuts mixed with water, lemon juice, and sweetened condensed milk.

Needless to say, it took off after its creation, and muesli breakfasts spread quickly throughout Switzerland. The recipe became so widespread in the country that many still refer to it as “Swiss muesli” or “Swiss-style muesli.”

Despite its European origins, muesli has also become a favorite breakfast food in the U.S., with successful brands like Alpen Muesli and Bob’s Red Mills appearing in health food stores across the country.

Muesli Ingredients

Below, you will find the formula I follow to make this muesli recipe along with recommendations on brands I like and buy all the time. However, if you are living outside the US (or in an area where you do not have access to these specific ingredients), please know that you can substitute pretty much every single ingredient in this recipe, which is listed under the formula.

Some of the links in this section are affiliate links, which means if you make a purchase using a link, I will get a commission at no cost to you.

Ingredients for a homemade cereal in bowls from the top view.

With that being said, these ingredients and brands are just a suggestion, and I suggest you take this basic muesli recipe and change it up according to your taste buds. My only recommendation is that you read the labels while you are shopping for these ingredients. 

When I am at the store, I make sure to buy products that are unsweetened, unsalted, and organic as much as possible. I prefer organic ingredients because USDA organic requirements prohibit the use of pesticides in farming, and I prefer that my muesli breakfast bowl in the morning has none of that in it. 

This recipe results in 16 cups of mixed muesli (approx. 16 servings), though you can halve or multiply the recipe as necessary. Please refer to the formula sheet below for ingredients and their amounts.

IngredientAmount
Quick Cooking Rolled Oats3 cups
Other Grain Cereals5 cups
Dried Fruit3 cups
Superfoods1 cup
Seeds and Nuts2 1/2 cups

Quick Cooking Rolled Oats VS. Old Fashioned Rolled Oats

You can use either quick-cooking or old-fashioned oats for muesli. I prefer using quick oats because they don’t require any extra cooking to soften them. Add in milk or yogurt, and they’re ready to eat!

If you are not sure about how they are different, be sure to check out this comprehensive article on rolled oats vs. old-fashioned oats.

However, if you prefer to use old-fashioned oats—a thicker cut than quick-cooking oats—I recommend roasting them in the oven before eating. Simply spread the rolled oats on a large baking sheet alongside nuts and seeds (if desired) at 350 degrees F. for 10-12 minutes. Just make sure to give it a toss halfway through the process.

Other Grain Cereals

Adding breakfast muesli cereals to your mixture is an excellent way to give your recipe a delectable crunch. Some of my favorite brands include Brown Rice Crisps, Rice Puffs, Kamut Khorasan Wheat Puffs (not gluten-free), Bran Flakes (not gluten-free), and Quinoa Flakes—all of which should be available in the health section of your local grocery store. Of course, you can order them online as well. Be sure to use a gluten-free cereal brand if you want to keep this recipe gluten-free.

Dried Fruit

To give your muesli mixture an irresistible sweetness, you can add any dried fruit that’s unsweetened and doesn’t contain sulfur (marked as “unsulfured”). Some of my favorite dry fruits include dried apples, golden raisins, dried apricot, goji berries, and dried mango. 

If I am making this DIY muesli during the holidays, I like using dried cranberries. However, be aware that most dried cranberries are sweetened with sugar as they are pretty bitter without it. That being said, you can find use orange juice-sweetened cranberries at health food stores like Whole Foods, Sprouts, and Trader Joe’s.

Superfoods

If you’re wondering how to make muesli extra nutritious, superfoods are just what your recipe needs. Heart-healthy hemp seeds and antioxidant-packed chia seeds are two of my favorite health-conscious add-ins. 

You could also add ground flax seeds to your muesli to increase its omega-3 fatty acids. However, don’t add them to the cereal mixture until just before you eat it, as they must be refrigerated until use.

Seeds and Nuts

Want to add more protein to your vegan muesli? Any unsalted raw seeds or nuts will work. My go-to additions to this muesli cereal recipe include pumpkin seeds, sliced or slivered almonds, sunflower seeds, pecans, and walnuts.

Other Optional Add-Ins & Topping Suggestions

Give your muesli a healthy crunch by filling it with unsweetened coconut flakes. Or, add ½ cup of wheat germ for a power food with tons of healthy fats. Sesame seeds, fresh berries, apricots, and bananas also add a bright taste to your muesli breakfast. 

I also enjoy adding ground warm spices for additional flavor, stirring in a pinch of ground cinnamon, ground nutmeg, ground cloves, ground ginger, or ground cardamom. Just remember that a small amount goes a long way!

How to Prepare Muesli at Home?

A series of images showing how to combine ingredients to make muesli.

This healthy muesli recipe is one of the simplest breakfast dishes in my recipe book. Simply place all of the ingredients in a large bowl or glass jar, mix to combine, top it off with a lid, and serve as desired. That’s it!

How to Serve?

There are several ways to serve this DIY muesli recipe. From homemade muesli cereal to fruity almond milk oatmeal, these tasty suggestions will have you craving a muesli breakfast daily.

  • Serve it as cereal with milk: Prepare your muesli as a breakfast cereal by mixing it with an equal amount of cold milk (I recommend one cup for every cup of muesli). You can use cow or plant-based milk, such as oat or almond milk (which you can even make at home using my effortless recipes for Almond Butter Milk or DIY Almond Milk!). Then, top off your cereal muesli with fresh fruit (strawberries and blueberries are my faves) for extra juicy and sweet flavors.
  • With yogurt: Give your muesli an irresistibly creamy texture by soaking it overnight in plain Greek yogurt. If you don’t want your muesli quite as soft, you could make a yogurt bowl by topping off your mixture with Homemade Vanilla Yogurt or your favorite store-bought brand. Or, make your muesli part of your favorite yogurt parfait with recipes like my fresh and flavorful Greek Yogurt Parfait. Alternatively, you can use this muesli to make my Overnight Oats with Yogurt by simply using this muesli mixture instead of rolled oats.
  • With juice: Enjoy your muesli in European style by serving it with fruit juice, such as orange juice.
  • Make oatmeal: To make muesli oatmeal, mix 1 cup of water or milk for every ½ cup of muesli. Then, bring the mixture to a quick boil on the stovetop or in the microwave, give it a quick stir, and serve. This simple oatmeal comes together in just 5-10 minutes. If you need further instructions, check out my Almond Milk Oatmeal recipe.
  • With fruit on top or on the side: Top it off with a handful of fruit, or better yet, make a batch of my Fruit Breakfast Salad and serve it on the side.
  • Optional sweeteners: If you have a sweet tooth, in my opinion, the best muesli recipe is one that has delicious natural sweeteners, like Pureed Blueberries, Unsweetened Applesauce, or Cranberry Maple Sauce. Alternatively, a drizzle of honey is yet another way of adding some sweetness to your morning bowl.
Two photos showing a close-up of a homemade cereal and the cereal in a jar.

How to Store Homemade Muesli?

You can store your muesli mix in an airtight container or airtight jar at room temperature for up to a month. It may seem like the muesli ingredients should last longer according to their expiration dates. However, their longevity decreases when repeatedly exposed to air, such as when you open their storage container to get a helping of muesli.

I use this one-gallon glass jar to store my muesli mixture. If you want to keep your muesli for longer than a month, place the cereal in smaller containers and remove as much air as possible.

Expert Tips

Learning to make muesli at home is one of my favorite beginner-level recipes. With these pro suggestions, your dream breakfast will come together in seconds.

  • Use a large bowl to mix: I highly recommend using a large bowl to combine your ingredients, as this recipe results in 16 cups of muesli, and you need enough space to distribute your ingredients evenly. When I made muesli on Instagram, I mixed all the ingredients in a large, 1-gallon glass jar, and as you can see, it is best to do it in a big bowl and then transfer it to the container.
  • Use organic and gluten-free certified ingredients: Reduce your gluten intake, cut unhealthy chemicals from your diet, and support all-natural farms by using organic and gluten-free ingredients in this muesli dish.
  • Halve or multiply the recipe as you please: You can prepare as many or as few servings of this breakfast dish as you’d like. Refer to the formula to increase or decrease your ingredients accordingly.
  • Get creative: There are countless different ways to customize this easy homemade muesli recipe, and trying out new combinations is the best way to vary your diet without the hassle of everyday prep time. Whether you try this dish using an overnight oats-style, mix in some peanut butter, or top it with additional fresh fruits, don’t be afraid to have fun with it!
  • Eat smaller portions for weight loss: If you’re trying to shed some pounds, I recommend consuming it in smaller portions (perhaps, ½ cup per serving.) Though it is made using healthy and nutritious ingredients, consuming muesli in smaller portions is ideal for weight loss.
Fruit muesli in a bowl with milk and a spoon from the top view.

FAQs

Wondering how to cook muesli, what muesli’s nutritional information is, or how muesli differs from other breakfast staples? Here are all your homemade muesli questions answered:

Are the oats in muesli raw?

Yes, muesli contains raw rolled oats, one of the most popular oats for breakfast amongst all kinds of oats available for consumption. Depending on your recipe, you can make muesli using quick-cooking oats or old-fashioned rolled oats.

What’s the difference between muesli and granola?

Though the two share many ingredients, muesli and granola are different. Traditional muesli is a dry mix of uncooked ingredients. By contrast, granola is baked using a binder of oil or egg whites and often contains a sweetener, such as maple syrup, honey, or brown sugar.

Is muesli gluten-free?

Muesli can be gluten-free if you ensure that each component ingredient is also gluten-free (including gluten-free oats!).

Is homemade muesli healthy?

Muesli contains highly nutritious ingredients, such as fiber-rich oats, nutrient-dense superfoods, and heart-healthy grains. You can even add milk for extra calcium! Therefore, as long as you read your ingredients’ labels and know what you’re using, muesli can be a healthy way to start the day.

Other Breakfast Bowl Recipes You Might Also Like

When you make your own muesli, you’re bound to fall in love with tasty breakfast foods. Try these other fan-favorite breakfast bowl recipes, and you’ll start every morning energized and satisfied.

If you try this How to Make Muesli recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Muesli oats in a bowl with a spoon from the top view.
Print

How to Make Muesli Recipe

Once you learn How to Make Muesli at home, you'll never have to buy store-bought cereal again. Not only is homemade muesli a nutrient-dense and filling breakfast, but it's also meal-prep friendly for busy mornings. This helpful guide also features plenty of substitutions and serving suggestions to accommodate your preferences, the ingredients you have on hand, and dietary restrictions and allergies.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 16 cups
Calories 406kcal

Ingredients

Instructions

  • Combine ingredients: Place all ingredients in a large bowl (or a glass jar, like I did) and stir to combine.
  • Serve/store: Cover it tightly with a lid. Enjoy it with your favorite milk and fresh fruit.

Notes

  • When shopping for these ingredients, be sure to read the label. I recommend choosing ingredients that are made with no added sugar and are naturally gluten-free (if that is important to you) and organic, if possible.
  • The basic formula: The ratio that I follow for making muesli is 3 cups of Quick Cooking Rolled Oats, 5 cups of grain (or non-grain) cereals, 3 cups of dried fruit, and 1 cup of superfoods. You can find further information on substitutions within the blog post.
  • Serving amount and suggestion: This recipe yields 16 cups of mixed muesli (approx. 16 servings), though you can halve or multiply the recipe as necessary. 
  • Quick Cooking Oats vs. Old-Fashioned Rolled Oats: I use quick-cooking oats in my muesli because they require no cooking and are softened as soon as they are mixed in with the liquid. However, if you prefer using rolled oats, I recommend roasting them in a preheated 350-degree oven for 10-12 minutes, along with the seeds and nuts you are using. 
  • Calorie Information: Please know that the nutritional values below are approximate and may change depending on the brand you use.
  • Storage: Store it in an airtight container or jar at room temperature for up to a month. It may seem like the muesli ingredients should last longer according to their expiration dates. However, their longevity decreases when repeatedly exposed to air, such as when you open their storage container to get a helping of muesli. 
  • Longer storage: If you want it to last longer, you can store it in separate airtight containers (or jars) in smaller portions for up to 3 months. 
  • Serving suggestions:
    • Serve it with any of your favorite dairy or non-dairy milk (like you would serve store-bought cereal). 
    • Make it a warm bowl of oatmeal by cooking it with milk. My ratio is ½ cup muesli to 1 cup liquid (plant-based or regular milk or water).
    • Mix it with milk or yogurt (1 to 1 ratio) to make it overnight muesli.

Nutrition

Calories: 406kcal | Carbohydrates: 38g | Protein: 12g | Fat: 25g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Sodium: 20mg | Potassium: 442mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 40IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 90mg | Iron: 5mg

The post How To Make Muesli appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-make-muesli/feed/ 4
Smashed Fingerling Potatoes https://foolproofliving.com/smashed-fingerling-potatoes/ https://foolproofliving.com/smashed-fingerling-potatoes/#respond Tue, 22 Nov 2022 20:41:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=62341 When it comes to carbs, it doesn’t get better than a good potato recipe. Potatoes are so versatile, inexpensive, and easy to cook, so I have lots of potato recipes here on the blog. Whip up Mashed Potatoes with Rosemary or cook a batch of Red Potatoes in the air fryer for a classic Thanksgiving dinner, make a Caper Potato Salad for a cold side dish, or throw together Muffin...

The post Smashed Fingerling Potatoes appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

When it comes to carbs, it doesn’t get better than a good potato recipe. Potatoes are so versatile, inexpensive, and easy to cook, so I have lots of potato recipes here on the blog. Whip up Mashed Potatoes with Rosemary or cook a batch of Red Potatoes in the air fryer for a classic Thanksgiving dinner, make a Caper Potato Salad for a cold side dish, or throw together Muffin Tin Potatoes for a party-ready appetizer. 

Roasted fingerling potatoes on a plate with chives from the top view.

Ingredients

Fingerling smashed potatoes are so buttery and creamy on their own that they don’t need many ingredients to jazz them up. In this recipe, we’re simply sprinkling on a little garlic powder and topping with fresh herbs to enhance their mild flavor. 

Ingredients for oven roasted potatoes in bowls from the top view.

To make this recipe, you’ll need a pound of fingerling potatoes (you can use colorful ones if they’re available), olive oil, garlic powder, fresh thyme, kosher salt, ground black pepper, and fresh chives (optional).  

Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

While you can follow this recipe exactly as written for a classic, great side dish, you can also customize it to suit the occasion or your preferences. Load them up with cheese and bacon for a great Game Day recipe, or top them with lots of fresh herbs for a holiday party. Here are some more suggestions: 

  • Potatoes: I used fingerlings for their small size and mild, buttery taste, but you can also substitute different types of potatoes in this recipe. Try Yukon Gold potatoes (also called Pee Wee potatoes), Honey Gold potatoes, or any other variation of a petite gold potato. 
  • Oil: The olive oil in this recipe helps the potatoes crisp up nicely, but you can also substitute butter for a richer, creamier taste. Just make sure to use melted butter so you can apply it evenly to the potatoes before baking. 
  • Herbs: If you have leftover herbs in your fridge from all your holiday cooking, feel free to add them to this recipe. You can substitute fresh rosemary in place of thyme and turn this recipe into delicious garlic rosemary smashed potatoes. Or use chopped green onions instead of chives if you can’t get your hands on them. Any other fresh herbs you have on hand, such as parsley, would also work. 
  • Garlic: We’re using a little bit of garlic powder in this recipe to enhance the buttery, mild flavor of the potatoes. I would not recommend substituting fresh garlic, as I found that it was prone to burning during the baking process. If you’d like to add extra garlicky flavor, whip up my Roasted Garlic Butter recipe and brush it onto the potatoes once they’re done baking. 
  • Other topping ideas: For a fun take on loaded baked potatoes, top your smashed fingerlings with parmesan cheese and chopped bacon bits. If you love turkey bacon, you can make my Oven Baked Turkey Bacon or Air Fried Turkey Bacon recipe, chop it, and sprinkle it over the potatoes. 

How to Make Crispy Fingerling Potatoes?

This recipe requires minimal prep and baking time, making it the perfect easy, last-minute, and crowd-pleasing dish for any occasion. Plus, smashing the potatoes is oddly satisfying! Here’s how to make them:

A person showing how to make par boiled potatoes from the top view.
  1. Boil the potatoes: Add the potatoes to a medium saucepan or large pot and fill with cold water until the potatoes are covered by an inch. Add a large pinch of salt to the pan, bring the salted water to a boil, and simmer for about 10 minutes, or until the potatoes are al dente and fork tender. Keep in mind that the potatoes may need more or less cooking time depending on their size. You should be able to easily insert and remove a sharp knife when done.  
  2. Drain the potatoes: Use a colander to drain the potatoes and place them back in the pan to “dry” for a few minutes. 
  3. Preheat the oven: While the potatoes are drying, preheat the oven to 450 degrees F. 
  4. Season the potatoes: In the same pan, sprinkle the potatoes with olive oil, garlic powder, thyme, salt, and pepper. Gently toss to evenly coat the potatoes with the seasonings and oil. 
  5. Transfer to a sheet pan: Transfer the potatoes to a rimmed baking sheet and arrange them in an even layer. 
A person showing how to smash potatoes on a baking sheet from the top view.
  1. Smash the potatoes: Use a ramekin, the bottom of a glass or jar, the bottom of a small bowl, or a potato masher to gently smash the potatoes until they’re all about ½ of an inch thick. If your smashing tool gets sticky, brush or spray it with a little oil. 
  2. Bake: Bake the smashed potatoes in the hot oven for about 15-20 minutes until crispy and lightly golden brown. Make sure to flip them at the halfway mark. 
  3. Serve: Transfer the smashed crispy fingerling potatoes from the large baking sheet to a serving plate or platter, sprinkle with chives (optional), and serve. 

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Reheat?

For a perfectly timed holiday dinner party or gathering, you can make these potatoes ahead of time and bake them right before the rest of your dishes are ready. They’re also super easy to store and reheat so that you can look forward to leftovers the next day. Here are some tips: 

  • Make-ahead: If you’re busy juggling multiple recipes for a big dinner or event and don’t have much time, you can prep the potatoes earlier in the day so you can pop them in the oven when you’re ready. Simply boil and smash the potatoes, let them cool, and store them on a covered baking sheet in the fridge. When it’s time to bake the potatoes, brush them with oil and follow the instructions above for roasting in the oven. 
  • Storage: Let the roasted smashed fingerling potatoes cool to room temperature and store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to two days. 
  • To reheat: To reheat, you have two options:
    • Skillet method: For extra crispy potatoes, reheat the smashed potatoes over medium-high heat in a cast iron skillet with hot oil until they’re cooked through and golden brown. 
    • Oven method: Reheat in a 350-degree F oven until cooked through and golden brown (make sure to flip halfway through reheating). If they are too dry, brush them with a bit of oil before reheating. 

What to Serve Them With?

There are endless ways to serve these melt-in-your-mouth, crispy smashed fingerling potatoes. Pair them with dipping sauces for a Game Day appetizer, serve them with your favorite main dish, or get creative with leftovers. If you’re still wondering what to serve with fingerling potatoes, here are a few suggestions:

  • As a crowd-favorite appetizer: These crispy fingerling potatoes will fit right in with all your favorite Game Day Foods. Serve them as grown-up french fries with an herbed sauce, such as Basil Tomato Sauce, Yogurt Dill Sauce, Blue Cheese Dressing without Sour Cream, or Yogurt Ranch Sauce. Or, simply top with a drizzle of Pesto Dressing
  • To serve with main dishes: With a sprinkling of fresh herbs, you can transform these crispy smashed potatoes into a sophisticated side dish to serve with an elegant main for an impressive family dinner. These potatoes pair beautifully with a holiday classic like Baked Turkey Tenderloin or chicken dishes such as Air Fried Chicken Legs, Greek Yogurt Chicken, or Goat Cheese Stuffed Chicken. You could also serve them with this next-level Porchetta recipe for an impressive meal. 
  • Got leftovers?: If you have leftover potatoes, why not turn your fingerling smash into a fingerling hash? Use them as breakfast potatoes and add them to a breakfast hash (don’t forget the bacon and lots of cheese), or throw them in a frittata for extra flavor. 
Smashed down potatoes on a baking sheet from the top view.

Expert Tips

These crispy fingerlings are a breeze to make for even a beginner chef, but following my tips will eliminate guesswork and help you achieve pro results on your first try. Here’s what I recommend:

  • Aim for equal-sized potatoes: If you can, try to buy fairly equal-sized potatoes to ensure even roasting. 
  • Smash with care: While you may be tempted to smash the potatoes with all your might (I was tempted, too), doing so may break the skin of the potatoes or cause split fingerling potatoes. I recommend using the bottom of a ramekin or jar (or a potato masher) to gently smash the potatoes down so that their surface area measures about ½ inch in thickness. Here is a quick visual.
  • Arrange in a single layer: When arranging the crushed fingerling potatoes on your baking sheet, make sure they form an even layer without overlapping. This will help them roast evenly and get nice and crispy on the outside. 
  • Let them dry: After boiling, it’s important to drain the potatoes and return them to the still-warm pan to let them “dry” for a few minutes. Don’t skip this step, as it makes a world of difference in preventing the potatoes from retaining excess moisture and helping them get crispy in the oven. 
  • Use extra oil for maximum crispiness: If you prefer extra crispy skin with crispy edges, oil is your best friend. Once the potatoes are done baking, remove them from the oven and brush them with an additional tablespoon of olive oil (or avocado oil) for the crispiest results. Broil them for 1-2 minutes, keeping a close eye on them so that they don’t burn.

FAQs

What are fingerling potatoes?

Fingerling potatoes are miniature, oblong-shaped potatoes that come in different colors and sizes. These waxy potatoes usually have thin skins, and they have a mild, buttery flavor when roasted.

How are fingerling potatoes different?

Fingerling potatoes are unique, finger-shaped small potatoes that are harvested when they are fully mature. They are usually confused with new potatoes or baby potatoes, which are also smaller potatoes but are harvested before they’re fully mature.

Can smashed potatoes be made ahead?

Yes, you can easily make smashed fingerling potatoes ahead of time. On the day you plan to bake them, boil and smash them, let them cool, and store them on a covered baking sheet in the fridge. Brush them with oil and pop them in the oven when you’re ready to serve.

Can you eat the skin of fingerling potatoes?

The skin of a fingerling potato is fully edible. When they’re smashed, brushed with oil, and oven-roasted, the skin gets super crispy while the inside stays creamy and soft.

What is the difference between mashed and smashed potatoes?

Mashing potatoes is the process of boiling potatoes and then mashing them completely for a smooth, creamy texture. For smashed potatoes, boil fingerling potatoes before roasting and gently smash them down until they form a thin, disk-like shape. Roast and serve.

Other Potato Recipes You Might Also Like

An easy potato recipe is always my go-to for the perfect side dish, appetizer, or snack for a crowd. If you and your family are looking for more ways to prepare this versatile vegetable, browse some of my favorite recipes below for inspiration: 

If you try this Smashed Fingerling Potatoes recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Roasted potatoes with chives on a baking sheet from the top view.
Print

Smashed Fingerling Potatoes Recipe

These Smashed Fingerling Potatoes, seasoned with salt, garlic powder, and fresh thyme, are perfectly crisp on the outside with a buttery, creamy center. Serve them sprinkled with chives for an elegant holiday side dish, or pair them with a dipping sauce for a fun Game Day appetizer. Plus, they're easy to make and require minimal ingredients!
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 4
Calories 183kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 lb fingerling potatoes scrubbed
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • 3-4 sprigs fresh thyme minced
  • 1/2 teaspoon kosher salt plus more to taste
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon chives chopped – optional

Instructions

  • Boil the potatoes: Place potatoes in a medium saucepan and fill it with cold water until covered by an inch. Season the water with a generous pinch of salt. Bring it to a boil and let it simmer until potatoes are fork-tender for about 10 minutes. They should be al dente. Please be aware that you may have to adjust the timing depending on the size of your potatoes.
  • Drain the potatoes: Drain the potatoes in a colander. Place them back into the pan, and let them dry for a few minutes.
  • Preheat the oven: Meanwhile, preheat the oven to 450 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • Add the oil and seasonings: Add olive oil, garlic powder, thyme, salt, and pepper into the saucepan with the potatoes and give it a gentle toss to ensure that they are coated with the olive oil mixture.
  • Prep for baking: Transfer the potatoes onto a baking sheet on a single layer.
  • Smash the potatoes: Using a potato masher, the bottom of a jar, or a ramekin, gently smash each potato to about ½-inch thickness. If it gets sticky, feel free to brush (or spray) the bottom of the glass or ramekin with a little bit of oil.
  • Bake: Bake in the preheated oven for about 20 minutes until they are lightly golden browned, making sure to turn them halfway through the baking process.
  • Serve: Transfer smashed potatoes onto a plate and sprinkle with chives if using.

Notes

  • Make-ahead: You can prep the potatoes earlier in the day so you can pop them in the oven when you’re ready to bake. Simply boil and smash the potatoes, let them cool, and store them on a covered baking sheet in the fridge. When it’s time to bake the potatoes, brush them with oil and follow the instructions above for roasting in the oven. 
  • Storage: After roasting, let the potatoes cool to room temperature and store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to two days. 
  • To reheat: To reheat, you have two options:
    • Skillet method: For extra crispy potatoes, reheat the smashed potatoes over medium-high heat in a lightly oiled cast iron skillet until they’re cooked through and golden brown. 
    • Oven method: Reheat in a 350-degree F oven until cooked through and golden brown (make sure to flip halfway through reheating). If they are too dry, brush them with a bit of oil before reheating.

Nutrition

Calories: 183kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 298mg | Potassium: 490mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 71IU | Vitamin C: 24mg | Calcium: 18mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Smashed Fingerling Potatoes appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/smashed-fingerling-potatoes/feed/ 0
Cranberry Sauce with Maple Syrup https://foolproofliving.com/cranberry-sauce-with-maple-syrup/ https://foolproofliving.com/cranberry-sauce-with-maple-syrup/#respond Wed, 16 Nov 2022 16:47:45 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=61895 Say hello to cranberry season. What great way to celebrate fresh (or frozen) cranberries than with a low-sugar, refined-sugar-free, vegan, and homemade cranberry maple sauce recipe to call your own?  The tart flavors of cranberries mixed in with mildly sweet maple syrup is a match made in heaven. Make it fast and flavorful, and serve it with plenty of Healthy Thanksgiving Sides like Rosemary Mashed Potatoes, Garlic Butter Green Beans,...

The post Cranberry Sauce with Maple Syrup appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Say hello to cranberry season. What great way to celebrate fresh (or frozen) cranberries than with a low-sugar, refined-sugar-free, vegan, and homemade cranberry maple sauce recipe to call your own? 

The tart flavors of cranberries mixed in with mildly sweet maple syrup is a match made in heaven. Make it fast and flavorful, and serve it with plenty of Healthy Thanksgiving Sides like Rosemary Mashed Potatoes, Garlic Butter Green Beans, Sweet Potato Soufflé, and Maple Roasted Carrots

A sauce made from cranberries in a bowl with rosemary and orange slices.

It goes without saying – this healthier cranberry sauce is going to outperform store-bought canned cranberry sauce any day. While it is a great addition to your Thanksgiving table and Christmas dinner, you can enjoy it any time of year!

Ingredients You Will Need

The ingredient list for this maple syrup cranberry sauce recipe is simple and straightforward. Take a trip to the grocery store and gather together fresh cranberries, pure maple syrup, water, fresh orange juice, a cinnamon stick, and orange zest.

Ingredients to make a sauce with cranberries and maple syrup.

Ingredient Substitutions and Optional Add Ins

  • Frozen cranberries: Use frozen cranberries in place of fresh – no need to thaw – and simply add a few minutes to the simmering time.
  • Honey syrup: Replace the maple syrup with an equal amount of Honey Syrup. Note: Since high heat can have negative effects on the nutritional value of honey, if going the honey route, bring the mixture up to a bare simmer under medium-low heat and then reduce it to low heat for 15-20 minutes. Cranberry Sauce with Honey is a wonderful alternative if you are living in an area where you can’t get maple syrup.
  • Ground cinnamon: Omit the cinnamon stick and add ¼ teaspoon of ground cinnamon at the end of cooking.
  • Additional spices: Add ⅛ teaspoon of additional warming spices, like ground ginger, allspice, cloves, cardamom, or pumpkin pie spice.
  • Liquor: Add a splash of bourbon or Cointreau, brandy, port wine, or sherry at the end of cooking.
  • With more fruit: Turn it into cranberry chutney with the addition of diced apples, pears, other berries, and raisins. 
  • Without orange: Not a fan of cranberry orange sauce? Replace orange juice with cranberry juice, apple juice, or water. I would not recommend lemon juice as it would make it even tarter. However, you can use lemon zest as a substitute for orange zest.
  • Vanilla extract: If preferred, you can add a splash of vanilla extract (about ½ teaspoon) in the end.

How to Make This Recipe?

This Refined Sugar-Free Cranberry Sauce couldn’t be any easier to make. All it takes is a quick simmer on the stove, and you have a homemade maple cranberry sauce right before your eyes. Here’s how to do it:

  1. Wash cranberries: Place cranberries in a colander and rinse with cold water. Pick the old, shriveled ones and discard them.
A person showing how to boil cranberries to make a sauce from the top view.
  1. Add ingredients to saucepan: In a medium-sized saucepan, combine cranberries, maple syrup, water, orange juice, and the cinnamon stick.
  2. Simmer: Set over medium-high heat and bring it up to a boil, give it a stir, turn the heat down to medium-low, and let it simmer for 10-12 minutes, stirring occasionally until the cranberries pop and it reaches your desired consistency.
  3. Taste test: Taste for sweetness and add more maple syrup if you’d like it a little less tart.
  4. Finish and serve: Off the heat, carefully remove the cinnamon stick. Finish with the orange zest. Enjoy your cranberry maple sauce warm, at room temperature, or chill in the fridge.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Freeze

This naturally sweetened cranberry sauce can be served warm, at room temperature, or cold. This makes it a wonderful make ahead recipe and gets you one step closer to holiday prep work.

  • Make ahead: Cook the cranberry maple syrup sauce as directed, cool it completely, and transfer it to an airtight container. Store in the refrigerator for 3-4 days.
  • Storage: Whether freshly made or looking to get ahead, the cranberry sauce will keep in the fridge for up to one week.
  • Freeze: Once cool, store the cranberry sauce made with maple syrup in a freezer-safe airtight container. Label, date, and freeze for up to 3 months.
  • Thaw: Thaw the frozen cranberry sauce overnight in the fridge.

How to Serve

In addition to serving it with a plethora of Thanksgiving recipes like Thanksgiving turkey (or Roasted Turkey Drumsticks or Baked Turkey Tenderloins), leftover cranberry sauce can be used to jazz up leftovers or provide a new twist on a recipe. Some of my favorite ways to serve include:

Expert Tips

  • Make a double batch. Double the recipe if serving a big crowd – or freeze the rest for later use.
  • Popping is completely normal. The cranberries will pop and sputter as they cook, and this is completely normal. This means they are breaking down and releasing their natural sweetness.
  • Remove the cinnamon stick before storing. The cinnamon will become too overpowering if left to sit in the cranberry sauce. Remove just after cooking.
  • The cranberry sauce will thicken significantly as it cools. Don’t fret if the texture is a little looser than expected. The cranberry sauce will thicken as it cools – and thicken even further once chilled.

FAQs

How to sweeten cranberry sauce without sugar?

It’s easy to sweeten cranberry sauce without sugar by replacing it with a natural sugar, like maple syrup or honey.

How to make cranberry sauce less tart?

Use maple syrup to make cranberry sauce less tart, while also keeping it healthier and refined sugar free. Taste test near the end of cooking. If it is still too tart for your liking, add more maple syrup, 1 tablespoon at a time.

How do you spice up cranberry sauce?

It’s easy to spice up cranberry sauce with the addition of warm winter spices like ground cinnamon, ginger, allspice, cloves, cardamom, or pumpkin pie spice. The ground spices will intensify as they sit in the sauce, so a mere ⅛ – ¼ teaspoon goes a long way.

What can you add to cranberry sauce to thicken it?

Cranberries contain a lot of pectin (a natural thickener), so there is really no need to add a thickening agent such as cornstarch or tapioca starch. Simply simmer the cranberry sauce until most of them have split, and allow to cool. The longer it cools, the thicker it will become.

How do you get the bitter taste out of cranberry sauce?

If, at the end of cooking, you taste a spoonful and it’s bitter, you can add more maple syrup for a touch of sweetness. If you prefer not to add more sugar, try something tangy, like a splash of orange juice, apple juice, or even white wine.

Other Creative Cranberry Recipes You’ll Enjoy:

If you try this refined-sugar free easy homemade Cranberry Sauce recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Homemade cranberry sauce with maple syrup in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Cranberry Sauce with Maple Syrup Recipe

This Cranberry Sauce with Maple Syrup is the perfect, satisfying balance of sweet and tart, yet it's also refined-sugar-free, vegan, and low-sugar. Serve this make-ahead friendly sauce as a light side dish for your holiday dinner, or enjoy it year-round with sandwiches, desserts, breakfast, and more!
Course Condiment/Sauce
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 12 minutes
Total Time 17 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 489kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 12-ounce bag of fresh or frozen cranberries
  • cup maple syrup more as needed
  • cup water
  • ¼ cup orange juice
  • 1 cinnamon stick or ¼ teaspoon ground cinnamon – optional
  • 1 tablespoon orange zest

Instructions

  • Rinse cranberries: Place cranberries in a colander and rinse with cold water. Pick the old, shriveled ones and discard them.
  • Add ingredients: Transfer the rest of the cranberries to a medium-sized pan and add the maple syrup, water, orange juice, and a cinnamon stick.
  • Cook: Heat over medium heat, bring it to a boil, give it a stir, turn the heat down to medium-low*, and let it simmer for 10-12 minutes or until it reaches your desired consistency. Be sure to stir it a few times.
  • Taste and adjust: As it simmers, cranberries will soften and pop, so don’t be alarmed. Taste for sweetness and add more maple syrup (in 1-tablespoon increments), if needed.
  • Remove from heat and serve: Off the heat, carefully remove the cinnamon stick, and stir in the orange zest. Serve it warm, at room temperature, or cold.

Notes

  • Servings: This recipe yields 1 1/2 cups of cranberry sauce. 
  • *Popping is completely normal. The cranberries will pop and sputter as they cook, which is completely normal. This means they are breaking down and releasing their natural sweetness.
  • Make ahead: Cook the cranberry sauce as directed, cool it completely, and transfer it to an airtight container. Store in the refrigerator for 3-4 days.
  • Storage: Store the cooled sauce in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 1 week.
  • Freeze: Once cool, store the cranberry sauce in a freezer-safe airtight container. Label, date, and freeze for up to 3 months.
  • Thaw: Thaw the frozen cranberry sauce overnight in the fridge.

Nutrition

Calories: 489kcal | Carbohydrates: 124g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 22mg | Potassium: 665mg | Fiber: 15g | Sugar: 84g | Vitamin A: 364IU | Vitamin C: 87mg | Calcium: 198mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Cranberry Sauce with Maple Syrup appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/cranberry-sauce-with-maple-syrup/feed/ 0
Roasted Acorn Squash Slices https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-acorn-squash-slices/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-acorn-squash-slices/#respond Thu, 29 Sep 2022 21:07:13 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=60475 I love roasting various kinds of squash in the fall and winter months, as this vegetable family is so versatile and always caramelizes beautifully in the oven. If you’re like me and can’t wait to roast squash this season, be sure to also try my other favorite squash recipes; Roasted Butternut Squash or Roasted Delicata Squash.  Similar to those recipes, this roasted acorn squash recipe is vegan, gluten-free and low-carb...

The post Roasted Acorn Squash Slices appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
I love roasting various kinds of squash in the fall and winter months, as this vegetable family is so versatile and always caramelizes beautifully in the oven. If you’re like me and can’t wait to roast squash this season, be sure to also try my other favorite squash recipes; Roasted Butternut Squash or Roasted Delicata Squash

A plate of oven-roasted acorn squash slices from the top view.

Similar to those recipes, this roasted acorn squash recipe is vegan, gluten-free and low-carb friendly, which is ideal if you are serving people with multiple dietary restrictions.

Ingredients

We’re using lots of classic fall flavors in this recipe for roasted acorn squash. The maple and cinnamon mixture complements the nutty, buttery flavors of the squash, and a pinch of salt and pepper adds a savory element that perfectly highlights the sweetness of this recipe. All you need are a few simple ingredients: 

Ingredients for roasting acorn squash slices from the top view.
  • Acorn squash: Green, white, and even golden acorn squash would work just fine for this paleo acorn squash recipe, or you can even use the smaller variation called “carnival squash” for roasted carnival squash slices. Try to choose a squash between 1 and 1 ½ pounds, which will yield about 4-5 slices. When selecting your squash at the store, look for one with skin that’s green and orange in color with a smooth, slightly dull appearance. Give the flesh of the squash a squeeze to ensure it’s firm, and choose one that feels heavy for its size. 
  • For the olive oil-maple syrup mixture, gather olive oil, pure maple syrup, ground cinnamon, kosher salt, ground black pepper, and (optional) chopped pecans or pumpkin seeds and chopped fresh herbs such as sage leaves, thyme, or parsley. 

Substitutions, Seasoning Ideas, Optional Toppings

These oven-roasted acorn squash slices are delicious with just their simple maple-olive oil topping, but you can also dress up your slices with various fall-inspired toppings or spices to give them a little extra flair. I’ve included some topping suggestions here, along with a few simple ingredient swaps: 

  • Oil: While I used olive oil in this healthy acorn squash recipe, you could also use coconut oil or avocado oil. For an extra rich flavor, try using melted butter instead.
  • Maple Syrup: I chose maple syrup for the sweet component of this recipe so that everyone, including my vegan friends, can enjoy this vegan roasted acorn squash! However, if you’re not vegan and don’t have any maple syrup on hand, feel free to use honey instead. 
  • Seasoning: If you’re itching to use those warm autumn spices, like ground cloves, allspice, or nutmeg, add them to the maple syrup mixture before brushing it on the slices for an extra cozy flavor. 
  • Topping ideas: To add an extra nutty crunch and take this caramelized acorn squash to the next level, try topping the slices with nuts or seeds like pumpkin seeds, walnuts, or pecans. I recommend roasting your nuts or seeds in the oven or in a pan to really bring out their flavor. Simply add your desired toppings to the roast sliced acorn squash once it comes out of the oven. 
  • Fresh herbs: It’s amazing how a just sprinkle of fresh herbs can perfectly complement the nutty flavor of this slow-roasted acorn squash recipe. If desired, garnish your oven-roasted acorn squash slices with fresh thyme, sage, or parsley after the baked squash slices come out of the oven. 
  • Brown sugar: Brown sugar is often paired with similar golden acorn squash recipes to add a touch of sweetness. We like to stray away from refined sugars here on the blog; unfortunately, brown sugar falls into that category. While you’re free to dust your squash slices with brown sugar if desired, I recommend using coconut sugar instead. They have a very similar flavor profile, and coconut sugar still provides that warm sweetness! Dust a tablespoon of coconut sugar over the slices while they’re warm. 

How Do You Cut Acorn Squash into Slices

Cutting a squash may seem like a daunting task because of the vegetable’s size, but this easy step-by-step guide will help you prepare your squash slices for roasting in no time. Here’s how to cut up acorn squash:

A person showing how to cut an acorn squash from the top view.
  1. Cut off the top of the squash: Identify the top of the squash, which is where the stem is located. Lay the squash on its side on a cutting board and, holding firmly with one hand, cut off the top. I recommend using a sawing motion while gently applying pressure with a sharp knife. 
  2. Slice the squash in half: Position the squash on the flat surface you created by the cut so that the bottom of the squash faces up. Cut it in half down the center. 
  3. Scoop out the seeds: Use a melon baller or a large spoon to remove all the seeds. 
  4. Cut the squash into slices: Lay down the squash halves and cut into 1-inch thick slices. The slices should resemble inch-think half-moons. Alternatively, you can skip step 2 and cut the slices into circles after removing the top of the squash. From there, you can use a knife or cookie cutter to remove the seeds so that the slices resemble acorn squash rings. 

How to Bake Acorn Squash Slices

Once you prepare acorn squash by cutting it into slices, all you have to do is brush on the maple syrup-olive oil mixture and roast your acorn squash slices in the oven. Plus, your kitchen will smell heavenly while these are baking! Here’s how to roast acorn squash slices: 

  1. Preheat the oven: Set your oven to 400 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
A person showing how to roast squash slices in the oven.
  1. Add the squash slices: Place your slices of acorn squash on the parchment-lined sheet pan, taking care to arrange them in a single layer. Use two sheet pans to avoid overcrowding, if needed. 
  2. Prepare the topping: Combine all the ingredients for the maple syrup mixture in a small bowl.
  3. Brush squash slices: Using a pastry brush, apply the mixture to each sliced acorn squash evenly. If you’re left with extra mixture, set it aside for later. 
  4. Roast: Roast the slices in the preheated oven for 15 minutes. Remove the cookie sheet from the oven, flip the slices, and bake for another 15 minutes or until they appear lightly golden brown. Remove the sheet pan acorn squash and let cool for about 5 minutes. 
  5. Add remaining topping: If you have any of the olive oil-maple syrup mixture left over, brush it on the warm squash slices. Arrange the slices on a large plate or serving platter. 
  6. Garnish and serve: Top the slices with toasted nuts, seeds, or fresh herbs, if desired. The slices are delicious when served warm or at room temperature. 

What to Serve it With

These roast acorn squash slices are the perfect addition to a fall salad or a beautiful complement to a number of fall and winter main dishes. If you’re still wondering what to do with your roasted squash slices, see below for some inspiration: 

How to Store Leftovers

Store leftover sliced roasted squash in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3-4 days. 

You can technically freeze baked acorn squash, but I find that it loses its texture after it is thawed. Therefore I would not recommend freezing it.

A plate of squash that has been roasted in the oven shown from the top view.

How to Make This Recipe Savory

While the flavor profile of this recipe is definitely on the sweet side, did you know that you can also make these baked acorn squash slices savory? If your dinner table or holiday spread requires a savory side dish, here’s how you can make this recipe less sweet but equally delicious:

  • Omit the maple syrup: Since the syrup mixture gives this recipe a kick of sweetness, simply omit the syrup for a sugar-free acorn squash recipe. Doing so also lets the squash’s natural sweetness shine through and gives you a more savory baked acorn squash flavor. 
  • Switch up the spices: Instead of using ground cinnamon, which is usually paired with sweet flavors, try seasoning acorn squash with ¼ teaspoon of each chili powder (or paprika) and garlic powder. 
  • Add some cheese: The nuttiness of parmesan cheese perfectly complements the caramelized flavors of roasted squash and gives it a more savory flavor profile. Add some chopped fresh herbs and sprinkle on 2-3 tablespoons of parmesan cheese for herb roasted parmesan acorn squash.

FAQs

Do you have to peel acorn squash?

The skin of an acorn winter squash is edible, so there’s no need to peel. This is especially true after roasting, which softens the peel and makes it more palatable.

What temperature do you cook acorn squash?

After testing this recipe, I’ve found that the best temperature for roasted acorn squash is 400 degrees Fahrenheit. Roasting acorn squash at this temperature yields a perfect caramelization.

How long to cook acorn squash?

The cook time for acorn squash depends on the temperature of your oven. The higher the oven temperature, the shorter the cooking time. If you’re wondering what temperature is best to bake acorn squash, I’ve put together an easy guide to make baking acorn squash slices a breeze. Acorn squash roasting time would be:

40-45 minutes if roasted at 350 degrees F.
35-40 minutes if roasted at 375 degrees F.
30 minutes if roasted at 400 degrees F.
20-25 minutes if roasted at 425 degrees F.

Other Squash Recipes You Might Like

If you try this Roasted Acorn Squash Slices recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A plate of squash that has been oven-roasted shown from the top view.
Print

Roasted Acorn Squash Slices Recipe

These Roasted Acorn Squash Slices are beautifully caramelized in the oven and generously coated in a maple-cinnamon mixture for warm, fall flavors in every bite. Serve them on salads, add them to recipes that call for squash, or bring them to your next holiday gathering!
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 2 acorn squash
Calories 437kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 small acorn squash 1 to 1 ½ pounds each rinsed and dried
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil or coconut or avocado oil
  • 2 tablespoons maple syrup or honey
  • teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • Pinch of black pepper

Optional Toppings:

  • ¼ cup chopped pecans or pumpkin seeds *
  • 1-2 tablespoons fresh herbs such as sage thyme, or parsley, chopped

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven: Set the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Cut the squash: Start by cutting the top of the squash (where the stem is located) while holding it firmly with your other hand. It is best to use a sawing motion while gently applying pressure with your knife. Lay squash down using the now-flat surface created by the cut. Cut it in half from the center. Scoop out the seeds using a melon baller or a large spoon. Then lay each half down and cut it into 1-inch slices.
  • Add the squash slices: Transfer acorn squash slices onto the parchment-lined baking sheet and arrange them in one layer. If needed, you may have to divide them into two sheet pans.
  • Make the maple topping: Mix olive oil, maple syrup, ground cinnamon, salt, and black pepper in a bowl.
  • Coat the squash slices: Brush each acorn squash slice with the maple syrup mixture on both sides. Depending on the size of your squash, you might be left with some, don’t throw it away.
  • Roast: Roast in the oven for 15 minutes. Remove from the oven, flip each slice and bake for another 15 minutes or until lightly browned. If you are using two sheet pans, be sure to rotate the sheets as well.
  • Let cool: Remove from the oven and let it cool for 5 minutes.
  • Add the remaining topping: Brush each slice with the remaining olive oil-maple syrup mixture. Arrange the roasted acorn squash slices on a large plate.
  • Garnish and serve: If preferred, garnish with toasted nuts (or seeds) and/or fresh herbs like sage or parsley. Serve warm or at room temperature.

Notes

  • Toasting pecans/pumpkin seeds: If you do have the time, I highly recommend toasting the nuts (or seeds) you use as this quick step will make them taste better and compliment the caramelized flavors of your roasted acorn squash. Simply place pecans (or pumpkin seeds) in an empty skillet over medium heat. Toast for 4-5 minutes. Be sure to keep a close eye on it and stir frequently. It should be ready when it starts smelling and changes its color slightly.
  • Storage: Leftovers can be kept in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3-4 days. 
  • How to make it savory? To make this roasted acorn squash recipe a savory side dish: 
    • Omit maple syrup.
    • Use ¼ teaspoon chili pepper (or paprika) and ¼ teaspoon garlic powder in place of ground cinnamon.
    • After it is roasted, sprinkle it with 2 tablespoons of parmesan cheese or top it off with ¼ cup of crumbled goat cheese.

Nutrition

Calories: 437kcal | Carbohydrates: 60g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Sodium: 598mg | Potassium: 1603mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 12g | Vitamin A: 1758IU | Vitamin C: 50mg | Calcium: 177mg | Iron: 4mg

The post Roasted Acorn Squash Slices appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-acorn-squash-slices/feed/ 0
Sweet Potato Noodles https://foolproofliving.com/sweet-potato-noodle-pad-thai/ https://foolproofliving.com/sweet-potato-noodle-pad-thai/#comments Wed, 28 Sep 2022 01:51:54 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=12110 What are Sweet Potato Noodles? Sweet potato noodles are a type of “noodle” made from spiralizing sweet potatoes into a shape similar to spaghetti or angel hair pasta. You can buy spiralized sweet potato noodles at the grocery store or make them at home by feeding skinned sweet potatoes through a spiralizer. The sweet potato spiral noodles we are featuring in this recipe are not the same as Korean sweet...

The post Sweet Potato Noodles appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

What are Sweet Potato Noodles?

Sweet potato noodles are a type of “noodle” made from spiralizing sweet potatoes into a shape similar to spaghetti or angel hair pasta. You can buy spiralized sweet potato noodles at the grocery store or make them at home by feeding skinned sweet potatoes through a spiralizer.

A pot of noodles made from sweet potatoes from the top view.

The sweet potato spiral noodles we are featuring in this recipe are not the same as Korean sweet potato glass noodles (also known as japchae noodles, Korean potato noodles, and Korean vermicelli potato noodles). Korean sweet potato noodles consist of sweet potato starch and water, whereas my noodles come from whole sweet potatoes.

I use a spiralizer to make the sweet potato spaghetti used in this recipe. However, you can find out below how to make spiralized sweet potato noodles without a spiralizer.

How are they Made?

If you’ve ever wondered, “How are sweet potato noodles made?” you’ll be happy to see that they are super easy to make. Yes, you do need a spiralizer (I use this Paderno Spiralizer – affiliate link), but it is a rather inexpensive one-time investment.

Once you have your equipment ready, spiralizing sweet potatoes requires the following three steps:

A person showing how to peel and cut a sweet potato from the top view.
  1. Cut and peel the sweet potatoes: Use a sharp knife to cut off both ends of the sweet potato. Then, peel off the skin using a vegetable peeler. Once peeled, cut the sweet potatoes in half, right down the middle.
  2. Align the sweet potato: Secure your spiralizer on the countertop to keep it from moving (for instance, my spiralizer has suction cups on its bottom to help keep it in place). Take one of your sweet potato halves, line it up with the center prong on your spiralizer, and press it firmly into the prong. Then, press the other end of the spiralizer to secure the sweet potato from both sides.
A person showing how to spiral a sweet potato from the top view.
  1. Spiralize: Once you secure the sweet potato half, spin the side handle of the spiralizer clockwise while applying pressure. Continue turning the handle until you spiralize the entire sweet potato half. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have spiralized all of your sweet potatoes.

What if I Don’t Have a Spiralizer?

If you don’t have a spiralizer, don’t worry! You can also prepare them using a julienne peeler (affiliate link). Just keep in mind that this method will likely require more physical effort. Also, because the noodles will turn out thinner, they will take less time to cook than spiralized vegetable noodles.

To reduce preparation time, you can also buy pre-prepared sweet potato noodles at the grocery store in lieu of using a spiralizer.

Recipe Ingredients

To make this recipe with sweet potato noodles, you’ll need two sets of ingredients:

Ingredients for sauce for sweet potato noodles from the top view.

For the sauce, you’ll need unsweetened, smooth peanut butter, tamari (or soy sauce), sesame oil, maple syrup, freshly grated ginger, minced garlic, fresh lime juice, salt, and vegetable stock.

Ingredients for a bowl of noodles made from sweet potatoes from the top view.

For the noodles, you’ll need olive oil, onion, red or yellow bell pepper, sweet potatoes, vegetable stock, edamame, and fresh cilantro.

You can also garnish them with sesame seeds, green onions, and lightly salted peanuts (roughly chopped).

Substitutions & Optional Add-Ins

There are countless ways to customize this gluten free sweet potato noodles recipe. These delicious add-ins will take your dish to the next level, from a pop of spice to natural oils.

  • Tamari: I use tamari in my noodle dish to make it gluten-free. However, soy sauce works just as well.
  • Nut butter: Don’t want to use peanut butter in your pasta sauce? Good news: Almond butter makes an excellent substitute for this sweet potato pasta.
  • Oil: I use sesame oil to give my potato and noodles a nutty Asian flavor. However, this recipe also works with light-flavored olive oil or avocado oil.
  • Add mushrooms: Few things amplify the taste of these tender veggie noodles more than earthy, buttery mushrooms. Add shiitake mushrooms to your noodles at the start of the recipe, and the mushrooms will come out beautifully sautéed. Or, add Roasted Shiitake Mushrooms just before serving your dish for extra smoky flavor.
  • Chili paste: Add a zing of sweet-and-spicy flavor by adding one teaspoon of chili paste to your sweet potato spaghetti recipe.

How to Cook?

Cooking sweet potato noodles is a simple, healthy way to treat yourself to full-bodied Asian flavor. You can have this delicious dish from spiralizer to table in just half an hour.

A person showing how to cook noodles made from yams.
  1. Spiralize the sweet potatoes: Trim, peel, and cut your sweet potatoes to prepare them for spiralization. Then, attach the sweet potato halves to your spiralizer, one by one, and turn the handle clockwise until you spiralize each half. Continue spiralizing your sweet potato halves until you have enough noodles.
  2. Mix the dressing: In a small bowl, whisk together the peanut butter, tamari, sesame oil, maple syrup, ginger, minced garlic, lime juice, salt, and vegetable stock. Refrigerate the mixture until you are ready to use it.
  3. Saute the veggies: Heat the olive oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Add the onion and pepper to the skillet and cook them, frequently stirring, until they turn translucent (5-7 minutes).
  4. Cook the noodles: Add the spiralized sweet potatoes and vegetable stock to the skillet. Using a pair of kitchen tongs, cook sweet potato noodles tossing gently every few minutes until they are al dente and lose most of their volume, for 6-7 minutes.
A person adding dressing and toppings to sweet potato spirals.
  1. Add the dressing: Pour the dressing over the noodles and toss the mixture until the noodles have an equal layer of dressing. Cook the coated noodles until they are warm (2-3 minutes).
  2. Stir in the edamame: Take the noodles off the heat, then stir in the edamame and chopped cilantro.
  3. Serve: Divide the noodles among four bowls and garnish each dish with sesame seeds, green onions, and peanuts. Serve.

How to Make Ahead and Store

Preparing sweet potato zoodles is a great way to fit meal prep into your schedule. Whether you serve this dish at a party or pack it for an easy lunch, these storage tips are just what you need.

  • Make ahead: To make sweet potato noodles ahead of time, spiralize your sweet potatoes up to 3-4 days in advance. Just be sure to remove air from the noodles’ container during storage. I recommend storing them in an airtight jar or a Ziploc bag with as much air removed as possible. You can also prepare the dressing up to two days in advance, storing it in an airtight container. Finally, you may also chop your vegetables on the day you plan to serve your noodles dish to eliminate prep time.
  • Store: To store leftovers, place them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2-3 days.

How to Serve?

As the main dish: Whether you serve it warm, at room temperature, or cold, this dish is a delicious lunch or dinner that is perfect when you are in need of a light meal with lots of flavors.

As a tasty side: This recipe also makes a delicious side dish alongside dozens of meat dishes with a similar flavor profile. Serve your vegetable noodles with Chicken Teriyaki Stir Fry or Crock Pot Butter Chicken for a bold and saucy pair. Or, try my Cauliflower Curry or Thai Lemongrass Chicken for meals as vibrant as they are easy.

A bowl of yam noodles with edamame and cilantro from the top view.

FAQs

Where to buy sweet potato noodles?

Most grocery stores sell sweet potato noodles in their refrigerated section, often near other frozen pasta.

Are sweet potato noodles healthy?

Yes! Sweet potato noodles contain high amounts of vitamins, antioxidants, and fiber, making them a popular choice among health-conscious eaters.

What are sweet potato noodles made of?

They consist of peeled sweet potatoes cut into shape using a spiralizer. However, the Korean version of this dish—japchae noodles—is made from sweet potato starch and water.

Is sweet potato noodles carb?

Yes, sweet potato noodles contain carbs. Generally, 1 cup of sweet potato noodles has 23 g. of carbs.

What do sweet potato noodles taste like?

Though incredibly mild, sweet potato noodles have a hint of the sweet, nutty flavor typical among sweet potatoes. They also have a tender, slightly chewy texture that tastes heavenly in pasta dishes.

Other Sweet Potato Recipes You Might Also Like

Want even more sweet potatoes on your table? The following recipes are some of the best ways to incorporate this festive (and healthy!) vegetable into your cooking.

If you try this recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A bowl of sweet potato noodles garnished with cilantro.
Print

Sweet Potato Noodles Recipe

This easy Sweet Potato Noodles recipe is loaded with Asian-inspired flavors, like ginger, edamame and cilantro, and is tossed in a sweet and savory peanut sauce. Throw this easy dish together for a satisfying lunch or a light, nutritious dinner
Course Main Dish
Cuisine Thai Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 25 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 4 Servings
Calories 291kcal

Ingredients

For the dressing:

  • 3 tablespoons unsweetened and smooth peanut butter
  • 3 tablespoons tamari*
  • 1 teaspoon sesame oil
  • 1 tablespoon maple syrup
  • 1 teaspoon freshly grated ginger
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 2 tablespoons lime juice freshly squeezed
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 3 tablespoons vegetable stock more as needed

For the Noodles:

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 small onion chopped
  • 1 red or yellow bell pepper seeded and sliced thinly
  • 2 medium-size sweet potatoes peeled and spiralized (as seen in the photos) – You should have 5-6 cups of “noodles”
  • ¼ cup vegetable stock
  • ½ cup edamame
  • 3 tablespoons chopped cilantro

As Garnish:

  • 1 tablespoon sesame seeds
  • 1-2 stalks green onions both white and green parts chopped
  • 2 tablespoons lightly salted peanuts coarsely chopped

Instructions

  • To make the dressing: Whisk together all the dressing ingredients in a bowl, cover with plastic wrap, and refrigerate until you are ready to use it.
  • To cook the sweet potato noodles: Heat olive oil in a large skillet in medium heat. Add in the onion and pepper. Cook, stirring frequently, until translucent, 5-7 minutes.
  • Add in the sweet potato noodles and vegetable stock and cook, stirring frequently, for 6-7 minutes.
  • Pour the dressing over the noodles and give it a large stir, making sure that the noodles are coated with the dressing. Cook 2-3 minutes until it is warm.
  • Off the heat, stir in the edamame and chopped cilantro.
  • To serve, divide the noodles in 4 bowls and garnish each one with sesame seeds, green onions, and peanuts.
  • Serve immediately.

Video

Notes

  • If you are not gluten-sensitive, you can use soy sauce instead of tamari, but make sure to taste the dressing before adding more salt to it. 
  • To Make ahead: To make this dish ahead of time, spiralize your sweet potatoes up to 3-4 days in advance. Just be sure to remove air from the noodles’ container during storage. I recommend storing them in an airtight jar or a Ziploc bag with as much air removed as possible. You can also prepare the dressing up to two days in advance, storing it in an airtight container. Finally, you may also chop your vegetables on the day you plan to serve your noodles dish to eliminate prep time.
  • Store: To store leftovers, place them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2-3 days.
 

Nutrition

Calories: 291kcal | Carbohydrates: 40g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 1289mg | Potassium: 708mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 12g | Vitamin A: 17068IU | Vitamin C: 47mg | Calcium: 88mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Sweet Potato Noodles appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/sweet-potato-noodle-pad-thai/feed/ 44
Roast Garlic in Air Fryer https://foolproofliving.com/roast-garlic-in-air-fryer/ https://foolproofliving.com/roast-garlic-in-air-fryer/#respond Thu, 08 Sep 2022 21:23:20 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=59479 Can’t get enough of roasted garlic? Be sure to check out our other popular garlic-related articles, including How To Roast Garlic Without Foil and Roasted Garlic Butter. Ingredients You are on your way to creating a culinary delicacy with a few simple ingredients. Garlic is the star of the show for this Air Fryer Roasted Garlic recipe, so it’s essential to use the freshest garlic you can find at the...

The post Roast Garlic in Air Fryer appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Can’t get enough of roasted garlic? Be sure to check out our other popular garlic-related articles, including How To Roast Garlic Without Foil and Roasted Garlic Butter.

Cloves of roasted garlic on a cutting board with a knife from the top view.

Ingredients

You are on your way to creating a culinary delicacy with a few simple ingredients. Garlic is the star of the show for this Air Fryer Roasted Garlic recipe, so it’s essential to use the freshest garlic you can find at the grocery store. 

Ingredients for air fryer roasted garlic in bowls from the top view.

Gather your fresh garlic, extra virgin olive oil (you can also use avocado oil), kosher salt, and black pepper. Salt and pepper are optional, so feel free to omit them if you like.

How To Roast Garlic In The Air Fryer

Roasting garlic in an air fryer is not only delicious but it’s also quick and easy. The best part is that you can air fry the whole head of garlic or just the cloves using your air fryer. Below are step-by-step instructions for each method:

Using Whole Cloves

I usually air fry garlic as a whole as I use a lot of it in my cooking and save whatever is left to use later. You can air fry one head of garlic or as many as you can fit in the air fryer basket following the method below:

  1. Preheat your air fryer to 400 F degrees.
A person showing how to prepare a head of garlic for roasting in the air fryer.
  1. Prepare garlic bulbs for air frying: Use a sharp knife to slice off the top of the garlic bulb, just enough to expose the cloves inside. Place the garlic head on the center of a piece of aluminum foil. Save the top to use for making chicken stock later, or discard it.
  2. Season: Drizzle the garlic with olive oil. It is optional, but if you want, you can lightly season with salt and pepper.
  3. Form a pouch: Wrap the head of the garlic tightly with foil forming a small pouch. Repeat the same process with the rest of the garlic bulbs, if you want to air fry more than one bulb.
A person roasting garlic in an air fryer and checking for doneness.
  1. Air Fry: Arrange the pouch in the air fryer basket. If you are roasting multiple heads of garlic, be sure not to overcrowd the basket. Cook for 18 minutes. 
  2. Check for doneness: Remove the pouch from the air fryer basket and carefully open it to allow the steam to escape. Using a paring knife (or cake tester), check if the garlic cloves are soft and creamy. If they are not yet ready, re-wrap the foil and place it back in the air fryer cooking at 2-minute increments (watch closely to prevent overcooking) until your cloves have reached the desired consistency.
A person squeezing out roasted garlic on a cutting board from the top view.
  1. Allow to cool: Let rest for 10 minutes before removing and venting the pouch. With the roasted garlic cooled to a manageable temperature, you can use your hands to squeeze the garlic from the whole head, or you can use a small spoon to scoop out the garlic from each individual clove.

Air Frying Garlic Cloves

Alternatively, you can roast individual garlic cloves in your air fryer. The good thing about air frying them individually is that they cook even faster. Here’s how I do it:

  1. Preheat the air fryer to 370° F
  2. Separate cloves: You can separate cloves from the whole head of garlic or use individual garlic cloves you already have on hand. You may peel the papery skin from the raw garlic cloves at this time, but I find it easier to peel them after they are roasted.
  3. Prepare garlic cloves for air frying: Arrange individual cloves of garlic in a ramekin (or an oven-proof small baking dish). If you do not have one, you can place garlic cloves on a sheet of aluminum foil instead.
A person preparing and roasting individual air fried garlic cloves.
  1. Season cloves: Drizzle with olive oil and lightly season with salt and pepper. Give it a toss to ensure each clove is evenly coated with oil and seasoning.
  2. Cover tightly to trap steam: Cover ramekin with foil or wrap foil tightly to create a pouch, depending on your chosen method.
  3. Air fry garlic cloves: Place pouch into the air fryer basket and air fry for 15 minutes.
  4. Check for doneness: Carefully open the tin foil allowing the steam to escape, and check a clove by gently squeezing it between your fingers. They should be soft and creamy. If they need more time, you can close the foil back up and cook at 1-minute increments (keep a close eye on cooking time to keep from burning the cloves).
  5. Peel the garlic: Once cloves are soft, remove and allow to cool for a few minutes before venting the pouch. Once you can handle the cloves, you can use your fingers to gently squeeze the garlic from its peel.

How To Store And Freeze

If you have leftover roasted garlic cloves or prefer to make a few batches to keep some air-fried garlic on hand, I have a few methods you can use to ensure lasting freshness for future meal preps.

Air Fried Garlic Cloves – Whole

  • To Store: If you prefer your cloves whole, remove the outer layer of each clove and place them in an airtight container. Air fryer roasted garlic cloves can be kept in the refrigerator for up to 5 days. You can also store your individual cloves in oil. Peel whole cloves, place them in a small glass jar (or mason jar), and cover with olive oil for up to 5 days. As an added bonus, use the roasted garlic-infused oil to incorporate garlic flavor into your recipes.
  • To Freeze: If you want to freeze the garlic cloves as a whole, wait until they reach room temperature, remove the papery skin from each clove and place them in a single layer on a cooking sheet. Place in the freezer overnight. Once frozen, they can be transferred to a freezer bag or airtight container and stored for up to 1 month.

Air Fried Garlic – Mashed

A person mashing roasted garlic cloves to prepare them for freezing.
  • To Store: If you prefer garlic mashed, take your already peeled roasted cloves and mash with a fork in a small bowl. Transfer it to an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • To Freeze: If you want to extend the life of your mashed garlic, you can store mashed garlic in an ice cube tray, cover it tightly, and freeze it in the fridge overnight. Once frozen, pop out the garlic cubes and store them in a freezer bag or airtight container for up to 2 months.

How To Use Air Fried Garlic

Air fryer garlic is the perfect substitute in any recipe calling for fresh garlic, especially if you are not a fan of the strong flavors of raw garlic. Not to mention, the creamy texture and the unique caramelized mellow garlic flavor are a great way to add a layer of complexity to any of your recipes.

Here are a few ways I use air fryer roasted garlic in my cooking:

Soups

Soups are practically begging for the addition of roasted garlic. The creamy texture melts into soups impeccably, and the delicious taste is hard to beat. Here are a few blended soup recipes you can try:

Sauces, Dressings, & Marinades

Soups don’t get all the fun around here, though. Air fryer roasted garlic is also a wonderful addition to sauces, salad dressings, and marinades. It mixes easily and lends a sweet, roasted, and garlicky flavor when added to your favorite condiments and marinades. Below are a few fan favorites:

Spread on Toast

For an addictive and delicious snack idea, you can mix your mashed roasted garlic puree with ricotta cheese or cream cheese. Load up your butter knife and spread it all over toasted Olive Bread.

Roasted garlic cloves in the air fryer also make a great addition to compound butter. Get my recipe for Roasted Garlic Butter made by mixing roasted garlic with herbs and spices to create a spread for meats, vegetables or just to spread on a slice of freshly baked crusty bread.

A person holding a jar of roasted garlic cloves from the side view.

Expert Tips

  • Size, type, and age of the garlic matter: When it comes to cooking time, the type, age, and size of your garlic bulbs (or cloves) matter. Small heads of garlic (and small garlic cloves) will require less cooking time than larger ones. For this reason, I recommend keeping a close watch on your cooking times and only increasing time in 1 to 2-minute increments.
  • Use the freshest garlic: This easy air fryer recipe is all about the garlic, so it stands to reason that you want to use the absolute best garlic you can find. When buying garlic for roasting, look for fresh bulbs that are heavy for their size, and avoid bulbs that have soft spots or mold.
  • Be careful as you open the pouch: Hot steam will vent from the pouch as soon as you open it. To prevent burns, allow the pouch to cool for a few moments and then only open a small section to allow the steam to escape.
  • Peeled garlic cooks faster: If you chose to air fryer peeled garlic cloves, be aware that they fry a few minutes quicker than garlic cloves with the skin on.
  • If you have questions about tin foil and air fryers, be sure to check out this post on how to use aluminum foil in an air fryer?

FAQs

How to roast garlic in an air fryer without foil?

There are two ways you could attempt to roast garlic in an air fryer without foil, and they both involve parchment paper and baker’s twine. You can wrap the bulbs (or cloves) in parchment paper, fold the sides, form a pouch or envelope, and tie them with twine.
Another option is placing the bulbs (or cloves) in a ramekin and wrapping that with parchment and twine. Either option will be successful if you ensure it is tightly wrapped. The creation of steam is essential in roasting garlic in the air fryer.

When roasting garlic, do you peel it first?

It is a personal choice. Either way would work but keep in mind that peeled garlic cooks faster in the air fryer.

How long to roast garlic in an air fryer?

Whole bulbs of garlic will need to be roasted for about 20 minutes, whereas individual cloves require around 10 minutes of cooking time. Still, the air frying time might slightly differ based on the type, age, and size of the garlic you are using.

Other Tasty Air Fryer Recipes You Might Like:

Can’t get enough? Check out all our Air Fryer recipes.

If you find this guide on Roast Garlic in Air Fryer or any one of our other How-To Guides on Foolproof Living helpful, please take a minute to leave a rating and a review. Doing so helps others who are planning to follow the processes outlined in this post. Thank you!

Air fryer roasted garlic cloves wrapped in foil from the top view.
Print

Roasted Garlic in Air Fryer Recipe

This recipe for roasted garlic in the air fryer is a super quick and easy way to transform raw garlic into a smooth, creamy, and caramelized addition to a variety of savory recipes. This method is faster than oven-roasting and takes only 25 minutes!
Course How To
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 18 minutes
Total Time 23 minutes
Servings 1 garlic bulb
Calories 23kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 whole head of garlic
  • 1/2 teaspoon extra virgin olive oil or avocado oil
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt optional
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper optional

Instructions

If roasting a whole head of garlic:

  • Preheat: Preheat the air fryer to 400 degrees F.
  • Prep the garlic: Slice the top off the head of the garlic (1/3rd from the top) and place it on a piece of aluminum foil.
  • Drizzle with oil: Pour olive oil over the garlic bulbs. If preferred, season with salt and black pepper.
  • Wrap: Wrap it tightly. It should look like a small pouch.
  • Roast: Place in the air fryer basket and air fry until garlic cloves are soft and creamy for 18 minutes. To check doneness, remove the pouch from the air fryer and carefully open it to let the steam out. Check the see if the garlic is fully roasted and soft. If not, wrap it tightly and let it air fry for 2 more minutes, keeping a close eye on it to prevent it from burning.
  • Cool and remove: Let it cool for 10 minutes, and remove the now-roasted garlic either by squeezing the whole head with your hands or removing each garlic clove with a small spoon.

If roasting garlic cloves:

  • Preheat: Preheat the air fryer to 370 degrees F.
  • Prep the garlic: Remove the outer layer of the garlic bulb and break it into cloves. If you want to peel them, you can go ahead and do that at this point, but I find it easier to skip peeling as it is easier to remove the outer skin after they are roasted.
  • Use foil: Place garlic cloves onto a square sheet of aluminum foil.
  • Drizzle with oil: Drizzle with oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper. Toss to make sure all the garlic cloves are equally coated with the oil and seasonings.
  • Wrap: Wrap it tightly to make it a pouch.
  • Roast: Place in the air fryer basket. Air fry for 10 minutes. To check doneness, open the pouch carefully and lightly squeeze one of the cloves. It should be soft. If not, wrap it tightly and air fry in 1-minute increments until fully softened.
  • Let cool: When done, take the pouch out and let it cool for a few minutes. Carefully open and let the steam out.
  • Squeeze out the garlic: Squeeze the now-roasted garlic out of each garlic clove by gently squeezing the garlic and removing it from its shell.

Notes

  • Using more than one bulb? This recipe can be made with as many garlic bulbs as you air fryer can accommodate.
  • Storing & Freezing Air Fried Garlic Cloves as a Whole:
    • To Store: If you need the roasted garlic cloves to remain whole, carefully remove the outer layer of each clove and store them in an airtight container. It should keep fresh for up to 5 days. Alternatively, you can drizzle it with olive oil and use the “garlic-infused oil” in your recipes, but again it is best to use it within 5 days.
    • To Freeze: If you prefer to freeze whole cloves, spread them out onto a sheet pan and place them in the freezer overnight. Once frozen, store them in a freezer bag or an airtight container.
  • Storing & Freezing Air Fried Garlic – Mashed:
    • To Store: If you prefer mashed garlic, then squeeze out the garlic from the roasted cloves and mash them in a small bowl. Place in a small airtight container and store in the fridge for upto 5 days.
    • To Freeze: Place mashed garlic in an ice cube tray and freeze it overnight. The next day, pop out the cubes and place them in a freezer bag or an airtight container. Store for up to a month.

Nutrition

Calories: 23kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 0.2g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 0.3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 582mg | Potassium: 19mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 0.03g | Vitamin A: 3IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 8mg | Iron: 0.1mg

The post Roast Garlic in Air Fryer appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roast-garlic-in-air-fryer/feed/ 0
How To Roast Garlic Without Foil https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-roast-garlic-without-foil/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-roast-garlic-without-foil/#respond Thu, 08 Sep 2022 21:14:38 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=59477 If you no longer carry aluminum foil in your household for the environment, for health reasons, or simply because you ran out or want to save money, rest assured that you can roast your garlic without it! Ingredients To roast garlic without tin foil, you only need two simple ingredients: a whole head of garlic and olive oil. If desired, you may also add salt and black pepper. When selecting...

The post How To Roast Garlic Without Foil appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
If you no longer carry aluminum foil in your household for the environment, for health reasons, or simply because you ran out or want to save money, rest assured that you can roast your garlic without it!

A collage of images showing how to roast garlic without the use of foil.

Ingredients

To roast garlic without tin foil, you only need two simple ingredients: a whole head of garlic and olive oil. If desired, you may also add salt and black pepper.

Salt and pepper and olive oil as ingredients for roasted garlic from the top view.

When selecting garlic, I recommend using soft neck garlic, the most common type of garlic found at the grocery store. You may also use more than one head of garlic when following any of my roasting methods. Just be sure to select bulbs of garlic that are similar in size to ensure even baking. 

Remember, too, that the size, age, and type of garlic you use affects how long it will take to roast in the oven. Always watch your bulbs as they cook and check their doneness based on the instructions below.

Furthermore, ghee or avocado oil would also work if you choose not to use olive oil.

Equipment You’ll Need for Each Method

People often use aluminum foil to roast garlic because it helps trap steam against the bulb, resulting in soft garlic cloves. Therefore, when you roast garlic without foil, it’s essential to have the right equipment to produce that slow, even roast.

Photo collage of equipment needed to roast garlic without foil.
  • Muffin tins or cast iron skillets: Stacking two muffin trays or two cast iron skillets on top of one another is a great way to keep your garlic bulbs moist in the oven. Don’t worry if you don’t have two tins or skillets, though. Simply wrap the top of the first baking tin/skillet with parchment paper, then cover it with a layer of aluminum foil for extra grip. If you don’t have a muffin tin or a cast iron skillet, it is easy to roast garlic in a pan, such as a loaf pan. Just cover the loaf pan with parchment paper, followed by tin foil.
  • Parchment paper: Parchment paper may be the best way to avoid messy cleanup when roasting garlic. Simply wrap the whole head of garlic in a piece of parchment paper and tie it with kitchen twine. Or you can also use a layer of aluminum foil to hold it together.
  • Garlic roaster: Another way to make roasted garlic with no foil is to use a garlic roaster (affiliate link). If your roaster is terra cotta, let it soak in water for 15 minutes before placing it in the oven.
  • A small, oven-proof baking dish: If you want to roast garlic cloves fast, you can bake peeled, individual cloves of garlic on a small baking sheet with olive oil.

Step-by-Step Instructions for Each Method

To roast garlic with no foil, you don’t have to be a five-star chef. You can add a delectable garlic taste to your favorite recipes with any of my four foolproof methods.

Method 1: Wrapping Garlic Bulbs in Parchment Paper

  1. Heat the oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F.
A person showing how to roast garlic with parchment from the top view.
  1. Slice the garlic head: Cut off the top ¼-inch of the garlic bulb using a sharp knife. You may discard the slice or save it for making chicken stock later.
  2. Drizzle with olive oil: Place the whole head of garlic on a small piece of parchment paper. Drizzle the exposed garlic bulb with 1-2 teaspoons of olive oil, depending on the bulb’s size.
  3. Wrap the garlic: Wrap the whole bulb of garlic with the parchment. If you have it, you can tie it with kitchen twine, or if not, wrap it again with a sheet of aluminum foil.
A person placing parchment and foil-wrapped garlic on a baking sheet.
  1. Roast: Transfer the wrapped garlic to a baking sheet, and place it in the oven for 40-45 minutes. Wary of hot steam, carefully remove the layers of tin foil and parchment paper to check for doneness. If the cloves are sufficiently soft, remove them from the oven. If they have not yet reached your desired level of tenderness, re-wrap the bulb and let it continue roasting. Roast the cloves until they have fully softened, checking them every 5-10 minutes.

Method 2: Using Two Muffin Tins or Two Cast Iron Skillets

  1. Preheat the oven: Set the oven to 400 degrees F.
  2. Trim the head of garlic: Remove the outer papery skin of each head of garlic, making sure that the cloves are still attached. Use a sharp knife to slice the topmost ¼-inch of the garlic bulb, thereby exposing the cloves.
A person showing how to roast garlic in a cast iron skillet from the top view.
  1. Add the garlic to the muffin tin or skillet: Place the trimmed head of garlic in a muffin tin or a small cast iron skillet. Drizzle the bulb with 1-2 teaspoons of olive oil, depending on the size of the garlic head.
  2. Top with another muffin tin or skillet: Top the first baking tin/skillet with another muffin tin or cast iron skillet such that you fully cover the garlic bulbs. If you do not have two muffin tins or skillets, you can first cover it with parchment paper, followed by aluminum foil to hold it in place.
Heads of roasted garlic in a cast iron skillet from the top view.
  1. Roast the garlic: Let the muffin tin- or cast iron-roasted garlic cook in the oven for 45-60 minutes, or until the garlic cloves have softened and caramelized. During my recipe testing, I found out that it took longer to roast garlic in a cast iron skillet than to roast it in a muffin tin.

Method 3: Using a Garlic Roaster

A person showing how to roast garlic in a garlic roaster from the top view.
  1. Soak the garlic roaster: Submerge your garlic roaster (affiliate link)(both the top and bottom pieces) in water and let it soak for 15 minutes. Remove the roaster and dry off any excess water with a kitchen towel.
  2. Cut the top of the bulb: With a sharp knife, slice off the top ¼-inch of your garlic head.
  3. Drizzle the olive oil: Place the sliced bulb in the bottom half of the garlic roaster. Drizzle the cloves with 1-2 teaspoons of olive oil.
  4. Bake: Set the oven to 350 degrees F and place the garlic roaster inside. (Note: You don’t have to preheat the oven for this method.) Roast the cloves for 55-60 minutes or until they are softened and lightly caramelized.

Method 4: Baking Garlic Cloves in a Baking Dish

  1. Set the oven: Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F.
  2. Peel the cloves: Break apart the entire head of garlic. Then, individually peel each clove.
A person showing how to roast peeled garlic in a baking dish.
  1. Add the olive oil: Place the pre-peeled garlic cloves in a small, oven-safe baking dish. Drizzle them with just enough oil to submerge their lower halves.
  2. Bake: Bake the garlic cloves in the oven for 30 minutes or until they have turned soft and golden brown.
  3. Let the cloves cool: Remove the fast-roasted garlic from the oven and let it cool before using it in recipes.

How to Store and Freeze

Once you see how garlic transforms your cooking, you won’t want a single bite to go to waste. These simple storage tips will keep your roasted garlic cloves fresh for as long as you need them.

A person showing how to freeze roasted garlic from the top view.
  • Store: To store your roasted garlic, place it in an airtight container in the fridge. This method will keep your garlic fresh for up to 5 days. Alternatively, place the garlic cloves in an airtight jar, cover them with olive oil, store them in the refrigerator and use it within 5 days.
  • Freeze: To freeze your garlic, mash the roasted cloves to a paste. Then, divide the garlic paste into the empty slots of an ice cube tray and freeze overnight. The following day, remove the frozen garlic from the ice tray and transfer the cubes to a freezer bag, removing as much air as possible. Freeze until ready to use.

Recipe Ideas to Use Roasted Garlic

Rich and caramelized, oven-roasted garlic is a game changer in my cooking. Not only does it have a more gentle flavor than raw garlic, but it also works in dozens of recipes.

  • Make Roasted Garlic Butter: Nothing satisfies the tastebuds like a rich, delicious spread topped on warm bread. This Roasted Garlic Butter will take your garlic bread (and other recipes!) to the next level with its sumptuous flavor.
  • Add it to salad dressing: My favorite way to add rich, mellow flavor to salad dressing is to add a few cloves of slow-roasted garlic. You won’t be able to put down your fork once you try roasted garlic with my Avocado Salad Dressing, Lemon Dijon Vinaigrette, and Creamy Poppy Seed Dressing.
  • Use it in pasta sauces and soups: If you don’t like the sharp flavor of raw garlic, try roasted garlic instead. The mellow, buttery flavor of roasted garlic makes an excellent substitute for raw garlic in all your favorite pasta sauces and soup recipes.
  • Make garlic bread: Mix it with butter and spread it on toast. I love making my garlic bread in an air fryer as it is ready in 5 minutes.
A close-up of roasted heads of garlic on parchment paper from the top view.

FAQs

How to roast garlic fast?

The fastest way to roast garlic is to roast peeled, individual garlic cloves in olive oil. Using a small, oven-proof baking dish, this quick roasted garlic only takes 30 minutes at 350 degrees F. You can also cook garlic quickly by following my recipe to roast garlic in an air fryer without foil, which takes about 25 minutes.

How do you roast garlic without burning it?

The best way to keep your garlic from burning in the oven is to cover it with parchment paper (and/or aluminum foil) before baking it for 40 minutes at 400 degrees F. The foil traps steam against the whole heads of garlic, keeping them moist. Just be sure to check your cloves after 40 to 45 minutes, and be careful when unwrapping the foil. 

Other Garlic-Related Posts You Might Like:

Garlic lovers rejoice! Because it doesn’t end here. As a self-proclaimed garlic aficionado, I have so many more garlic recipes for you. Below are a few more garlic recipes to help you put our favorite ingredient to good use:

  • Roasted Garlic in the Oven: This method for roasting garlic in the oven works for both whole heads of garlic or individual cloves. The whole process takes less than an hour and results in bold, rich roasted garlic that adds depth to a variety of recipes.
  • Air Fryer Garlic: It takes only 25 minutes to roast garlic if you have an air fryer. In the recipe post, I made sure to cover the instructions for roasting garlic with or without foil using your air fryer.
  • Roasted Garlic Compound Butter: While roasted garlic tastes wonderful by itself, mixing it with butter and fresh herbs is yet another great way to use it in your recipes.

If you find this guide on How To Roast Garlic Without Foil or any one of our other How-To Guides on Foolproof Living helpful, please take a minute to leave a rating and a review. Doing so helps others who are planning to follow the processes outlined in this post. Thank you!

Heads of roasted garlic on parchment paper from the top view.
Print

How to Roast Garlic Without Foil

Learn four different methods of roasting garlic without foil with this step-by-step guide. It's easy to achieve soft, creamy, and bold garlic without the use of aluminum foil, and you can add your roasted garlic to everything from salad dressings to pasta dishes for lots of depth and extra flavor!
Course How To
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 1
Calories 40kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 1 whole head of garlic or more
  • 1 teaspoon Olive oil or more depending on the size of your garlic bulb
  • Salt optional

Instructions

  • Start by peeling the outer layer of the whole head of garlic but be gentle so that the bulb stays intact.

Method 1: Use parchment paper (and aluminum foil) and kitchen twine

  • Preheat: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • Prep the garlic: Using a sharp knife, slice 1/4 -inch off the top of the garlic bulb. Discard the top or save it for making stock later.
  • Drizzle with oil: Drizzle garlic bulb with 1 to 2 teaspoons of olive oil, depending on the size of the bulb.
  • Wrap the garlic: Wrap the garlic bulb in a small sheet of parchment paper and wrap it again with aluminum foil.
  • Roast: Place it on a baking sheet and roast it in the oven for 40 minutes. Carefully remove the layers of aluminum foil and parchment paper and check for doneness. If the cloves are softened to your liking, then they are done. Otherwise, wrap it up and let it roast until they are fully softened, checking in every 5- 10 minutes.

Method 2: Use 2 muffin tins or 2 cast iron skillets

  • Preheat: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • Prep the garlic: Using a sharp knife, slice the top of the head of garlic.
  • Drizzle with oil: Place it in a muffin tin or a small cast iron skillet and drizzle it with 1 to 2 teaspoons of olive oil, depending on the size of the bulb.
  • Cover: Cover it with another muffin tin or cast iron skillet on top, making sure that garlic bulbs are fully covered on top.
  • Roast: Roast in the oven for 40-45 minutes or until the garlic cloves are softened and caramelized.

Method 3: Use a garlic roaster

  • Prep the roaster: Soak your garlic roaster (both the bottom and the top piece) in water for 15 minutes. Remove and dry off the excess water with a kitchen towel.
  • Prep the garlic: Slice the top of the garlic bulb/s using a sharp knife.
  • Drizzle with oil: Place them on the bottom piece of the garlic roaster. Drizzle each bulb with 1-2 teaspoons of olive oil.
  • Cover: Put the top piece on top and place it in the oven.
  • Roast: Heat the oven to 350 degrees F (no need to preheat the oven for this method). Roast for 30-35 minutes or until the garlic cloves are softened and lightly caramelized.

Method 4: Roast garlic cloves in oil

  • Preheat: Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F.
  • Prep the garlic: Break apart the whole head of garlic and peel each clove one by one.
  • Drizzle with oil: Place them into a small ovenproof baking dish. Drizzle them with just enough olive oil to cover the bottom halves of the cloves. just enough that they are covered halfway through.
  • Roast: Bake in the preheated oven for 30 minutes or until they are softened and turned golden brown.
  • Let cool: Remove from oven and let it cool before using in recipes.

Notes

  • Store: To store your leftovers, place them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days. Alternatively, you can place the garlic cloves in an airtight jar, cover them with olive oil, store them in the refrigerator and use it within 5 days.
  • Freeze: To freeze your garlic, mash the roasted cloves to a paste. Then, divide the garlic paste into the empty slots of an ice cube tray and freeze overnight. The following day, remove the frozen garlic from the ice tray and transfer the cubes to a freezer bag, removing as much air as possible. Freeze until ready to use.

Nutrition

Calories: 40kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 0.2g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 1mg | Potassium: 12mg | Fiber: 0.1g | Sugar: 0.03g | Vitamin A: 0.3IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 5mg | Iron: 0.1mg

The post How To Roast Garlic Without Foil appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-roast-garlic-without-foil/feed/ 0
How to Roast Garlic in Oven https://foolproofliving.com/oven-roasted-garlic/ https://foolproofliving.com/oven-roasted-garlic/#comments Thu, 08 Sep 2022 21:03:17 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=7428 In this easy recipe, I use aluminum foil to wrap garlic bulbs. If you are not a fan, check out my post on Roasting Garlic without Foil. And if you are short on time, be sure to also get my foolproof recipe for Garlic in the Air Fryer. Recipe Ingredients To make this roasted garlic recipe, you will need two simple ingredients: garlic and olive oil.  You can follow the...

The post How to Roast Garlic in Oven appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
In this easy recipe, I use aluminum foil to wrap garlic bulbs. If you are not a fan, check out my post on Roasting Garlic without Foil. And if you are short on time, be sure to also get my foolproof recipe for Garlic in the Air Fryer.

A top view of foil-wrapped heads of roasted garlic.

Recipe Ingredients

To make this roasted garlic recipe, you will need two simple ingredients: garlic and olive oil. 

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

You can follow the recipe below to roast one whole garlic bulb or more. You may also add salt for additional flavor, but it is optional.

When selecting heads of garlic, look for firm, fresh bulbs that don’t have any soft spots or mold. Avoid old garlic that is dried out or has green shoots growing inside.

Best Garlic For Roasting:

This recipe will work with any type of garlic, but I think the best garlic for roasting is artichoke garlic. Artichoke garlic, or “soft neck garlic,” is the most common variety in grocery stores and has a delectably mild taste. 

For a sweeter, more full-bodied variety, you can also use rocambole garlic (also known as “hard neck garlic”). You can also use this recipe for baked elephant garlic—a much larger variety of garlic that tastes similar to an onion. However, oven-roasted elephant garlic will require more cooking time due to its size.

Though I use olive oil in this recipe, any neutral oil, such as avocado oil and ghee, would work.

Optional Add-Ins & Variations

Whether you are roasting a whole head of garlic or individual cloves, these optional add-ins are an easy way to change up the flavors of roasted garlic cloves.

  • Seasonings: Adding a pinch of salt and black pepper is the easiest way to enhance the flavors when baking garlic in olive oil. While it is optional, if you are using the roasted garlic on its own, I would recommend seasoning it before roasting.
  • Fresh herbs: Nothing balances the bold taste of oven-roasted garlic cloves better than fresh herbs. Chopped rosemary, fresh thyme, and parsley are just a few of my favorites.
  • Butter: To enhance the rich flavor of your whole roasted garlic cloves, try using butter instead of olive oil. 

How to Make Roasted Garlic

Roasting garlic in the oven is an easy yet vital tool for any chef who likes bold flavors. Below are two simple methods for making homemade roasted garlic like a pro:

Method 1: Roasting Whole Garlic Heads

Here is my hands-free method for making roasted garlic in aluminum foil. The recipe below can be made with one head of garlic or more.

A person using foil to cinch garlic for roasting in the oven.
  1. Preheat the oven: Set your oven temperature to 400 degrees F.
  2. Peel the garlic: Peel off the outermost layer of each garlic bulb. Be sure to keep the bulb intact so that each clove connects to the base.
  3. Trim the bulbs: Use a sharp knife to slice ¼-inch off the head of each garlic bulb. This cut should expose the tops of the cloves.
  4. Place garlic on aluminum foil: Take out several pieces of aluminum foil and place each of the whole garlic bulbs on its own sheet. Then, drizzle each bulb with 1-2 teaspoons of olive oil, ensuring that the oil touches the individual garlic cloves.
  5. Wrap the foil: If desired, sprinkle your garlic with a pinch of salt and pepper. Then, wrap each garlic head in its piece of foil.
  6. Roast the garlic: Place the aluminum-wrapped garlic cloves onto a baking sheet and roast them for 40 minutes in the hot oven.
  7. Check for doneness: Remove the foil-wrapped cloves from the oven. Cautiously open the foil, being careful not to burn yourself with trapped steam. Then, insert a paring knife into a garlic clove. If the clove is soft, remove it from the oven. If the clove is still hard, re-wrap it in its aluminum sheet and roast it for 5-10 more minutes.
  8. Caramelize the garlic (optional): If you want to caramelize your garlic even further, unwrap your soft garlic and roast it for 5-7 more minutes. Just be sure to keep an eye on your garlic during this step, so it doesn’t burn.
A person squeezing garlic into a container from the top view.
  1. Let the garlic cool: Rest your roasted garlic cloves on the counter and let them cool for 5-10 minutes. When ready, remove the aluminum foil carefully and let out any trapped steam.
  2. Remove the roasted garlic: To remove the garlic from their cloves, squeeze the whole head of garlic or remove each clove individually with a teaspoon or cocktail fork.

Method 2: Roasting Individual Garlic Cloves

If you’re on a time crunch, a faster way to roast garlic is to roast individual garlic cloves. Follow the steps below to cut your roasting garlic time in half.

A person showing how to cook garlic by roasting cloves in the oven.
  1. Arrange the cloves: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F and place the individual garlic cloves in a medium-size ramekin or an oven-safe container.
  2. Bake: Drizzle the cloves with olive oil, cover the ramekin with aluminum foil, and bake until the garlic cloves are tender. However, remember that individual cloves roast faster than whole garlic heads. Therefore, I recommend checking for doneness after the first 15 minutes of baking.
  3. Roast until finished: You are good to go if the cloves are soft and lightly browned. If not, return the ramekin back to the oven and check every 4-5 minutes to prevent them from burning.

How Long Does it Take to Roast Garlic?

When roasting a head of garlic, I recommend setting your oven to 400 degrees F and baking the bulbs for 40-50 minutes. However, roasting time may vary depending on your garlic’s size, variety, and age. 

You can also change what temperature you use to roast garlic. For instance, if you prefer slow-roasted garlic, you can bake your cloves at 350 degrees F for about 70-90 minutes

How to Keep it

If roasting garlic cloves (or bulbs) is a part of your weekly meal prep, follow the storage steps below to have them ready throughout the week:

A person showing how to store garlic in a container or an ice tray for freezing.
  • Store: Place leftover roasted cloves in an airtight container (or a small jar) and keep it in the fridge for up to 5 days. If preferred, you can drizzle the cloves with a little bit of olive oil and use the garlic-infused olive oil in homemade salad dressings. However, make sure you store it in an airtight container and consume it within 5 days.
  • Freeze: First, make a roasted garlic paste by mashing your garlic cloves. Then, divide the paste into the empty slots of an ice tray. After squeezing out the garlic, freeze the ice tray overnight, then transfer the garlic cubes to a Ziploc bag. Remove as much air from the bag as possible before placing it back in the freezer.

How to Use Roasted Garlic?

Wondering what to do with roasted garlic? This mouthwatering collection includes dozens of uses for roasted garlic, from making garlic bread to a simple baked garlic appetizer.

A bowl of peeled, roasted garlic from the top view.

Expert Tips

  • Meal prep: Since a whole head of garlic wrapped in foil doesn’t take up much space in the oven, I always throw in a head or two whenever I’m roasting another dish. And because my weekly meal prep always includes roasted vegetables, it’s easy to roast garlic at the same time.
  • Eliminate bitter taste: If your roasted garlic tastes bitter, it may be because it is old. However, because garlic is also sensitive to high heat, its bitterness may also be a result of over or undercooking. Therefore, if it tastes bitter, try reducing the temperature. I recommend setting your oven to 350 degrees F. and cooking your garlic for 70-90 minutes.
  • Roast and freeze garlic in bulk: If you’re a fan of advanced meal prep, roasting and freezing garlic in bulk is a great way to reduce waste. This is especially useful if you are growing your own garlic.

FAQs

What is the head of the garlic?

The head of the garlic refers to the large bulb of papery skin that contains individual cloves.

How long is roasted garlic good for?

Roasted garlic will keep fresh for up to one week when stored in an airtight container in the fridge. 

How to roast peeled garlic?

To roast garlic cloves that are peeled, place the cloves in a ramekin and drizzle them with olive oil. Then, cover the ramekin with aluminum foil and bake at 400 degrees F. for 10-12 minutes.

How to roast minced garlic?

Preheat your oven to 325 degrees F. Then, place minced garlic on a sheet pan, drizzle it with 1-2 teaspoons of olive oil, and bake for 10 minutes. Be sure to toss the garlic halfway through to ensure even cooking.

How to roast garlic quickly?

The fastest way to roast garlic is by roasting peeled cloves in the oven in a ramekin covered with aluminum foil. This process takes about 15 minutes. The other way to roast garlic quickly is to roast it in the air fryer. The air fryer roasted garlic also takes about 15 minutes from start to finish.

Other Garlic-Related Posts You Might Like:

Garlic lovers rejoice! Because it doesn’t end here. As a self-proclaimed garlic aficionado, I have so many more garlic recipes for you. Below are a few more garlic recipes to help you put our favorite ingredient to good use:

  • Roasting Garlic No Foil Method: While I think the best way to roast garlic is in the oven wrapped in tin foil, I know some people don’t like using aluminum foil in their cooking. This post shows you 4 different ways of roasting garlic without foil, including how to roast garlic in a garlic roaster and a cast iron skillet.
  • Air Fryer Garlic: It takes only 25 minutes to roast garlic if you have an air fryer. In the recipe post, I made sure to cover the instructions for roasting garlic with or without foil using your air fryer.
  • Roasted Garlic Compound Butter: While roasted garlic tastes wonderful by itself, mixing it with butter and fresh herbs is yet another great way to use it in your recipes.

If you find this guide on Roasted Garlic Recipe or any one of our other How-To Guides on Foolproof Living helpful, please take a minute to leave a rating and a review. Doing so helps others who are planning to follow the processes outlined in this post. Thank you!

roasted garlic cloves on a baking sheet from the top view.
Print

How to Roast Garlic in Oven

This simple guide on How to Roast Garlic in the Oven results in creamy, soft, and bold roasted garlic that you can add to endless recipes. My foolproof method works for both whole heads of garlic or individual cloves.
Course Condiment
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 1 garlic bulb
Calories 40kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 head of garlic or more
  • 1 teaspoon Olive oil
  • Pinch of Salt optional

Instructions

Method 1: Roasting Garlic Cloves As A Whole:

  • Preheat the oven to 400 F (205 C) degrees.
  • Peel the outer layer (aka papery skin) off each garlic bulb, making sure to leave the whole bulb intact with all of the cloves still connected.
  • Slice 1/4 -inch top off the head of each garlic bulb, exposing the tops of the garlic cloves.
  • Place each garlic bulb in the middle of a piece of aluminum foil, drizzle with 1-2 teaspoons of olive oil (depending on the side of your garlic) and make sure that the oil sinks all the way down into the individual garlic cloves.
  • If preferred, sprinkle it with a pinch of salt. Wrap the whole garlic head in foil and repeat the same process with the rest of your garlic bulbs.
  • Place them onto a baking sheet and roast for 40 minutes.
  • To check doneness, remove foil packets from the oven. Carefully open the foil (being careful not to let the hot built-up steam burn your fingers) and insert a paring knife into a garlic clove. If it is soft, it should be ready. If not, wrap it up and put it back in the oven for 5-10 more minutes.
  • If you want it to get even more browned and caramelized, you can unwrap it and let it roast for another 5-7 minutes after it is fully softened. Though I would keep a close eye on them during this step as you do not want them to burn.
  • Let roasted garlic cool for 5-10 minutes on the counter. When ready, carefully let the steam out as you remove the aluminum foil.
  • To remove the now-roasted garlic from cloves, you can either squeeze the whole head of garlic or remove each clove one by one with a teaspoon or cocktail fork.

Method 2: Roasting Individual Garlic Cloves:

  • If you prefer to roast garlic cloves individually, you can place them in a large ramekin. Drizzle them with olive oil, cover the ramekin tightly with foil and bake until tender.
  • Please keep in mind that individual garlic cloves roast faster than whole garlic heads. So, be sure to check for doneness after the first 15-minute mark.
  • If they are not fully roasted, place them back in the oven and continue to bake, checking every 5 minutes to make sure they are not burning.

Notes

  • This recipe can be multiplied as many times as you want.
  • The exact roasting time will depend on each garlic bulb’s variety, size, and age. During my recipe testing, I found that it is best to check the garlic bulbs after the first 40-45 minute mark. In most cases, they were done by then, but if yours are not, feel free to keep them in the oven longer but be sure to check them every 5-10 minutes.
  • To Store: Place leftover roasted garlic in an airtight container and keep it in the fridge for up to 5 days. If preferred, you can drizzle the cloves with a little bit of olive oil and use the garlic-infused olive oil in homemade salad dressings. However, make sure you store it in an airtight container and consume it within 5 days.
  • Freeze: First, make a roasted garlic paste by mashing your garlic cloves. Then, divide the paste into the empty slots of an ice tray. After squeezing out the garlic, freeze the ice tray overnight, then transfer the garlic cubes to a freezer-safe plastic bag. Remove as much air from the bag as possible before placing it back in the freezer.

Nutrition

Calories: 40kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 0.2g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 1mg | Potassium: 12mg | Fiber: 0.1g | Sugar: 0.03g | Vitamin A: 0.3IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 5mg | Iron: 0.1mg

The post How to Roast Garlic in Oven appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/oven-roasted-garlic/feed/ 9
Blanched Kale https://foolproofliving.com/blanched-kale/ https://foolproofliving.com/blanched-kale/#respond Wed, 24 Aug 2022 18:42:41 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=58747 Why Should You Blanch Kale While it might sound like an additional step, blanching kale is a useful process for many reasons. Below are just a few of them: Blanching kale reduces bitter flavor by releasing harsh compounds present in fresh kale. (In other words, your taste buds will thank you!) When you blanch kale, you make it easier to chew by breaking down its tough fibers. Because blanching kale...

The post Blanched Kale appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Why Should You Blanch Kale

While it might sound like an additional step, blanching kale is a useful process for many reasons. Below are just a few of them:

  • Blanching kale reduces bitter flavor by releasing harsh compounds present in fresh kale. (In other words, your taste buds will thank you!)
  • When you blanch kale, you make it easier to chew by breaking down its tough fibers. Because blanching kale tenderizes and softens the vegetable, this process is also an alternative to massaging kale.
  • Blanched kale does not have to cook for as long as raw kale, which means shorter cooking times when it is added to recipes.
  • Once kale is blanched, it can be stored for longer. I recommend blanching kale for freezing, especially if you are growing it in your garden and want to store large amounts of raw kale. This way, you not only have kale available year-round but also eliminate food waste.
A person removing blanched kale from a pot of water from the side view.

What You Will Need

For this recipe, you’ll need a bunch of kale, a strainer, a pot, water, and ice. You may also choose to add a pinch of kosher salt if desired.

Ingredients for blanching kale from the top view.

Though there are many different types of kale to choose from, my blanching method will work for the three most popular varieties available at the grocery store: dark green curly kale, red Russian kale, and dinosaur kale (also referred to as lacinato kale).

Step-by-Step Instructions

Understanding how to blanch kale is a simple skill that will transform your cooking process. In five easy steps, you’ll be able to prepare and preserve kale in the best way possible.

A person showing how to use water to blanch kale from the top view.
  1. Wash & cut the kale: Fill a large bowl with cold water, submerge your kale, and rinse each leaf under cold running water. Remove each stem from its leaves and give it a rough chop. For more detailed instructions on this step, check out my article on How to Cut Kale.
  2. Boil water: Add salt (if using) to a large pot of water and bring the mixture to a rolling boil. While the water heats, fill a large bowl with ice water and set the ice bath aside.
  3. Blanch the kale: Add your kale to the boiling water and let it cook for 1-2 minutes or until it loses most of its volume and gets softer.
  4. Place the kale in the ice bath: Remove the kale from the boiling water with tongs or a spider strainer. Transfer it into the ice bath to stop the cooking process. Let it chill for ten seconds before draining.
  5. Drain & dry the kale: Drain the kale with a strainer and add them to your recipe. Or, for later use, dry the kale thoroughly with a clean kitchen towel (or using a salad spinner) and follow the steps below to freeze for long-term storage.

How to Store & Freeze

If you are planning to use it within a few days, you can store it in the fridge. If you want to store it for a longer time, I recommend freezing it. Below you can find my detailed instructions on how to store blanched kale:

freezing kale in a plastic bag from the top view.
  • Store: Once dry, place the excess kale in an airtight container or a Ziploc bag with as much air removed as possible. Your kale will remain fresh for up to five days in the fridge. 
  • To freeze blanched kale:
    • Squeeze the excess water out of kale leaves as much as you can. Line a baking sheet with a kitchen towel. Spread the kale onto the sheet and pop it into the freezer for 2-3 hours to flash freeze it.
    • Remove from the freezer and place the now-frozen blanched kale in an airtight container or a freezer bag (remove as much air as possible.) Label, date, and store for up to 6 months.

What to Do with Blanched Kale

Blanched kale makes a great addition to countless flavorful recipes (my favorite being salads!). From hearty stews to crisp salads, this tasty collection of kale recipes will satisfy your cravings.

  • Serve it by itself: When you blanch kale, you don’t need a complicated recipe to make a five-star side dish. Simply flavor your veggies with kale seasoning—I recommend olive oil, salt, and black pepper—and dig in!
  • Make a blanched kale salad: You can add blanched kale to any salad that uses raw or cooked kale. Add brilliant color to your table with recipes like my Brussels Sprout Kale Salad and Apple Kale Slaw. Or, fill yourself with tasty superfoods with dishes like my Avocado Kale Salad and Kale Quinoa Salad.
  • Add it to soups & stews: With a bright green color and dozens of health benefits, kale is a delectable addition to all your favorite soup recipes (especially in the winter months!). Simply add in blanched kale right before serving dishes like Chicken Vegetable Soup and Tuscan Kale Soup.
  • Add it in smoothies: Green smoothies are an easy way to get your daily nutrients on the go. It only takes five minutes to whip up a healthy breakfast (or snack) like my Pineapple Kale Smoothie and Turmeric Green Smoothie.
  • Make a quick & easy sautéed kale: Transform this simple green vegetable into a side dish no one can resist. For a classic flavor, sauté your kale in olive oil, garlic, and lemon juice. Or, if you want an Asian-inspired recipe, try cooking your kale in sesame oil, ginger, and a splash of soy sauce.

FAQs

Does kale have to be blanched?

No, you can eat raw kale if you want to. However, some people find raw kale to have a tough texture and bitter taste, so blanching helps make the vegetable more palatable.

How long should you blanch kale?

Though times may vary based on the type of kale you use, the appropriate kale blanching time for curly kale is 1-2 minutes.

How long would blanched kale last?

The blanching process is essential when preserving kale. Blanched kale will last five days in the fridge or six months in the freezer when stored in an airtight container.

Does blanched kale retain its nutrients?

Because some of the vitamins in kale are water soluble—in particular, vitamins C and B—kale may lose some of its nutrients during the blanching process. Alternatively, though it may take longer, you can steam the kale for a short amount of time to preserve its nutrient levels.

Should you blanch kale before sautéing?

You don’t have to blanch kale before sauteeing it, but blanching kale beforehand will help cut down on your cooking time.

More Helpful Kale Articles

Can’t get enough hearty greens? Then I have great news for you: With my collection of foolproof kale guides, even beginner chefs can become an expert in all things “kale.”

  • Types of Kale: Feel confused when you go to the store? Not sure which type of kale is for your recipe? Be sure to check out my guide to learn about the different varieties of kale.
  • How to Store Kale in the Fridge & Freezer: If you love preparing kale in bulk, then proper kale storage is just what you need. Learn how to store kale in the fridge and the freezer while keeping it as fresh as possible.
  • How To Cut Kale: Learn how to properly chop kale the right way. Plus, learn how to use stems to avoid any food waste.
  • Tenderize Kale (by massaging it): Learn how to tenderize kale’s tough leaves and eliminate bitter flavor with just three simple ingredients. Massaging kale is the perfect way to prepare your leafy green for salads, slaws, and more.

If you find this guide on How To Blanch Kale or any one of our other How-To Guides on Foolproof Living helpful, please take a minute to leave a rating and a review. Doing so helps others who are planning to follow the processes outlined in this post.

A person putting kale leaves in an ice bath from the top view.
Print

Blanched Kale Recipe

This step-by-step guide for making blanched kale is the perfect solution for transforming this sometimes bitter vegetable into a tender, mild-flavored addition to salads, soups, and smoothies. The blanching process also prepares kale leaves for freezing, which will allow you to enjoy this leafy green for up to 6 months.
Course How To
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 3 minutes
Total Time 8 minutes
Servings 1 bunch
Calories 20kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 bunch kale
  • 1 tablespoon of salt optional

Instructions

  • Boil the water: Fill a large pot with water and salt (if using). Bring it to a boil. Meanwhile, have a large bowl of ice water ready.
  • Prep the kale: Remove kale leaves from their stems. Give them a rough chop or tear them to small pieces by hand.
  • Blanch the kale: When the water comes to a boil, add the kale leaves into the pot and let them cook for 1 – 2 minutes or until it is softened to your liking.
  • Chill the kale: Using tongs or a spider strainer, pull the leaves out and immediately place them in the ice bath. Let leaves chill for 10 seconds or so and then drain.
  • Use or store: Use them in your recipe, or thoroughly dry and freeze them for later.

Notes

  • To blanch kale stems: If you want to blanch kale stems, I recommend blanching them separately from the kale leaves. To do so, bring a pot of water to a rolling boil before adding the stems. Then, let the stems cook for 4-5 minutes before transferring them to a bowl of ice water.
  • Store: Once dry, place the excess kale in an airtight container or a Ziploc bag with as much air removed as possible. Your kale will remain fresh for up to five days in the fridge. 
  • To freeze blanched kale:
    • Squeeze the excess water out of kale leaves as much as you can. Line a baking sheet with a kitchen towel. Spread the kale onto the sheet and pop it into the freezer for 2-3 hours to flash freeze it.
    • Remove from the freezer and place the now-frozen blanched kale in an airtight container or a freezer bag. Label, date, and store for up to 6 months.
  •  

Nutrition

Calories: 20kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 7007mg | Potassium: 200mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 0.5g | Vitamin A: 5694IU | Vitamin C: 53mg | Calcium: 149mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Blanched Kale appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/blanched-kale/feed/ 0
Mexican Pickled Onions https://foolproofliving.com/pickled-red-onions/ https://foolproofliving.com/pickled-red-onions/#comments Tue, 09 Aug 2022 15:02:01 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=7571 This quick and easy topping adds bright flavor and a gorgeous pink color to any recipe, from Mexican Corn Salad to quesadillas to Mexican Street Corn Salad with Pasta. You can even use Mexican onions for tacos, giving you dozens of Mexican party food ideas. Take your Flank Steak Tacos, Brisket Tacos, and Black Bean Quinoa Tacos to the next level with one easy recipe.  Love red onions as a...

The post Mexican Pickled Onions appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
This quick and easy topping adds bright flavor and a gorgeous pink color to any recipe, from Mexican Corn Salad to quesadillas to Mexican Street Corn Salad with Pasta. You can even use Mexican onions for tacos, giving you dozens of Mexican party food ideas. Take your Flank Steak Tacos, Brisket Tacos, and Black Bean Quinoa Tacos to the next level with one easy recipe. 

Love red onions as a condiment? Also, check out our Roasted Red Onions recipe!

Mexican pickled red onions in a jar with a fork from the top view

Ingredients

For this Mexican pickled onion recipe, you’ll need one large red onion, boiling hot water, fresh lime juice, apple cider vinegar, and kosher salt.

ingredients for the recipe

Substitutions & Optional Add-Ins

When it comes to add-ins, these red pickled onions make Mexican cuisine an adventure. Choose a few of your favorite ingredients from this tasty list for a flavor experience perfectly suited to your taste buds.

optional add-in ingredients for pickled purple onions
  • Add some spice: Turn up the heat at your Mexican potluck by making a batch of quick pickled red onions with jalapenos. Just be sure to slice your jalapeno peppers thinly before adding them to the pickling jar. Or, add a pinch of red pepper flakes to the mix for another spicy solution. 
  • Make it sweeter: Mexican pickled onions are known for their sharp, tangy flavor. Now you can balance this robust condiment with a touch of sweetness by adding just a teaspoon of honey, maple syrup, or granulated sugar. 
  • Add seasoning: Want to make this Mexican pickled red onion recipe even more flavorful? Then, additional seasoning is just what you need! Thinly sliced garlic clove and allspice berries will give your onions a potent edge, while cumin seeds and whole black peppercorns are perfect for a rich and earthy taste. You can even add bay leaves or dried oregano (or Mexican oregano, if you can get your hands on it) for bold herby notes.
  • White onions: Not a fan of red onions? No problem! Though I love red onions for their brilliant color and sweet taste, white or yellow onions will also work in this easy recipe.
  • Vinegar: Though I use apple cider vinegar in my Mexican red onions, red wine vinegar or distilled white vinegar will also work.
  • Lemon juice: If you don’t want to make your Mexican pickled red onions with lime juice, fresh lemon juice works as a tart and tasty substitute.

How to Make Pickled Red Onions for Tacos

Mexican-style pickled red onions are a cinch to make and even better to eat. One small batch of this pickled red onion recipe, and you’ll want it for all your Mexican meals.

person making Spanish pickled onions
  1. Prep the onions: Place the sliced red onion in a colander, set the colander in a bowl, and set aside. Pour two cups of boiling water atop the sliced onions and gently press with a spoon. 
  2. Soak: Be sure to submerge all of the onion slices in the water. Let them soak for 45 seconds and drain.
  3. Add ingredients to the jar: Transfer the onion slices to a jar with a tight-fitting lid. Then, pour the fresh lime juice and apple cider vinegar over the onions, and add the salt. Using a fork, make sure to push them down so that they are submerged in the liquid as much as possible.
  4. Add additional ingredients: If you’re using any optional add-ins, put them into the jar.
person shaking a jar of marinated red onions for tacos
  1. Shake the ingredients: Close the lid over the jar and give it a good shake.
  2. Refrigerate the jar: Place the closed jar in the fridge and let it sit for a minimum of two hours.
  3. Serve: Serve the pickled Mexican onions as a condiment or garnish with your favorite taco, salad, or grain bowl recipes.

How to Store

To store leftover Mexican pickled red onions, place them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 weeks. However, keep in mind that the more things you add in, the higher the potential of spoilage.

How to Use These Lime Pickled Onions

These authentic Mexican pickled red onions (aka Escabeche Onions)  are a godsend when it comes to garnishing any of your meat or vegetable dishes. And guess what? They are not just for Mexican cooking! They can also be served with dishes from Cuban, Dominican, and even Spanish cuisine.

Needless to say, you can use this versatile condiment anywhere you use red onions, from tasty tacos to garden-fresh salads. Below are a few dishes from the archives to get you started:

Your Favorite Tacos & Quesadillas

These red pickled onions are mostly served for street tacos in Mexico, so it is a no-brainer to serve them with your favorite tacos in your home as well. 

For a savory, protein-filled meal, add your onions to Flank Steak Tacos or Brisket Tacos (hello, meat-lovers!). Use it as a topping for your Salmon Avocado Toast. You can also serve vegetarian or pescatarian dishes by adding your pickled purple onion to a Spinach Quesadilla, fish tacos, or Black Bean Quinoa Tacos.

Chilis & Grain Bowls 

Who can resist a bold and hearty bowl of authentic Mexican chili? Not me! You can add authentic Mexican pickled onions to rich and savory recipes, like Quinoa Chili, Chocolate Chili, and my fan-favorite Mexican Quinoa Bowl. Pink onions are also a great condiment in vegan recipes and surely a perfect match for my Vegan Chili and Burrito Bowl.

Salads

This quick recipe makes a delicious addition to dozens of your favorite Mexican dishes, from spicy Mexican Corn Salad to fresh Mexican Street Corn Salad with Pasta. You can even add this simple recipe to dishes beyond Mexican food, like my creamy, crowd-pleasing Potato Salad with Capers.

a jar of Qdoba pickled red onions recipe from the side view

Expert Tips

You don’t have to live south of the border to learn how to make pickled onions Mexican style. These tasty tips will have you preparing these delicious marinated onions any day of the week.

  • Use the freshest onions you can get your hands on: When making this lime pickled red onions recipe, make sure your onions are super fresh. Not only will they taste fresher, but they will also have a brighter color and more intense flavor.
  • Slice your onions thinly: Even thin onion slices make the best pickled onions. For best results, use a sharp chef’s knife, or a mandoline (affiliate link), if you have one.
  • Do not skip the 45-second soaking: I learned this trick from Rick Bayless’ cookbook, Mexican Kitchen (affiliate link). While it might seem like an extra step, soaking raw onions for a short amount of time helps with softening their flavor and pungent taste. 
  • Pickled purple onions lose volume as they sit: Don’t be worried if your onion slices seem to overflow in their jar, especially at the beginning. They lose volume as they marinate in the acid, so feel free to push them down until they fit. If your onions still don’t fit, feel free to split them into two jars instead.
  • Use a glass container with a tight-fitting lid: Glass containers with tight lids—such as a pint-sized jar such as a mason jar (affiliate link) with a wide mouth or a large jar such as this Weck Canning Jar (affiliate link) —are your best options.
  • Use the pickle juice in salad dressings: Don’t throw away the pickle brine, as the leftover tangy juice makes for a great addition to any of your salad dressings.

FAQs

How long do pickled red onions last?

Mexican pickled red onion will last 2 weeks when stored in an airtight container in the fridge.

How to make pickled onions very quickly?

 To make quick pickled onions for tacos, use lime juice—also referred to as “Mexican vinegar”—as your pickling base. When you make pickled onion in lime, the citrus juice will break down your onions in less time than other pickling ingredients.

Other Recipes You Can Make with Red Onions:

Wondering what else you can do with red onions? Here are a few of my favorite recipes to help you use them:

If you try this Mexican Pickled Onions recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

red onions pickled in lime juice in a jar with fork pulling out some
Print

Mexican Pickled Onions Recipe

These easy Mexican Pickled Onions add a punch of tangy flavor and a burst of bold color to all your favorite Mexican recipes. This 4-ingredient recipe is super quick to make and adds the perfect finishing touch to tacos, salads, chilis, and more!
Course Garnish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Resting time 2 hours
Total Time 2 hours 5 minutes
Servings 1 cup
Calories 96kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 large red onion sliced thinly (approximately 1 ½ cup sliced onion)
  • 2 cups boiling hot water
  • ¾ cup fresh lime juice*
  • 2 tablespoons apple cider vinegar red wine vinegar
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt

Optional Add Ins:

  • 1 garlic clove sliced thinly (⅛ inch thick slices)
  • ½ small jalapeno slice thinly – remove seeds if you like
  • ¼ teaspoon cumin seeds
  • ¼ whole black peppercorns
  • 1 teaspoon honey maple syrup or granulated sugar
  • 1 bay leaf
  • ¼ teaspoon oregano Mexican oregano if you can get your hands on
  • ½ teaspoon all spice berries
  • Pinch of red pepper flakes

Instructions

  • Place red onion slices in a colander set in a bowl. Pour 2 cups of boiling water over the onion. Gently press with a spoon to make sure that the onions are fully submerged in water. Let it sit for 45 seconds.
  • Transfer the now-drained onion slices to a jar with a tight-fitting lid. Pour fresh lime juice and apple cider vinegar over the onions. Add in the salt.
  • If you are using any of the optional add-ins, go ahead and add them in.
  • Put the lid on and shake until everything is fully combined.
  • Place it in the fridge and let it sit for at least 2 hours.
  • Serve with your favorite taco, salad, or grain bowl recipes as garnish.

Video

Notes

  • Lime juice: I highly recommend using freshly squeezed lime juice here, but in a pinch, you can also use store-bought lime juice.
  • Storage: If you have leftovers, place them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 weeks. 
  • They lose volume as they sit in lime juice and vinegar mixture: When you are first placing them in the jar it might feel like you have a lot, but keep in mind that as they sit in the acidic brine juice, they lose some of their volume.
  • Weck Jars or Pint Size Mason Jars are ideal: I use Weck jars for pickling (as you see in the photos), but pint-sized Mason Jars are also ideal. Just make sure that they have a large mouth and a tight-fitting lid.

Nutrition

Serving: 1cup | Calories: 96kcal | Carbohydrates: 26g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.02g | Sodium: 2359mg | Potassium: 395mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 93IU | Vitamin C: 63mg | Calcium: 68mg | Iron: 0.5mg

The post Mexican Pickled Onions appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/pickled-red-onions/feed/ 14
Thai Quinoa Salad https://foolproofliving.com/thai-quinoa-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/thai-quinoa-salad/#comments Mon, 08 Aug 2022 17:15:23 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=36630 If you have been following me for a while, you know that I am a huge fan of quinoa salads and make them often. I know you like them too because my Mediterranean Quinoa Salad, Avocado Quinoa Salad, Quinoa and Kale Salad, Quinoa Black Bean Avocado Salad, and Butternut Squash Quinoa Salad recipes are some of the most popular recipes on Foolproof Living. This Thai Quinoa Salad recipe, packed with...

The post Thai Quinoa Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
If you have been following me for a while, you know that I am a huge fan of quinoa salads and make them often. I know you like them too because my Mediterranean Quinoa Salad, Avocado Quinoa Salad, Quinoa and Kale Salad, Quinoa Black Bean Avocado Salad, and Butternut Squash Quinoa Salad recipes are some of the most popular recipes on Foolproof Living.

This Thai Quinoa Salad recipe, packed with good-for-you and colorful veggies and a delicious peanut sauce, is the newest addition to the collection.

Thai Quinoa Salad in a bowl garnished with peanuts and cilantro with a spoon

This crunchy Thai Quinoa Salad recipe is made with my all-time favorite creamy vegan Thai salad dressing, Sesame Ginger Dressing, fluffy quinoa, and fresh veggies. In my humble opinion, this hearty salad is addictive, but in a good way. Packed with a ton of everyday vegetables and topped off with roasted nuts (including but not limited to cashews, almonds, and peanuts), it is wholesome, vegan, and gluten-free.

What is in This Recipe?

As in most salad recipes, this easy Thai vegan quinoa salad has 2 sets of ingredients; The salad dressing and the salad ingredients.

Thai-Style Peanut butter dressing with a whisk in a jar
  1. Asian Sesame Ginger Dressing: For the dressing ingredients, you will need creamy peanut butter (or almond butter would also work), maple syrup, rice vinegar, tamari (or soy sauce), sesame oil, fresh garlic, fresh ginger and chili pepper sauce (like Sriracha or sambal oelek). If you need information on making ahead or storing this dressing recipe, be sure to check out my recipe post on how to make sesame ginger dressing.
Ingredients for Thai Crunch salad on a marble backdrop
  1. Salad Ingredients: In terms of the salad ingredients, you will need 3 cups of cooked quinoa, purple cabbage, carrots, red bell peppers, scallions, cucumbers, edamame, cilantro (optional), and roasted nuts like O Organics Cashews, Peanuts, and Almonds (for extra crunch).

Substitutions and Helpful Notes For The Ingredients:

  • Red Cabbage: As I mentioned in my No Mayo Coleslaw and Greek Yogurt Coleslaw recipes, the secret to making cabbage salads work is to slice the cabbage as thinly as you can. This Thai cabbage salad is no different. Because doing so allows the cabbage to soften as soon as it is mixed with the salad dressing and turns it into a soft yet still crunchy salad ingredient. If you do not have purple cabbage, you can use green cabbage instead.
  • Green Onion: Scallions are a classic for any salad, but you can also use thinly sliced red onion.
  • Shelled edamame: I consider edamame a staple ingredient for any of my Asian-style salad recipes (i.e. Asian Chicken Salad recipe). However, if you cannot get your hands on it, you can use sugar snap peas instead or omit them altogether.
  • Quinoa: I used 3 cups of cooked tricolor quinoa, but any type of quinoa (tricolor, white, and red quinoa) would work in this recipe. I usually cook quinoa in bulk and freeze it to have it on hand fast.
  • Use almond Butter instead of peanut butter: You can use almond butter and peanut butter interchangeably in this recipe. I love using Open Nature’s almond or peanut butter as it is made with nothing but nuts and a bit of sea salt. Not to mention it is super creamy.
  • Lime Juice: Don’t have rice vinegar? In a pinch, you can use an equal amount of freshly squeezed lime juice or apple cider vinegar instead.

How To Make?

  1. Cook the quinoa: I believe that the best way to make quinoa taste good is to cook it in the vegetable broth after rinsing it. I cooked my quinoa in a pressure cooker (in my instant pot), but you can cook it in a rice cooker, microwave or on the stovetop as well.
Person whisking vegan spicy peanut dressing
  1. Make the Thai Peanut dressing: While the quinoa cooks, make the dressing. Place all salad dressing ingredients in a jar (or a small bowl) and give it a whisk until it is creamy.
  2. Assemble the salad: Place the now-cooked quinoa in a large salad bowl and top it off with all the chopped veggies.
How to make Thai Style Quinoa Salad shown in 4 photos in a collage
  1. Drizzle it with the dressing: Pour the spicy peanut dressing over the salad and give it a gentle toss.
  2. Garnish & Serve: Top it off with chopped O Organics organic roasted almonds and cashews with sea salt (for extra crunch) and chopped fresh cilantro (optional).

What to serve it with?

This crunchy Thai quinoa salad is a meal-worthy salad that you can serve by itself. However, I also love to serve it as a vegetable side dish with my Thai Lemongrass Chicken or Orange Ginger Chicken.

Additionally, if you are serving it during the BBQ season, you can easily pair it with Grilled Mahi Mahi or Grilled Shrimp Skewers for a healthy meal that is guaranteed to impress.

A bowl crunchy Thai quinoa salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side

Make Ahead & Storage:

Can I make it ahead, you ask? You sure can. As a matter of fact, this Asian Quinoa Salad recipe is one of my favorite meal prep lunches. Simply store it in individual airtight containers in the fridge and enjoy it throughout the week.

If you decide to do so, I highly recommend storing the dressing separately and tossing it with the salad right before serving it.

And if you end up with leftovers of this quinoa cabbage salad, simply store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to two days. 

A Few Helpful Tips & Variations:

  • Taste for seasoning: I highly recommend giving a taste to the salad before serving it. I used a minimal amount of tamari sauce in the recipe below to make it work for everyone. However, as someone who is addicted to salt, I use almost double the amount of tamari when I make this salad for us.
  • Turn it into a Thai Chicken Quinoa Salad: If I am serving this for my meat-loving husband, I usually bake split chicken breasts or air fryer chicken legs, cut (or shred) them into cubes, and incorporate them into the salad.

FAQs

What is Thai Quinoa Salad?

Thai Quinoa Salad is an Asian-styled salad made with crunchy vegetables like cabbage, bell peppers, and cucumbers, and drizzled with a spicy peanut sauce that is flavored with ginger, garlic, and sesame oil.

Is quinoa salad eaten hot or cold?

One of my favorite things about this Thai quinoa recipe is that it can be served warm, room temperature, or cold. If I am serving it as a main dish, I usually serve it warm. I love that the freshly cooked and still warm quinoa absorbs the dressing right away and makes it incredibly delicious and creamy. However, it makes a great salad when served cold as well, which is why I usually make it a part of my weekly meal prep and store it in individual containers.

Check Out These Products and More in Shaw’s:

There you have it friends, a Thai-style crunchy quinoa salad recipe that you can make all year round. I love shopping at our local Shaw’s and appreciate that they have a great collection of organic ingredients that I can use in my everyday cooking. If there is one in your area, be sure to check out their products.

Vegan quinoa salad garnished with nuts and cilantro served in bowls from the top view

Other Quinoa Recipes You Might Like:

If you liked this easy quinoa salad recipe, I suspect that you are like me; a fan of quinoa salads and include it in your weekly meal prep.

If you try this Thai Quinoa Salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Crunch Thai quinoa salad from the top view with a spoon on the side
Print

Thai Quinoa Salad Recipe

This Thai Quinoa Salad recipe is my go-to weekday lunch. It is easy and quick to make, naturally vegan and gluten free. Packed with crunchy veggies like carrots, cabbage, and cucumber and tossed with a peanut butter/almond butter dressing, it is guaranteed to impress.
Course Salad
Cuisine Asian Cuisine, Thai
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 395kcal

Ingredients

For The Peanut Butter Dressing:

  • 3 tablespoons Open Nature® almond or peanut butter* (unsweetened/unsalted)
  • 2 tablespoons maple syrup or honey
  • 1/4 cup rice vinegar
  • 2 tablespoons tamari or soy sauce
  • 2 teaspoons toasted sesame oil
  • 1 clove of garlic minced
  • 1 tablespoon fresh ginger grated
  • 1 teaspoon chili pepper sauce I used Sriracha – optional
  • 1/4 teaspoon coarse sea salt

For The Salad:

  • 3 cups cooked quinoa warm or cold
  • 3 small carrots peeled and shredded
  • 1 cup red cabbage sliced thinly
  • 1 red bell pepper chopped
  • 5 stalks of scallions sliced thinly (both green and white parts)
  • 2 Persian cucumbers peeled and cut into small pieces
  • 1 cup edamame or sugar snap peas
  • ½ cup fresh cilantro chopped
  • 1 cup roasted and lightly salted nuts chopped ( I used cashews and almonds)

Instructions

  • To make the dressing: Place all the ingredients in a jar and whisk until emulsified.
  • To make the salad: Place the quinoa, carrots, cabbage, bell pepper, scallions, cucumber, edamame, and cilantro in a large salad bowl.
  • Drizzle the dressing over the salad. Give it a toss. Garnish with cashews and almonds. Serve.

Video

Notes

  • Make Ahead: This salad is one of my favorite meal prep lunches because it stores well. Simply make the salad and dressing. Place the salad ingredients in individual meal prep bowls and store them with the dressing on the side. When ready to serve, drizzle it with the dressing and toss.
  • Storage: You can store the leftovers in an airtight container for up to 2 days in the fridge. When ready to serve, give it a mix, give it a taste, and season with salt, if necessary.

Nutrition

Calories: 395kcal | Carbohydrates: 40g | Protein: 17g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 494mg | Potassium: 770mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 6091IU | Vitamin C: 41mg | Calcium: 95mg | Iron: 4mg

The post Thai Quinoa Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/thai-quinoa-salad/feed/ 8
Air Fryer Corn On The Cob https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-corn-on-the-cob/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-corn-on-the-cob/#respond Fri, 29 Jul 2022 19:16:01 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=57261 Can’t get enough? Once you master cooking sweet corn in air fryer, be sure to also try my Air Fryer Mexican Street Corn recipe.    Ingredients Crispy, sweet, and juicy corn on the cob is the star of the show in this delicious air fryer recipe, so take advantage of your local farmers’ market to find the freshest, sweetest corn possible.  Get started by gathering your ears of sweet corn...

The post Air Fryer Corn On The Cob appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Can’t get enough? Once you master cooking sweet corn in air fryer, be sure to also try my Air Fryer Mexican Street Corn recipe.   

A plate of corn on the cob in air fryer recipe from side view

Ingredients

Crispy, sweet, and juicy corn on the cob is the star of the show in this delicious air fryer recipe, so take advantage of your local farmers’ market to find the freshest, sweetest corn possible. 

Air fryer sweet corn ingredients from the top view

Get started by gathering your ears of sweet corn (make sure you husk them first), some vegetable oil, kosher salt, and black pepper.

Substitutions & Optional Seasonings

  • Vegetable oil: I used avocado oil, but you can also use olive oil. If it is easier, you can also use cooking spray.
  • Unsalted butter: If you want to be decadent, you can use 1 tsp of unsalted butter in place of the vegetable oil. The butter helps crisp the corn and adds a creamy taste to the roasted corn kernels.
  • A sprinkle of parmesan cheese: If you are serving your air-fried corn as a side dish and want to elevate it to the next level, sprinkle it with grated parmesan cheese. The juicy kernels of corn mixed with crispy fried parmesan cheese bits are amazing, addicting, and a must-try.
  • Seasoning ideas: For additional flavors, get creative with your favorite seasoning blends. Try smoked paprika and/or chili powder for a splash of color and a little heat. Garlic powder sprinkled on each ear is also fantastic.
  • Frozen corn: If fresh corn is not in season, you can use this recipe with frozen corn. When using frozen corn, you do not need to thaw it first; it can go straight from the freezer to the air fryer; check the modification to cooking times described below.

How to Cook Corn On The Cob In Air Fryer 

You can make this air fryer corn on the cob at the height of summer or in the middle of winter. Whether you use fresh or frozen corn, the only thing that will be different is how you cook them.

I am giving you both options below to ensure you experience the most incredibly flavorful, crispy air fryer sweet corn imaginable. 

For both methods, preheat your air fryer to 380° F

If using fresh corn:

Person brushing oil on corn and adding salt and pepper from the top view
  1. Oil and season: Lightly brush each ear of corn with a thin layer of oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper (you can also add the optional seasonings at this time).
Roasting corn in the air fryer from the top view
  1. Fill fryer basket: Once your air fryer reaches 380° F, arrange your ears of corn in a single layer. Do not overcrowd your fryer basket.
  2. Air fry for 12-15 minutes: Rotate each ear of corn halfway through (around 6-7 minutes) for even cooking. If you want crispier corn, you can apply a layer of melted butter to each ear before rotating.
  3. Add butter and serve: Carefully remove the corn from the basket and smother it with butter or take it to the next level and try topping it off with my roasted garlic herb butter or drizzling it with Buttery Garlic Sauce. That being said, butter is optional but highly recommended. 

If using frozen corn:

Cooking frozen corn on the cob in an air fryer is not much different. It is only 5 minutes longer and there is no need to thaw the corn.

  1. Fill fryer basket: Once your fryer has reached 380° F, arrange the frozen corn on the cob (no need to thaw first) in a single layer and fry for 5 minutes.
  2. Brush with oil: Carefully remove the hot ears of corn and lightly brush with oil, sprinkle with salt and pepper (additional seasonings can be added now) and place corn back into the fryer basket.
  3. Air fry for 10-12 minutes: You will want to check on the corn after cooking for 5-6 minutes. Rotate and cook for the remaining time.
  4. Add butter and serve: Carefully remove the hot ears and layer on the butter. Again, the butter is optional, though it is highly suggested you give it a try.

What to Serve it With

The amazing thing about this recipe is its versatility. Air fryer roasted corn on the cob makes a perfect side dish all on its own, or you can remove those crispy kernels and add them to any recipe calling for corn. 

Below are a few recipe ideas to serve it with:

  • Seafood: Corn and seafood are a classic combination. Nothing screams coastal vibes more than fried corn and Grilled Shrimp Skewers, except perhaps pairing this corn with my delicious Grilled Mahi Mahi
  • Chicken: If seafood isn’t your thing, I’ve got you covered; corn on the cob makes a fantastic pairing with chicken. Give it a try with my Yogurt Marinated Chicken or alongside Mediterranean Lemon Chicken; either one makes for a delicious combo.
  • Salads: While I am a big fan of eating corn on the cob, I also like to husk it and throw it into my summer salad recipes, such as my Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad and Esquites. I find that this is especially a good use of the leftover corn.

How to Store Leftovers and Reheat

Whether you include your air-fried corn on the cob as a part of your weekly meal prep or have some leftovers, below are the instructions to store and reheat:

  • Storage: A perfect make-ahead dish, this corn stores so well that you can keep it in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 5 days without losing flavor.
  • Reheat: To reheat the corn, pop it back into the air fryer basket and cook for 5 minutes at 320 F degrees to crisp it up.
Air fryer frozen corn on the cob with butter on it from the top view

Expert Tips

New to air frying? Here are some great tips for the best air-fried corn on the cob (even on your first try!).

  • Choose corn that is equal in size: For the best results, you want to choose corn that is similar in size, as mixing thin corn cobs with thick corn cobs could cause excess browning or undercooked corn.
  • Cut them in half: If you have a small fryer basket, you can cut the cobs in half for a better fit. Cutting them into smaller pieces is also great if you have a crowd of people or to make it easier for children to grab onto.
  • Do not overcrowd the air fryer basket: Keep the corn in a single layer so that the hot circulating air can reach every corn kernel and ensure even cooking.
  • Be sure to rotate the ears halfway through: To keep the corn from being cooked unevenly, you should turn them halfway through cooking.
  • Quick cooking: Air frying corn on the cob takes a fraction of the time necessary for other methods, so while it’s a good idea to get your fryer preheated, you will want to put off cooking the corn until the last thing, when the rest of your meal is close to being ready. Cooking the corn at the end ensures your piping hot meal is ready all at once. If you misjudged the time, it’s no big deal; cover the hot corn with aluminum foil to keep the heat in.
  • Cook time might slightly change based on your air fryer: Pay attention to the color and doneness while you are rotating the corn on the cob in the air fryer halfway through the cooking process. It is a known fact that there might be slight differences in cooking times with different brands of air fryers.

FAQs

How long to air fry corn on the cob?

Air fry corn on the cob for 12-15 minutes in an air fryer preheated to 380° F.

Do I have to cut corn on the cob in half to air fry them?

Cutting the ears of corn is optional. For air fryers with smaller baskets, it may be necessary to cut the corn so it will fit. Cutting the corn also makes it easier for kids to handle.

Can I cook frozen corn ears in the air fryer?

Absolutely! You can pull your frozen corn straight from the freezer and add it to your air fryer; no need to thaw it first. Cooking times and procedures may vary. See the instructions above to make perfect air fryer corn on the cob from frozen corn.

Can corn on the cob pop like popcorn in the air fryer?

Not unless it is a cob of popcorn variety corn. There is a difference between sweet corn and popcorn. The perfect corn for this recipe is sweet corn. So, no worries about it popping in your air fryer.

Can I air fry corn on the cob in husk?

You can air fry corn in its husk, but it will take a much longer time, and you will lose the crispy roasted flavor air-fried corn is famous for. For best results, I suggest husking the corn fully (don’t forget those little corn silks).

Other Easy Air Fryer Recipes You Might Also Like:

Here are a few other side dishes you can make using your air fryer:

If you try this Air Fryer Corn on the Cob recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Air fryer corn on the cob on a plate from the top view
Print

Air Fryer Corn On The Cob Recipe

This easy air fryer corn on the cob recipe produces crisp, perfectly tender corn with a hint of sweetness and a buttery finish- without a grill! This versatile, 15-minute recipe makes for an easy side dish to accompany a weeknight dinner or can be served as a crowd-favorite addition to your BBQ or outdoor gathering.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4
Calories 128kcal

Ingredients

  • 4 ears of corn on the cob husks fully removed
  • 1 teaspoon vegetable oil like avocado oil
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter optional

Instructions

  • Preheat air fryer to 380 degrees F.
  • While it is heating, brush each ear of corn with vegetable oil and season with salt and pepper.
  • Place in the air fryer basket in a single layer and air fry for 12-15 minutes, rotating them halfway through the air frying process.
  • Remove from the air fryer and top it off with butter*, if preferred.

Notes

  • Instructions for making this recipe with frozen corn: If using frozen corn, there is no need to thaw it before air frying them.
    Simply place frozen corn on the cob in the air fryer basket and the air fryer for 5 minutes. Carefully remove them from the basket, lightly brush with oil and season them with salt and pepper. Air fry for another 10-12 minutes making sure to rotate halfway through the air frying process. Carefully remove them from the basket onto a plate and top it off with butter if using.
  • Storage: Store leftover corn in the refrigerator in an airtight container for up to 5 days. 
  • Reheat: Reheat the corn in the air fryer at 320 F degrees for about 5 minutes, or until crisp. 
  • Butter: Use our Roasted Garlic Butter or Melted Garlic Butter Sauce to drizzle them in the end.

Nutrition

Calories: 128kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 15mg | Sodium: 305mg | Potassium: 246mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 344IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 4mg | Iron: 0.5mg

The post Air Fryer Corn On The Cob appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-corn-on-the-cob/feed/ 0
Black Eyed Pea Salad https://foolproofliving.com/black-eyed-pea-salad-with-peaches-and-pecans-2/ https://foolproofliving.com/black-eyed-pea-salad-with-peaches-and-pecans-2/#comments Thu, 07 Jul 2022 20:14:20 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=6712 If you are in need of inspiration for bean salad recipes, you are in for a treat, because here at FPL headquarters we love beans and use them regularly in our salads. If you are a fan of this cold black eyed pea salad, it is likely that you might also like our Texas Caviar (aka Cowboy Caviar) Corn Salad with Black Beans, Quinoa Black Bean Salad, and 5 Bean...

The post Black Eyed Pea Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
If you are in need of inspiration for bean salad recipes, you are in for a treat, because here at FPL headquarters we love beans and use them regularly in our salads. If you are a fan of this cold black eyed pea salad, it is likely that you might also like our Texas Caviar (aka Cowboy Caviar) Corn Salad with Black Beans, Quinoa Black Bean Salad, and 5 Bean Salad.

This festive and healthy salad is extra fun to make on New Year’s Day alongside my other New Year’s Eve recipes, as tradition holds that eating salad with black eyed peas brings good luck and prosperity. But it can also be served as a crowd-pleasing dish for game days, potlucks, picnics, or your next barbecue served as a side dish or dip with tortilla chips. 

Blackeyed peas salad in a bowl with spoon on the side

Ingredients

You’ll need two sets of simple, everyday ingredients for this versatile, year-round black eyed peas salad that is sure to impress! 

dressing ingredients from the top view
  • For the salad dressing, I am using my lemon balsamic vinegar dressing. For that, you will need balsamic vinegar, extra-virgin olive oil, freshly squeezed lemon juice, minced garlic, kosher salt, and freshly ground black pepper. 
recipe ingredients from the top view
  • To make the salad, gather canned black eyed peas (15 ounce cans), cherry tomatoes, English cucumber, celery rib, a red bell pepper, fresh or canned corn, red onion, and fresh herbs (italian parsley or cilantro). 

Substitutions

  • Onion: Not everyone prefers the flavor of red onion (or has one on hand). Instead, substitute green onions for a more mild flavor with an equally great crunch! Or, for a sweeter flavor, substitute with a Vidalia onion (sweet onion). 
  • Dressing: If you don’t have balsamic vinegar on hand for the black-eyed peas dressing, you can use red wine vinegar instead. 
  • Corn: Fresh corn is great in this salad, but if it is not in season, you can use canned corn or even thawed frozen corn instead. 
  • Hot sauce: For my spice-loving friends, add a dash of hot sauce for a great way to kick up the flavors in this recipe! 
  • Cook your own black eyed peas: While using a can of beans is convenient, you can use dried black eyed peas and cook them yourself. Here is a helpful guide on how to cook black-eyed peas.

How to Make This Recipe?

Making this recipe for black eyed peas tomato salad couldn’t be easier. With a quick whisk of the dressing ingredients and a gentle toss of the veggies, you’ll have this vibrant salad on the table in no time! Simply:

a collage of images showing how to make the recipe
  1. Make the vinaigrette: In a small bowl, combine the balsamic vinegar, freshly squeezed lemon juice, minced garlic, and salt and black pepper with a whisk. As you’re whisking, slowly pour in the extra-virgin olive oil and keep whisking until the mixture looks smooth and the ingredients are fully incorporated. Set aside. 
  2. Assemble the salad: Grab a large bowl and add in your salad ingredients: black-eyed peas, fresh tomatoes, cucumber, celery, red peppers, corn, red onion, and chopped fresh parsley or cilantro. 
  3. Add the dressing: Drizzle the dressing over the salad and toss it gently until just combined. 
  4. Season: Top with additional chopped fresh parsley or cilantro. Give it a taste and season it with more salt and black pepper, if necessary. 
  5. Rest: If time permits, let the salad rest overnight or at least for a few hours. A marinated black eyed pea salad tastes the best!
  6. Serve: You can serve the salad alone at room temperature or with tortilla chips on the side. 

How to Make Ahead & Store Leftovers

  • Make ahead: If you know you’re going to be short on time, you can make this recipe in advance. Simply make the salad and cover it with stretch film or store in an airtight container. Keep in the fridge overnight or until you’re ready to serve. 
  • Storage: You can store the leftover salad in an airtight container in the fridge and enjoy it for up to four days. Be sure to give it a toss and season it with salt and pepper before serving.

What Goes Well With This Salad?

This easy black eyed pea salad with corn is a year-round favorite and is the perfect accompaniment for everything from your Thanksgiving meal to New Year’s Day celebrations to summer BBQ parties to simple weeknight dinners. Here are some serving suggestions:

black eyed pea tomato salad garnished with parsley with spoons on the side

Variations

Whether you are a Greek food connoisseur or can’t get enough of Mexican cuisine, you can change up this Southern salad to suit whatever flavor your heart desires! There are so many different ways, but here are some suggestions:

  • Make it Mexican: Add jalapeño and cilantro and top with my Chili Lime Vinaigrette. You can even make black eyed pea salad with Rotel. 
  • Give it a Greek/Mediterranean flair: For a Mediterranean black eyed pea salad or a black eyed pea salad Greek version, toss in a cup of crumbled feta cheese and top with chopped fresh mint and fresh dill. 
  • Try an African black eyed pea salad: Layer the salad over a base of basmati rice and substitute the lemon juice for lime juice. 

FAQs

Is black-eyed peas good for you?

Black-eyed peas, which are technically beans, are a great source of plant-based protein. They also provide a high amount of fiber, which helps you feel full throughout the day, stabilize your blood pressure, and improve your heart health.

Are canned black-eyed peas already cooked?

Canned black-eyed peas are pre-cooked and are safe to eat from the can. This recipe, in fact, is a canned black-eyed peas salad recipe. Easy peasy!

Do you rinse canned black-eyed peas?

It’s best to rinse canned black-eyed peas under cold water before use to remove excess liquid and salt from the can.

Other Bean Salads You Might Also Like

Everyone loves this black-eyed pea salad’s Southern versions, such as those made by Pioneer Woman, Delicious Miss Brown, Southern Living, and Hattie B’s, but I hope you give my version a try. In my opinion, it gives those famous ones a run for their money! If you can’t get enough of this blackeyed pea salad, here are some other bean salad recipes you need to try!

If you try this Black-Eyed Pea Salad recipe or any other salad recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Black Eyed Pea Salad in a bowl
Print

Black Eyed Pea Salad Recipe

Here is a wholesome Black Eyed Pea Salad recipe that you can make in 20 minutes. Serve it as a side dish for holiday dinners or summer barbeque gatherings or by itself for a humble yet delicious lunch.
Course Vegan & Gluten-Free Salad
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 20 minutes
Servings 6 Servings
Calories 214kcal

Ingredients

For The Dressing:

  • 3 tablespoons balsamic vinegar
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 clove garlic peeled and minced
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1/2 teaspoon black pepper
  • 1/4 cup extra virgin olive oil

For The Salad:

  • 2 cans black eyed peas drained and rinsed
  • 2 cups cherry tomatoes sliced
  • 1 English cucumber (medium-size ) cut into small pieces (approximately 1 to 1 ½ cups)
  • 1 celery rib sliced thinly
  • 1 large red bell pepper
  • 1 cup corn fresh, canned or thawed from frozen
  • ½ cup red onion finely diced
  • ½ cup Italian Parsley or cilantro chopped

Instructions

  • To make the vinaigrette, whisk together balsamic vinegar, fresh lemon juice, minced garlic, salt and black pepper in a small bowl. While still whisking, slowly add the extra-virgin olive oil and continue whisking until fully incorporated and smooth. Set it aside.
  • To assemble the salad: Place black-eyed peas, cherry tomatoes, cucumber, celery, bell pepper, corn, and red onion in a bowl.
  • Drizzle the salad with the dressing. Add the parsley. Give it a toss.
  • Taste for seasoning and add more, if necessary. If you have the time, let it rest for at least four hours or preferably overnight.
  • Serve by itself, as a side dish, or with tortilla chips as a dip.

Video

Notes

  • Make ahead: This is a terrific make ahead salad that gets better as it sits. I highly recommend making it a day ahead, covering it with stretch fil, and keeping it in the fridge overnight or until you’re ready to serve. 
  • Storage: You can store the leftover salad in an airtight container in the fridge and enjoy it for up to four days. Be sure to give it a toss and season it with salt and pepper before serving.
  • Change it up: I used my Lemon Balsamic Vinegar to make this salad, but if you want to change it up, you can also make it with my Chili Lime Dressing.

Nutrition

Calories: 214kcal | Carbohydrates: 24g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 594mg | Potassium: 481mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 12g | Vitamin A: 1699IU | Vitamin C: 21mg | Calcium: 48mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Black Eyed Pea Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/black-eyed-pea-salad-with-peaches-and-pecans-2/feed/ 29
Fresh Peach Salsa https://foolproofliving.com/fresh-peach-walnut-salsa/ https://foolproofliving.com/fresh-peach-walnut-salsa/#comments Fri, 24 Jun 2022 15:47:52 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=9726 Fan of Mexican-inspired condiments? Be sure to also try my Corn and Bean Salad, Easy Guacamole, Mango Pineapple Salsa, or pick your favorite from my collection of fun Mexican Party Food ideas. Ingredients With a few simple, fresh ingredients, you can enjoy this easy peach salsa recipe as an appetizer or a great topping year-round.  To make this easy homemade fresh fruit salsa recipe gather your fresh peaches, cherry tomatoes,...

The post Fresh Peach Salsa appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Fan of Mexican-inspired condiments? Be sure to also try my Corn and Bean Salad, Easy Guacamole, Mango Pineapple Salsa, or pick your favorite from my collection of fun Mexican Party Food ideas.

Fresh peach salsa with tomatoes in a large bowl from the top view

Ingredients

With a few simple, fresh ingredients, you can enjoy this easy peach salsa recipe as an appetizer or a great topping year-round. 

ingredients for the recipe from the top view

To make this easy homemade fresh fruit salsa recipe gather your fresh peaches, cherry tomatoes, red bell pepper, jalapeño pepper, red onion, fresh lime juice, salt, and black pepper. It is optional, but you can also add fresh cilantro and a little chili powder to finish it off.

Substitutions & Possible Additions

  • Peaches: Any peach varieties such as white peaches, yellow peaches, nectarines, or even grilled peaches would work for this Mexican peach salsa. When buying peaches, I recommend picking ones that are not overly ripe, as the ripe ones tend to be too juicy. You do want some of the juices, but it should be just enough to compliment the dressing instead of overpowering it.
  • Tomatoes: I used cherry tomatoes, but you can try Roma tomatoes or other heirloom varieties, such as San Marzano or Brandywine are also delicious.
  • Onions: Use white (such as Vidalia onions) or green onions as a substitute for red onions. 
  • Garlic Cloves: A clove of garlic finely minced can add a burst of flavor and can be added in the end.
  • Nuts & Seeds: Add in a handful of walnuts or pepitas for a bit of a crunch.

How To Make

This delicious homemade fresh peach salsa recipe comes together in 15 minutes and mixes the freshest ingredients for a mouthwatering addition to any meal. Here are the steps:

A collage of images showing how to make peach salsa
  1. Prep ingredients: Place fresh ripe peaches, cherry tomatoes, red bell pepper, jalapeno pepper, and red onion in a large bowl.
  2. Add seasonings: Sprinkle with kosher salt and black pepper, and pour lime juice over the assembled ingredients. 
  3. Toss and garnish: Lightly mix ingredients together. If you choose, you can add chili powder and cilantro as your garnish.
  4. Serve: You can serve immediately. However, if you have the time, let your peach jalapeno salsa sit for 15 to 30 minutes to let the flavors to blend.

How To Store

If you didn’t finish this delicious peach salsa in one sitting (is that even possible?), you have options for preserving that fantastic flavor.

  • Storage: For the best results, you can store your homemade peach salsa in an airtight container for up to 2 days in the refrigerator.
  • Freezing: I do not recommend freezing this salsa recipe.

What to Serve with Peach Salsa

This homemade salsa recipe is perfect when you want to add a Mexican flavor to chicken, pork, or fish recipes. But guess what? It is so versatile that you can pretty much use it anywhere you use regular tomato salsa, which is probably why some even call it, peach pico de gallo.

Here are a few ideas to get you started:

  • With your favorite tortilla chips: A great appetizer! Chips and salsa, how can you go wrong?
  • Makes a great topping: Vegetable-filled Burrito Bowls or Baked Chicken Breasts smothered in this fruity and spicy peach salsa recipe. Need I say more?
  • Peach salsa for fish: This recipe is a great accompaniment for grilled fish like this  Grilled Mahi Mahi. It would also be delicious on Grilled Shrimp or  Breaded Fish
  • Tacos: Of course! Fresh salsa is terrific on tacos, and this salsa recipe with peaches pairs amazingly well with tacos, especially fish tacos. For an elevated taco experience, try it on; Brisket Tacos, Flank Steak Tacos, and a vegan-friendly Black Bean Quinoa Taco.

Variations

There are many ways to customize this peach and tomato salsa recipe to suit your tastebuds.

  • Turn up the heat: For a spicier peach salsa, leave the seeds in the jalapeno peppers. If you are a brave soul with an affinity for super spicy salsa, then swap jalapenos with habanero peppers.
  • Cool it down: If heat isn’t your thing, you can adjust your spice level. Use fewer hot peppers, or omit the hot peppers altogether for a mild fruity salsa still loaded with flavor.
  • Without tomatoes: If you’re not a fan of your peach salsa with tomatoes, you can simply leave them out. It will be sweeter but still delicious.
  • Cilantro: If peach cilantro salsa is not your thing, simply leave the cilantro out and make it without. It will be just as delicious.
peach salsa served on a tortilla chip from the front

Expert Tips

Here are a few foolproof tips that will ensure each bite is nothing short of sweet and juicy peach perfection.

  • Added Salt: If you are serving this fresh fruit salsa with tortilla chips, I recommend adjusting the amount of salt you use to prevent it from being overly salty.
  • Bite-Size: I suggest finely diced peaches (½-inch cubes) to achieve a better blend of flavors, but if you prefer a chunkier salsa, you can chop the pieces a little larger.
  • Marinate: If time permits, let it sit in the fridge for 15-20 minutes to allow the flavors to marinate and blend. 

FAQs

Can you freeze fresh peach salsa?

It is not recommended that you freeze fresh peach salsa. The freezing process will alter the texture and consistency of your salsa. For optimal flavor, you should eat this salsa with peaches and tomatoes fresh.

Can you can fresh peach salsa? 

Most canned peach salsa recipes are made by cooking peaches and tomatoes before preserving them in a jar. Since this recipe is made with fresh peaches and tomatoes, it would not be ideal for canning.

Other Delicious Peach Recipes You Might Like

Do you have an abundance of just-picked peaches? Need more ideas about what you can do with these sweet juicy gems? I have listed a few more recipes to satisfy your cravings during the peach season and all year round.

Person stirring a bowl of Fresh Peach and Walnut Salsa

If you try this Fresh Peach Salsa recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

peach salsa in a bowl from the top view
Print

Fresh Peach Salsa Recipe

This Fresh Peach Salsa recipe is made in 15 minutes with juicy peaches, tomatoes, jalapeno peppers, and red onion. Serve it as a condiment over grilled fish or chicken, fish tacos or by itself with tortilla chips on the side.
Course Condiment – Dip
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 81kcal

Ingredients

  • 4 peaches cut into small pieces (½ inch cubes) – approximately 2 cups – pick firm but ripe peaches
  • 1 cup cherry tomatoes sliced
  • 1 small red bell pepper seeded and chopped
  • 1 jalapeno pepper seeded and chopped
  • ½ red onion chopped
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • ¼ cup lime juice
  • ½ cup chopped fresh cilantro optional
  • ¼ teaspoon chili powder optional

Instructions

  • Place peaches, tomatoes, red bell pepper, jalapeno, red onion, salt and pepper in a large bowl.
  • Drizzle it with lime juice and give it a toss.
  • Garnish with cilantro and chili powder, if using.
  • Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary. Serve it with your favorite tortilla chips.

Video

Notes

  • This recipe yields approximately 3 cups of fresh peach salsa.
  • Peaches: Any peach varieties such as white peaches, yellow peaches, nectarines, or even grilled peaches would work in this recipe.
  • Storage: You can store the leftovers in an airtight container for up to 2 days in the fridge.

Nutrition

Calories: 81kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.05g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 318mg | Potassium: 325mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 15g | Vitamin A: 889IU | Vitamin C: 25mg | Calcium: 18mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Fresh Peach Salsa appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/fresh-peach-walnut-salsa/feed/ 16
Mango Avocado Salad https://foolproofliving.com/mango-avocado-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/mango-avocado-salad/#respond Sat, 18 Jun 2022 19:52:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=54258 Once you try a bite of this refreshing, vibrant salad, you’ll be adding avocado to all your summer fruit salads. While I think that creamy avocado and ripe mango are a match made in heaven, avocado is also the perfect addition to other fruit salads. Try this Peach Avocado Salad or Watermelon and Avocado Salad for a refreshing twist. Readers also love my Kale Avocado Salad or this Avocado Quinoa...

The post Mango Avocado Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

Once you try a bite of this refreshing, vibrant salad, you’ll be adding avocado to all your summer fruit salads. While I think that creamy avocado and ripe mango are a match made in heaven, avocado is also the perfect addition to other fruit salads. Try this Peach Avocado Salad or Watermelon and Avocado Salad for a refreshing twist. Readers also love my Kale Avocado Salad or this Avocado Quinoa Salad for a more savory option. 

And if you have some leftover mangoes, try our Pineapple Mango Salsa.

Avocado Mango Salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side

Ingredients

You’ll need two sets of simple ingredients to make this mango salad with avocado. A few well-loved, familiar pantry items make up the dressing, and a handful of fresh produce from your local farmer’s market or grocery store comprise the salad. 

avocado mango dressing ingredients
  • For the chili lime dressing, you’ll need extra-virgin olive oil, lime zest, fresh lime juice, garlic, ground cumin, chili powder, kosher salt, and maple syrup (or honey).
mango salad ingredients
  • To make the recipe for mango salad, gather ripe avocados and ripe mangoes, thinly sliced red onion, jalapeño, and fresh cilantro. 

Substitutions and Possible Additions

  • Dressing: If a spicy mango avocado salad isn’t your thing, try this Balsamic Lemon Dressing for a tangy, balsamic vinegar-based salad addition with fresh lemon juice.
  • Fresh herbs: I know that Mango Salad with cilantro might not be everybody’s cup of tea. If that is you, feel free to swap it with fresh parsley or mint to pack an aromatic punch. 
  • Onions: If you don’t have red onion on hand, green onions are a perfect substitute!
  • Peppers: Not a fan of jalapenos? Use a small red bell pepper or 
  • Nuts & Seeds: For a salty crunch that beautifully balances the sweetness of the mango, try adding a handful of pumpkin seeds or chopped walnuts. 
  • Other produce: Create endless salad varieties with any fresh summer produce you have on hand. Turn this recipe into a Mango Avocado Tomato Salad by tossing in a cup of cherry tomatoes, or throw in a cup of diced English cucumber for some extra crunch. 
  • Salad greens: Make a green salad with mango and avocado by adding in some spring mix, butter lettuce, or your favorite leafy greens. 
  • Add in some protein: Looking for a good protein source to make this salad more filling? Try adding a few grilled or baked chicken breasts for a delicious copycat version of the fan-favorite Cheesecake Factory salad with mango and avocado. Or if you have the grill on, top it off with grilled shrimp on top.

How to Make Mango Salad 

With a little bit of chopping and a gentle toss of the ingredients, this delicious avo mango salad comes together in the blink of an eye and is sure to impress at any summer gathering. Simply:

person showing how to make mango avocado salad
  1. Make the dressing: Add all ingredients into a mason jar. Screw on the lid tightly and shake until thoroughly combined. 
  2. Assemble the salad: Grab a large bowl and add in your cubed avocado, chunks of fresh mango, sliced red onion, chopped jalapeño (optional), and freshly chopped cilantro. 
  3. Add the dressing: Drizzle the dressing over the salad and toss it gently until just combined. 
  4. Season: Season to taste with salt and black pepper, if necessary. Enjoy!

How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers

  • Dressing: To make this recipe come together quickly, you can make the dressing a day in advance. Simply combine all ingredients in a mason jar and place in the fridge. 
  • Prep: Avocado is difficult to prep ahead of time because it can quickly turn an unappealing brown color once cut. I recommend chopping up the ripe avocado and the rest of the ingredients as soon as you’re ready to assemble the salad. You can, however, prep the mango and jalapeño in advance, but be sure to store them in an airtight container in the fridge. 
  • Storage: You can store the salad in an airtight container in the fridge and enjoy it for up to two days. 

What to Serve it With

A salad this versatile, refreshing, and vibrant is sure to brighten up your favorite summer main dish. Here are some serving suggestions:

Salad with mango and avocado in a bowl from the front view

Expert Tips

While this recipe for avocado and mango salad is super simple and easy, follow these helpful tips to achieve maximum results and flavor!

  • Use ripe fruit: Avocados and mangoes have the best texture and flavor when they’re ripe. Also, it is best if you cut them in bite-sized pieces.
  • Ensure your prepped fruit is similar in size: Make sure every bite of your salad is consistent by cutting your mango and avocado into equal-sized cubes or chunks. 
  • Toss gently: Avocado tends to turn mushy if over-handled, so be sure to toss your salad gently when combining.

FAQs

How do you know if a mango is ripe?

To tell whether a mango is ripe, use your thumb to gently apply pressure to the skin. If it feels soft or gives slightly, it’s ready! If you’re not quite sure, locate the fruit’s stem and give it a whiff. If it gives off a sweet, fruity aroma, it’s ripe. 

Is mango skin edible?

Mango skin is edible, and studies show that the skin contains a variety of health and nutritional benefits. However, keep in mind that eating mango skin may cause allergic reactions or lead to the ingestion of pesticides or harmful chemicals. The skin is also generally bitter and tough to chew.

Why Should You Make this Salad?

I know you’ll love this mango and avocado salad as much as I do! Here’s why:

  • Quick, easy, and nutrient-dense: Healthy has never been easier! Throw this simple salad together in 15 minutes for your daily dose of essential fatty acids and vitamin-C
  • The ideal accompaniment to grilled favorites: This is a perfect salad to pair with fish tacos, grilled seafood, meats, and other main dishes. Or, serve it as a mango salsa with your favorite tortilla chip! 
  • Bursting with refreshing summer flavor: This fresh summer salad is the perfect way to cool off on a hot summer day. 

Other Fruit Salads You Might Also Like

If you loved this avocado mango salad, here are some other fruity salad recipes you need to try!

If you try this delicious Mango Avocado Salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

mango salad with avocado in a bowl from the top view
Print

Mango Avocado Salad Recipe

This Mango Avocado Salad recipe is made with fresh mango, ripe avocados, and chili lime dressing. Ready in 15 minutes, it is the perfect side dish for the grilling season.
Course Salad
Cuisine Mexican/Southwestern
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 358kcal

Ingredients

For The Chili Lime Vinaigrette:

  • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon of lime zest
  • 4 tablespoons lime juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon chili powder
  • ¾ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon maple syrup/honey

For The Salad:

  • 2 ripe avocados cut into cubes
  • 2 ripe mangos cut into 1-inch chunks
  • ½ cup red onion thinly sliced – from a small red onion
  • 1 small jalapeno pepper seeded and chopped (optional)
  • ½ cup chopped fresh cilantro

Instructions

  • Make the dressing by combining everything in a mason jar. Close the lid tightly and give it a shake until all ingredients are thoroughly mixed.
  • Place the cubed avocados, mango chunks, red onion slices, jalapeno, and cilantro in a salad bowl.
  • Drizzle it with the dressing and give it a toss to combine.
  • Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.

Video

Notes

  • The finished salad is about 4 cups with 1 cup per serving.
  • Storage: You can store the salad in an airtight container in the fridge and enjoy it for up to two days.
  • Cut them in similar bite-size chunks: For best results, cut avocado and mango cubes in similar sizes.
  • Toss gently: Avocado tends to turn mushy if over-handled, so be sure to toss your salad gently when combining. 

Nutrition

Calories: 358kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 29g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 20g | Sodium: 452mg | Potassium: 743mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 1528IU | Vitamin C: 59mg | Calcium: 38mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Mango Avocado Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mango-avocado-salad/feed/ 0
Avocado Peach Salad https://foolproofliving.com/peach-avocado-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/peach-avocado-salad/#comments Mon, 06 Jun 2022 20:48:17 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=14574 I think we can all agree that having a few summer salad recipes in your back pocket will make your life easier, especially when it comes to putting dinner on the table when it is 90 degrees outside. They are fresh, vibrant, crunchy, and colorful – and usually require only one bowl. While I adore Avocado Kale Salad, Quinoa Avocado Salad, Mango Avocado Salad, and Watermelon Avocado Salad, this is...

The post Avocado Peach Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

I think we can all agree that having a few summer salad recipes in your back pocket will make your life easier, especially when it comes to putting dinner on the table when it is 90 degrees outside. They are fresh, vibrant, crunchy, and colorful – and usually require only one bowl. While I adore Avocado Kale Salad, Quinoa Avocado Salad, Mango Avocado Salad, and Watermelon Avocado Salad, this is by far my favorite.

avocado peach salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side from top view

Why Should You Try This Recipe?

This peach and avocado salad is the dictionary definition of a simple summer salad. I know you will love it because:

  • Packed full of fresh summer produce: Yellow peaches, Persian cucumber, and creamy avocado – does anything get better than that? It’s also gluten-free, vegan, vegetarian and nut free!
  • Easy, homemade, Mediterranean-inspired dressing: The flavors of cumin and coriander really sparkle in this peach salad recipe and they compliment the sweet fruit so well.
  • Super customizable: Stick to the original recipe or amp it up with a few ingredient add-ins.

Ingredients

The ingredient list for this peach avocado salad is nothing more than a mix of pantry and fresh, flavorful produce. Venture out to your favorite farmer’s market for this one.

ingredients for the recipe in small portions on a marble backdrop

Gather together pumpkin seeds, ground coriander, ground cumin, extra virgin olive oil, serrano chile, fresh cilantro, fresh parsley, fresh lemon juice, kosher salt, yellow ripe peaches, Persian cucumbers, ripe avocado and sesame seeds.

Ingredient Substitutions and Notes

  • Chile: Use a jalapeno or fresno chiles if serranos are hard to find.
  • Fresh Herbs: Add an extra sprinkle of chopped fresh mint or basil.
  • Acid / Vinegar: Swap out the lemon juice for lime juice or balsamic vinegar (either white or dark) instead. Alternatively, use my lemon balsamic vinaigrette or chili-lime vinaigrette as a spicy kick.
  • Fresh Peaches: I love sweet yellow juicy peaches, but you could also try white peaches, donut peaches, or other stone fruit like nectarines.
  • Cucumber: English cucumber is the next best thing to Persian cucumbers. It is a personal preference whether or not to peel and remove the seeds.
  • Seeds / Nuts: Replace the pumpkin seeds with thinly sliced almonds (or toasted almonds), walnuts, pine nuts, or pistachios instead.
  • Spice: A final sprinkle of black pepper would be a great way to amp up the spice, too.

How to Make

The avocado peach salad recipe comes together in a few easy steps. Simply:

person toasting pumpkin seeds and making the dressing
  1. Toast pepitas and sesame seeds: Place pumpkin seeds and sesame seeds in a non-stick skillet. Set over medium heat and toast, stirring frequently, until lightly golden, about 5-7 minutes. Do not leave the sight of it as they can burn easily. Pour onto a plate to cool.
  2. Make the dressing: In a large bowl, add the ground coriander, ground cumin, olive oil, Serrano chile, cilantro, parsley, lemon juice, and salt. Gently whisk until combined.
person assembling and tossing peach salad
  1. Coat the fruit and vegetables: To the bowl with the dressing, add the peach slices, cucumbers and avocado. Gently toss to ensure all pieces are coated.
  2. Sprinkle with seeds and serve: Finish with the toasted pumpkin seeds and sesame seeds. Taste and season with salt and pepper, if necessary. Enjoy!

Serving Suggestions

This avocado and peach salad can be served in a number of different fashions. You could try:

  • Appetizer: Serve it as the salad course for dinner. All that juicy produce will certainly wet your appetite.
  • Side Dish: Make it a light and bright side dish to main meals like Cornish Hens, Whole Roasted Chicken, Chicken Rice Pilaf or a simple Lemon Herb Quinoa
  • Potluck / Dinner Party: This makes the perfect summer salad and a gorgeous accompaniment to bring to your next potluck or dinner party with friends.
  • Picnic / BBQ: Keep it chilled right up until it’s time to eat or serve the bowl on top of a larger bowl of ice at any outdoor engagement like a picnic or BBQ. This summer peach salad would be perfect when served with grilled shrimp skewers, shrimp kabobs shrimp tacos, or guacamole burgers.

Variations

Feel free to get fun and creative with this avocado salad with peaches. Add ½ – 1 cup of any of the following:

  • Top it off with cheese: This summer peach salad would be perfect with the addition of crumbled goat cheese, feta cheese cubes, sliced fresh mozzarella, or better yet hand torn burrata. My personal favorite is peach and goat cheese salad as it tastes very similar to my Warm Pear Salad recipe.
  • Add in some green leafy vegetables: Turn it into a green salad by adding arugula, baby spinach, butter lettuce, or even grilled lettuce.
  • Add some onion: If you can’t imagine a salad without onions, feel free to add some sliced red onion for extra flavor.
  • Grilled peaches: If the grill is on and you have the time, why not grill some peaches for the dreamy grill marks and caramelized flavors. Grilled Peach Salad with all the other fresh and crunchy ingredients is an easy way to take it up a notch.

How to Store

  • Storage: The fresh peach salad will keep for up to 1 day covered tightly with plastic wrap in the fridge. After that, I find the avocado starts to turn slightly brown and bitter – and you lose too much of the crunch from the cucumbers. Wake up the leftovers with an extra squeeze of lemon.
  • Freezing: I would not recommend freezing this salad as it will lose most of its tangy flavors and texture.

Expert Tips

  • Toss minimally and gently. If you toss this nectarine avocado salad too much, the avocado will melt into the salad and you will lose some of the texture.
  • Serve immediately. This salad is best enjoyed the moment it is made. I like to keep all the produce in the fridge right up until I’m ready to prepare so the ingredients stay crisp and chilled.
  • Chill the salad bowl. For even more insurance, chill your serving bowl in the fridge if you have some extra time. 
peach avocado salad in a bowl from the top view

FAQs

How long will avocado last in a salad?

Avocado will last in a salad refrigerated for only 1-2 days, after too much time, the avocado breaks down and turns slightly brown and bitter.

How to keep avocado in a salad from turning brown?

Directly cover the dressed salad with a layer of plastic wrap, then wrap it once more with another layer of plastic wrap. This keeps the air from oxidizing the avocado and turning it brown.

Other Summer Salads You’ll Enjoy:

If you try this Avocado Peach Salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

This recipe has been adapted from Bon Appetit’s Peach and Cucumber Salad Recipe with minor changes.

avocado peach salad in a bowl from the top view
Print

Avocado Peach Salad Recipe

This Avocado Peach Salad recipe is the perfect vegan summer salad featuring fresh peaches, along with ripe avocados, toasted pumpkin and sesame seeds. Packed with sweet, savory and crunchy flavors, this easy salad recipe is all you need for your summer get-togethers.
Course Salad
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 308kcal

Ingredients

For The Toasted Seeds:

  • 1/3 cup raw pumpkin seeds (unsalted)
  • 1 tablespoon sesame seeds

Salad Dressing Ingredients:

  • ½ teaspoon ground coriander
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 serrano chile seeds removed and chopped – or jalapeno
  • 3 tablespoons fresh cilantro chopped – omit it if you are not a fan
  • 3 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt

For The Salad:

  • 4 medium size yellow peaches ripened & sliced with the skin on
  • 2 Persian cucumbers sliced thinly
  • 1 ripe avocado cut into small cubes

Instructions

  • Toast the seeds: Place pumpkin seeds and sesame seeds in a non-stick skillet. Toast in medium heat, stirring frequently, until golden brown, 5-7 minutes. Do not leave sight of it as it can burn easily. Set aside to cool.
  • Make the salad dressing: In a large salad bowl, mix together ground coriander, ground cumin, olive oil, Serrano chile, cilantro, parsley, lemon juice, and salt.
  • Assemble salad: Add the sliced peaches, cucumbers, and avocado to the same bowl. Gently toss to ensure that peaches, cucumbers and avocados are coated with the dressing and herbs.
  • Sprinkle with pumpkin and sesame seeds. Give it a toss.
  • Taste and season with more salt, if necessary. Serve immediately.

Notes

  • Pick ripe fruit: I find that this salad works best with peaches that are ripened. Though you do not want them to be too ripened that it’s mushy.
  • Storage: This peach avocado salad will keep for up to 1 day covered tightly with plastic wrap in the fridge. After that, I find the avocado starts to turn slightly brown and bitter – and you lose too much of the crunch from the cucumbers. Wake up the leftovers with an extra squeeze of lemon.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 308kcal | Carbohydrates: 21g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 25g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Sodium: 298mg | Potassium: 639mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 14g | Vitamin A: 879IU | Vitamin C: 22mg | Calcium: 43mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Avocado Peach Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/peach-avocado-salad/feed/ 1
Cantaloupe Smoothie https://foolproofliving.com/citrusy-cantaloupe-smoothie-bowl-with-pepitas/ https://foolproofliving.com/citrusy-cantaloupe-smoothie-bowl-with-pepitas/#comments Tue, 31 May 2022 15:38:44 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=10192 Why Should You Try This Smoothie Recipe? This simple melon shake is as nutritious as it is refreshing, and you won’t believe how easy it is to make. With so much to love, this cantaloupe smoothie recipe will be your new go-to treat perfect for a hot summer day. No sugar is added to this naturally sweet cantaloupe yogurt smoothie, making it a refreshing (and healthy!) treat to have first...

The post Cantaloupe Smoothie appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Why Should You Try This Smoothie Recipe?

This simple melon shake is as nutritious as it is refreshing, and you won’t believe how easy it is to make. With so much to love, this cantaloupe smoothie recipe will be your new go-to treat perfect for a hot summer day.

Frozen cantaloupe smoothie in a glass from close up
  • No sugar is added to this naturally sweet cantaloupe yogurt smoothie, making it a refreshing (and healthy!) treat to have first thing in the morning or even for dessert.
  • You can make this cantaloupe shake recipe for nearly any special diet. Anyone who follows a vegan, gluten-free, or even dairy-free diet can enjoy this tasty drink—alongside my Mango Tumeric Smoothie or any one of my other Turmeric Smoothies, of course.
  • Needing only 5 ingredients and less than 10 minutes, this beginner-friendly drink is one of the most effortless cantaloupe smoothie ideas out there.

Ingredients

To make this cantaloupe shake, gather cubed cantaloupe, unsweetened plain yogurt, orange juice, and ice. Because the high water content of melon can lead to a watery texture, you’ll also need a half-cup of another fruit, such as mango.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view

Substitutions & Additions

Putting cantaloupe in a smoothie is the best way to make a healthy drink without a lengthy shopping list. Make your frozen melon smoothie countless ways with these simple substitutions.

  • Freeze cantaloupe: To make a frozen cantaloupe smoothie, freeze your fresh cantaloupe pieces before blending. Note, however, that you may have to pulse your smoothie for extra time to break up the frozen bits. 
  • Second fruit: Almost any sweet fruit will work alongside your cantaloupe, including strawberry, pineapple, banana, and mango. You can also freeze this second fruit if you have time or add extra ice cubes for a refreshing chill.
  • Juice: Adding juice is one of my favorite ways to add sweetness to my summer smoothie. However, though I use orange juice (I squeeze it myself instead of using orange juice from concentrate) in my smoothie routine, pineapple juice would also work.
  • Milk instead of juice: If you prefer to make your cantaloupe smoothie with milk, any kind will do. For instance, you can make cantaloupe smoothie recipes with almond milk, cashew milk, or even coconut milk. Just note that you may have to add a little honey, honey syrup, or simple syrup to make your smoothie a bit sweeter if you prefer.
  • Yogurt: I use plain Greek yogurt in my smoothie recipe, but you could also use a dairy-free alternative instead. Like the almond milk yogurt I use in my Vegan Banana Smoothie, vegan yogurt makes a great, diet-friendly substitution.
  • Additional Sweetener: I think this orange cantaloupe smoothie recipe is adequately sweet as written, but if you want it sweeter you can add in a few tablespoons of honey syrup or as it blends.
  • Add protein (optional): To make this healthy smoothie recipe even more nutritious, try adding extra proteins. Simply add a teaspoon of ground flax seeds, chia seeds, hemp seeds, collagen peptides, nut butter, or your favorite protein powder.

How to Make a Cantaloupe Smoothie

Smoothie recipes with melon are a great way to satisfy your sweet tooth without breaking a sweat. This cool, fruity treat will be the easiest drink you make all summer.

two images showing how to make smoothie with cantaloupe
  1. Blend ingredients: Place the ingredients into a blender, preferably with fruit on the bottom and ice at the top. Pulse the ingredients a few times, then blend on high until smooth. If you do not own a blender, you can use a food processor for blending as well.
  2. Serve: Pour the mixture into a glass and, if desired, garnish with cantaloupe. Drink immediately.

Variations

Make dozens of smoothie recipes with cantaloupe with these yummy variations. Whether you’re craving a sweet cantaloupe berry smoothie or a creamy banana variation, we’ve got you covered!

  • Frozen cantaloupe smoothie: Want to give your melon smoothie extra chill? Freeze your cantaloupe cubes for 4-8 hours before blending.
  • Cantaloupe banana smoothie: If you’re looking for a healthy breakfast that’s equal parts sweet and creamy, a banana smoothie is just what you need. Simply swap out your mango for a half-cup of sliced banana.
  • Strawberry cantaloupe smoothie: Give your recipe a tart, summer-fresh flavor with a match made in heaven: cantaloupe and strawberries! No one can resist the fresh fruit of this easy recipe.
  • Watermelon cantaloupe smoothie: No one can resist a refreshing smoothie recipe with double the ripe melon. For this delicious recipe, I recommend adding a full cup of cubed watermelon to keep your smoothie from becoming too watery.

How to Store

Smoothie recipes with melon are a godsend when it comes to easy storage. Simply place your smoothie mixture in a bottle with a tight-fitting lid, like a mason jar. Drink within 2 days, being sure to shake the smoothie before pouring.

Please note that your smoothie will likely get watery as it sits in the fridge. To keep your cantaloupe smoothie’s creamy texture, I recommend enjoying your beverage on the day it’s made.

person pouring smoothie into a glass

FAQs

No guesswork is necessary when making this recipe for a melon smoothie. Whether you have questions about substitutions or nutrition information, this handy guide is just what you need.

Can you put cantaloupe in a smoothie?

 Yes, you can use cantaloupe in a smoothie! Adding melon to smoothies is the perfect way to make a naturally sweet, creamy, and healthy treat.

How to make a cantaloupe smoothie with milk?

If you don’t want to add juice to your smoothie, you can use milk instead. Any milk will work, but you may have to add extra sweetness with ingredients like honey or Honey Simple Syrup if you like your smoothies on the sweeter side.

Can cantaloupe be frozen for smoothies?

Absolutely! Simply cut your cantaloupe into 1-inch cubes, arrange them on a sheet pan, and put them in the freezer for 4-8 hours. Then, blend your ingredients.

Is cantaloupe smoothie good for you?

Using natural, nutrient-packed ingredients, this cantaloupe smoothie with yogurt is a tasty and healthy way to get extra vitamins. Just one serving of cantaloupe fills your daily need for vitamin c and vitamin A.

Similar Smoothie Recipes You Might Like:

It is no secret that drinking a smoothie a day has its benefits. If you are new to making your own smoothies you are in for a treat because I have so many recipes for you. Below are a few recipes to get you started.

If you try this Cantaloupe Smoothie recipe or any other smoothie recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Cantaloupe smoothies in two glasses from the front view
Print

Cantaloupe Smoothie Recipe

This Cantaloupe Smoothie recipe is an easy, quick and healthy breakfast or snack you can make in minutes. Made without any sugar, this melon smoothie is incredibly refreshing perfect for a hot summer day.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 1 serving
Calories 197kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup cantaloupe cut into 1 to 2-inch cubes
  • ½ cup mango strawberry, or banana, cut into small pieces*
  • ¼ cup unsweetened plain yogurt or vanilla yogurt or vegan yogurt
  • ½ cup orange juice or pineapple juice
  • 1 cup ice

Instructions

  • Place all ingredients in a blender. Blend on high until smooth.
  • Pour into a glass and garnish with cantaloupe if desired. Enjoy immediately.

Notes

  • This recipe can easily be multiplied.
  • I think it goes without saying that the riper the fruit the sweeter your smoothie will be. So, if you prefer it on the sweeter side be sure to pick a ripe cantaloupe white you are at the grocery store.
  • You can use frozen cantaloupe if you want. However, if you do so, I would recommend using 1/2 cup of ice.
  • Storage: Simply place your smoothie mixture in a bottle with a tight-fitting lid, like a mason jar. Drink within 2 days, being sure to shake the smoothie before pouring. Please note that your smoothie will likely get watery as it sits in the fridge. To keep your cantaloupe smoothie’s creamy texture, I recommend enjoying your beverage on the day it’s made.

Nutrition

Serving: 1person | Calories: 197kcal | Carbohydrates: 41g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 3g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 8mg | Sodium: 90mg | Potassium: 733mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 37g | Vitamin A: 6612IU | Vitamin C: 110mg | Calcium: 118mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Cantaloupe Smoothie appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/citrusy-cantaloupe-smoothie-bowl-with-pepitas/feed/ 8
Sauteed Asparagus and Mushrooms https://foolproofliving.com/sauteed-asparagus-and-mushrooms/ https://foolproofliving.com/sauteed-asparagus-and-mushrooms/#comments Thu, 12 May 2022 18:41:20 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=51734 Whenever I think of the spring and fall seasons, my mind immediately goes to mushrooms and asparagus. Now that I have the foolproof technique for storing asparagus to keep it fresh longer, I keep a few bunches in my fridge and make this delicious asparagus dish a few times during the week. And if asparagus is a favorite in your house as well, be sure to check out my air...

The post Sauteed Asparagus and Mushrooms appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Whenever I think of the spring and fall seasons, my mind immediately goes to mushrooms and asparagus. Now that I have the foolproof technique for storing asparagus to keep it fresh longer, I keep a few bunches in my fridge and make this delicious asparagus dish a few times during the week.

And if asparagus is a favorite in your house as well, be sure to check out my air fryer asparagus, sautéed asparagus, asparagus salad, truffled asparagus eggs, asparagus tart, or this baked asparagus recipe to use up all the asparagus you have on hand.

sautéed mushroom and asparagus in a cast iron skillet with a wooden spoon on the side

Asparagus is great when served by itself, but I think adding mushrooms to the mix takes this humble vegetable over the top. Let’s get started!

Why Should You Try This Recipe?

Sauteing asparagus and mushrooms requires nothing more than a hot skillet. I know you’ll love it because:

  • Dietary friendly: It’s healthy, low-carb, gluten-free, keto-friendly, vegan, vegetarian, and absolutely delicious.
  • One-pan wonder: All you need is a large skillet to have this stir fry asparagus with mushrooms ready in no time.
  • Versatile and easy side dish: I like to think of this as a blank canvas side dish that goes with just about anything – chicken, meat, or even more vegetables.

Ingredients

Sauteed mushrooms and asparagus is a great side dish that requires no more than 6 ingredients. Gather together vegetable oil, garlic, fresh asparagus spears, fresh mushrooms, kosher salt and black pepper.

ingredients for the recipe are laid out in bowls

Ingredient Substitutions and Notes

  • Oil: Any cooking oil will work. Avocado oil will give a neutral flavor, while olive oil will impart a slightly fruitier taste. Coconut oil would make it slightly sweet. If preferred, you can also finish with a drizzle of sesame oil.
  • Aromatics: Garlic is always my go-to for sauteeing vegetables. You could also add red onion, green onions, bell pepper, or grated fresh ginger for more of an Asian side.
  • Herbs: A teaspoon or two of fresh herbs like thyme or rosemary would also be divine.
  • Mushrooms: I love plump and simple cremini mushrooms (also known as baby Bellas) or milder white button mushrooms. If you’re feeling adventurous, you could try different kinds of mushrooms like shiitake, oyster, or portobello mushrooms instead.
  • The finishing touch: While it is optional, you can finish it off with a squeeze of lemon juice for a Mediterranean flair or a splash of soy sauce (with a sprinkle of sesame seeds) for an Asian flair.
  • Turn it into a Mushroom Asparagus Salad: Add in a handful of spring mix and a drizzle of my lemon salad dressing to make it a wholesome and delicious salad.

New to mushrooms? Make sure to check out how to clean shiitake mushrooms and how to clean portobello mushrooms, then move on to roasted shiitake mushrooms and roasted portobello mushrooms, too!

How to Make This Recipe?

This recipe for mushrooms and asparagus is as easy as 1-2-3! Here’s how:

person sauteeing mushroom and asparagus in a skillet from the top view
  1. Saute garlic: Place a large saute pan over medium to medium-high heat. Heat oil, then add the fresh garlic and saute for 1 minute.
  2. Saute vegetables: Add asparagus and mushrooms and saute, stirring often, until the mushrooms release their liquid and the asparagus is tender about 5-7 minutes.
  3. Finish and serve: Finish with seasoning and serve warm.

What to Make with Asparagus and Mushrooms?

This asparagus and mushroom recipe can be served with just about anything to make it a complete meal. You could try:

sauteed asparagus and mushroom placed on a serving plate from the top view

How to Store

  • Storage: This asparagus mushroom recipe will keep in an airtight container for up to 4 days in the fridge.
  • Freezing: I do not recommend freezing, as the vegetables tend to get mushy when reheated from frozen.

Expert Tips

  • Preheat the skillet for 1-2 minutes. This ensures the cooking surface is hot enough so that you don’t overcook the asparagus and mushrooms.
  • Leave the vegetables alone for a stir-fry appeal. Rather than continuously stirring the vegetables, let them be for 1-2 minutes so the vegetables get golden brown and crispy on the outside.

FAQs

Should asparagus be soaked before cooking?

There is no need to soak asparagus before cooking. Simply give them a good rinse under cool running water to remove the grit and proceed with chopping.

How do you cook asparagus so it isn’t tough?

Make sure to remove all parts of the woody stem. This is easy to do by snapping off the woody end at its natural break. Once the vegetable is prepped and cut into 2-inch pieces, cook until fork tender.

Other Vegetable Side Dish Recipes You’ll Enjoy:

If you are a fan of similar vegetable-based side dishes, below are a few other recipes that you might also like:

If you try this Sautéed Asparagus and Mushrooms recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

sauteed asparagus and mushrooms in a skillet with a spoon on the side
Print

Sauteed Asparagus and Mushrooms Recipe

This Sauteed Asparagus and Mushrooms recipe is an easy vegan side dish that you can serve along with any of your favorite main dishes. Made with 6 ingredients and ready in 10 minutes, it is the perfect vegetable side when you are short on time.
Course Vegan side dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 8 minutes
Total Time 13 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 60kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon vegetable oil olive oil or avocado oil would work
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 2 bunches asparagus woody ends removed, cut into smaller pieces
  • 8 oz. button or cremini mushrooms
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt more or less to taste
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

Instructions

  • Saute garlic: Heat oil in a large (12-inch) skillet over medium heat. Add in garlic and saute for a minute.
  • Saute vegetables: Add asparagus and mushrooms and cook, stirring often, until mushrooms release their juices and asparagus is tender for about 5-7 minutes.
  • Finish and serve: Season with salt and pepper. Serve while still warm.

Notes

  • The finishing touch: While it is optional, you can finish it off with a squeeze of lemon juice for a Mediterranean flair or a splash of soy sauce (with a sprinkle of sesame seeds) for an Asian flair.
  • Mushrooms: I used widely available white button mushrooms, but any mushroom would work here. Feel free to try shiitake, portobello or even oyster mushrooms for an even more umami flavor.
  • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container for up to 4 days in the fridge.

Nutrition

Calories: 60kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 298mg | Potassium: 643mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 1702IU | Vitamin C: 14mg | Calcium: 59mg | Iron: 5mg

The post Sauteed Asparagus and Mushrooms appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/sauteed-asparagus-and-mushrooms/feed/ 4